Title: | 'Amazon Web Services' Analytics Services |
Version: | 0.9.0 |
Description: | Interface to 'Amazon Web Services' 'analytics' services, including 'Elastic MapReduce' 'Hadoop' and 'Spark' big data service, 'Elasticsearch' search engine, and more https://aws.amazon.com/. |
License: | Apache License (≥ 2.0) |
URL: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws, https://paws-r.r-universe.dev/paws.analytics |
BugReports: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws/issues |
Imports: | paws.common (≥ 0.8.0) |
Suggests: | testthat |
Encoding: | UTF-8 |
RoxygenNote: | 7.3.2 |
Collate: | 'athena_service.R' 'athena_interfaces.R' 'athena_operations.R' 'cloudsearch_service.R' 'cloudsearch_interfaces.R' 'cloudsearch_operations.R' 'cloudsearchdomain_service.R' 'cloudsearchdomain_interfaces.R' 'cloudsearchdomain_operations.R' 'datapipeline_service.R' 'datapipeline_interfaces.R' 'datapipeline_operations.R' 'datazone_service.R' 'datazone_interfaces.R' 'datazone_operations.R' 'elasticsearchservice_service.R' 'elasticsearchservice_interfaces.R' 'elasticsearchservice_operations.R' 'emr_service.R' 'emr_interfaces.R' 'emr_operations.R' 'entityresolution_service.R' 'entityresolution_interfaces.R' 'entityresolution_operations.R' 'firehose_service.R' 'firehose_interfaces.R' 'firehose_operations.R' 'glue_service.R' 'glue_interfaces.R' 'glue_operations.R' 'gluedatabrew_service.R' 'gluedatabrew_interfaces.R' 'gluedatabrew_operations.R' 'healthlake_service.R' 'healthlake_interfaces.R' 'healthlake_operations.R' 'ivs_service.R' 'ivs_interfaces.R' 'ivs_operations.R' 'ivsrealtime_service.R' 'ivsrealtime_interfaces.R' 'ivsrealtime_operations.R' 'kafka_service.R' 'kafka_interfaces.R' 'kafka_operations.R' 'kafkaconnect_service.R' 'kafkaconnect_interfaces.R' 'kafkaconnect_operations.R' 'kendra_service.R' 'kendra_interfaces.R' 'kendra_operations.R' 'kendraranking_service.R' 'kendraranking_interfaces.R' 'kendraranking_operations.R' 'kinesis_service.R' 'kinesis_interfaces.R' 'kinesis_operations.R' 'kinesisanalytics_service.R' 'kinesisanalytics_interfaces.R' 'kinesisanalytics_operations.R' 'kinesisanalyticsv2_service.R' 'kinesisanalyticsv2_interfaces.R' 'kinesisanalyticsv2_operations.R' 'mturk_service.R' 'mturk_interfaces.R' 'mturk_operations.R' 'opensearchingestion_service.R' 'opensearchingestion_interfaces.R' 'opensearchingestion_operations.R' 'opensearchservice_service.R' 'opensearchservice_interfaces.R' 'opensearchservice_operations.R' 'opensearchserviceserverless_service.R' 'opensearchserviceserverless_interfaces.R' 'opensearchserviceserverless_operations.R' 'quicksight_service.R' 'quicksight_interfaces.R' 'quicksight_operations.R' 'reexports_paws.common.R' |
NeedsCompilation: | no |
Packaged: | 2025-03-14 09:19:09 UTC; dyfanjones |
Author: | David Kretch [aut], Adam Banker [aut], Dyfan Jones [cre], Amazon.com, Inc. [cph] |
Maintainer: | Dyfan Jones <dyfan.r.jones@gmail.com> |
Repository: | CRAN |
Date/Publication: | 2025-03-14 12:00:02 UTC |
Amazon Athena
Description
Amazon Athena is an interactive query service that lets you use standard SQL to analyze data directly in Amazon S3. You can point Athena at your data in Amazon S3 and run ad-hoc queries and get results in seconds. Athena is serverless, so there is no infrastructure to set up or manage. You pay only for the queries you run. Athena scales automatically—executing queries in parallel—so results are fast, even with large datasets and complex queries. For more information, see What is Amazon Athena in the Amazon Athena User Guide.
If you connect to Athena using the JDBC driver, use version 1.1.0 of the driver or later with the Amazon Athena API. Earlier version drivers do not support the API. For more information and to download the driver, see Accessing Amazon Athena with JDBC.
Usage
athena(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- athena( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_get_named_query | Returns the details of a single named query or a list of up to 50 queries, which you provide as an array of query ID strings |
batch_get_prepared_statement | Returns the details of a single prepared statement or a list of up to 256 prepared statements for the array of prepared statement names that you provide |
batch_get_query_execution | Returns the details of a single query execution or a list of up to 50 query executions, which you provide as an array of query execution ID strings |
cancel_capacity_reservation | Cancels the capacity reservation with the specified name |
create_capacity_reservation | Creates a capacity reservation with the specified name and number of requested data processing units |
create_data_catalog | Creates (registers) a data catalog with the specified name and properties |
create_named_query | Creates a named query in the specified workgroup |
create_notebook | Creates an empty ipynb file in the specified Apache Spark enabled workgroup |
create_prepared_statement | Creates a prepared statement for use with SQL queries in Athena |
create_presigned_notebook_url | Gets an authentication token and the URL at which the notebook can be accessed |
create_work_group | Creates a workgroup with the specified name |
delete_capacity_reservation | Deletes a cancelled capacity reservation |
delete_data_catalog | Deletes a data catalog |
delete_named_query | Deletes the named query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query was saved |
delete_notebook | Deletes the specified notebook |
delete_prepared_statement | Deletes the prepared statement with the specified name from the specified workgroup |
delete_work_group | Deletes the workgroup with the specified name |
export_notebook | Exports the specified notebook and its metadata |
get_calculation_execution | Describes a previously submitted calculation execution |
get_calculation_execution_code | Retrieves the unencrypted code that was executed for the calculation |
get_calculation_execution_status | Gets the status of a current calculation |
get_capacity_assignment_configuration | Gets the capacity assignment configuration for a capacity reservation, if one exists |
get_capacity_reservation | Returns information about the capacity reservation with the specified name |
get_database | Returns a database object for the specified database and data catalog |
get_data_catalog | Returns the specified data catalog |
get_named_query | Returns information about a single query |
get_notebook_metadata | Retrieves notebook metadata for the specified notebook ID |
get_prepared_statement | Retrieves the prepared statement with the specified name from the specified workgroup |
get_query_execution | Returns information about a single execution of a query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query ran |
get_query_results | Streams the results of a single query execution specified by QueryExecutionId from the Athena query results location in Amazon S3 |
get_query_runtime_statistics | Returns query execution runtime statistics related to a single execution of a query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query ran |
get_session | Gets the full details of a previously created session, including the session status and configuration |
get_session_status | Gets the current status of a session |
get_table_metadata | Returns table metadata for the specified catalog, database, and table |
get_work_group | Returns information about the workgroup with the specified name |
import_notebook | Imports a single ipynb file to a Spark enabled workgroup |
list_application_dpu_sizes | Returns the supported DPU sizes for the supported application runtimes (for example, Athena notebook version 1) |
list_calculation_executions | Lists the calculations that have been submitted to a session in descending order |
list_capacity_reservations | Lists the capacity reservations for the current account |
list_databases | Lists the databases in the specified data catalog |
list_data_catalogs | Lists the data catalogs in the current Amazon Web Services account |
list_engine_versions | Returns a list of engine versions that are available to choose from, including the Auto option |
list_executors | Lists, in descending order, the executors that joined a session |
list_named_queries | Provides a list of available query IDs only for queries saved in the specified workgroup |
list_notebook_metadata | Displays the notebook files for the specified workgroup in paginated format |
list_notebook_sessions | Lists, in descending order, the sessions that have been created in a notebook that are in an active state like CREATING, CREATED, IDLE or BUSY |
list_prepared_statements | Lists the prepared statements in the specified workgroup |
list_query_executions | Provides a list of available query execution IDs for the queries in the specified workgroup |
list_sessions | Lists the sessions in a workgroup that are in an active state like CREATING, CREATED, IDLE, or BUSY |
list_table_metadata | Lists the metadata for the tables in the specified data catalog database |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags associated with an Athena resource |
list_work_groups | Lists available workgroups for the account |
put_capacity_assignment_configuration | Puts a new capacity assignment configuration for a specified capacity reservation |
start_calculation_execution | Submits calculations for execution within a session |
start_query_execution | Runs the SQL query statements contained in the Query |
start_session | Creates a session for running calculations within a workgroup |
stop_calculation_execution | Requests the cancellation of a calculation |
stop_query_execution | Stops a query execution |
tag_resource | Adds one or more tags to an Athena resource |
terminate_session | Terminates an active session |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from an Athena resource |
update_capacity_reservation | Updates the number of requested data processing units for the capacity reservation with the specified name |
update_data_catalog | Updates the data catalog that has the specified name |
update_named_query | Updates a NamedQuery object |
update_notebook | Updates the contents of a Spark notebook |
update_notebook_metadata | Updates the metadata for a notebook |
update_prepared_statement | Updates a prepared statement |
update_work_group | Updates the workgroup with the specified name |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- athena()
svc$batch_get_named_query(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Returns the details of a single named query or a list of up to 50 queries, which you provide as an array of query ID strings
Description
Returns the details of a single named query or a list of up to 50 queries, which you provide as an array of query ID strings. Requires you to have access to the workgroup in which the queries were saved. Use ListNamedQueriesInput to get the list of named query IDs in the specified workgroup. If information could not be retrieved for a submitted query ID, information about the query ID submitted is listed under UnprocessedNamedQueryId. Named queries differ from executed queries. Use BatchGetQueryExecutionInput to get details about each unique query execution, and ListQueryExecutionsInput to get a list of query execution IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_batch_get_named_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_batch_get_named_query(NamedQueryIds)
Arguments
NamedQueryIds |
[required] An array of query IDs. |
Returns the details of a single prepared statement or a list of up to 256 prepared statements for the array of prepared statement names that you provide
Description
Returns the details of a single prepared statement or a list of up to 256 prepared statements for the array of prepared statement names that you provide. Requires you to have access to the workgroup to which the prepared statements belong. If a prepared statement cannot be retrieved for the name specified, the statement is listed in UnprocessedPreparedStatementNames
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_batch_get_prepared_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_batch_get_prepared_statement(PreparedStatementNames, WorkGroup)
Arguments
PreparedStatementNames |
[required] A list of prepared statement names to return. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The name of the workgroup to which the prepared statements belong. |
Returns the details of a single query execution or a list of up to 50 query executions, which you provide as an array of query execution ID strings
Description
Returns the details of a single query execution or a list of up to 50 query executions, which you provide as an array of query execution ID strings. Requires you to have access to the workgroup in which the queries ran. To get a list of query execution IDs, use ListQueryExecutionsInput$WorkGroup. Query executions differ from named (saved) queries. Use BatchGetNamedQueryInput to get details about named queries.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_batch_get_query_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_batch_get_query_execution(QueryExecutionIds)
Arguments
QueryExecutionIds |
[required] An array of query execution IDs. |
Cancels the capacity reservation with the specified name
Description
Cancels the capacity reservation with the specified name. Cancelled reservations remain in your account and will be deleted 45 days after cancellation. During the 45 days, you cannot re-purpose or reuse a reservation that has been cancelled, but you can refer to its tags and view it for historical reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_cancel_capacity_reservation/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_cancel_capacity_reservation(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation to cancel. |
Creates a capacity reservation with the specified name and number of requested data processing units
Description
Creates a capacity reservation with the specified name and number of requested data processing units.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_capacity_reservation/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_capacity_reservation(TargetDpus, Name, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
TargetDpus |
[required] The number of requested data processing units. |
Name |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation to create. |
Tags |
The tags for the capacity reservation. |
Creates (registers) a data catalog with the specified name and properties
Description
Creates (registers) a data catalog with the specified name and properties. Catalogs created are visible to all users of the same Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_data_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_data_catalog(
Name,
Type,
Description = NULL,
Parameters = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the data catalog to create. The catalog name must be unique for the Amazon Web Services account and can use a maximum of 127 alphanumeric, underscore, at sign, or hyphen characters. The remainder of the length constraint of 256 is reserved for use by Athena. For
|
Type |
[required] The type of data catalog to create: |
Description |
A description of the data catalog to be created. |
Parameters |
Specifies the Lambda function or functions to use for creating the data catalog. This is a mapping whose values depend on the catalog type.
|
Tags |
A list of comma separated tags to add to the data catalog that is
created. All the resources that are created by the
|
Creates a named query in the specified workgroup
Description
Creates a named query in the specified workgroup. Requires that you have access to the workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_named_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_named_query(
Name,
Description = NULL,
Database,
QueryString,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The query name. |
Description |
The query description. |
Database |
[required] The database to which the query belongs. |
QueryString |
[required] The contents of the query with all query statements. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the
query is idempotent (executes only once). If another
This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for users. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup in which the named query is being created. |
Creates an empty ipynb file in the specified Apache Spark enabled workgroup
Description
Creates an empty ipynb
file in the specified Apache Spark enabled workgroup. Throws an error if a file in the workgroup with the same name already exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_notebook/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_notebook(WorkGroup, Name, ClientRequestToken = NULL)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The name of the Spark enabled workgroup in which the notebook will be created. |
Name |
[required] The name of the |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the notebook is idempotent (executes only once). This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for you. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
Creates a prepared statement for use with SQL queries in Athena
Description
Creates a prepared statement for use with SQL queries in Athena.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_prepared_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_prepared_statement(
StatementName,
WorkGroup,
QueryStatement,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
StatementName |
[required] The name of the prepared statement. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The name of the workgroup to which the prepared statement belongs. |
QueryStatement |
[required] The query string for the prepared statement. |
Description |
The description of the prepared statement. |
Gets an authentication token and the URL at which the notebook can be accessed
Description
Gets an authentication token and the URL at which the notebook can be accessed. During programmatic access, create_presigned_notebook_url
must be called every 10 minutes to refresh the authentication token. For information about granting programmatic access, see Grant programmatic access.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_presigned_notebook_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_presigned_notebook_url(SessionId)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
Creates a workgroup with the specified name
Description
Creates a workgroup with the specified name. A workgroup can be an Apache Spark enabled workgroup or an Athena SQL workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_create_work_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_create_work_group(
Name,
Configuration = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The workgroup name. |
Configuration |
Contains configuration information for creating an Athena SQL workgroup
or Spark enabled Athena workgroup. Athena SQL workgroup configuration
includes the location in Amazon S3 where query and calculation results
are stored, the encryption configuration, if any, used for encrypting
query results, whether the Amazon CloudWatch Metrics are enabled for the
workgroup, the limit for the amount of bytes scanned (cutoff) per query,
if it is specified, and whether workgroup's settings (specified with
|
Description |
The workgroup description. |
Tags |
A list of comma separated tags to add to the workgroup that is created. |
Deletes a cancelled capacity reservation
Description
Deletes a cancelled capacity reservation. A reservation must be cancelled before it can be deleted. A deleted reservation is immediately removed from your account and can no longer be referenced, including by its ARN. A deleted reservation cannot be called by get_capacity_reservation
, and deleted reservations do not appear in the output of list_capacity_reservations
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_delete_capacity_reservation/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_delete_capacity_reservation(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation to delete. |
Deletes a data catalog
Description
Deletes a data catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_delete_data_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_delete_data_catalog(Name, DeleteCatalogOnly = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the data catalog to delete. |
DeleteCatalogOnly |
Deletes the Athena Data Catalog. You can only use this with the
|
Deletes the named query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query was saved
Description
Deletes the named query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query was saved.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_delete_named_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_delete_named_query(NamedQueryId)
Arguments
NamedQueryId |
[required] The unique ID of the query to delete. |
Deletes the specified notebook
Description
Deletes the specified notebook.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_delete_notebook/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_delete_notebook(NotebookId)
Arguments
NotebookId |
[required] The ID of the notebook to delete. |
Deletes the prepared statement with the specified name from the specified workgroup
Description
Deletes the prepared statement with the specified name from the specified workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_delete_prepared_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_delete_prepared_statement(StatementName, WorkGroup)
Arguments
StatementName |
[required] The name of the prepared statement to delete. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The workgroup to which the statement to be deleted belongs. |
Deletes the workgroup with the specified name
Description
Deletes the workgroup with the specified name. The primary workgroup cannot be deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_delete_work_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_delete_work_group(WorkGroup, RecursiveDeleteOption = NULL)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The unique name of the workgroup to delete. |
RecursiveDeleteOption |
The option to delete the workgroup and its contents even if the workgroup contains any named queries, query executions, or notebooks. |
Exports the specified notebook and its metadata
Description
Exports the specified notebook and its metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_export_notebook/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_export_notebook(NotebookId)
Arguments
NotebookId |
[required] The ID of the notebook to export. |
Describes a previously submitted calculation execution
Description
Describes a previously submitted calculation execution.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_calculation_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_calculation_execution(CalculationExecutionId)
Arguments
CalculationExecutionId |
[required] The calculation execution UUID. |
Retrieves the unencrypted code that was executed for the calculation
Description
Retrieves the unencrypted code that was executed for the calculation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_calculation_execution_code/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_calculation_execution_code(CalculationExecutionId)
Arguments
CalculationExecutionId |
[required] The calculation execution UUID. |
Gets the status of a current calculation
Description
Gets the status of a current calculation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_calculation_execution_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_calculation_execution_status(CalculationExecutionId)
Arguments
CalculationExecutionId |
[required] The calculation execution UUID. |
Gets the capacity assignment configuration for a capacity reservation, if one exists
Description
Gets the capacity assignment configuration for a capacity reservation, if one exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_capacity_assignment_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_capacity_assignment_configuration(CapacityReservationName)
Arguments
CapacityReservationName |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation to retrieve the capacity assignment configuration for. |
Returns information about the capacity reservation with the specified name
Description
Returns information about the capacity reservation with the specified name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_capacity_reservation/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_capacity_reservation(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation. |
Returns the specified data catalog
Description
Returns the specified data catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_data_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_data_catalog(Name, WorkGroup = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the data catalog to return. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup. Required if making an IAM Identity Center request. |
Returns a database object for the specified database and data catalog
Description
Returns a database object for the specified database and data catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_database(CatalogName, DatabaseName, WorkGroup = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogName |
[required] The name of the data catalog that contains the database to return. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database to return. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup for which the metadata is being fetched. Required if requesting an IAM Identity Center enabled Glue Data Catalog. |
Returns information about a single query
Description
Returns information about a single query. Requires that you have access to the workgroup in which the query was saved.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_named_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_named_query(NamedQueryId)
Arguments
NamedQueryId |
[required] The unique ID of the query. Use
|
Retrieves notebook metadata for the specified notebook ID
Description
Retrieves notebook metadata for the specified notebook ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_notebook_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_notebook_metadata(NotebookId)
Arguments
NotebookId |
[required] The ID of the notebook whose metadata is to be retrieved. |
Retrieves the prepared statement with the specified name from the specified workgroup
Description
Retrieves the prepared statement with the specified name from the specified workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_prepared_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_prepared_statement(StatementName, WorkGroup)
Arguments
StatementName |
[required] The name of the prepared statement to retrieve. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The workgroup to which the statement to be retrieved belongs. |
Returns information about a single execution of a query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query ran
Description
Returns information about a single execution of a query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query ran. Each time a query executes, information about the query execution is saved with a unique ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_query_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_query_execution(QueryExecutionId)
Arguments
QueryExecutionId |
[required] The unique ID of the query execution. |
Streams the results of a single query execution specified by QueryExecutionId from the Athena query results location in Amazon S3
Description
Streams the results of a single query execution specified by QueryExecutionId
from the Athena query results location in Amazon S3. For more information, see Working with query results, recent queries, and output files in the Amazon Athena User Guide. This request does not execute the query but returns results. Use start_query_execution
to run a query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_query_results/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_query_results(QueryExecutionId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
QueryExecutionId |
[required] The unique ID of the query execution. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results (rows) to return in this request. |
Returns query execution runtime statistics related to a single execution of a query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query ran
Description
Returns query execution runtime statistics related to a single execution of a query if you have access to the workgroup in which the query ran. Statistics from the Timeline
section of the response object are available as soon as QueryExecutionStatus$State is in a SUCCEEDED or FAILED state. The remaining non-timeline statistics in the response (like stage-level input and output row count and data size) are updated asynchronously and may not be available immediately after a query completes. The non-timeline statistics are also not included when a query has row-level filters defined in Lake Formation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_query_runtime_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_query_runtime_statistics(QueryExecutionId)
Arguments
QueryExecutionId |
[required] The unique ID of the query execution. |
Gets the full details of a previously created session, including the session status and configuration
Description
Gets the full details of a previously created session, including the session status and configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_session(SessionId)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
Gets the current status of a session
Description
Gets the current status of a session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_session_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_session_status(SessionId)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
Returns table metadata for the specified catalog, database, and table
Description
Returns table metadata for the specified catalog, database, and table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_table_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_table_metadata(
CatalogName,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogName |
[required] The name of the data catalog that contains the database and table metadata to return. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database that contains the table metadata to return. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which metadata is returned. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup for which the metadata is being fetched. Required if requesting an IAM Identity Center enabled Glue Data Catalog. |
Returns information about the workgroup with the specified name
Description
Returns information about the workgroup with the specified name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_get_work_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_get_work_group(WorkGroup)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The name of the workgroup. |
Imports a single ipynb file to a Spark enabled workgroup
Description
Imports a single ipynb
file to a Spark enabled workgroup. To import the notebook, the request must specify a value for either Payload
or NoteBookS3LocationUri
. If neither is specified or both are specified, an InvalidRequestException
occurs. The maximum file size that can be imported is 10 megabytes. If an ipynb
file with the same name already exists in the workgroup, throws an error.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_import_notebook/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_import_notebook(
WorkGroup,
Name,
Payload = NULL,
Type,
NotebookS3LocationUri = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The name of the Spark enabled workgroup to import the notebook to. |
Name |
[required] The name of the notebook to import. |
Payload |
The notebook content to be imported. The payload must be in |
Type |
[required] The notebook content type. Currently, the only valid type is |
NotebookS3LocationUri |
A URI that specifies the Amazon S3 location of a notebook file in
|
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to import the notebook is idempotent (executes only once). This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for you. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
Returns the supported DPU sizes for the supported application runtimes (for example, Athena notebook version 1)
Description
Returns the supported DPU sizes for the supported application runtimes (for example, Athena notebook version 1
).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_application_dpu_sizes/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_application_dpu_sizes(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Specifies the maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. |
Lists the calculations that have been submitted to a session in descending order
Description
Lists the calculations that have been submitted to a session in descending order. Newer calculations are listed first; older calculations are listed later.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_calculation_executions/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_calculation_executions(
SessionId,
StateFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
StateFilter |
A filter for a specific calculation execution state. A description of each state follows.
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of calculation executions to return. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
Lists the capacity reservations for the current account
Description
Lists the capacity reservations for the current account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_capacity_reservations/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_capacity_reservations(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the maximum number of results to return. |
Lists the data catalogs in the current Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the data catalogs in the current Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_data_catalogs/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_data_catalogs(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set of pages, pass in the NextToken from the response object of the previous page call. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the maximum number of data catalogs to return. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup. Required if making an IAM Identity Center request. |
Lists the databases in the specified data catalog
Description
Lists the databases in the specified data catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_databases/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_databases(
CatalogName,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogName |
[required] The name of the data catalog that contains the databases to return. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
Specifies the maximum number of results to return. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup for which the metadata is being fetched. Required if requesting an IAM Identity Center enabled Glue Data Catalog. |
Returns a list of engine versions that are available to choose from, including the Auto option
Description
Returns a list of engine versions that are available to choose from, including the Auto option.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_engine_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_engine_versions(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of engine versions to return in this request. |
Lists, in descending order, the executors that joined a session
Description
Lists, in descending order, the executors that joined a session. Newer executors are listed first; older executors are listed later. The result can be optionally filtered by state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_executors/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_executors(
SessionId,
ExecutorStateFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
ExecutorStateFilter |
A filter for a specific executor state. A description of each state follows.
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of executors to return. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
Provides a list of available query IDs only for queries saved in the specified workgroup
Description
Provides a list of available query IDs only for queries saved in the specified workgroup. Requires that you have access to the specified workgroup. If a workgroup is not specified, lists the saved queries for the primary workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_named_queries/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_named_queries(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of queries to return in this request. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup from which the named queries are being returned. If a workgroup is not specified, the saved queries for the primary workgroup are returned. |
Displays the notebook files for the specified workgroup in paginated format
Description
Displays the notebook files for the specified workgroup in paginated format.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_notebook_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_notebook_metadata(
Filters = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
WorkGroup
)
Arguments
Filters |
Search filter string. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the maximum number of results to return. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The name of the Spark enabled workgroup to retrieve notebook metadata for. |
Lists, in descending order, the sessions that have been created in a notebook that are in an active state like CREATING, CREATED, IDLE or BUSY
Description
Lists, in descending order, the sessions that have been created in a notebook that are in an active state like CREATING
, CREATED
, IDLE
or BUSY
. Newer sessions are listed first; older sessions are listed later.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_notebook_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_notebook_sessions(NotebookId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NotebookId |
[required] The ID of the notebook to list sessions for. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of notebook sessions to return. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
Lists the prepared statements in the specified workgroup
Description
Lists the prepared statements in the specified workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_prepared_statements/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_prepared_statements(WorkGroup, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The workgroup to list the prepared statements for. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
Provides a list of available query execution IDs for the queries in the specified workgroup
Description
Provides a list of available query execution IDs for the queries in the specified workgroup. Athena keeps a query history for 45 days. If a workgroup is not specified, returns a list of query execution IDs for the primary workgroup. Requires you to have access to the workgroup in which the queries ran.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_query_executions/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_query_executions(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of query executions to return in this request. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup from which queries are being returned. If a workgroup is not specified, a list of available query execution IDs for the queries in the primary workgroup is returned. |
Lists the sessions in a workgroup that are in an active state like CREATING, CREATED, IDLE, or BUSY
Description
Lists the sessions in a workgroup that are in an active state like CREATING
, CREATED
, IDLE
, or BUSY
. Newer sessions are listed first; older sessions are listed later.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_sessions(
WorkGroup,
StateFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The workgroup to which the session belongs. |
StateFilter |
A filter for a specific session state. A description of each state follows.
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of sessions to return. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
Lists the metadata for the tables in the specified data catalog database
Description
Lists the metadata for the tables in the specified data catalog database.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_table_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_table_metadata(
CatalogName,
DatabaseName,
Expression = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogName |
[required] The name of the data catalog for which table metadata should be returned. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database for which table metadata should be returned. |
Expression |
A regex filter that pattern-matches table names. If no expression is supplied, metadata for all tables are listed. |
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set of pages, pass in the NextToken from the response object of the previous page call. |
MaxResults |
Specifies the maximum number of results to return. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup for which the metadata is being fetched. Required if requesting an IAM Identity Center enabled Glue Data Catalog. |
Lists the tags associated with an Athena resource
Description
Lists the tags associated with an Athena resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] Lists the tags for the resource with the specified ARN. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no additional results for this request, where the request lists the tags for the resource with the specified ARN. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request that lists the tags for the resource. |
Lists available workgroups for the account
Description
Lists available workgroups for the account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_list_work_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_list_work_groups(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token generated by the Athena service that specifies where to continue
pagination if a previous request was truncated. To obtain the next set
of pages, pass in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of workgroups to return in this request. |
Puts a new capacity assignment configuration for a specified capacity reservation
Description
Puts a new capacity assignment configuration for a specified capacity reservation. If a capacity assignment configuration already exists for the capacity reservation, replaces the existing capacity assignment configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_put_capacity_assignment_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_put_capacity_assignment_configuration(
CapacityReservationName,
CapacityAssignments
)
Arguments
CapacityReservationName |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation to put a capacity assignment configuration for. |
CapacityAssignments |
[required] The list of assignments for the capacity assignment configuration. |
Submits calculations for execution within a session
Description
Submits calculations for execution within a session. You can supply the code to run as an inline code block within the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_start_calculation_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_start_calculation_execution(
SessionId,
Description = NULL,
CalculationConfiguration = NULL,
CodeBlock = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
Description |
A description of the calculation. |
CalculationConfiguration |
Contains configuration information for the calculation. |
CodeBlock |
A string that contains the code of the calculation. Use this parameter instead of CalculationConfiguration$CodeBlock, which is deprecated. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the
calculation is idempotent (executes only once). If another
This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for users. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
Runs the SQL query statements contained in the Query
Description
Runs the SQL query statements contained in the Query
. Requires you to have access to the workgroup in which the query ran. Running queries against an external catalog requires get_data_catalog
permission to the catalog. For code samples using the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java, see Examples and Code Samples in the Amazon Athena User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_start_query_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_start_query_execution(
QueryString,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
QueryExecutionContext = NULL,
ResultConfiguration = NULL,
WorkGroup = NULL,
ExecutionParameters = NULL,
ResultReuseConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
QueryString |
[required] The SQL query statements to be executed. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the
query is idempotent (executes only once). If another
This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for users. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
QueryExecutionContext |
The database within which the query executes. |
ResultConfiguration |
Specifies information about where and how to save the results of the query execution. If the query runs in a workgroup, then workgroup's settings may override query settings. This affects the query results location. The workgroup settings override is specified in EnforceWorkGroupConfiguration (true/false) in the WorkGroupConfiguration. See WorkGroupConfiguration$EnforceWorkGroupConfiguration. |
WorkGroup |
The name of the workgroup in which the query is being started. |
ExecutionParameters |
A list of values for the parameters in a query. The values are applied sequentially to the parameters in the query in the order in which the parameters occur. |
ResultReuseConfiguration |
Specifies the query result reuse behavior for the query. |
Creates a session for running calculations within a workgroup
Description
Creates a session for running calculations within a workgroup. The session is ready when it reaches an IDLE
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_start_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_start_session(
Description = NULL,
WorkGroup,
EngineConfiguration,
NotebookVersion = NULL,
SessionIdleTimeoutInMinutes = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Description |
The session description. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The workgroup to which the session belongs. |
EngineConfiguration |
[required] Contains engine data processing unit (DPU) configuration settings and parameter mappings. |
NotebookVersion |
The notebook version. This value is supplied automatically for notebook
sessions in the Athena console and is not required for programmatic
session access. The only valid notebook version is
|
SessionIdleTimeoutInMinutes |
The idle timeout in minutes for the session. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the
session is idempotent (executes only once). If another
This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for users. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
Requests the cancellation of a calculation
Description
Requests the cancellation of a calculation. A stop_calculation_execution
call on a calculation that is already in a terminal state (for example, STOPPED
, FAILED
, or COMPLETED
) succeeds but has no effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_stop_calculation_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_stop_calculation_execution(CalculationExecutionId)
Arguments
CalculationExecutionId |
[required] The calculation execution UUID. |
Stops a query execution
Description
Stops a query execution. Requires you to have access to the workgroup in which the query ran.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_stop_query_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_stop_query_execution(QueryExecutionId)
Arguments
QueryExecutionId |
[required] The unique ID of the query execution to stop. |
Adds one or more tags to an Athena resource
Description
Adds one or more tags to an Athena resource. A tag is a label that you assign to a resource. Each tag consists of a key and an optional value, both of which you define. For example, you can use tags to categorize Athena workgroups, data catalogs, or capacity reservations by purpose, owner, or environment. Use a consistent set of tag keys to make it easier to search and filter the resources in your account. For best practices, see Tagging Best Practices. Tag keys can be from 1 to 128 UTF-8 Unicode characters, and tag values can be from 0 to 256 UTF-8 Unicode characters. Tags can use letters and numbers representable in UTF-8, and the following characters: + - = . _ : / @. Tag keys and values are case-sensitive. Tag keys must be unique per resource. If you specify more than one tag, separate them by commas.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the Athena resource to which tags are to be added. |
Tags |
[required] A collection of one or more tags, separated by commas, to be added to an Athena resource. |
Terminates an active session
Description
Terminates an active session. A terminate_session
call on a session that is already inactive (for example, in a FAILED
, TERMINATED
or TERMINATING
state) succeeds but has no effect. Calculations running in the session when terminate_session
is called are forcefully stopped, but may display as FAILED
instead of STOPPED
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_terminate_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_terminate_session(SessionId)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The session ID. |
Removes one or more tags from an Athena resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from an Athena resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the resource from which tags are to be removed. |
TagKeys |
[required] A comma-separated list of one or more tag keys whose tags are to be removed from the specified resource. |
Updates the number of requested data processing units for the capacity reservation with the specified name
Description
Updates the number of requested data processing units for the capacity reservation with the specified name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_capacity_reservation/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_capacity_reservation(TargetDpus, Name)
Arguments
TargetDpus |
[required] The new number of requested data processing units. |
Name |
[required] The name of the capacity reservation. |
Updates the data catalog that has the specified name
Description
Updates the data catalog that has the specified name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_data_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_data_catalog(Name, Type, Description = NULL, Parameters = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the data catalog to update. The catalog name must be unique for the Amazon Web Services account and can use a maximum of 127 alphanumeric, underscore, at sign, or hyphen characters. The remainder of the length constraint of 256 is reserved for use by Athena. |
Type |
[required] Specifies the type of data catalog to update. Specify |
Description |
New or modified text that describes the data catalog. |
Parameters |
Specifies the Lambda function or functions to use for updating the data catalog. This is a mapping whose values depend on the catalog type.
|
Updates a NamedQuery object
Description
Updates a NamedQuery object. The database or workgroup cannot be updated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_named_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_named_query(NamedQueryId, Name, Description = NULL, QueryString)
Arguments
NamedQueryId |
[required] The unique identifier (UUID) of the query. |
Name |
[required] The name of the query. |
Description |
The query description. |
QueryString |
[required] The contents of the query with all query statements. |
Updates the contents of a Spark notebook
Description
Updates the contents of a Spark notebook.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_notebook/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_notebook(
NotebookId,
Payload,
Type,
SessionId = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
NotebookId |
[required] The ID of the notebook to update. |
Payload |
[required] The updated content for the notebook. |
Type |
[required] The notebook content type. Currently, the only valid type is |
SessionId |
The active notebook session ID. Required if the notebook has an active session. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the notebook is idempotent (executes only once). This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for you. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
Updates the metadata for a notebook
Description
Updates the metadata for a notebook.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_notebook_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_notebook_metadata(NotebookId, ClientRequestToken = NULL, Name)
Arguments
NotebookId |
[required] The ID of the notebook to update the metadata for. |
ClientRequestToken |
A unique case-sensitive string used to ensure the request to create the notebook is idempotent (executes only once). This token is listed as not required because Amazon Web Services SDKs (for example the Amazon Web Services SDK for Java) auto-generate the token for you. If you are not using the Amazon Web Services SDK or the Amazon Web Services CLI, you must provide this token or the action will fail. |
Name |
[required] The name to update the notebook to. |
Updates a prepared statement
Description
Updates a prepared statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_prepared_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_prepared_statement(
StatementName,
WorkGroup,
QueryStatement,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
StatementName |
[required] The name of the prepared statement. |
WorkGroup |
[required] The workgroup for the prepared statement. |
QueryStatement |
[required] The query string for the prepared statement. |
Description |
The description of the prepared statement. |
Updates the workgroup with the specified name
Description
Updates the workgroup with the specified name. The workgroup's name cannot be changed. Only ConfigurationUpdates
can be specified.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/athena_update_work_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
athena_update_work_group(
WorkGroup,
Description = NULL,
ConfigurationUpdates = NULL,
State = NULL
)
Arguments
WorkGroup |
[required] The specified workgroup that will be updated. |
Description |
The workgroup description. |
ConfigurationUpdates |
Contains configuration updates for an Athena SQL workgroup. |
State |
The workgroup state that will be updated for the given workgroup. |
Amazon CloudSearch
Description
Amazon CloudSearch Configuration Service
You use the Amazon CloudSearch configuration service to create, configure, and manage search domains. Configuration service requests are submitted using the AWS Query protocol. AWS Query requests are HTTP or HTTPS requests submitted via HTTP GET or POST with a query parameter named Action.
The endpoint for configuration service requests is region-specific: cloudsearch.region.amazonaws.com. For example, cloudsearch.us-east-1.amazonaws.com. For a current list of supported regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints.
Usage
cloudsearch(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cloudsearch( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
build_suggesters | Indexes the search suggestions |
create_domain | Creates a new search domain |
define_analysis_scheme | Configures an analysis scheme that can be applied to a text or text-array field to define language-specific text processing options |
define_expression | Configures an Expression for the search domain |
define_index_field | Configures an IndexField for the search domain |
define_suggester | Configures a suggester for a domain |
delete_analysis_scheme | Deletes an analysis scheme |
delete_domain | Permanently deletes a search domain and all of its data |
delete_expression | Removes an Expression from the search domain |
delete_index_field | Removes an IndexField from the search domain |
delete_suggester | Deletes a suggester |
describe_analysis_schemes | Gets the analysis schemes configured for a domain |
describe_availability_options | Gets the availability options configured for a domain |
describe_domain_endpoint_options | Returns the domain's endpoint options, specifically whether all requests to the domain must arrive over HTTPS |
describe_domains | Gets information about the search domains owned by this account |
describe_expressions | Gets the expressions configured for the search domain |
describe_index_fields | Gets information about the index fields configured for the search domain |
describe_scaling_parameters | Gets the scaling parameters configured for a domain |
describe_service_access_policies | Gets information about the access policies that control access to the domain's document and search endpoints |
describe_suggesters | Gets the suggesters configured for a domain |
index_documents | Tells the search domain to start indexing its documents using the latest indexing options |
list_domain_names | Lists all search domains owned by an account |
update_availability_options | Configures the availability options for a domain |
update_domain_endpoint_options | Updates the domain's endpoint options, specifically whether all requests to the domain must arrive over HTTPS |
update_scaling_parameters | Configures scaling parameters for a domain |
update_service_access_policies | Configures the access rules that control access to the domain's document and search endpoints |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cloudsearch()
svc$build_suggesters(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Indexes the search suggestions
Description
Indexes the search suggestions. For more information, see Configuring Suggesters in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_build_suggesters/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_build_suggesters(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
Creates a new search domain
Description
Creates a new search domain. For more information, see Creating a Search Domain in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_create_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_create_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] A name for the domain you are creating. Allowed characters are a-z (lower-case letters), 0-9, and hyphen (-). Domain names must start with a letter or number and be at least 3 and no more than 28 characters long. |
Configures an analysis scheme that can be applied to a text or text-array field to define language-specific text processing options
Description
Configures an analysis scheme that can be applied to a text
or text-array
field to define language-specific text processing options. For more information, see Configuring Analysis Schemes in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_define_analysis_scheme/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_define_analysis_scheme(DomainName, AnalysisScheme)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
AnalysisScheme |
[required] |
Configures an Expression for the search domain
Description
Configures an Expression
for the search domain. Used to create new expressions and modify existing ones. If the expression exists, the new configuration replaces the old one. For more information, see Configuring Expressions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_define_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_define_expression(DomainName, Expression)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
Expression |
[required] |
Configures an IndexField for the search domain
Description
Configures an IndexField
for the search domain. Used to create new fields and modify existing ones. You must specify the name of the domain you are configuring and an index field configuration. The index field configuration specifies a unique name, the index field type, and the options you want to configure for the field. The options you can specify depend on the IndexFieldType
. If the field exists, the new configuration replaces the old one. For more information, see Configuring Index Fields in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_define_index_field/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_define_index_field(DomainName, IndexField)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
IndexField |
[required] The index field and field options you want to configure. |
Configures a suggester for a domain
Description
Configures a suggester for a domain. A suggester enables you to display possible matches before users finish typing their queries. When you configure a suggester, you must specify the name of the text field you want to search for possible matches and a unique name for the suggester. For more information, see Getting Search Suggestions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_define_suggester/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_define_suggester(DomainName, Suggester)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
Suggester |
[required] |
Deletes an analysis scheme
Description
Deletes an analysis scheme. For more information, see Configuring Analysis Schemes in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_delete_analysis_scheme/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_delete_analysis_scheme(DomainName, AnalysisSchemeName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
AnalysisSchemeName |
[required] The name of the analysis scheme you want to delete. |
Permanently deletes a search domain and all of its data
Description
Permanently deletes a search domain and all of its data. Once a domain has been deleted, it cannot be recovered. For more information, see Deleting a Search Domain in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_delete_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_delete_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to permanently delete. |
Removes an Expression from the search domain
Description
Removes an Expression
from the search domain. For more information, see Configuring Expressions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_delete_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_delete_expression(DomainName, ExpressionName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
ExpressionName |
[required] The name of the |
Removes an IndexField from the search domain
Description
Removes an IndexField
from the search domain. For more information, see Configuring Index Fields in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_delete_index_field/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_delete_index_field(DomainName, IndexFieldName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
IndexFieldName |
[required] The name of the index field your want to remove from the domain's indexing options. |
Deletes a suggester
Description
Deletes a suggester. For more information, see Getting Search Suggestions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_delete_suggester/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_delete_suggester(DomainName, SuggesterName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
SuggesterName |
[required] Specifies the name of the suggester you want to delete. |
Gets the analysis schemes configured for a domain
Description
Gets the analysis schemes configured for a domain. An analysis scheme defines language-specific text processing options for a text
field. Can be limited to specific analysis schemes by name. By default, shows all analysis schemes and includes any pending changes to the configuration. Set the Deployed
option to true
to show the active configuration and exclude pending changes. For more information, see Configuring Analysis Schemes in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_analysis_schemes/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_analysis_schemes(
DomainName,
AnalysisSchemeNames = NULL,
Deployed = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to describe. |
AnalysisSchemeNames |
The analysis schemes you want to describe. |
Deployed |
Whether to display the deployed configuration ( |
Gets the availability options configured for a domain
Description
Gets the availability options configured for a domain. By default, shows the configuration with any pending changes. Set the Deployed
option to true
to show the active configuration and exclude pending changes. For more information, see Configuring Availability Options in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_availability_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_availability_options(DomainName, Deployed = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to describe. |
Deployed |
Whether to display the deployed configuration ( |
Returns the domain's endpoint options, specifically whether all requests to the domain must arrive over HTTPS
Description
Returns the domain's endpoint options, specifically whether all requests to the domain must arrive over HTTPS. For more information, see Configuring Domain Endpoint Options in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_domain_endpoint_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_domain_endpoint_options(DomainName, Deployed = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] A string that represents the name of a domain. |
Deployed |
Whether to retrieve the latest configuration (which might be in a
Processing state) or the current, active configuration. Defaults to
|
Gets information about the search domains owned by this account
Description
Gets information about the search domains owned by this account. Can be limited to specific domains. Shows all domains by default. To get the number of searchable documents in a domain, use the console or submit a matchall
request to your domain's search endpoint: q=matchall&q.parser=structured&size=0
. For more information, see Getting Information about a Search Domain in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_domains/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_domains(DomainNames = NULL)
Arguments
DomainNames |
The names of the domains you want to include in the response. |
Gets the expressions configured for the search domain
Description
Gets the expressions configured for the search domain. Can be limited to specific expressions by name. By default, shows all expressions and includes any pending changes to the configuration. Set the Deployed
option to true
to show the active configuration and exclude pending changes. For more information, see Configuring Expressions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_expressions/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_expressions(
DomainName,
ExpressionNames = NULL,
Deployed = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to describe. |
ExpressionNames |
Limits the |
Deployed |
Whether to display the deployed configuration ( |
Gets information about the index fields configured for the search domain
Description
Gets information about the index fields configured for the search domain. Can be limited to specific fields by name. By default, shows all fields and includes any pending changes to the configuration. Set the Deployed
option to true
to show the active configuration and exclude pending changes. For more information, see Getting Domain Information in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_index_fields/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_index_fields(
DomainName,
FieldNames = NULL,
Deployed = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to describe. |
FieldNames |
A list of the index fields you want to describe. If not specified, information is returned for all configured index fields. |
Deployed |
Whether to display the deployed configuration ( |
Gets the scaling parameters configured for a domain
Description
Gets the scaling parameters configured for a domain. A domain's scaling parameters specify the desired search instance type and replication count. For more information, see Configuring Scaling Options in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_scaling_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_scaling_parameters(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
Gets information about the access policies that control access to the domain's document and search endpoints
Description
Gets information about the access policies that control access to the domain's document and search endpoints. By default, shows the configuration with any pending changes. Set the Deployed
option to true
to show the active configuration and exclude pending changes. For more information, see Configuring Access for a Search Domain in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_service_access_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_service_access_policies(DomainName, Deployed = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to describe. |
Deployed |
Whether to display the deployed configuration ( |
Gets the suggesters configured for a domain
Description
Gets the suggesters configured for a domain. A suggester enables you to display possible matches before users finish typing their queries. Can be limited to specific suggesters by name. By default, shows all suggesters and includes any pending changes to the configuration. Set the Deployed
option to true
to show the active configuration and exclude pending changes. For more information, see Getting Search Suggestions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_describe_suggesters/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_describe_suggesters(
DomainName,
SuggesterNames = NULL,
Deployed = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to describe. |
SuggesterNames |
The suggesters you want to describe. |
Deployed |
Whether to display the deployed configuration ( |
Tells the search domain to start indexing its documents using the latest indexing options
Description
Tells the search domain to start indexing its documents using the latest indexing options. This operation must be invoked to activate options whose OptionStatus is RequiresIndexDocuments
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_index_documents/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_index_documents(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
Lists all search domains owned by an account
Description
Lists all search domains owned by an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_list_domain_names/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_list_domain_names()
Configures the availability options for a domain
Description
Configures the availability options for a domain. Enabling the Multi-AZ option expands an Amazon CloudSearch domain to an additional Availability Zone in the same Region to increase fault tolerance in the event of a service disruption. Changes to the Multi-AZ option can take about half an hour to become active. For more information, see Configuring Availability Options in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_update_availability_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_update_availability_options(DomainName, MultiAZ)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
MultiAZ |
[required] You expand an existing search domain to a second Availability Zone by
setting the Multi-AZ option to true. Similarly, you can turn off the
Multi-AZ option to downgrade the domain to a single Availability Zone by
setting the Multi-AZ option to |
Updates the domain's endpoint options, specifically whether all requests to the domain must arrive over HTTPS
Description
Updates the domain's endpoint options, specifically whether all requests to the domain must arrive over HTTPS. For more information, see Configuring Domain Endpoint Options in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_update_domain_endpoint_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_update_domain_endpoint_options(DomainName, DomainEndpointOptions)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] A string that represents the name of a domain. |
DomainEndpointOptions |
[required] Whether to require that all requests to the domain arrive over HTTPS. We recommend Policy-Min-TLS-1-2-2019-07 for TLSSecurityPolicy. For compatibility with older clients, the default is Policy-Min-TLS-1-0-2019-07. |
Configures scaling parameters for a domain
Description
Configures scaling parameters for a domain. A domain's scaling parameters specify the desired search instance type and replication count. Amazon CloudSearch will still automatically scale your domain based on the volume of data and traffic, but not below the desired instance type and replication count. If the Multi-AZ option is enabled, these values control the resources used per Availability Zone. For more information, see Configuring Scaling Options in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_update_scaling_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_update_scaling_parameters(DomainName, ScalingParameters)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
ScalingParameters |
[required] |
Configures the access rules that control access to the domain's document and search endpoints
Description
Configures the access rules that control access to the domain's document and search endpoints. For more information, see Configuring Access for an Amazon CloudSearch Domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearch_update_service_access_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearch_update_service_access_policies(DomainName, AccessPolicies)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
AccessPolicies |
[required] The access rules you want to configure. These rules replace any existing rules. |
Amazon CloudSearch Domain
Description
You use the AmazonCloudSearch2013 API to upload documents to a search domain and search those documents.
The endpoints for submitting
upload_documents
,
search
, and
suggest
requests are domain-specific. To
get the endpoints for your domain, use the Amazon CloudSearch
configuration service DescribeDomains
action. The domain endpoints are
also displayed on the domain dashboard in the Amazon CloudSearch
console. You submit suggest requests to the search endpoint.
For more information, see the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide.
Usage
cloudsearchdomain(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- cloudsearchdomain( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
search | Retrieves a list of documents that match the specified search criteria |
suggest | Retrieves autocomplete suggestions for a partial query string |
upload_documents | Posts a batch of documents to a search domain for indexing |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- cloudsearchdomain()
svc$search(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Retrieves a list of documents that match the specified search criteria
Description
Retrieves a list of documents that match the specified search criteria. How you specify the search criteria depends on which query parser you use. Amazon CloudSearch supports four query parsers:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearchdomain_search/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearchdomain_search(
cursor = NULL,
expr = NULL,
facet = NULL,
filterQuery = NULL,
highlight = NULL,
partial = NULL,
query,
queryOptions = NULL,
queryParser = NULL,
return = NULL,
size = NULL,
sort = NULL,
start = NULL,
stats = NULL
)
Arguments
cursor |
Retrieves a cursor value you can use to page through large result sets.
Use the For more information, see Paginating Results in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
expr |
Defines one or more numeric expressions that can be used to sort results or specify search or filter criteria. You can also specify expressions as return fields. You specify the expressions in JSON using the form
For information about the variables, operators, and functions you can use in expressions, see Writing Expressions in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
facet |
Specifies one or more fields for which to get facet information, and
options that control how the facet information is returned. Each
specified field must be facet-enabled in the domain configuration. The
fields and options are specified in JSON using the form
You can specify the following faceting options:
If no facet options are specified, facet counts are computed for all field values, the facets are sorted by facet count, and the top 10 facets are returned in the results. To count particular buckets of values, use the
To sort facets by facet count, use the
To sort the facets by value, use the
For more information, see Getting and Using Facet Information in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
filterQuery |
Specifies a structured query that filters the results of a search
without affecting how the results are scored and sorted. You use
For more information about using filters, see Filtering Matching Documents in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
highlight |
Retrieves highlights for matches in the specified You can specify the following highlight options:
If no highlight options are specified for a field, the returned field
text is treated as HTML and the first match is highlighted with emphasis
tags: For example, the following request retrieves highlights for the
|
partial |
Enables partial results to be returned if one or more index partitions are unavailable. When your search index is partitioned across multiple search instances, by default Amazon CloudSearch only returns results if every partition can be queried. This means that the failure of a single search instance can result in 5xx (internal server) errors. When you enable partial results, Amazon CloudSearch returns whatever results are available and includes the percentage of documents searched in the search results (percent-searched). This enables you to more gracefully degrade your users' search experience. For example, rather than displaying no results, you could display the partial results and a message indicating that the results might be incomplete due to a temporary system outage. |
query |
[required] Specifies the search criteria for the request. How you specify the
search criteria depends on the query parser used for the request and the
parser options specified in the For more information about specifying search criteria, see Searching Your Data in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
queryOptions |
Configures options for the query parser specified in the The options you can configure vary according to which parser you use:
|
queryParser |
Specifies which query parser to use to process the request. If
Amazon CloudSearch supports four query parsers:
|
return |
Specifies the field and expression values to include in the response.
Multiple fields or expressions are specified as a comma-separated list.
By default, a search response includes all return enabled fields
( |
size |
Specifies the maximum number of search hits to include in the response. |
sort |
Specifies the fields or custom expressions to use to sort the search
results. Multiple fields or expressions are specified as a
comma-separated list. You must specify the sort direction ( For more information, see Sorting Results in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
start |
Specifies the offset of the first search hit you want to return. Note
that the result set is zero-based; the first result is at index 0. You
can specify either the For more information, see Paginating Results in the Amazon CloudSearch Developer Guide. |
stats |
Specifies one or more fields for which to get statistics information. Each specified field must be facet-enabled in the domain configuration. The fields are specified in JSON using the form:
There are currently no options supported for statistics. |
Retrieves autocomplete suggestions for a partial query string
Description
Retrieves autocomplete suggestions for a partial query string. You can use suggestions enable you to display likely matches before users finish typing. In Amazon CloudSearch, suggestions are based on the contents of a particular text field. When you request suggestions, Amazon CloudSearch finds all of the documents whose values in the suggester field start with the specified query string. The beginning of the field must match the query string to be considered a match.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearchdomain_suggest/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearchdomain_suggest(query, suggester, size = NULL)
Arguments
query |
[required] Specifies the string for which you want to get suggestions. |
suggester |
[required] Specifies the name of the suggester to use to find suggested matches. |
size |
Specifies the maximum number of suggestions to return. |
Posts a batch of documents to a search domain for indexing
Description
Posts a batch of documents to a search domain for indexing. A document batch is a collection of add and delete operations that represent the documents you want to add, update, or delete from your domain. Batches can be described in either JSON or XML. Each item that you want Amazon CloudSearch to return as a search result (such as a product) is represented as a document. Every document has a unique ID and one or more fields that contain the data that you want to search and return in results. Individual documents cannot contain more than 1 MB of data. The entire batch cannot exceed 5 MB. To get the best possible upload performance, group add and delete operations in batches that are close the 5 MB limit. Submitting a large volume of single-document batches can overload a domain's document service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/cloudsearchdomain_upload_documents/ for full documentation.
Usage
cloudsearchdomain_upload_documents(documents, contentType)
Arguments
documents |
[required] A batch of documents formatted in JSON or HTML. |
contentType |
[required] The format of the batch you are uploading. Amazon CloudSearch supports two document batch formats:
|
AWS Data Pipeline
Description
AWS Data Pipeline configures and manages a data-driven workflow called a pipeline. AWS Data Pipeline handles the details of scheduling and ensuring that data dependencies are met so that your application can focus on processing the data.
AWS Data Pipeline provides a JAR implementation of a task runner called AWS Data Pipeline Task Runner. AWS Data Pipeline Task Runner provides logic for common data management scenarios, such as performing database queries and running data analysis using Amazon Elastic MapReduce (Amazon EMR). You can use AWS Data Pipeline Task Runner as your task runner, or you can write your own task runner to provide custom data management.
AWS Data Pipeline implements two main sets of functionality. Use the first set to create a pipeline and define data sources, schedules, dependencies, and the transforms to be performed on the data. Use the second set in your task runner application to receive the next task ready for processing. The logic for performing the task, such as querying the data, running data analysis, or converting the data from one format to another, is contained within the task runner. The task runner performs the task assigned to it by the web service, reporting progress to the web service as it does so. When the task is done, the task runner reports the final success or failure of the task to the web service.
Usage
datapipeline(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- datapipeline( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
activate_pipeline | Validates the specified pipeline and starts processing pipeline tasks |
add_tags | Adds or modifies tags for the specified pipeline |
create_pipeline | Creates a new, empty pipeline |
deactivate_pipeline | Deactivates the specified running pipeline |
delete_pipeline | Deletes a pipeline, its pipeline definition, and its run history |
describe_objects | Gets the object definitions for a set of objects associated with the pipeline |
describe_pipelines | Retrieves metadata about one or more pipelines |
evaluate_expression | Task runners call EvaluateExpression to evaluate a string in the context of the specified object |
get_pipeline_definition | Gets the definition of the specified pipeline |
list_pipelines | Lists the pipeline identifiers for all active pipelines that you have permission to access |
poll_for_task | Task runners call PollForTask to receive a task to perform from AWS Data Pipeline |
put_pipeline_definition | Adds tasks, schedules, and preconditions to the specified pipeline |
query_objects | Queries the specified pipeline for the names of objects that match the specified set of conditions |
remove_tags | Removes existing tags from the specified pipeline |
report_task_progress | Task runners call ReportTaskProgress when assigned a task to acknowledge that it has the task |
report_task_runner_heartbeat | Task runners call ReportTaskRunnerHeartbeat every 15 minutes to indicate that they are operational |
set_status | Requests that the status of the specified physical or logical pipeline objects be updated in the specified pipeline |
set_task_status | Task runners call SetTaskStatus to notify AWS Data Pipeline that a task is completed and provide information about the final status |
validate_pipeline_definition | Validates the specified pipeline definition to ensure that it is well formed and can be run without error |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- datapipeline()
svc$activate_pipeline(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Validates the specified pipeline and starts processing pipeline tasks
Description
Validates the specified pipeline and starts processing pipeline tasks. If the pipeline does not pass validation, activation fails.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_activate_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_activate_pipeline(
pipelineId,
parameterValues = NULL,
startTimestamp = NULL
)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
parameterValues |
A list of parameter values to pass to the pipeline at activation. |
startTimestamp |
The date and time to resume the pipeline. By default, the pipeline resumes from the last completed execution. |
Adds or modifies tags for the specified pipeline
Description
Adds or modifies tags for the specified pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_add_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_add_tags(pipelineId, tags)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
tags |
[required] The tags to add, as key/value pairs. |
Creates a new, empty pipeline
Description
Creates a new, empty pipeline. Use put_pipeline_definition
to populate the pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_create_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_create_pipeline(name, uniqueId, description = NULL, tags = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name for the pipeline. You can use the same name for multiple pipelines associated with your AWS account, because AWS Data Pipeline assigns each pipeline a unique pipeline identifier. |
uniqueId |
[required] A unique identifier. This identifier is not the same as the pipeline
identifier assigned by AWS Data Pipeline. You are responsible for
defining the format and ensuring the uniqueness of this identifier. You
use this parameter to ensure idempotency during repeated calls to
|
description |
The description for the pipeline. |
tags |
A list of tags to associate with the pipeline at creation. Tags let you control access to pipelines. For more information, see Controlling User Access to Pipelines in the AWS Data Pipeline Developer Guide. |
Deactivates the specified running pipeline
Description
Deactivates the specified running pipeline. The pipeline is set to the DEACTIVATING
state until the deactivation process completes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_deactivate_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_deactivate_pipeline(pipelineId, cancelActive = NULL)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
cancelActive |
Indicates whether to cancel any running objects. The default is true,
which sets the state of any running objects to |
Deletes a pipeline, its pipeline definition, and its run history
Description
Deletes a pipeline, its pipeline definition, and its run history. AWS Data Pipeline attempts to cancel instances associated with the pipeline that are currently being processed by task runners.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_delete_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_delete_pipeline(pipelineId)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
Gets the object definitions for a set of objects associated with the pipeline
Description
Gets the object definitions for a set of objects associated with the pipeline. Object definitions are composed of a set of fields that define the properties of the object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_describe_objects/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_describe_objects(
pipelineId,
objectIds,
evaluateExpressions = NULL,
marker = NULL
)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline that contains the object definitions. |
objectIds |
[required] The IDs of the pipeline objects that contain the definitions to be
described. You can pass as many as 25 identifiers in a single call to
|
evaluateExpressions |
Indicates whether any expressions in the object should be evaluated when the object descriptions are returned. |
marker |
The starting point for the results to be returned. For the first call,
this value should be empty. As long as there are more results, continue
to call |
Retrieves metadata about one or more pipelines
Description
Retrieves metadata about one or more pipelines. The information retrieved includes the name of the pipeline, the pipeline identifier, its current state, and the user account that owns the pipeline. Using account credentials, you can retrieve metadata about pipelines that you or your IAM users have created. If you are using an IAM user account, you can retrieve metadata about only those pipelines for which you have read permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_describe_pipelines/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_describe_pipelines(pipelineIds)
Arguments
pipelineIds |
[required] The IDs of the pipelines to describe. You can pass as many as 25
identifiers in a single call. To obtain pipeline IDs, call
|
Task runners call EvaluateExpression to evaluate a string in the context of the specified object
Description
Task runners call evaluate_expression
to evaluate a string in the context of the specified object. For example, a task runner can evaluate SQL queries stored in Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_evaluate_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_evaluate_expression(pipelineId, objectId, expression)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
objectId |
[required] The ID of the object. |
expression |
[required] The expression to evaluate. |
Gets the definition of the specified pipeline
Description
Gets the definition of the specified pipeline. You can call get_pipeline_definition
to retrieve the pipeline definition that you provided using put_pipeline_definition
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_get_pipeline_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_get_pipeline_definition(pipelineId, version = NULL)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
version |
The version of the pipeline definition to retrieve. Set this parameter
to |
Lists the pipeline identifiers for all active pipelines that you have permission to access
Description
Lists the pipeline identifiers for all active pipelines that you have permission to access.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_list_pipelines/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_list_pipelines(marker = NULL)
Arguments
marker |
The starting point for the results to be returned. For the first call,
this value should be empty. As long as there are more results, continue
to call |
Task runners call PollForTask to receive a task to perform from AWS Data Pipeline
Description
Task runners call poll_for_task
to receive a task to perform from AWS Data Pipeline. The task runner specifies which tasks it can perform by setting a value for the workerGroup
parameter. The task returned can come from any of the pipelines that match the workerGroup
value passed in by the task runner and that was launched using the IAM user credentials specified by the task runner.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_poll_for_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_poll_for_task(
workerGroup,
hostname = NULL,
instanceIdentity = NULL
)
Arguments
workerGroup |
[required] The type of task the task runner is configured to accept and process.
The worker group is set as a field on objects in the pipeline when they
are created. You can only specify a single value for |
hostname |
The public DNS name of the calling task runner. |
instanceIdentity |
Identity information for the EC2 instance that is hosting the task
runner. You can get this value from the instance using
|
Adds tasks, schedules, and preconditions to the specified pipeline
Description
Adds tasks, schedules, and preconditions to the specified pipeline. You can use put_pipeline_definition
to populate a new pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_put_pipeline_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_put_pipeline_definition(
pipelineId,
pipelineObjects,
parameterObjects = NULL,
parameterValues = NULL
)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
pipelineObjects |
[required] The objects that define the pipeline. These objects overwrite the existing pipeline definition. |
parameterObjects |
The parameter objects used with the pipeline. |
parameterValues |
The parameter values used with the pipeline. |
Queries the specified pipeline for the names of objects that match the specified set of conditions
Description
Queries the specified pipeline for the names of objects that match the specified set of conditions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_query_objects/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_query_objects(
pipelineId,
query = NULL,
sphere,
marker = NULL,
limit = NULL
)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
query |
The query that defines the objects to be returned. The |
sphere |
[required] Indicates whether the query applies to components or instances. The
possible values are: |
marker |
The starting point for the results to be returned. For the first call,
this value should be empty. As long as there are more results, continue
to call |
limit |
The maximum number of object names that
|
Removes existing tags from the specified pipeline
Description
Removes existing tags from the specified pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_remove_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_remove_tags(pipelineId, tagKeys)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
tagKeys |
[required] The keys of the tags to remove. |
Task runners call ReportTaskProgress when assigned a task to acknowledge that it has the task
Description
Task runners call report_task_progress
when assigned a task to acknowledge that it has the task. If the web service does not receive this acknowledgement within 2 minutes, it assigns the task in a subsequent poll_for_task
call. After this initial acknowledgement, the task runner only needs to report progress every 15 minutes to maintain its ownership of the task. You can change this reporting time from 15 minutes by specifying a reportProgressTimeout
field in your pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_report_task_progress/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_report_task_progress(taskId, fields = NULL)
Arguments
taskId |
[required] The ID of the task assigned to the task runner. This value is provided
in the response for |
fields |
Key-value pairs that define the properties of the ReportTaskProgressInput object. |
Task runners call ReportTaskRunnerHeartbeat every 15 minutes to indicate that they are operational
Description
Task runners call report_task_runner_heartbeat
every 15 minutes to indicate that they are operational. If the AWS Data Pipeline Task Runner is launched on a resource managed by AWS Data Pipeline, the web service can use this call to detect when the task runner application has failed and restart a new instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_report_task_runner_heartbeat/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_report_task_runner_heartbeat(
taskrunnerId,
workerGroup = NULL,
hostname = NULL
)
Arguments
taskrunnerId |
[required] The ID of the task runner. This value should be unique across your AWS account. In the case of AWS Data Pipeline Task Runner launched on a resource managed by AWS Data Pipeline, the web service provides a unique identifier when it launches the application. If you have written a custom task runner, you should assign a unique identifier for the task runner. |
workerGroup |
The type of task the task runner is configured to accept and process.
The worker group is set as a field on objects in the pipeline when they
are created. You can only specify a single value for |
hostname |
The public DNS name of the task runner. |
Requests that the status of the specified physical or logical pipeline objects be updated in the specified pipeline
Description
Requests that the status of the specified physical or logical pipeline objects be updated in the specified pipeline. This update might not occur immediately, but is eventually consistent. The status that can be set depends on the type of object (for example, DataNode or Activity). You cannot perform this operation on FINISHED
pipelines and attempting to do so returns InvalidRequestException
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_set_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_set_status(pipelineId, objectIds, status)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline that contains the objects. |
objectIds |
[required] The IDs of the objects. The corresponding objects can be either physical or components, but not a mix of both types. |
status |
[required] The status to be set on all the objects specified in |
Task runners call SetTaskStatus to notify AWS Data Pipeline that a task is completed and provide information about the final status
Description
Task runners call set_task_status
to notify AWS Data Pipeline that a task is completed and provide information about the final status. A task runner makes this call regardless of whether the task was sucessful. A task runner does not need to call set_task_status
for tasks that are canceled by the web service during a call to report_task_progress
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_set_task_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_set_task_status(
taskId,
taskStatus,
errorId = NULL,
errorMessage = NULL,
errorStackTrace = NULL
)
Arguments
taskId |
[required] The ID of the task assigned to the task runner. This value is provided
in the response for |
taskStatus |
[required] If |
errorId |
If an error occurred during the task, this value specifies the error code. This value is set on the physical attempt object. It is used to display error information to the user. It should not start with string "Service_" which is reserved by the system. |
errorMessage |
If an error occurred during the task, this value specifies a text description of the error. This value is set on the physical attempt object. It is used to display error information to the user. The web service does not parse this value. |
errorStackTrace |
If an error occurred during the task, this value specifies the stack trace associated with the error. This value is set on the physical attempt object. It is used to display error information to the user. The web service does not parse this value. |
Validates the specified pipeline definition to ensure that it is well formed and can be run without error
Description
Validates the specified pipeline definition to ensure that it is well formed and can be run without error.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datapipeline_validate_pipeline_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
datapipeline_validate_pipeline_definition(
pipelineId,
pipelineObjects,
parameterObjects = NULL,
parameterValues = NULL
)
Arguments
pipelineId |
[required] The ID of the pipeline. |
pipelineObjects |
[required] The objects that define the pipeline changes to validate against the pipeline. |
parameterObjects |
The parameter objects used with the pipeline. |
parameterValues |
The parameter values used with the pipeline. |
Amazon DataZone
Description
Amazon DataZone is a data management service that enables you to catalog, discover, govern, share, and analyze your data. With Amazon DataZone, you can share and access your data across accounts and supported regions. Amazon DataZone simplifies your experience across Amazon Web Services services, including, but not limited to, Amazon Redshift, Amazon Athena, Amazon Web Services Glue, and Amazon Web Services Lake Formation.
Usage
datazone(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- datazone( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_predictions | Accepts automatically generated business-friendly metadata for your Amazon DataZone assets |
accept_subscription_request | Accepts a subscription request to a specific asset |
add_entity_owner | Adds the owner of an entity (a domain unit) |
add_policy_grant | Adds a policy grant (an authorization policy) to a specified entity, including domain units, environment blueprint configurations, or environment profiles |
associate_environment_role | Associates the environment role in Amazon DataZone |
cancel_metadata_generation_run | Cancels the metadata generation run |
cancel_subscription | Cancels the subscription to the specified asset |
create_asset | Creates an asset in Amazon DataZone catalog |
create_asset_filter | Creates a data asset filter |
create_asset_revision | Creates a revision of the asset |
create_asset_type | Creates a custom asset type |
create_connection | Creates a new connection |
create_data_product | Creates a data product |
create_data_product_revision | Creates a data product revision |
create_data_source | Creates an Amazon DataZone data source |
create_domain | Creates an Amazon DataZone domain |
create_domain_unit | Creates a domain unit in Amazon DataZone |
create_environment | Create an Amazon DataZone environment |
create_environment_action | Creates an action for the environment, for example, creates a console link for an analytics tool that is available in this environment |
create_environment_profile | Creates an Amazon DataZone environment profile |
create_form_type | Creates a metadata form type |
create_glossary | Creates an Amazon DataZone business glossary |
create_glossary_term | Creates a business glossary term |
create_group_profile | Creates a group profile in Amazon DataZone |
create_listing_change_set | Publishes a listing (a record of an asset at a given time) or removes a listing from the catalog |
create_project | Creates an Amazon DataZone project |
create_project_membership | Creates a project membership in Amazon DataZone |
create_project_profile | Creates a project profile |
create_rule | Creates a rule in Amazon DataZone |
create_subscription_grant | Creates a subsscription grant in Amazon DataZone |
create_subscription_request | Creates a subscription request in Amazon DataZone |
create_subscription_target | Creates a subscription target in Amazon DataZone |
create_user_profile | Creates a user profile in Amazon DataZone |
delete_asset | Deletes an asset in Amazon DataZone |
delete_asset_filter | Deletes an asset filter |
delete_asset_type | Deletes an asset type in Amazon DataZone |
delete_connection | Deletes and connection |
delete_data_product | Deletes a data product in Amazon DataZone |
delete_data_source | Deletes a data source in Amazon DataZone |
delete_domain | Deletes a Amazon DataZone domain |
delete_domain_unit | Deletes a domain unit |
delete_environment | Deletes an environment in Amazon DataZone |
delete_environment_action | Deletes an action for the environment, for example, deletes a console link for an analytics tool that is available in this environment |
delete_environment_blueprint_configuration | Deletes the blueprint configuration in Amazon DataZone |
delete_environment_profile | Deletes an environment profile in Amazon DataZone |
delete_form_type | Delets and metadata form type in Amazon DataZone |
delete_glossary | Deletes a business glossary in Amazon DataZone |
delete_glossary_term | Deletes a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone |
delete_listing | Deletes a listing (a record of an asset at a given time) |
delete_project | Deletes a project in Amazon DataZone |
delete_project_membership | Deletes project membership in Amazon DataZone |
delete_project_profile | Deletes a project profile |
delete_rule | Deletes a rule in Amazon DataZone |
delete_subscription_grant | Deletes and subscription grant in Amazon DataZone |
delete_subscription_request | Deletes a subscription request in Amazon DataZone |
delete_subscription_target | Deletes a subscription target in Amazon DataZone |
delete_time_series_data_points | Deletes the specified time series form for the specified asset |
disassociate_environment_role | Disassociates the environment role in Amazon DataZone |
get_asset | Gets an Amazon DataZone asset |
get_asset_filter | Gets an asset filter |
get_asset_type | Gets an Amazon DataZone asset type |
get_connection | Gets a connection |
get_data_product | Gets the data product |
get_data_source | Gets an Amazon DataZone data source |
get_data_source_run | Gets an Amazon DataZone data source run |
get_domain | Gets an Amazon DataZone domain |
get_domain_unit | Gets the details of the specified domain unit |
get_environment | Gets an Amazon DataZone environment |
get_environment_action | Gets the specified environment action |
get_environment_blueprint | Gets an Amazon DataZone blueprint |
get_environment_blueprint_configuration | Gets the blueprint configuration in Amazon DataZone |
get_environment_credentials | Gets the credentials of an environment in Amazon DataZone |
get_environment_profile | Gets an evinronment profile in Amazon DataZone |
get_form_type | Gets a metadata form type in Amazon DataZone |
get_glossary | Gets a business glossary in Amazon DataZone |
get_glossary_term | Gets a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone |
get_group_profile | Gets a group profile in Amazon DataZone |
get_iam_portal_login_url | Gets the data portal URL for the specified Amazon DataZone domain |
get_job_run | The details of the job run |
get_lineage_event | Describes the lineage event |
get_lineage_node | Gets the data lineage node |
get_listing | Gets a listing (a record of an asset at a given time) |
get_metadata_generation_run | Gets a metadata generation run in Amazon DataZone |
get_project | Gets a project in Amazon DataZone |
get_project_profile | The details of the project profile |
get_rule | Gets the details of a rule in Amazon DataZone |
get_subscription | Gets a subscription in Amazon DataZone |
get_subscription_grant | Gets the subscription grant in Amazon DataZone |
get_subscription_request_details | Gets the details of the specified subscription request |
get_subscription_target | Gets the subscription target in Amazon DataZone |
get_time_series_data_point | Gets the existing data point for the asset |
get_user_profile | Gets a user profile in Amazon DataZone |
list_asset_filters | Lists asset filters |
list_asset_revisions | Lists the revisions for the asset |
list_connections | Lists connections |
list_data_product_revisions | Lists data product revisions |
list_data_source_run_activities | Lists data source run activities |
list_data_source_runs | Lists data source runs in Amazon DataZone |
list_data_sources | Lists data sources in Amazon DataZone |
list_domains | Lists Amazon DataZone domains |
list_domain_units_for_parent | Lists child domain units for the specified parent domain unit |
list_entity_owners | Lists the entity (domain units) owners |
list_environment_actions | Lists existing environment actions |
list_environment_blueprint_configurations | Lists blueprint configurations for a Amazon DataZone environment |
list_environment_blueprints | Lists blueprints in an Amazon DataZone environment |
list_environment_profiles | Lists Amazon DataZone environment profiles |
list_environments | Lists Amazon DataZone environments |
list_job_runs | Lists job runs |
list_lineage_events | Lists lineage events |
list_lineage_node_history | Lists the history of the specified data lineage node |
list_metadata_generation_runs | Lists all metadata generation runs |
list_notifications | Lists all Amazon DataZone notifications |
list_policy_grants | Lists policy grants |
list_project_memberships | Lists all members of the specified project |
list_project_profiles | Lists project profiles |
list_projects | Lists Amazon DataZone projects |
list_rules | Lists existing rules |
list_subscription_grants | Lists subscription grants |
list_subscription_requests | Lists Amazon DataZone subscription requests |
list_subscriptions | Lists subscriptions in Amazon DataZone |
list_subscription_targets | Lists subscription targets in Amazon DataZone |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists tags for the specified resource in Amazon DataZone |
list_time_series_data_points | Lists time series data points |
post_lineage_event | Posts a data lineage event |
post_time_series_data_points | Posts time series data points to Amazon DataZone for the specified asset |
put_environment_blueprint_configuration | Writes the configuration for the specified environment blueprint in Amazon DataZone |
reject_predictions | Rejects automatically generated business-friendly metadata for your Amazon DataZone assets |
reject_subscription_request | Rejects the specified subscription request |
remove_entity_owner | Removes an owner from an entity |
remove_policy_grant | Removes a policy grant |
revoke_subscription | Revokes a specified subscription in Amazon DataZone |
search | Searches for assets in Amazon DataZone |
search_group_profiles | Searches group profiles in Amazon DataZone |
search_listings | Searches listings (records of an asset at a given time) in Amazon DataZone |
search_types | Searches for types in Amazon DataZone |
search_user_profiles | Searches user profiles in Amazon DataZone |
start_data_source_run | Start the run of the specified data source in Amazon DataZone |
start_metadata_generation_run | Starts the metadata generation run |
tag_resource | Tags a resource in Amazon DataZone |
untag_resource | Untags a resource in Amazon DataZone |
update_asset_filter | Updates an asset filter |
update_connection | Updates a connection |
update_data_source | Updates the specified data source in Amazon DataZone |
update_domain | Updates a Amazon DataZone domain |
update_domain_unit | Updates the domain unit |
update_environment | Updates the specified environment in Amazon DataZone |
update_environment_action | Updates an environment action |
update_environment_profile | Updates the specified environment profile in Amazon DataZone |
update_glossary | Updates the business glossary in Amazon DataZone |
update_glossary_term | Updates a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone |
update_group_profile | Updates the specified group profile in Amazon DataZone |
update_project | Updates the specified project in Amazon DataZone |
update_project_profile | Updates a project profile |
update_rule | Updates a rule |
update_subscription_grant_status | Updates the status of the specified subscription grant status in Amazon DataZone |
update_subscription_request | Updates a specified subscription request in Amazon DataZone |
update_subscription_target | Updates the specified subscription target in Amazon DataZone |
update_user_profile | Updates the specified user profile in Amazon DataZone |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- datazone()
svc$accept_predictions(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Accepts automatically generated business-friendly metadata for your Amazon DataZone assets
Description
Accepts automatically generated business-friendly metadata for your Amazon DataZone assets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_accept_predictions/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_accept_predictions(
acceptChoices = NULL,
acceptRule = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
revision = NULL
)
Arguments
acceptChoices |
Specifies the prediction (aka, the automatically generated piece of metadata) and the target (for example, a column name) that can be accepted. |
acceptRule |
Specifies the rule (or the conditions) under which a prediction can be accepted. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. This field is automatically populated if not provided. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the asset. |
revision |
The revision that is to be made to the asset. |
Accepts a subscription request to a specific asset
Description
Accepts a subscription request to a specific asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_accept_subscription_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_accept_subscription_request(
assetScopes = NULL,
decisionComment = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier
)
Arguments
assetScopes |
The asset scopes of the accept subscription request. |
decisionComment |
A description that specifies the reason for accepting the specified subscription request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon DataZone domain where the specified subscription request is being accepted. |
identifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the subscription request that is to be accepted. |
Adds the owner of an entity (a domain unit)
Description
Adds the owner of an entity (a domain unit).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_add_entity_owner/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_add_entity_owner(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
owner
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which you want to add the entity owner. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the entity to which you want to add an owner. |
entityType |
[required] The type of an entity. |
owner |
[required] The owner that you want to add to the entity. |
Adds a policy grant (an authorization policy) to a specified entity, including domain units, environment blueprint configurations, or environment profiles
Description
Adds a policy grant (an authorization policy) to a specified entity, including domain units, environment blueprint configurations, or environment profiles.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_add_policy_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_add_policy_grant(
clientToken = NULL,
detail,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
policyType,
principal
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
detail |
[required] The details of the policy grant. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to add a policy grant. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the entity (resource) to which you want to add a policy grant. |
entityType |
[required] The type of entity (resource) to which the grant is added. |
policyType |
[required] The type of policy that you want to grant. |
principal |
[required] The principal to whom the permissions are granted. |
Associates the environment role in Amazon DataZone
Description
Associates the environment role in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_associate_environment_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_associate_environment_role(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
environmentRoleArn
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the environment role is associated. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone environment. |
environmentRoleArn |
[required] The ARN of the environment role. |
Cancels the metadata generation run
Description
Cancels the metadata generation run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_cancel_metadata_generation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_cancel_metadata_generation_run(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the metadata generation run is to be cancelled. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the metadata generation run. |
Cancels the subscription to the specified asset
Description
Cancels the subscription to the specified asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_cancel_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_cancel_subscription(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain where the subscription request is being cancelled. |
identifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the subscription that is being cancelled. |
Creates an asset in Amazon DataZone catalog
Description
Creates an asset in Amazon DataZone catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_asset/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_asset(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
externalIdentifier = NULL,
formsInput = NULL,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
name,
owningProjectIdentifier,
predictionConfiguration = NULL,
typeIdentifier,
typeRevision = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
Asset description. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] Amazon DataZone domain where the asset is created. |
externalIdentifier |
The external identifier of the asset. |
formsInput |
Metadata forms attached to the asset. |
glossaryTerms |
Glossary terms attached to the asset. |
name |
[required] Asset name. |
owningProjectIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the project that owns this asset. |
predictionConfiguration |
The configuration of the automatically generated business-friendly metadata for the asset. |
typeIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of this asset's type. |
typeRevision |
The revision of this asset's type. |
Creates a data asset filter
Description
Creates a data asset filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_asset_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_asset_filter(
assetIdentifier,
clientToken = NULL,
configuration,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
name
)
Arguments
assetIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the data asset. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
configuration |
[required] The configuration of the asset filter. |
description |
The description of the asset filter. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which you want to create an asset filter. |
name |
[required] The name of the asset filter. |
Creates a revision of the asset
Description
Creates a revision of the asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_asset_revision/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_asset_revision(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
formsInput = NULL,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
identifier,
name,
predictionConfiguration = NULL,
typeRevision = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The revised description of the asset. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the domain where the asset is being revised. |
formsInput |
The metadata forms to be attached to the asset as part of asset revision. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms to be attached to the asset as part of asset revision. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the asset. |
name |
[required] Te revised name of the asset. |
predictionConfiguration |
The configuration of the automatically generated business-friendly metadata for the asset. |
typeRevision |
The revision type of the asset. |
Creates a custom asset type
Description
Creates a custom asset type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_asset_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_asset_type(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
formsInput,
name,
owningProjectIdentifier
)
Arguments
description |
The descripton of the custom asset type. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain where the custom asset type is being created. |
formsInput |
[required] The metadata forms that are to be attached to the custom asset type. |
name |
[required] The name of the custom asset type. |
owningProjectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone project that is to own the custom asset type. |
Creates a new connection
Description
Creates a new connection. In Amazon DataZone, a connection enables you to connect your resources (domains, projects, and environments) to external resources and services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_connection(
awsLocation = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
name,
props = NULL
)
Arguments
awsLocation |
The location where the connection is created. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
A connection description. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the connection is created. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment where the connection is created. |
name |
[required] The connection name. |
props |
The connection props. |
Creates a data product
Description
Creates a data product.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_data_product/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_data_product(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
formsInput = NULL,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
items = NULL,
name,
owningProjectIdentifier
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description of the data product. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the data product is created. |
formsInput |
The metadata forms of the data product. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms of the data product. |
items |
The data assets of the data product. |
name |
[required] The name of the data product. |
owningProjectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the owning project of the data product. |
Creates a data product revision
Description
Creates a data product revision.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_data_product_revision/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_data_product_revision(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
formsInput = NULL,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
identifier,
items = NULL,
name
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description of the data product revision. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the data product revision is created. |
formsInput |
The metadata forms of the data product revision. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms of the data product revision. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data product revision. |
items |
The data assets of the data product revision. |
name |
[required] The name of the data product revision. |
Creates an Amazon DataZone data source
Description
Creates an Amazon DataZone data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_data_source(
assetFormsInput = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
configuration = NULL,
connectionIdentifier = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
enableSetting = NULL,
environmentIdentifier = NULL,
name,
projectIdentifier,
publishOnImport = NULL,
recommendation = NULL,
schedule = NULL,
type
)
Arguments
assetFormsInput |
The metadata forms that are to be attached to the assets that this data source works with. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
configuration |
Specifies the configuration of the data source. It can be set to either
|
connectionIdentifier |
The ID of the connection. |
description |
The description of the data source. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where the data source is created. |
enableSetting |
Specifies whether the data source is enabled. |
environmentIdentifier |
The unique identifier of the Amazon DataZone environment to which the data source publishes assets. |
name |
[required] The name of the data source. |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone project in which you want to add this data source. |
publishOnImport |
Specifies whether the assets that this data source creates in the inventory are to be also automatically published to the catalog. |
recommendation |
Specifies whether the business name generation is to be enabled for this data source. |
schedule |
The schedule of the data source runs. |
type |
[required] The type of the data source. |
Creates an Amazon DataZone domain
Description
Creates an Amazon DataZone domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_domain(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainExecutionRole,
domainVersion = NULL,
kmsKeyIdentifier = NULL,
name,
serviceRole = NULL,
singleSignOn = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
domainExecutionRole |
[required] The domain execution role that is created when an Amazon DataZone domain is created. The domain execution role is created in the Amazon Web Services account that houses the Amazon DataZone domain. |
domainVersion |
The version of the domain that is created. |
kmsKeyIdentifier |
The identifier of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (KMS) key that is used to encrypt the Amazon DataZone domain, metadata, and reporting data. |
name |
[required] The name of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
serviceRole |
The service role of the domain that is created. |
singleSignOn |
The single-sign on configuration of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
tags |
The tags specified for the Amazon DataZone domain. |
Creates a domain unit in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a domain unit in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_domain_unit/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_domain_unit(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
name,
parentDomainUnitIdentifier
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description of the domain unit. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to crate a domain unit. |
name |
[required] The name of the domain unit. |
parentDomainUnitIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the parent domain unit. |
Create an Amazon DataZone environment
Description
Create an Amazon DataZone environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_environment/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_environment(
deploymentOrder = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentAccountIdentifier = NULL,
environmentAccountRegion = NULL,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier = NULL,
environmentConfigurationId = NULL,
environmentProfileIdentifier,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
name,
projectIdentifier,
userParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
deploymentOrder |
The deployment order of the environment. |
description |
The description of the Amazon DataZone environment. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the environment is created. |
environmentAccountIdentifier |
The ID of the account in which the environment is being created. |
environmentAccountRegion |
The region of the account in which the environment is being created. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
The ID of the blueprint with which the environment is being created. |
environmentConfigurationId |
The configuration ID of the environment. |
environmentProfileIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment profile that is used to create this Amazon DataZone environment. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms that can be used in this Amazon DataZone environment. |
name |
[required] The name of the Amazon DataZone environment. |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone project in which this environment is created. |
userParameters |
The user parameters of this Amazon DataZone environment. |
Creates an action for the environment, for example, creates a console link for an analytics tool that is available in this environment
Description
Creates an action for the environment, for example, creates a console link for an analytics tool that is available in this environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_environment_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_environment_action(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
name,
parameters
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the environment action that is being created in the environment. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the environment action is created. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment in which the environment action is created. |
name |
[required] The name of the environment action. |
parameters |
[required] The parameters of the environment action. |
Creates an Amazon DataZone environment profile
Description
Creates an Amazon DataZone environment profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_environment_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_environment_profile(
awsAccountId = NULL,
awsAccountRegion = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier,
name,
projectIdentifier,
userParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
awsAccountId |
The Amazon Web Services account in which the Amazon DataZone environment is created. |
awsAccountRegion |
The Amazon Web Services region in which this environment profile is created. |
description |
The description of this Amazon DataZone environment profile. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this environment profile is created. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the blueprint with which this environment profile is created. |
name |
[required] The name of this Amazon DataZone environment profile. |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the project in which to create the environment profile. |
userParameters |
The user parameters of this Amazon DataZone environment profile. |
Creates a metadata form type
Description
Creates a metadata form type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_form_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_form_type(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
model,
name,
owningProjectIdentifier,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of this Amazon DataZone metadata form type. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this metadata form type is created. |
model |
[required] The model of this Amazon DataZone metadata form type. |
name |
[required] The name of this Amazon DataZone metadata form type. |
owningProjectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone project that owns this metadata form type. |
status |
The status of this Amazon DataZone metadata form type. |
Creates an Amazon DataZone business glossary
Description
Creates an Amazon DataZone business glossary.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_glossary/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_glossary(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
name,
owningProjectIdentifier,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description of this business glossary. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this business glossary is created. |
name |
[required] The name of this business glossary. |
owningProjectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the project that currently owns business glossary. |
status |
The status of this business glossary. |
Creates a business glossary term
Description
Creates a business glossary term.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_glossary_term/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_glossary_term(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
glossaryIdentifier,
longDescription = NULL,
name,
shortDescription = NULL,
status = NULL,
termRelations = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this business glossary term is created. |
glossaryIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the business glossary in which this term is created. |
longDescription |
The long description of this business glossary term. |
name |
[required] The name of this business glossary term. |
shortDescription |
The short description of this business glossary term. |
status |
The status of this business glossary term. |
termRelations |
The term relations of this business glossary term. |
Creates a group profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a group profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_group_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_group_profile(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
groupIdentifier
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the group profile is created. |
groupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the group for which the group profile is created. |
Publishes a listing (a record of an asset at a given time) or removes a listing from the catalog
Description
Publishes a listing (a record of an asset at a given time) or removes a listing from the catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_listing_change_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_listing_change_set(
action,
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityRevision = NULL,
entityType
)
Arguments
action |
[required] Specifies whether to publish or unpublish a listing. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the asset. |
entityRevision |
The revision of an asset. |
entityType |
[required] The type of an entity. |
Creates an Amazon DataZone project
Description
Creates an Amazon DataZone project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_project(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
domainUnitId = NULL,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
name,
projectProfileId = NULL,
userParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the Amazon DataZone project. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this project is created. |
domainUnitId |
The ID of the domain unit. This parameter is not required and if it is not specified, then the project is created at the root domain unit level. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms that can be used in this Amazon DataZone project. |
name |
[required] The name of the Amazon DataZone project. |
projectProfileId |
The ID of the project profile. |
userParameters |
The user parameters of the project. |
Creates a project membership in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a project membership in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_project_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_project_membership(
designation,
domainIdentifier,
member,
projectIdentifier
)
Arguments
designation |
[required] The designation of the project membership. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which project membership is created. |
member |
[required] The project member whose project membership was created. |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the project for which this project membership was created. |
Creates a project profile
Description
Creates a project profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_project_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_project_profile(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
domainUnitIdentifier = NULL,
environmentConfigurations = NULL,
name,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
A description of a project profile. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] A domain ID of the project profile. |
domainUnitIdentifier |
A domain unit ID of the project profile. |
environmentConfigurations |
Environment configurations of the project profile. |
name |
[required] Project profile name. |
status |
Project profile status. |
Creates a rule in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a rule in Amazon DataZone. A rule is a formal agreement that enforces specific requirements across user workflows (e.g., publishing assets to the catalog, requesting subscriptions, creating projects) within the Amazon DataZone data portal. These rules help maintain consistency, ensure compliance, and uphold governance standards in data management processes. For instance, a metadata enforcement rule can specify the required information for creating a subscription request or publishing a data asset to the catalog, ensuring alignment with organizational standards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_rule(
action,
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
detail,
domainIdentifier,
name,
scope,
target
)
Arguments
action |
[required] The action of the rule. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description of the rule. |
detail |
[required] The detail of the rule. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the rule is created. |
name |
[required] The name of the rule. |
scope |
[required] The scope of the rule. |
target |
[required] The target of the rule. |
Creates a subsscription grant in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a subsscription grant in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_subscription_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_subscription_grant(
assetTargetNames = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
grantedEntity,
subscriptionTargetIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
assetTargetNames |
The names of the assets for which the subscription grant is created. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription grant is created. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment in which the subscription grant is created. |
grantedEntity |
[required] The entity to which the subscription is to be granted. |
subscriptionTargetIdentifier |
The ID of the subscription target for which the subscription grant is created. |
Creates a subscription request in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a subscription request in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_subscription_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_subscription_request(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
metadataForms = NULL,
requestReason,
subscribedListings,
subscribedPrincipals
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription request is created. |
metadataForms |
The metadata form included in the subscription request. |
requestReason |
[required] The reason for the subscription request. |
subscribedListings |
[required] The published asset for which the subscription grant is to be created. |
subscribedPrincipals |
[required] The Amazon DataZone principals for whom the subscription request is created. |
Creates a subscription target in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a subscription target in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_subscription_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_subscription_target(
applicableAssetTypes,
authorizedPrincipals,
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
manageAccessRole,
name,
provider = NULL,
subscriptionTargetConfig,
type
)
Arguments
applicableAssetTypes |
[required] The asset types that can be included in the subscription target. |
authorizedPrincipals |
[required] The authorized principals of the subscription target. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which subscription target is created. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment in which subscription target is created. |
manageAccessRole |
[required] The manage access role that is used to create the subscription target. |
name |
[required] The name of the subscription target. |
provider |
The provider of the subscription target. |
subscriptionTargetConfig |
[required] The configuration of the subscription target. |
type |
[required] The type of the subscription target. |
Creates a user profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Creates a user profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_create_user_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_create_user_profile(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
userIdentifier,
userType = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a user profile is created. |
userIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the user for which the user profile is created. |
userType |
The user type of the user for which the user profile is created. |
Deletes an asset in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes an asset in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_asset/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_asset(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the asset is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the asset that is deleted. |
Deletes an asset filter
Description
Deletes an asset filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_asset_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_asset_filter(assetIdentifier, domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
assetIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the data asset. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to delete an asset filter. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the asset filter that you want to delete. |
Deletes an asset type in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes an asset type in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_asset_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_asset_type(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the asset type is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the asset type that is deleted. |
Deletes and connection
Description
Deletes and connection. In Amazon DataZone, a connection enables you to connect your resources (domains, projects, and environments) to external resources and services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_connection(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the connection is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the connection that is deleted. |
Deletes a data product in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a data product in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_data_product/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_data_product(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the data product is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the data product that is deleted. |
Deletes a data source in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a data source in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_data_source(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
retainPermissionsOnRevokeFailure = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the data source is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the data source that is deleted. |
retainPermissionsOnRevokeFailure |
Specifies that the granted permissions are retained in case of a self-subscribe functionality failure for a data source. |
Deletes a Amazon DataZone domain
Description
Deletes a Amazon DataZone domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_domain(
clientToken = NULL,
identifier,
skipDeletionCheck = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services domain that is to be deleted. |
skipDeletionCheck |
Specifies the optional flag to delete all child entities within the domain. |
Deletes a domain unit
Description
Deletes a domain unit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_domain_unit/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_domain_unit(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to delete a domain unit. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the domain unit that you want to delete. |
Deletes an environment in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes an environment in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_environment/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_environment(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the environment is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment that is to be deleted. |
Deletes an action for the environment, for example, deletes a console link for an analytics tool that is available in this environment
Description
Deletes an action for the environment, for example, deletes a console link for an analytics tool that is available in this environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_environment_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_environment_action(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
identifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which an environment action is deleted. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment where an environment action is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the environment action that is deleted. |
Deletes the blueprint configuration in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes the blueprint configuration in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_environment_blueprint_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_environment_blueprint_configuration(
domainIdentifier,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the blueprint configuration is deleted. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the blueprint the configuration of which is deleted. |
Deletes an environment profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes an environment profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_environment_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_environment_profile(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the environment profile is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the environment profile that is deleted. |
Delets and metadata form type in Amazon DataZone
Description
Delets and metadata form type in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_form_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_form_type(domainIdentifier, formTypeIdentifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the metadata form type is deleted. |
formTypeIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the metadata form type that is deleted. |
Deletes a business glossary in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a business glossary in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_glossary/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_glossary(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the business glossary is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the business glossary that is deleted. |
Deletes a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_glossary_term/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_glossary_term(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the business glossary term is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the business glossary term that is deleted. |
Deletes a listing (a record of an asset at a given time)
Description
Deletes a listing (a record of an asset at a given time).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_listing/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_listing(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the listing to be deleted. |
Deletes a project in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a project in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_project(domainIdentifier, identifier, skipDeletionCheck = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the project is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the project that is to be deleted. |
skipDeletionCheck |
Specifies the optional flag to delete all child entities within the project. |
Deletes project membership in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes project membership in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_project_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_project_membership(domainIdentifier, member, projectIdentifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where project membership is deleted. |
member |
[required] The project member whose project membership is deleted. |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone project the membership to which is deleted. |
Deletes a project profile
Description
Deletes a project profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_project_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_project_profile(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where a project profile is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the project profile that is deleted. |
Deletes a rule in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a rule in Amazon DataZone. A rule is a formal agreement that enforces specific requirements across user workflows (e.g., publishing assets to the catalog, requesting subscriptions, creating projects) within the Amazon DataZone data portal. These rules help maintain consistency, ensure compliance, and uphold governance standards in data management processes. For instance, a metadata enforcement rule can specify the required information for creating a subscription request or publishing a data asset to the catalog, ensuring alignment with organizational standards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_rule(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain that where the rule is to be deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the rule that is to be deleted. |
Deletes and subscription grant in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes and subscription grant in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_subscription_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_subscription_grant(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where the subscription grant is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the subscription grant that is deleted. |
Deletes a subscription request in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a subscription request in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_subscription_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_subscription_request(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription request is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the subscription request that is deleted. |
Deletes a subscription target in Amazon DataZone
Description
Deletes a subscription target in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_subscription_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_subscription_target(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
identifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription target is deleted. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone environment in which the subscription target is deleted. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the subscription target that is deleted. |
Deletes the specified time series form for the specified asset
Description
Deletes the specified time series form for the specified asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_delete_time_series_data_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_delete_time_series_data_points(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
formName
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. This field is automatically populated if not provided. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain that houses the asset for which you want to delete a time series form. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the asset for which you want to delete a time series form. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the asset for which you want to delete a time series form. |
formName |
[required] The name of the time series form that you want to delete. |
Disassociates the environment role in Amazon DataZone
Description
Disassociates the environment role in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_disassociate_environment_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_disassociate_environment_role(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
environmentRoleArn
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which an environment role is disassociated. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment. |
environmentRoleArn |
[required] The ARN of the environment role. |
Gets an Amazon DataZone asset
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_asset/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_asset(domainIdentifier, identifier, revision = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain to which the asset belongs. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone asset. |
revision |
The revision of the Amazon DataZone asset. |
Gets an asset filter
Description
Gets an asset filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_asset_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_asset_filter(assetIdentifier, domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
assetIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the data asset. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to get an asset filter. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the asset filter. |
Gets an Amazon DataZone asset type
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone asset type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_asset_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_asset_type(domainIdentifier, identifier, revision = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the asset type exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the asset type. |
revision |
The revision of the asset type. |
Gets a connection
Description
Gets a connection. In Amazon DataZone, a connection enables you to connect your resources (domains, projects, and environments) to external resources and services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_connection(domainIdentifier, identifier, withSecret = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where we get the connection. |
identifier |
[required] The connection ID. |
withSecret |
Specifies whether a connection has a secret. |
Gets the data product
Description
Gets the data product.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_data_product/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_data_product(domainIdentifier, identifier, revision = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the data product lives. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data product. |
revision |
The revision of the data product. |
Gets an Amazon DataZone data source
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_data_source(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the data source exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone data source. |
Gets an Amazon DataZone data source run
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone data source run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_data_source_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_data_source_run(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which this data source run was performed. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data source run. |
Gets an Amazon DataZone domain
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_domain(identifier)
Arguments
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the specified Amazon DataZone domain. |
Gets the details of the specified domain unit
Description
Gets the details of the specified domain unit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_domain_unit/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_domain_unit(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to get a domain unit. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the domain unit that you want to get. |
Gets an Amazon DataZone environment
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_environment/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_environment(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where the environment exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone environment. |
Gets the specified environment action
Description
Gets the specified environment action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_environment_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_environment_action(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
identifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the
|
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The environment ID of the environment action. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the environment action |
Gets an Amazon DataZone blueprint
Description
Gets an Amazon DataZone blueprint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_environment_blueprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_environment_blueprint(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the domain in which this blueprint exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of this Amazon DataZone blueprint. |
Gets the blueprint configuration in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets the blueprint configuration in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_environment_blueprint_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_environment_blueprint_configuration(
domainIdentifier,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where this blueprint exists. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
[required] He ID of the blueprint. |
Gets the credentials of an environment in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets the credentials of an environment in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_environment_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_environment_credentials(domainIdentifier, environmentIdentifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this environment and its credentials exist. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment whose credentials this operation gets. |
Gets an evinronment profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets an evinronment profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_environment_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_environment_profile(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this environment profile exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the environment profile. |
Gets a metadata form type in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a metadata form type in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_form_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_form_type(domainIdentifier, formTypeIdentifier, revision = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this metadata form type exists. |
formTypeIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the metadata form type. |
revision |
The revision of this metadata form type. |
Gets a business glossary in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a business glossary in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_glossary/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_glossary(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this business glossary exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the business glossary. |
Gets a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_glossary_term/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_glossary_term(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which this business glossary term exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the business glossary term. |
Gets a group profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a group profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_group_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_group_profile(domainIdentifier, groupIdentifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the group profile exists. |
groupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the group profile. |
Gets the data portal URL for the specified Amazon DataZone domain
Description
Gets the data portal URL for the specified Amazon DataZone domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_iam_portal_login_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_iam_portal_login_url(domainIdentifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] the ID of the Amazon DataZone domain the data portal of which you want to get. |
The details of the job run
Description
The details of the job run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_job_run(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the job run. |
Describes the lineage event
Description
Describes the lineage event.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_lineage_event/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_lineage_event(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the lineage event. |
Gets the data lineage node
Description
Gets the data lineage node.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_lineage_node/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_lineage_node(domainIdentifier, eventTimestamp = NULL, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which you want to get the data lineage node. |
eventTimestamp |
The event time stamp for which you want to get the data lineage node. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data lineage node that you want to get. Both, a lineage node identifier generated by Amazon DataZone and a
|
Gets a listing (a record of an asset at a given time)
Description
Gets a listing (a record of an asset at a given time). If you specify a listing version, only details that are specific to that version are returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_listing/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_listing(domainIdentifier, identifier, listingRevision = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the listing. |
listingRevision |
The revision of the listing. |
Gets a metadata generation run in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a metadata generation run in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_metadata_generation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_metadata_generation_run(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain the metadata generation run of which you want to get. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the metadata generation run. |
Gets a project in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a project in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_project(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the project exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the project. |
The details of the project profile
Description
The details of the project profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_project_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_project_profile(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the project profile. |
Gets the details of a rule in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets the details of a rule in Amazon DataZone. A rule is a formal agreement that enforces specific requirements across user workflows (e.g., publishing assets to the catalog, requesting subscriptions, creating projects) within the Amazon DataZone data portal. These rules help maintain consistency, ensure compliance, and uphold governance standards in data management processes. For instance, a metadata enforcement rule can specify the required information for creating a subscription request or publishing a data asset to the catalog, ensuring alignment with organizational standards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_rule(domainIdentifier, identifier, revision = NULL)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where the |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the rule. |
revision |
The revision of the rule. |
Gets a subscription in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a subscription in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_subscription(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the subscription. |
Gets the subscription grant in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets the subscription grant in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_subscription_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_subscription_grant(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription grant exists. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the subscription grant. |
Gets the details of the specified subscription request
Description
Gets the details of the specified subscription request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_subscription_request_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_subscription_request_details(domainIdentifier, identifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which to get the subscription request details. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the subscription request the details of which to get. |
Gets the subscription target in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets the subscription target in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_subscription_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_subscription_target(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
identifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription target exists. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the environment associated with the subscription target. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the subscription target. |
Gets the existing data point for the asset
Description
Gets the existing data point for the asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_time_series_data_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_time_series_data_point(
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
formName,
identifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain that houses the asset for which you want to get the data point. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the asset for which you want to get the data point. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the asset for which you want to get the data point. |
formName |
[required] The name of the time series form that houses the data point that you want to get. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data point that you want to get. |
Gets a user profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Gets a user profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_get_user_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_get_user_profile(domainIdentifier, type = NULL, userIdentifier)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] the ID of the Amazon DataZone domain the data portal of which you want to get. |
type |
The type of the user profile. |
userIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the user for which you want to get the user profile. |
Lists asset filters
Description
Lists asset filters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_asset_filters/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_asset_filters(
assetIdentifier,
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
assetIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the data asset. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list asset filters. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of asset filters to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of asset filters is greater than the default value for
the |
status |
The status of the asset filter. |
Lists the revisions for the asset
Description
Lists the revisions for the asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_asset_revisions/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_asset_revisions(
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the domain. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the asset. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of revisions to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of revisions is greater than the default value for the
|
Lists connections
Description
Lists connections. In Amazon DataZone, a connection enables you to connect your resources (domains, projects, and environments) to external resources and services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_connections(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
projectIdentifier,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
type = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list connections. |
environmentIdentifier |
The ID of the environment where you want to list connections. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of connections to return in a single call to ListConnections. When the number of connections to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListConnections to list the next set of connections. |
name |
The name of the connection. |
nextToken |
When the number of connections is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of connections, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListConnections to list the next set of connections. |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the project where you want to list connections. |
sortBy |
Specifies how you want to sort the listed connections. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the sort order for the listed connections. |
type |
The type of connection. |
Lists data product revisions
Description
Lists data product revisions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_data_product_revisions/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_data_product_revisions(
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain of the data product revisions that you want to list. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data product revision. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of asset filters to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of data product revisions is greater than the default
value for the |
Lists data source run activities
Description
Lists data source run activities.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_data_source_run_activities/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_data_source_run_activities(
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which to list data source run activities. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the data source run. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of activities to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of activities is greater than the default value for the
|
status |
The status of the data source run. |
Lists data source runs in Amazon DataZone
Description
Lists data source runs in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_data_source_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_data_source_runs(
dataSourceIdentifier,
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
dataSourceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the data source. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which to invoke the
|
maxResults |
The maximum number of runs to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of runs is greater than the default value for the
|
status |
The status of the data source. |
Lists data sources in Amazon DataZone
Description
Lists data sources in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_data_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_data_sources(
connectionIdentifier = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
projectIdentifier,
status = NULL,
type = NULL
)
Arguments
connectionIdentifier |
The ID of the connection. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which to list the data sources. |
environmentIdentifier |
The identifier of the environment in which to list the data sources. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of data sources to return in a single call to
|
name |
The name of the data source. |
nextToken |
When the number of data sources is greater than the default value for
the |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the project in which to list data sources. |
status |
The status of the data source. |
type |
The type of the data source. |
Lists child domain units for the specified parent domain unit
Description
Lists child domain units for the specified parent domain unit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_domain_units_for_parent/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_domain_units_for_parent(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
parentDomainUnitIdentifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which you want to list domain units for a parent domain unit. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of domain units to return in a single call to ListDomainUnitsForParent. When the number of domain units to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListDomainUnitsForParent to list the next set of domain units. |
nextToken |
When the number of domain units is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of domain units, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListDomainUnitsForParent to list the next set of domain units. |
parentDomainUnitIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the parent domain unit. |
Lists Amazon DataZone domains
Description
Lists Amazon DataZone domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_domains/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_domains(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL, status = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of domains to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of domains is greater than the default value for the
|
status |
The status of the data source. |
Lists the entity (domain units) owners
Description
Lists the entity (domain units) owners.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_entity_owners/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_entity_owners(
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list entity owners. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the entity that you want to list. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the entity that you want to list. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of entities to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of entities is greater than the default value for the
|
Lists existing environment actions
Description
Lists existing environment actions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_environment_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_environment_actions(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the environment actions are listed. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the envrironment whose environment actions are listed. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of environment actions to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of environment actions is greater than the default value
for the |
Lists blueprint configurations for a Amazon DataZone environment
Description
Lists blueprint configurations for a Amazon DataZone environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_environment_blueprint_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_environment_blueprint_configurations(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of blueprint configurations to return in a single
call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of blueprint configurations is greater than the default
value for the |
Lists blueprints in an Amazon DataZone environment
Description
Lists blueprints in an Amazon DataZone environment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_environment_blueprints/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_environment_blueprints(
domainIdentifier,
managed = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
managed |
Specifies whether the environment blueprint is managed by Amazon DataZone. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of blueprints to return in a single call to
|
name |
The name of the Amazon DataZone environment. |
nextToken |
When the number of blueprints in the environment is greater than the
default value for the |
Lists Amazon DataZone environment profiles
Description
Lists Amazon DataZone environment profiles.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_environment_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_environment_profiles(
awsAccountId = NULL,
awsAccountRegion = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
projectIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
awsAccountId |
The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account where you want to list environment profiles. |
awsAccountRegion |
The Amazon Web Services region where you want to list environment profiles. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
The identifier of the blueprint that was used to create the environment profiles that you want to list. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of environment profiles to return in a single call to
|
name |
|
nextToken |
When the number of environment profiles is greater than the default
value for the |
projectIdentifier |
The identifier of the Amazon DataZone project. |
Lists Amazon DataZone environments
Description
Lists Amazon DataZone environments.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_environments/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_environments(
awsAccountId = NULL,
awsAccountRegion = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier = NULL,
environmentProfileIdentifier = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
projectIdentifier,
provider = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
awsAccountId |
The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account where you want to list environments. |
awsAccountRegion |
The Amazon Web Services region where you want to list environments. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
The identifier of the Amazon DataZone blueprint. |
environmentProfileIdentifier |
The identifier of the environment profile. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of environments to return in a single call to
|
name |
The name of the environment. |
nextToken |
When the number of environments is greater than the default value for
the |
projectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone project. |
provider |
The provider of the environment. |
status |
The status of the environments that you want to list. |
Lists job runs
Description
Lists job runs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_job_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_job_runs(
domainIdentifier,
jobIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list job runs. |
jobIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the job run. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of job runs to return in a single call to ListJobRuns. When the number of job runs to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListJobRuns to list the next set of job runs. |
nextToken |
When the number of job runs is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of job runs, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListJobRuns to list the next set of job runs. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the order in which job runs are to be sorted. |
status |
The status of a job run. |
Lists lineage events
Description
Lists lineage events.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_lineage_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_lineage_events(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
processingStatus = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
timestampAfter = NULL,
timestampBefore = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list lineage events. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of lineage events to return in a single call to ListLineageEvents. When the number of lineage events to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListLineageEvents to list the next set of lineage events. |
nextToken |
When the number of lineage events is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of lineage events, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListLineageEvents to list the next set of lineage events. |
processingStatus |
The processing status of a lineage event. |
sortOrder |
The sort order of the lineage events. |
timestampAfter |
The after timestamp of a lineage event. |
timestampBefore |
The before timestamp of a lineage event. |
Lists the history of the specified data lineage node
Description
Lists the history of the specified data lineage node.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_lineage_node_history/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_lineage_node_history(
direction = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
eventTimestampGTE = NULL,
eventTimestampLTE = NULL,
identifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
direction |
The direction of the data lineage node refers to the lineage node having
neighbors in that direction. For example, if direction is |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list the history of the specified data lineage node. |
eventTimestampGTE |
Specifies whether the action is to return data lineage node history from the time after the event timestamp. |
eventTimestampLTE |
Specifies whether the action is to return data lineage node history from the time prior of the event timestamp. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the data lineage node whose history you want to list. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of history items to return in a single call to ListLineageNodeHistory. When the number of memberships to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListLineageNodeHistory to list the next set of items. |
nextToken |
When the number of history items is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of items, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListLineageNodeHistory to list the next set of items. |
sortOrder |
The order by which you want data lineage node history to be sorted. |
Lists all metadata generation runs
Description
Lists all metadata generation runs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_metadata_generation_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_metadata_generation_runs(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
status = NULL,
type = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where you want to list metadata generation runs. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of metadata generation runs to return in a single call to ListMetadataGenerationRuns. When the number of metadata generation runs to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListMetadataGenerationRuns to list the next set of revisions. |
nextToken |
When the number of metadata generation runs is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of metadata generation runs, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListMetadataGenerationRuns to list the next set of revisions. |
status |
The status of the metadata generation runs. |
type |
The type of the metadata generation runs. |
Lists all Amazon DataZone notifications
Description
Lists all Amazon DataZone notifications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_notifications(
afterTimestamp = NULL,
beforeTimestamp = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
subjects = NULL,
taskStatus = NULL,
type
)
Arguments
afterTimestamp |
The time after which you want to list notifications. |
beforeTimestamp |
The time before which you want to list notifications. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of notifications to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of notifications is greater than the default value for
the |
subjects |
The subjects of notifications. |
taskStatus |
The task status of notifications. |
type |
[required] The type of notifications. |
Lists policy grants
Description
Lists policy grants.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_policy_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_policy_grants(
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
policyType
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list policy grants. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the entity for which you want to list policy grants. |
entityType |
[required] The type of entity for which you want to list policy grants. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of grants to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of grants is greater than the default value for the
|
policyType |
[required] The type of policy that you want to list. |
Lists all members of the specified project
Description
Lists all members of the specified project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_project_memberships/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_project_memberships(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
projectIdentifier,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which you want to list project memberships. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of memberships to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of memberships is greater than the default value for the
|
projectIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the project whose memberships you want to list. |
sortBy |
The method by which you want to sort the project memberships. |
sortOrder |
The sort order of the project memberships. |
Lists project profiles
Description
Lists project profiles.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_project_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_project_profiles(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to list project profiles. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of project profiles to return in a single call to ListProjectProfiles. When the number of project profiles to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListProjectProfiles to list the next set of project profiles. |
name |
The name of a project profile. |
nextToken |
When the number of project profiles is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of project profiles, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListProjectProfiles to list the next set of project profiles. |
sortBy |
Specifies by what to sort project profiles. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the sort order of the project profiles. |
Lists Amazon DataZone projects
Description
Lists Amazon DataZone projects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_projects/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_projects(
domainIdentifier,
groupIdentifier = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
name = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
userIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
groupIdentifier |
The identifier of a group. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of projects to return in a single call to
|
name |
The name of the project. |
nextToken |
When the number of projects is greater than the default value for the
|
userIdentifier |
The identifier of the Amazon DataZone user. |
Lists existing rules
Description
Lists existing rules. In Amazon DataZone, a rule is a formal agreement that enforces specific requirements across user workflows (e.g., publishing assets to the catalog, requesting subscriptions, creating projects) within the Amazon DataZone data portal. These rules help maintain consistency, ensure compliance, and uphold governance standards in data management processes. For instance, a metadata enforcement rule can specify the required information for creating a subscription request or publishing a data asset to the catalog, ensuring alignment with organizational standards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_rules(
action = NULL,
assetTypes = NULL,
dataProduct = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
includeCascaded = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
projectIds = NULL,
ruleType = NULL,
targetIdentifier,
targetType
)
Arguments
action |
The action of the rule. |
assetTypes |
The asset types of the rule. |
dataProduct |
The data product of the rule. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which the rules are to be listed. |
includeCascaded |
Specifies whether to include cascading rules in the results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of rules to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of rules is greater than the default value for the
|
projectIds |
The IDs of projects in which rules are to be listed. |
ruleType |
The type of the rule. |
targetIdentifier |
[required] The target ID of the rule. |
targetType |
[required] The target type of the rule. |
Lists subscription grants
Description
Lists subscription grants.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_subscription_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_subscription_grants(
domainIdentifier,
environmentId = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
owningProjectId = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
subscribedListingId = NULL,
subscriptionId = NULL,
subscriptionTargetId = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
environmentId |
The identifier of the Amazon DataZone environment. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of subscription grants to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of subscription grants is greater than the default value
for the |
owningProjectId |
The ID of the owning project of the subscription grants. |
sortBy |
Specifies the way of sorting the results of this action. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the sort order of this action. |
subscribedListingId |
The identifier of the subscribed listing. |
subscriptionId |
The identifier of the subscription. |
subscriptionTargetId |
The identifier of the subscription target. |
Lists Amazon DataZone subscription requests
Description
Lists Amazon DataZone subscription requests.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_subscription_requests/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_subscription_requests(
approverProjectId = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
owningProjectId = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
status = NULL,
subscribedListingId = NULL
)
Arguments
approverProjectId |
The identifier of the subscription request approver's project. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of subscription requests to return in a single call
to |
nextToken |
When the number of subscription requests is greater than the default
value for the |
owningProjectId |
The identifier of the project for the subscription requests. |
sortBy |
Specifies the way to sort the results of this action. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the sort order for the results of this action. |
status |
Specifies the status of the subscription requests. This is not a required parameter, but if not specified, by default,
Amazon DataZone returns only |
subscribedListingId |
The identifier of the subscribed listing. |
Lists subscription targets in Amazon DataZone
Description
Lists subscription targets in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_subscription_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_subscription_targets(
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain where you want to list subscription targets. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment where you want to list subscription targets. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of subscription targets to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of subscription targets is greater than the default
value for the |
sortBy |
Specifies the way in which the results of this action are to be sorted. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the sort order for the results of this action. |
Lists subscriptions in Amazon DataZone
Description
Lists subscriptions in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_subscriptions(
approverProjectId = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
owningProjectId = NULL,
sortBy = NULL,
sortOrder = NULL,
status = NULL,
subscribedListingId = NULL,
subscriptionRequestIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
approverProjectId |
The identifier of the project for the subscription's approver. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of subscriptions to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of subscriptions is greater than the default value for
the |
owningProjectId |
The identifier of the owning project. |
sortBy |
Specifies the way in which the results of this action are to be sorted. |
sortOrder |
Specifies the sort order for the results of this action. |
status |
The status of the subscriptions that you want to list. This is not a required parameter, but if not provided, by default,
Amazon DataZone returns only |
subscribedListingId |
The identifier of the subscribed listing for the subscriptions that you want to list. |
subscriptionRequestIdentifier |
The identifier of the subscription request for the subscriptions that you want to list. |
Lists tags for the specified resource in Amazon DataZone
Description
Lists tags for the specified resource in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource whose tags you want to list. |
Lists time series data points
Description
Lists time series data points.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_list_time_series_data_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_list_time_series_data_points(
domainIdentifier,
endedAt = NULL,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
formName,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
startedAt = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain that houses the assets for which you want to list time series data points. |
endedAt |
The timestamp at which the data points that you wanted to list ended. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the asset for which you want to list data points. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the asset for which you want to list data points. |
formName |
[required] The name of the time series data points form. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of data points to return in a single call to ListTimeSeriesDataPoints. When the number of data points to be listed is greater than the value of MaxResults, the response contains a NextToken value that you can use in a subsequent call to ListTimeSeriesDataPoints to list the next set of data points. |
nextToken |
When the number of data points is greater than the default value for the MaxResults parameter, or if you explicitly specify a value for MaxResults that is less than the number of data points, the response includes a pagination token named NextToken. You can specify this NextToken value in a subsequent call to ListTimeSeriesDataPoints to list the next set of data points. |
startedAt |
The timestamp at which the data points that you want to list started. |
Posts a data lineage event
Description
Posts a data lineage event.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_post_lineage_event/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_post_lineage_event(clientToken = NULL, domainIdentifier, event)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to post a data lineage event. |
event |
[required] The data lineage event that you want to post. Only open-lineage run event are supported as events. |
Posts time series data points to Amazon DataZone for the specified asset
Description
Posts time series data points to Amazon DataZone for the specified asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_post_time_series_data_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_post_time_series_data_points(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
forms
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain in which you want to post time series data points. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the asset for which you want to post time series data points. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the asset for which you want to post data points. |
forms |
[required] The forms that contain the data points that you want to post. |
Writes the configuration for the specified environment blueprint in Amazon DataZone
Description
Writes the configuration for the specified environment blueprint in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_put_environment_blueprint_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_put_environment_blueprint_configuration(
domainIdentifier,
enabledRegions,
environmentBlueprintIdentifier,
environmentRolePermissionBoundary = NULL,
manageAccessRoleArn = NULL,
provisioningConfigurations = NULL,
provisioningRoleArn = NULL,
regionalParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
enabledRegions |
[required] Specifies the enabled Amazon Web Services Regions. |
environmentBlueprintIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment blueprint. |
environmentRolePermissionBoundary |
The environment role permissions boundary. |
manageAccessRoleArn |
The ARN of the manage access role. |
provisioningConfigurations |
The provisioning configuration of a blueprint. |
provisioningRoleArn |
The ARN of the provisioning role. |
regionalParameters |
The regional parameters in the environment blueprint. |
Rejects automatically generated business-friendly metadata for your Amazon DataZone assets
Description
Rejects automatically generated business-friendly metadata for your Amazon DataZone assets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_reject_predictions/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_reject_predictions(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
rejectChoices = NULL,
rejectRule = NULL,
revision = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the prediction. |
rejectChoices |
Specifies the prediction (aka, the automatically generated piece of metadata) and the target (for example, a column name) that can be rejected. |
rejectRule |
Specifies the rule (or the conditions) under which a prediction can be rejected. |
revision |
The revision that is to be made to the asset. |
Rejects the specified subscription request
Description
Rejects the specified subscription request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_reject_subscription_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_reject_subscription_request(
decisionComment = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier
)
Arguments
decisionComment |
The decision comment of the rejected subscription request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which the subscription request was rejected. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the subscription request that was rejected. |
Removes an owner from an entity
Description
Removes an owner from an entity.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_remove_entity_owner/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_remove_entity_owner(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
owner
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to remove an owner from an entity. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the entity from which you want to remove an owner. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the entity from which you want to remove an owner. |
owner |
[required] The owner that you want to remove from an entity. |
Removes a policy grant
Description
Removes a policy grant.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_remove_policy_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_remove_policy_grant(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
entityIdentifier,
entityType,
policyType,
principal
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to remove a policy grant. |
entityIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the entity from which you want to remove a policy grant. |
entityType |
[required] The type of the entity from which you want to remove a policy grant. |
policyType |
[required] The type of the policy that you want to remove. |
principal |
[required] The principal from which you want to remove a policy grant. |
Revokes a specified subscription in Amazon DataZone
Description
Revokes a specified subscription in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_revoke_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_revoke_subscription(
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
retainPermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain where you want to revoke a subscription. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the revoked subscription. |
retainPermissions |
Specifies whether permissions are retained when the subscription is revoked. |
Searches for assets in Amazon DataZone
Description
Searches for assets in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_search/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_search(
additionalAttributes = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
filters = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
owningProjectIdentifier = NULL,
searchIn = NULL,
searchScope,
searchText = NULL,
sort = NULL
)
Arguments
additionalAttributes |
Specifies additional attributes for the |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain. |
filters |
Specifies the search filters. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of results is greater than the default value for the
|
owningProjectIdentifier |
The identifier of the owning project specified for the search. |
searchIn |
The details of the search. |
searchScope |
[required] The scope of the search. |
searchText |
Specifies the text for which to search. |
sort |
Specifies the way in which the search results are to be sorted. |
Searches group profiles in Amazon DataZone
Description
Searches group profiles in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_search_group_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_search_group_profiles(
domainIdentifier,
groupType,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
searchText = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which you want to search group profiles. |
groupType |
[required] The group type for which to search. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of results is greater than the default value for the
|
searchText |
Specifies the text for which to search. |
Searches listings (records of an asset at a given time) in Amazon DataZone
Description
Searches listings (records of an asset at a given time) in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_search_listings/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_search_listings(
additionalAttributes = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
filters = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
searchIn = NULL,
searchText = NULL,
sort = NULL
)
Arguments
additionalAttributes |
Specifies additional attributes for the search. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the domain in which to search listings. |
filters |
Specifies the filters for the search of listings. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of results is greater than the default value for the
|
searchIn |
The details of the search. |
searchText |
Specifies the text for which to search. |
sort |
Specifies the way for sorting the search results. |
Searches for types in Amazon DataZone
Description
Searches for types in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_search_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_search_types(
domainIdentifier,
filters = NULL,
managed,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
searchIn = NULL,
searchScope,
searchText = NULL,
sort = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which to invoke the
|
filters |
The filters for the |
managed |
[required] Specifies whether the search is managed. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of results is greater than the default value for the
|
searchIn |
The details of the search. |
searchScope |
[required] Specifies the scope of the search for types. |
searchText |
Specifies the text for which to search. |
sort |
The specifies the way to sort the
|
Searches user profiles in Amazon DataZone
Description
Searches user profiles in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_search_user_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_search_user_profiles(
domainIdentifier,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
searchText = NULL,
userType
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which you want to search user profiles. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call to
|
nextToken |
When the number of results is greater than the default value for the
|
searchText |
Specifies the text for which to search. |
userType |
[required] Specifies the user type for the
|
Start the run of the specified data source in Amazon DataZone
Description
Start the run of the specified data source in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_start_data_source_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_start_data_source_run(
clientToken = NULL,
dataSourceIdentifier,
domainIdentifier
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
dataSourceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the data source. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which to start a data source run. |
Starts the metadata generation run
Description
Starts the metadata generation run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_start_metadata_generation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_start_metadata_generation_run(
clientToken = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
owningProjectIdentifier,
target,
type
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. This field is automatically populated if not provided. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where you want to start a metadata generation run. |
owningProjectIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the project that owns the asset for which you want to start a metadata generation run. |
target |
[required] The asset for which you want to start a metadata generation run. |
type |
[required] The type of the metadata generation run. |
Tags a resource in Amazon DataZone
Description
Tags a resource in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be tagged in Amazon DataZone. |
tags |
[required] Specifies the tags for the |
Untags a resource in Amazon DataZone
Description
Untags a resource in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be untagged in Amazon DataZone. |
tagKeys |
[required] Specifies the tag keys for the
|
Updates an asset filter
Description
Updates an asset filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_asset_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_asset_filter(
assetIdentifier,
configuration = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
name = NULL
)
Arguments
assetIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the data asset. |
configuration |
The configuration of the asset filter. |
description |
The description of the asset filter. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to update an asset filter. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the asset filter. |
name |
The name of the asset filter. |
Updates a connection
Description
Updates a connection. In Amazon DataZone, a connection enables you to connect your resources (domains, projects, and environments) to external resources and services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_connection(
awsLocation = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
props = NULL
)
Arguments
awsLocation |
The location where a connection is to be updated. |
description |
The description of a connection. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where a connection is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the connection to be updated. |
props |
The connection props. |
Updates the specified data source in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified data source in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_data_source(
assetFormsInput = NULL,
configuration = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
enableSetting = NULL,
identifier,
name = NULL,
publishOnImport = NULL,
recommendation = NULL,
retainPermissionsOnRevokeFailure = NULL,
schedule = NULL
)
Arguments
assetFormsInput |
The asset forms to be updated as part of the
|
configuration |
The configuration to be updated as part of the
|
description |
The description to be updated as part of the
|
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the domain in which to update a data source. |
enableSetting |
The enable setting to be updated as part of the
|
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the data source to be updated. |
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
publishOnImport |
The publish on import setting to be updated as part of the
|
recommendation |
The recommendation to be updated as part of the
|
retainPermissionsOnRevokeFailure |
Specifies that the granted permissions are retained in case of a self-subscribe functionality failure for a data source. |
schedule |
The schedule to be updated as part of the
|
Updates a Amazon DataZone domain
Description
Updates a Amazon DataZone domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_domain(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainExecutionRole = NULL,
identifier,
name = NULL,
serviceRole = NULL,
singleSignOn = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description to be updated as part of the
|
domainExecutionRole |
The domain execution role to be updated as part of the
|
identifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services domain that is to be updated. |
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
serviceRole |
The service role of the domain. |
singleSignOn |
The single sign-on option to be updated as part of the
|
Updates the domain unit
Description
Updates the domain unit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_domain_unit/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_domain_unit(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
name = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the domain unit that you want to update. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where you want to update a domain unit. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the domain unit that you want to update. |
name |
The name of the domain unit that you want to update. |
Updates the specified environment in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified environment in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_environment/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_environment(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
identifier,
name = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description to be updated as part of the
|
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the domain in which the environment is to be updated. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms to be updated as part of the
|
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment that is to be updated. |
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
Updates an environment action
Description
Updates an environment action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_environment_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_environment_action(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
identifier,
name = NULL,
parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the environment action. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The domain ID of the environment action. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The environment ID of the environment action. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the environment action. |
name |
The name of the environment action. |
parameters |
The parameters of the environment action. |
Updates the specified environment profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified environment profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_environment_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_environment_profile(
awsAccountId = NULL,
awsAccountRegion = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
name = NULL,
userParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
awsAccountId |
The Amazon Web Services account in which a specified environment profile is to be udpated. |
awsAccountRegion |
The Amazon Web Services Region in which a specified environment profile is to be updated. |
description |
The description to be updated as part of the
|
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which an environment profile is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment profile that is to be updated. |
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
userParameters |
The user parameters to be updated as part of the
|
Updates the business glossary in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the business glossary in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_glossary/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_glossary(
clientToken = NULL,
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
name = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that is provided to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
description |
The description to be updated as part of the
|
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a business glossary is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the business glossary to be updated. |
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
status |
The status to be updated as part of the
|
Updates a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates a business glossary term in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_glossary_term/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_glossary_term(
domainIdentifier,
glossaryIdentifier = NULL,
identifier,
longDescription = NULL,
name = NULL,
shortDescription = NULL,
status = NULL,
termRelations = NULL
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a business glossary term is to be updated. |
glossaryIdentifier |
The identifier of the business glossary in which a term is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the business glossary term that is to be updated. |
longDescription |
The long description to be updated as part of the
|
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
shortDescription |
The short description to be updated as part of the
|
status |
The status to be updated as part of the
|
termRelations |
The term relations to be updated as part of the
|
Updates the specified group profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified group profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_group_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_group_profile(domainIdentifier, groupIdentifier, status)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a group profile is updated. |
groupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the group profile that is updated. |
status |
[required] The status of the group profile that is updated. |
Updates the specified project in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified project in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_project(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentDeploymentDetails = NULL,
glossaryTerms = NULL,
identifier,
name = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description to be updated as part of the
|
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the Amazon DataZone domain where a project is being updated. |
environmentDeploymentDetails |
The environment deployment details of the project. |
glossaryTerms |
The glossary terms to be updated as part of the
|
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the project that is to be updated. |
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
Updates a project profile
Description
Updates a project profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_project_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_project_profile(
description = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
domainUnitIdentifier = NULL,
environmentConfigurations = NULL,
identifier,
name = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of a project profile. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain where a project profile is to be updated. |
domainUnitIdentifier |
The ID of the domain unit where a project profile is to be updated. |
environmentConfigurations |
The environment configurations of a project profile. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of a project profile that is to be updated. |
name |
The name of a project profile. |
status |
The status of a project profile. |
Updates a rule
Description
Updates a rule. In Amazon DataZone, a rule is a formal agreement that enforces specific requirements across user workflows (e.g., publishing assets to the catalog, requesting subscriptions, creating projects) within the Amazon DataZone data portal. These rules help maintain consistency, ensure compliance, and uphold governance standards in data management processes. For instance, a metadata enforcement rule can specify the required information for creating a subscription request or publishing a data asset to the catalog, ensuring alignment with organizational standards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_rule(
description = NULL,
detail = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
includeChildDomainUnits = NULL,
name = NULL,
scope = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the rule. |
detail |
The detail of the rule. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The ID of the domain in which a rule is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] The ID of the rule that is to be updated |
includeChildDomainUnits |
Specifies whether to update this rule in the child domain units. |
name |
The name of the rule. |
scope |
The scrope of the rule. |
Updates the status of the specified subscription grant status in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the status of the specified subscription grant status in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_subscription_grant_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_subscription_grant_status(
assetIdentifier,
domainIdentifier,
failureCause = NULL,
identifier,
status,
targetName = NULL
)
Arguments
assetIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the asset the subscription grant status of which is to be updated. |
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a subscription grant status is to be updated. |
failureCause |
Specifies the error message that is returned if the operation cannot be successfully completed. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the subscription grant the status of which is to be updated. |
status |
[required] The status to be updated as part of the
|
targetName |
The target name to be updated as part of the
|
Updates a specified subscription request in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates a specified subscription request in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_subscription_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_subscription_request(
domainIdentifier,
identifier,
requestReason
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a subscription request is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] The identifier of the subscription request that is to be updated. |
requestReason |
[required] The reason for the
|
Updates the specified subscription target in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified subscription target in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_subscription_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_subscription_target(
applicableAssetTypes = NULL,
authorizedPrincipals = NULL,
domainIdentifier,
environmentIdentifier,
identifier,
manageAccessRole = NULL,
name = NULL,
provider = NULL,
subscriptionTargetConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
applicableAssetTypes |
The applicable asset types to be updated as part of the
|
authorizedPrincipals |
The authorized principals to be updated as part of the
|
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a subscription target is to be updated. |
environmentIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the environment in which a subscription target is to be updated. |
identifier |
[required] Identifier of the subscription target that is to be updated. |
manageAccessRole |
The manage access role to be updated as part of the
|
name |
The name to be updated as part of the
|
provider |
The provider to be updated as part of the
|
subscriptionTargetConfig |
The configuration to be updated as part of the
|
Updates the specified user profile in Amazon DataZone
Description
Updates the specified user profile in Amazon DataZone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/datazone_update_user_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
datazone_update_user_profile(
domainIdentifier,
status,
type = NULL,
userIdentifier
)
Arguments
domainIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DataZone domain in which a user profile is updated. |
status |
[required] The status of the user profile that are to be updated. |
type |
The type of the user profile that are to be updated. |
userIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the user whose user profile is to be updated. |
Amazon Elasticsearch Service
Description
Amazon Elasticsearch Configuration Service
Use the Amazon Elasticsearch Configuration API to create, configure, and manage Elasticsearch domains.
For sample code that uses the Configuration API, see the Amazon Elasticsearch Service Developer Guide. The guide also contains sample code for sending signed HTTP requests to the Elasticsearch APIs.
The endpoint for configuration service requests is region-specific: es.region.amazonaws.com. For example, es.us-east-1.amazonaws.com. For a current list of supported regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints.
Usage
elasticsearchservice(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- elasticsearchservice( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection | Allows the destination domain owner to accept an inbound cross-cluster search connection request |
add_tags | Attaches tags to an existing Elasticsearch domain |
associate_package | Associates a package with an Amazon ES domain |
authorize_vpc_endpoint_access | Provides access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint |
cancel_domain_config_change | Cancels a pending configuration change on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
cancel_elasticsearch_service_software_update | Cancels a scheduled service software update for an Amazon ES domain |
create_elasticsearch_domain | Creates a new Elasticsearch domain |
create_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connection | Creates a new cross-cluster search connection from a source domain to a destination domain |
create_package | Create a package for use with Amazon ES domains |
create_vpc_endpoint | Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoint |
delete_elasticsearch_domain | Permanently deletes the specified Elasticsearch domain and all of its data |
delete_elasticsearch_service_role | Deletes the service-linked role that Elasticsearch Service uses to manage and maintain VPC domains |
delete_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection | Allows the destination domain owner to delete an existing inbound cross-cluster search connection |
delete_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connection | Allows the source domain owner to delete an existing outbound cross-cluster search connection |
delete_package | Delete the package |
delete_vpc_endpoint | Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint |
describe_domain_auto_tunes | Provides scheduled Auto-Tune action details for the Elasticsearch domain, such as Auto-Tune action type, description, severity, and scheduled date |
describe_domain_change_progress | Returns information about the current blue/green deployment happening on a domain, including a change ID, status, and progress stages |
describe_elasticsearch_domain | Returns domain configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domain, including the domain ID, domain endpoint, and domain ARN |
describe_elasticsearch_domain_config | Provides cluster configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domain, such as the state, creation date, update version, and update date for cluster options |
describe_elasticsearch_domains | Returns domain configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domains, including the domain ID, domain endpoint, and domain ARN |
describe_elasticsearch_instance_type_limits | Describe Elasticsearch Limits for a given InstanceType and ElasticsearchVersion |
describe_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connections | Lists all the inbound cross-cluster search connections for a destination domain |
describe_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connections | Lists all the outbound cross-cluster search connections for a source domain |
describe_packages | Describes all packages available to Amazon ES |
describe_reserved_elasticsearch_instance_offerings | Lists available reserved Elasticsearch instance offerings |
describe_reserved_elasticsearch_instances | Returns information about reserved Elasticsearch instances for this account |
describe_vpc_endpoints | Describes one or more Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints |
dissociate_package | Dissociates a package from the Amazon ES domain |
get_compatible_elasticsearch_versions | Returns a list of upgrade compatible Elastisearch versions |
get_package_version_history | Returns a list of versions of the package, along with their creation time and commit message |
get_upgrade_history | Retrieves the complete history of the last 10 upgrades that were performed on the domain |
get_upgrade_status | Retrieves the latest status of the last upgrade or upgrade eligibility check that was performed on the domain |
list_domain_names | Returns the name of all Elasticsearch domains owned by the current user's account |
list_domains_for_package | Lists all Amazon ES domains associated with the package |
list_elasticsearch_instance_types | List all Elasticsearch instance types that are supported for given ElasticsearchVersion |
list_elasticsearch_versions | List all supported Elasticsearch versions |
list_packages_for_domain | Lists all packages associated with the Amazon ES domain |
list_tags | Returns all tags for the given Elasticsearch domain |
list_vpc_endpoint_access | Retrieves information about each principal that is allowed to access a given Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint |
list_vpc_endpoints | Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints in the current account and Region |
list_vpc_endpoints_for_domain | Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints associated with a particular domain |
purchase_reserved_elasticsearch_instance_offering | Allows you to purchase reserved Elasticsearch instances |
reject_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection | Allows the destination domain owner to reject an inbound cross-cluster search connection request |
remove_tags | Removes the specified set of tags from the specified Elasticsearch domain |
revoke_vpc_endpoint_access | Revokes access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain that was provided through an interface VPC endpoint |
start_elasticsearch_service_software_update | Schedules a service software update for an Amazon ES domain |
update_elasticsearch_domain_config | Modifies the cluster configuration of the specified Elasticsearch domain, setting as setting the instance type and the number of instances |
update_package | Updates a package for use with Amazon ES domains |
update_vpc_endpoint | Modifies an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint |
upgrade_elasticsearch_domain | Allows you to either upgrade your domain or perform an Upgrade eligibility check to a compatible Elasticsearch version |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- elasticsearchservice()
svc$accept_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Allows the destination domain owner to accept an inbound cross-cluster search connection request
Description
Allows the destination domain owner to accept an inbound cross-cluster search connection request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_accept_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_accept_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection(
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId
)
Arguments
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId |
[required] The id of the inbound connection that you want to accept. |
Attaches tags to an existing Elasticsearch domain
Description
Attaches tags to an existing Elasticsearch domain. Tags are a set of case-sensitive key value pairs. An Elasticsearch domain may have up to 10 tags. See Tagging Amazon Elasticsearch Service Domains for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_add_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_add_tags(ARN, TagList)
Arguments
ARN |
[required] Specify the |
TagList |
[required] List of |
Associates a package with an Amazon ES domain
Description
Associates a package with an Amazon ES domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_associate_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_associate_package(PackageID, DomainName)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Internal ID of the package that you want to associate with a domain. Use
|
DomainName |
[required] Name of the domain that you want to associate the package with. |
Provides access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint
Description
Provides access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_authorize_vpc_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_authorize_vpc_endpoint_access(DomainName, Account)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Service domain to provide access to. |
Account |
[required] The account ID to grant access to. |
Cancels a pending configuration change on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Cancels a pending configuration change on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_cancel_domain_config_change/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_cancel_domain_config_change(DomainName, DryRun = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the OpenSearch Service domain configuration request to cancel. |
DryRun |
When set to True, returns the list of change IDs and properties that will be cancelled without actually cancelling the change. |
Cancels a scheduled service software update for an Amazon ES domain
Description
Cancels a scheduled service software update for an Amazon ES domain. You can only perform this operation before the AutomatedUpdateDate
and when the UpdateStatus
is in the PENDING_UPDATE
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_cancel_elasticsearch_service_software_update/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_cancel_elasticsearch_service_software_update(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain that you want to stop the latest service software update on. |
Creates a new Elasticsearch domain
Description
Creates a new Elasticsearch domain. For more information, see Creating Elasticsearch Domains in the Amazon Elasticsearch Service Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_create_elasticsearch_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_create_elasticsearch_domain(
DomainName,
ElasticsearchVersion = NULL,
ElasticsearchClusterConfig = NULL,
EBSOptions = NULL,
AccessPolicies = NULL,
SnapshotOptions = NULL,
VPCOptions = NULL,
CognitoOptions = NULL,
EncryptionAtRestOptions = NULL,
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions = NULL,
AdvancedOptions = NULL,
LogPublishingOptions = NULL,
DomainEndpointOptions = NULL,
AdvancedSecurityOptions = NULL,
AutoTuneOptions = NULL,
TagList = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the Elasticsearch domain that you are creating. Domain names are unique across the domains owned by an account within an AWS region. Domain names must start with a lowercase letter and can contain the following characters: a-z (lowercase), 0-9, and - (hyphen). |
ElasticsearchVersion |
String of format X.Y to specify version for the Elasticsearch domain eg. "1.5" or "2.3". For more information, see Creating Elasticsearch Domains in the Amazon Elasticsearch Service Developer Guide. |
ElasticsearchClusterConfig |
Configuration options for an Elasticsearch domain. Specifies the instance type and number of instances in the domain cluster. |
EBSOptions |
Options to enable, disable and specify the type and size of EBS storage volumes. |
AccessPolicies |
IAM access policy as a JSON-formatted string. |
SnapshotOptions |
Option to set time, in UTC format, of the daily automated snapshot. Default value is 0 hours. |
VPCOptions |
Options to specify the subnets and security groups for VPC endpoint. For more information, see Creating a VPC in VPC Endpoints for Amazon Elasticsearch Service Domains |
CognitoOptions |
Options to specify the Cognito user and identity pools for Kibana authentication. For more information, see Amazon Cognito Authentication for Kibana. |
EncryptionAtRestOptions |
Specifies the Encryption At Rest Options. |
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions |
Specifies the NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions. |
AdvancedOptions |
Option to allow references to indices in an HTTP request body. Must be
|
LogPublishingOptions |
Map of |
DomainEndpointOptions |
Options to specify configuration that will be applied to the domain endpoint. |
AdvancedSecurityOptions |
Specifies advanced security options. |
AutoTuneOptions |
Specifies Auto-Tune options. |
TagList |
A list of |
Creates a new cross-cluster search connection from a source domain to a destination domain
Description
Creates a new cross-cluster search connection from a source domain to a destination domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_create_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_create_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connection(
SourceDomainInfo,
DestinationDomainInfo,
ConnectionAlias
)
Arguments
SourceDomainInfo |
[required] Specifies the |
DestinationDomainInfo |
[required] Specifies the |
ConnectionAlias |
[required] Specifies the connection alias that will be used by the customer for this connection. |
Create a package for use with Amazon ES domains
Description
Create a package for use with Amazon ES domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_create_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_create_package(
PackageName,
PackageType,
PackageDescription = NULL,
PackageSource
)
Arguments
PackageName |
[required] Unique identifier for the package. |
PackageType |
[required] Type of package. Currently supports only TXT-DICTIONARY. |
PackageDescription |
Description of the package. |
PackageSource |
[required] The customer S3 location |
Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoint
Description
Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_create_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_create_vpc_endpoint(
DomainArn,
VpcOptions,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the domain to grant access to. |
VpcOptions |
[required] Options to specify the subnets and security groups for the endpoint. |
ClientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Permanently deletes the specified Elasticsearch domain and all of its data
Description
Permanently deletes the specified Elasticsearch domain and all of its data. Once a domain is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_delete_elasticsearch_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_delete_elasticsearch_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the Elasticsearch domain that you want to permanently delete. |
Deletes the service-linked role that Elasticsearch Service uses to manage and maintain VPC domains
Description
Deletes the service-linked role that Elasticsearch Service uses to manage and maintain VPC domains. Role deletion will fail if any existing VPC domains use the role. You must delete any such Elasticsearch domains before deleting the role. See Deleting Elasticsearch Service Role in VPC Endpoints for Amazon Elasticsearch Service Domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_delete_elasticsearch_service_role/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_delete_elasticsearch_service_role()
Allows the destination domain owner to delete an existing inbound cross-cluster search connection
Description
Allows the destination domain owner to delete an existing inbound cross-cluster search connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_delete_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_delete_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection(
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId
)
Arguments
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId |
[required] The id of the inbound connection that you want to permanently delete. |
Allows the source domain owner to delete an existing outbound cross-cluster search connection
Description
Allows the source domain owner to delete an existing outbound cross-cluster search connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_delete_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_delete_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connection(
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId
)
Arguments
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId |
[required] The id of the outbound connection that you want to permanently delete. |
Delete the package
Description
Delete the package.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_delete_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_delete_package(PackageID)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Internal ID of the package that you want to delete. Use
|
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint
Description
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_delete_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_delete_vpc_endpoint(VpcEndpointId)
Arguments
VpcEndpointId |
[required] The unique identifier of the endpoint to be deleted. |
Provides scheduled Auto-Tune action details for the Elasticsearch domain, such as Auto-Tune action type, description, severity, and scheduled date
Description
Provides scheduled Auto-Tune action details for the Elasticsearch domain, such as Auto-Tune action type, description, severity, and scheduled date.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_domain_auto_tunes/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_domain_auto_tunes(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Specifies the domain name for which you want Auto-Tune action details. |
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. If not specified, defaults to 100. |
NextToken |
NextToken is sent in case the earlier API call results contain the NextToken. It is used for pagination. |
Returns information about the current blue/green deployment happening on a domain, including a change ID, status, and progress stages
Description
Returns information about the current blue/green deployment happening on a domain, including a change ID, status, and progress stages.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_domain_change_progress/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_domain_change_progress(
DomainName,
ChangeId = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The domain you want to get the progress information about. |
ChangeId |
The specific change ID for which you want to get progress information. This is an optional parameter. If omitted, the service returns information about the most recent configuration change. |
Returns domain configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domain, including the domain ID, domain endpoint, and domain ARN
Description
Returns domain configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domain, including the domain ID, domain endpoint, and domain ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the Elasticsearch domain for which you want information. |
Provides cluster configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domain, such as the state, creation date, update version, and update date for cluster options
Description
Provides cluster configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domain, such as the state, creation date, update version, and update date for cluster options.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_domain_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_domain_config(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The Elasticsearch domain that you want to get information about. |
Returns domain configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domains, including the domain ID, domain endpoint, and domain ARN
Description
Returns domain configuration information about the specified Elasticsearch domains, including the domain ID, domain endpoint, and domain ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_domains/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_domains(DomainNames)
Arguments
DomainNames |
[required] The Elasticsearch domains for which you want information. |
Describe Elasticsearch Limits for a given InstanceType and ElasticsearchVersion
Description
Describe Elasticsearch Limits for a given InstanceType and ElasticsearchVersion. When modifying existing Domain, specify the DomainName
to know what Limits are supported for modifying.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_instance_type_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_elasticsearch_instance_type_limits(
DomainName = NULL,
InstanceType,
ElasticsearchVersion
)
Arguments
DomainName |
DomainName represents the name of the Domain that we are trying to
modify. This should be present only if we are querying for Elasticsearch
|
InstanceType |
[required] The instance type for an Elasticsearch cluster for which Elasticsearch
|
ElasticsearchVersion |
[required] Version of Elasticsearch for which |
Lists all the inbound cross-cluster search connections for a destination domain
Description
Lists all the inbound cross-cluster search connections for a destination domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connections(
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
A list of filters used to match properties for inbound cross-cluster
search connection. Available
|
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. If not specified, defaults to 100. |
NextToken |
NextToken is sent in case the earlier API call results contain the NextToken. It is used for pagination. |
Lists all the outbound cross-cluster search connections for a source domain
Description
Lists all the outbound cross-cluster search connections for a source domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_outbound_cross_cluster_search_connections(
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
A list of filters used to match properties for outbound cross-cluster
search connection. Available
|
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. If not specified, defaults to 100. |
NextToken |
NextToken is sent in case the earlier API call results contain the NextToken. It is used for pagination. |
Describes all packages available to Amazon ES
Description
Describes all packages available to Amazon ES. Includes options for filtering, limiting the number of results, and pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_packages(
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
Only returns packages that match the |
MaxResults |
Limits results to a maximum number of packages. |
NextToken |
Used for pagination. Only necessary if a previous API call includes a non-null NextToken value. If provided, returns results for the next page. |
Lists available reserved Elasticsearch instance offerings
Description
Lists available reserved Elasticsearch instance offerings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_reserved_elasticsearch_instance_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_reserved_elasticsearch_instance_offerings(
ReservedElasticsearchInstanceOfferingId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedElasticsearchInstanceOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier. |
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. If not specified, defaults to 100. |
NextToken |
NextToken should be sent in case if earlier API call produced result containing NextToken. It is used for pagination. |
Returns information about reserved Elasticsearch instances for this account
Description
Returns information about reserved Elasticsearch instances for this account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_reserved_elasticsearch_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_reserved_elasticsearch_instances(
ReservedElasticsearchInstanceId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedElasticsearchInstanceId |
The reserved instance identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reserved Elasticsearch instance ID. |
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. If not specified, defaults to 100. |
NextToken |
NextToken should be sent in case if earlier API call produced result containing NextToken. It is used for pagination. |
Describes one or more Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints
Description
Describes one or more Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_describe_vpc_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_describe_vpc_endpoints(VpcEndpointIds)
Arguments
VpcEndpointIds |
[required] The unique identifiers of the endpoints to get information about. |
Dissociates a package from the Amazon ES domain
Description
Dissociates a package from the Amazon ES domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_dissociate_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_dissociate_package(PackageID, DomainName)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Internal ID of the package that you want to associate with a domain. Use
|
DomainName |
[required] Name of the domain that you want to associate the package with. |
Returns a list of upgrade compatible Elastisearch versions
Description
Returns a list of upgrade compatible Elastisearch versions. You can optionally pass a DomainName
to get all upgrade compatible Elasticsearch versions for that specific domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_get_compatible_elasticsearch_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_get_compatible_elasticsearch_versions(DomainName = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
Returns a list of versions of the package, along with their creation time and commit message
Description
Returns a list of versions of the package, along with their creation time and commit message.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_get_package_version_history/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_get_package_version_history(
PackageID,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Returns an audit history of versions of the package. |
MaxResults |
Limits results to a maximum number of versions. |
NextToken |
Used for pagination. Only necessary if a previous API call includes a non-null NextToken value. If provided, returns results for the next page. |
Retrieves the complete history of the last 10 upgrades that were performed on the domain
Description
Retrieves the complete history of the last 10 upgrades that were performed on the domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_get_upgrade_history/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_get_upgrade_history(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
MaxResults |
|
NextToken |
Retrieves the latest status of the last upgrade or upgrade eligibility check that was performed on the domain
Description
Retrieves the latest status of the last upgrade or upgrade eligibility check that was performed on the domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_get_upgrade_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_get_upgrade_status(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
Returns the name of all Elasticsearch domains owned by the current user's account
Description
Returns the name of all Elasticsearch domains owned by the current user's account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_domain_names/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_domain_names(EngineType = NULL)
Arguments
EngineType |
Optional parameter to filter the output by domain engine type. Acceptable values are 'Elasticsearch' and 'OpenSearch'. |
Lists all Amazon ES domains associated with the package
Description
Lists all Amazon ES domains associated with the package.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_domains_for_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_domains_for_package(
PackageID,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] The package for which to list domains. |
MaxResults |
Limits results to a maximum number of domains. |
NextToken |
Used for pagination. Only necessary if a previous API call includes a non-null NextToken value. If provided, returns results for the next page. |
List all Elasticsearch instance types that are supported for given ElasticsearchVersion
Description
List all Elasticsearch instance types that are supported for given ElasticsearchVersion
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_elasticsearch_instance_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_elasticsearch_instance_types(
ElasticsearchVersion,
DomainName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ElasticsearchVersion |
[required] Version of Elasticsearch for which list of supported elasticsearch instance types are needed. |
DomainName |
DomainName represents the name of the Domain that we are trying to modify. This should be present only if we are querying for list of available Elasticsearch instance types when modifying existing domain. |
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. Value provided must be greater than 30 else it wont be honored. |
NextToken |
NextToken should be sent in case if earlier API call produced result containing NextToken. It is used for pagination. |
List all supported Elasticsearch versions
Description
List all supported Elasticsearch versions
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_elasticsearch_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_elasticsearch_versions(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Set this value to limit the number of results returned. Value provided must be greater than 10 else it wont be honored. |
NextToken |
Lists all packages associated with the Amazon ES domain
Description
Lists all packages associated with the Amazon ES domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_packages_for_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_packages_for_domain(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain for which you want to list associated packages. |
MaxResults |
Limits results to a maximum number of packages. |
NextToken |
Used for pagination. Only necessary if a previous API call includes a non-null NextToken value. If provided, returns results for the next page. |
Returns all tags for the given Elasticsearch domain
Description
Returns all tags for the given Elasticsearch domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_tags(ARN)
Arguments
ARN |
[required] Specify the |
Retrieves information about each principal that is allowed to access a given Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint
Description
Retrieves information about each principal that is allowed to access a given Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_vpc_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_vpc_endpoint_access(DomainName, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Service domain to retrieve access information for. |
NextToken |
Provides an identifier to allow retrieval of paginated results. |
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints in the current account and Region
Description
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints in the current account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
Identifier to allow retrieval of paginated results. |
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints associated with a particular domain
Description
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints associated with a particular domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints_for_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints_for_domain(
DomainName,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the ElasticSearch domain whose VPC endpoints are to be listed. |
NextToken |
Provides an identifier to allow retrieval of paginated results. |
Allows you to purchase reserved Elasticsearch instances
Description
Allows you to purchase reserved Elasticsearch instances.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_purchase_reserved_elasticsearch_instance_offering/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_purchase_reserved_elasticsearch_instance_offering(
ReservedElasticsearchInstanceOfferingId,
ReservationName,
InstanceCount = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedElasticsearchInstanceOfferingId |
[required] The ID of the reserved Elasticsearch instance offering to purchase. |
ReservationName |
[required] A customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. |
InstanceCount |
The number of Elasticsearch instances to reserve. |
Allows the destination domain owner to reject an inbound cross-cluster search connection request
Description
Allows the destination domain owner to reject an inbound cross-cluster search connection request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_reject_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_reject_inbound_cross_cluster_search_connection(
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId
)
Arguments
CrossClusterSearchConnectionId |
[required] The id of the inbound connection that you want to reject. |
Removes the specified set of tags from the specified Elasticsearch domain
Description
Removes the specified set of tags from the specified Elasticsearch domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_remove_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_remove_tags(ARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ARN |
[required] Specifies the |
TagKeys |
[required] Specifies the |
Revokes access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain that was provided through an interface VPC endpoint
Description
Revokes access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain that was provided through an interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_revoke_vpc_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_revoke_vpc_endpoint_access(DomainName, Account)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Service domain. |
Account |
[required] The account ID to revoke access from. |
Schedules a service software update for an Amazon ES domain
Description
Schedules a service software update for an Amazon ES domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_start_elasticsearch_service_software_update/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_start_elasticsearch_service_software_update(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain that you want to update to the latest service software. |
Modifies the cluster configuration of the specified Elasticsearch domain, setting as setting the instance type and the number of instances
Description
Modifies the cluster configuration of the specified Elasticsearch domain, setting as setting the instance type and the number of instances.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_update_elasticsearch_domain_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_update_elasticsearch_domain_config(
DomainName,
ElasticsearchClusterConfig = NULL,
EBSOptions = NULL,
SnapshotOptions = NULL,
VPCOptions = NULL,
CognitoOptions = NULL,
AdvancedOptions = NULL,
AccessPolicies = NULL,
LogPublishingOptions = NULL,
DomainEndpointOptions = NULL,
AdvancedSecurityOptions = NULL,
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions = NULL,
EncryptionAtRestOptions = NULL,
AutoTuneOptions = NULL,
DryRun = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the Elasticsearch domain that you are updating. |
ElasticsearchClusterConfig |
The type and number of instances to instantiate for the domain cluster. |
EBSOptions |
Specify the type and size of the EBS volume that you want to use. |
SnapshotOptions |
Option to set the time, in UTC format, for the daily automated snapshot.
Default value is |
VPCOptions |
Options to specify the subnets and security groups for VPC endpoint. For more information, see Creating a VPC in VPC Endpoints for Amazon Elasticsearch Service Domains |
CognitoOptions |
Options to specify the Cognito user and identity pools for Kibana authentication. For more information, see Amazon Cognito Authentication for Kibana. |
AdvancedOptions |
Modifies the advanced option to allow references to indices in an HTTP
request body. Must be |
AccessPolicies |
IAM access policy as a JSON-formatted string. |
LogPublishingOptions |
Map of |
DomainEndpointOptions |
Options to specify configuration that will be applied to the domain endpoint. |
AdvancedSecurityOptions |
Specifies advanced security options. |
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions |
Specifies the NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions. |
EncryptionAtRestOptions |
Specifies the Encryption At Rest Options. |
AutoTuneOptions |
Specifies Auto-Tune options. |
DryRun |
This flag, when set to True, specifies whether the
|
Updates a package for use with Amazon ES domains
Description
Updates a package for use with Amazon ES domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_update_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_update_package(
PackageID,
PackageSource,
PackageDescription = NULL,
CommitMessage = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Unique identifier for the package. |
PackageSource |
[required] |
PackageDescription |
New description of the package. |
CommitMessage |
An info message for the new version which will be shown as part of
|
Modifies an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint
Description
Modifies an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_update_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_update_vpc_endpoint(VpcEndpointId, VpcOptions)
Arguments
VpcEndpointId |
[required] Unique identifier of the VPC endpoint to be updated. |
VpcOptions |
[required] The security groups and/or subnets to add, remove, or modify. |
Allows you to either upgrade your domain or perform an Upgrade eligibility check to a compatible Elasticsearch version
Description
Allows you to either upgrade your domain or perform an Upgrade eligibility check to a compatible Elasticsearch version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticsearchservice_upgrade_elasticsearch_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticsearchservice_upgrade_elasticsearch_domain(
DomainName,
TargetVersion,
PerformCheckOnly = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
TargetVersion |
[required] The version of Elasticsearch that you intend to upgrade the domain to. |
PerformCheckOnly |
This flag, when set to True, indicates that an Upgrade Eligibility Check needs to be performed. This will not actually perform the Upgrade. |
Amazon EMR
Description
Amazon EMR is a web service that makes it easier to process large amounts of data efficiently. Amazon EMR uses Hadoop processing combined with several Amazon Web Services services to do tasks such as web indexing, data mining, log file analysis, machine learning, scientific simulation, and data warehouse management.
Usage
emr(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- emr( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_instance_fleet | Adds an instance fleet to a running cluster |
add_instance_groups | Adds one or more instance groups to a running cluster |
add_job_flow_steps | AddJobFlowSteps adds new steps to a running cluster |
add_tags | Adds tags to an Amazon EMR resource, such as a cluster or an Amazon EMR Studio |
cancel_steps | Cancels a pending step or steps in a running cluster |
create_security_configuration | Creates a security configuration, which is stored in the service and can be specified when a cluster is created |
create_studio | Creates a new Amazon EMR Studio |
create_studio_session_mapping | Maps a user or group to the Amazon EMR Studio specified by StudioId, and applies a session policy to refine Studio permissions for that user or group |
delete_security_configuration | Deletes a security configuration |
delete_studio | Removes an Amazon EMR Studio from the Studio metadata store |
delete_studio_session_mapping | Removes a user or group from an Amazon EMR Studio |
describe_cluster | Provides cluster-level details including status, hardware and software configuration, VPC settings, and so on |
describe_job_flows | This API is no longer supported and will eventually be removed |
describe_notebook_execution | Provides details of a notebook execution |
describe_release_label | Provides Amazon EMR release label details, such as the releases available the Region where the API request is run, and the available applications for a specific Amazon EMR release label |
describe_security_configuration | Provides the details of a security configuration by returning the configuration JSON |
describe_step | Provides more detail about the cluster step |
describe_studio | Returns details for the specified Amazon EMR Studio including ID, Name, VPC, Studio access URL, and so on |
get_auto_termination_policy | Returns the auto-termination policy for an Amazon EMR cluster |
get_block_public_access_configuration | Returns the Amazon EMR block public access configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region |
get_cluster_session_credentials | Provides temporary, HTTP basic credentials that are associated with a given runtime IAM role and used by a cluster with fine-grained access control activated |
get_managed_scaling_policy | Fetches the attached managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster |
get_studio_session_mapping | Fetches mapping details for the specified Amazon EMR Studio and identity (user or group) |
list_bootstrap_actions | Provides information about the bootstrap actions associated with a cluster |
list_clusters | Provides the status of all clusters visible to this Amazon Web Services account |
list_instance_fleets | Lists all available details about the instance fleets in a cluster |
list_instance_groups | Provides all available details about the instance groups in a cluster |
list_instances | Provides information for all active Amazon EC2 instances and Amazon EC2 instances terminated in the last 30 days, up to a maximum of 2,000 |
list_notebook_executions | Provides summaries of all notebook executions |
list_release_labels | Retrieves release labels of Amazon EMR services in the Region where the API is called |
list_security_configurations | Lists all the security configurations visible to this account, providing their creation dates and times, and their names |
list_steps | Provides a list of steps for the cluster in reverse order unless you specify stepIds with the request or filter by StepStates |
list_studios | Returns a list of all Amazon EMR Studios associated with the Amazon Web Services account |
list_studio_session_mappings | Returns a list of all user or group session mappings for the Amazon EMR Studio specified by StudioId |
list_supported_instance_types | A list of the instance types that Amazon EMR supports |
modify_cluster | Modifies the number of steps that can be executed concurrently for the cluster specified using ClusterID |
modify_instance_fleet | Modifies the target On-Demand and target Spot capacities for the instance fleet with the specified InstanceFleetID within the cluster specified using ClusterID |
modify_instance_groups | ModifyInstanceGroups modifies the number of nodes and configuration settings of an instance group |
put_auto_scaling_policy | Creates or updates an automatic scaling policy for a core instance group or task instance group in an Amazon EMR cluster |
put_auto_termination_policy | Auto-termination is supported in Amazon EMR releases 5 |
put_block_public_access_configuration | Creates or updates an Amazon EMR block public access configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region |
put_managed_scaling_policy | Creates or updates a managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster |
remove_auto_scaling_policy | Removes an automatic scaling policy from a specified instance group within an Amazon EMR cluster |
remove_auto_termination_policy | Removes an auto-termination policy from an Amazon EMR cluster |
remove_managed_scaling_policy | Removes a managed scaling policy from a specified Amazon EMR cluster |
remove_tags | Removes tags from an Amazon EMR resource, such as a cluster or Amazon EMR Studio |
run_job_flow | RunJobFlow creates and starts running a new cluster (job flow) |
set_keep_job_flow_alive_when_no_steps | You can use the SetKeepJobFlowAliveWhenNoSteps to configure a cluster (job flow) to terminate after the step execution, i |
set_termination_protection | SetTerminationProtection locks a cluster (job flow) so the Amazon EC2 instances in the cluster cannot be terminated by user intervention, an API call, or in the event of a job-flow error |
set_unhealthy_node_replacement | Specify whether to enable unhealthy node replacement, which lets Amazon EMR gracefully replace core nodes on a cluster if any nodes become unhealthy |
set_visible_to_all_users | The SetVisibleToAllUsers parameter is no longer supported |
start_notebook_execution | Starts a notebook execution |
stop_notebook_execution | Stops a notebook execution |
terminate_job_flows | TerminateJobFlows shuts a list of clusters (job flows) down |
update_studio | Updates an Amazon EMR Studio configuration, including attributes such as name, description, and subnets |
update_studio_session_mapping | Updates the session policy attached to the user or group for the specified Amazon EMR Studio |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- emr()
svc$add_instance_fleet(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds an instance fleet to a running cluster
Description
Adds an instance fleet to a running cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_add_instance_fleet/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_add_instance_fleet(ClusterId, InstanceFleet)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster. |
InstanceFleet |
[required] Specifies the configuration of the instance fleet. |
Adds one or more instance groups to a running cluster
Description
Adds one or more instance groups to a running cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_add_instance_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_add_instance_groups(InstanceGroups, JobFlowId)
Arguments
InstanceGroups |
[required] Instance groups to add. |
JobFlowId |
[required] Job flow in which to add the instance groups. |
AddJobFlowSteps adds new steps to a running cluster
Description
AddJobFlowSteps adds new steps to a running cluster. A maximum of 256 steps are allowed in each job flow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_add_job_flow_steps/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_add_job_flow_steps(JobFlowId, Steps, ExecutionRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
JobFlowId |
[required] A string that uniquely identifies the job flow. This identifier is
returned by |
Steps |
[required] A list of StepConfig to be executed by the job flow. |
ExecutionRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the runtime role for a step on the
cluster. The runtime role can be a cross-account IAM role. The runtime
role ARN is a combination of account ID, role name, and role type using
the following format: For example, |
Adds tags to an Amazon EMR resource, such as a cluster or an Amazon EMR Studio
Description
Adds tags to an Amazon EMR resource, such as a cluster or an Amazon EMR Studio. Tags make it easier to associate resources in various ways, such as grouping clusters to track your Amazon EMR resource allocation costs. For more information, see Tag Clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_add_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_add_tags(ResourceId, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] The Amazon EMR resource identifier to which tags will be added. For example, a cluster identifier or an Amazon EMR Studio ID. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tags to associate with a resource. Tags are user-defined key-value pairs that consist of a required key string with a maximum of 128 characters, and an optional value string with a maximum of 256 characters. |
Cancels a pending step or steps in a running cluster
Description
Cancels a pending step or steps in a running cluster. Available only in Amazon EMR versions 4.8.0 and later, excluding version 5.0.0. A maximum of 256 steps are allowed in each CancelSteps request. CancelSteps is idempotent but asynchronous; it does not guarantee that a step will be canceled, even if the request is successfully submitted. When you use Amazon EMR releases 5.28.0 and later, you can cancel steps that are in a PENDING
or RUNNING
state. In earlier versions of Amazon EMR, you can only cancel steps that are in a PENDING
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_cancel_steps/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_cancel_steps(ClusterId, StepIds, StepCancellationOption = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The |
StepIds |
[required] The list of |
StepCancellationOption |
The option to choose to cancel |
Creates a security configuration, which is stored in the service and can be specified when a cluster is created
Description
Creates a security configuration, which is stored in the service and can be specified when a cluster is created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_create_security_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_create_security_configuration(Name, SecurityConfiguration)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the security configuration. |
SecurityConfiguration |
[required] The security configuration details in JSON format. For JSON parameters and examples, see Use Security Configurations to Set Up Cluster Security in the Amazon EMR Management Guide. |
Creates a new Amazon EMR Studio
Description
Creates a new Amazon EMR Studio.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_create_studio/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_create_studio(
Name,
Description = NULL,
AuthMode,
VpcId,
SubnetIds,
ServiceRole,
UserRole = NULL,
WorkspaceSecurityGroupId,
EngineSecurityGroupId,
DefaultS3Location,
IdpAuthUrl = NULL,
IdpRelayStateParameterName = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
TrustedIdentityPropagationEnabled = NULL,
IdcUserAssignment = NULL,
IdcInstanceArn = NULL,
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A descriptive name for the Amazon EMR Studio. |
Description |
A detailed description of the Amazon EMR Studio. |
AuthMode |
[required] Specifies whether the Studio authenticates users using IAM or IAM Identity Center. |
VpcId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC) to associate with the Studio. |
SubnetIds |
[required] A list of subnet IDs to associate with the Amazon EMR Studio. A Studio
can have a maximum of 5 subnets. The subnets must belong to the VPC
specified by |
ServiceRole |
[required] The IAM role that the Amazon EMR Studio assumes. The service role provides a way for Amazon EMR Studio to interoperate with other Amazon Web Services services. |
UserRole |
The IAM user role that users and groups assume when logged in to an
Amazon EMR Studio. Only specify a |
WorkspaceSecurityGroupId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio Workspace security group. The Workspace
security group allows outbound network traffic to resources in the
Engine security group, and it must be in the same VPC specified by
|
EngineSecurityGroupId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio Engine security group. The Engine
security group allows inbound network traffic from the Workspace
security group, and it must be in the same VPC specified by |
DefaultS3Location |
[required] The Amazon S3 location to back up Amazon EMR Studio Workspaces and notebook files. |
IdpAuthUrl |
The authentication endpoint of your identity provider (IdP). Specify this value when you use IAM authentication and want to let federated users log in to a Studio with the Studio URL and credentials from your IdP. Amazon EMR Studio redirects users to this endpoint to enter credentials. |
IdpRelayStateParameterName |
The name that your identity provider (IdP) uses for its |
Tags |
A list of tags to associate with the Amazon EMR Studio. Tags are user-defined key-value pairs that consist of a required key string with a maximum of 128 characters, and an optional value string with a maximum of 256 characters. |
TrustedIdentityPropagationEnabled |
A Boolean indicating whether to enable Trusted identity propagation for
the Studio. The default value is |
IdcUserAssignment |
Specifies whether IAM Identity Center user assignment is |
IdcInstanceArn |
The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance to create the Studio application. |
EncryptionKeyArn |
The KMS key identifier (ARN) used to encrypt Amazon EMR Studio workspace and notebook files when backed up to Amazon S3. |
Maps a user or group to the Amazon EMR Studio specified by StudioId, and applies a session policy to refine Studio permissions for that user or group
Description
Maps a user or group to the Amazon EMR Studio specified by StudioId
, and applies a session policy to refine Studio permissions for that user or group. Use create_studio_session_mapping
to assign users to a Studio when you use IAM Identity Center authentication. For instructions on how to assign users to a Studio when you use IAM authentication, see Assign a user or group to your EMR Studio.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_create_studio_session_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_create_studio_session_mapping(
StudioId,
IdentityId = NULL,
IdentityName = NULL,
IdentityType,
SessionPolicyArn
)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio to which the user or group will be mapped. |
IdentityId |
The globally unique identifier (GUID) of the user or group from the IAM
Identity Center Identity Store. For more information, see
UserId
and
GroupId
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityName |
The name of the user or group. For more information, see
UserName
and
DisplayName
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityType |
[required] Specifies whether the identity to map to the Amazon EMR Studio is a user or a group. |
SessionPolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the session policy that will be applied to the user or group. You should specify the ARN for the session policy that you want to apply, not the ARN of your user role. For more information, see Create an Amazon EMR Studio User Role with Session Policies. |
Deletes a security configuration
Description
Deletes a security configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_delete_security_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_delete_security_configuration(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the security configuration. |
Removes an Amazon EMR Studio from the Studio metadata store
Description
Removes an Amazon EMR Studio from the Studio metadata store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_delete_studio/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_delete_studio(StudioId)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio. |
Removes a user or group from an Amazon EMR Studio
Description
Removes a user or group from an Amazon EMR Studio.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_delete_studio_session_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_delete_studio_session_mapping(
StudioId,
IdentityId = NULL,
IdentityName = NULL,
IdentityType
)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio. |
IdentityId |
The globally unique identifier (GUID) of the user or group to remove
from the Amazon EMR Studio. For more information, see
UserId
and
GroupId
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityName |
The name of the user name or group to remove from the Amazon EMR Studio.
For more information, see
UserName
and
DisplayName
in the IAM Identity Center Store API Reference. Either |
IdentityType |
[required] Specifies whether the identity to delete from the Amazon EMR Studio is a user or a group. |
Provides cluster-level details including status, hardware and software configuration, VPC settings, and so on
Description
Provides cluster-level details including status, hardware and software configuration, VPC settings, and so on.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_cluster(ClusterId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to describe. |
This API is no longer supported and will eventually be removed
Description
This API is no longer supported and will eventually be removed. We recommend you use list_clusters
, describe_cluster
, list_steps
, list_instance_groups
and list_bootstrap_actions
instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_job_flows/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_job_flows(
CreatedAfter = NULL,
CreatedBefore = NULL,
JobFlowIds = NULL,
JobFlowStates = NULL
)
Arguments
CreatedAfter |
Return only job flows created after this date and time. |
CreatedBefore |
Return only job flows created before this date and time. |
JobFlowIds |
Return only job flows whose job flow ID is contained in this list. |
JobFlowStates |
Return only job flows whose state is contained in this list. |
Provides details of a notebook execution
Description
Provides details of a notebook execution.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_notebook_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_notebook_execution(NotebookExecutionId)
Arguments
NotebookExecutionId |
[required] The unique identifier of the notebook execution. |
Provides Amazon EMR release label details, such as the releases available the Region where the API request is run, and the available applications for a specific Amazon EMR release label
Description
Provides Amazon EMR release label details, such as the releases available the Region where the API request is run, and the available applications for a specific Amazon EMR release label. Can also list Amazon EMR releases that support a specified version of Spark.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_release_label/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_release_label(
ReleaseLabel = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ReleaseLabel |
The target release label to be described. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. Reserved for future use. Currently set to null. |
MaxResults |
Reserved for future use. Currently set to null. |
Provides the details of a security configuration by returning the configuration JSON
Description
Provides the details of a security configuration by returning the configuration JSON.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_security_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_security_configuration(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the security configuration. |
Provides more detail about the cluster step
Description
Provides more detail about the cluster step.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_step/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_step(ClusterId, StepId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier of the cluster with steps to describe. |
StepId |
[required] The identifier of the step to describe. |
Returns details for the specified Amazon EMR Studio including ID, Name, VPC, Studio access URL, and so on
Description
Returns details for the specified Amazon EMR Studio including ID, Name, VPC, Studio access URL, and so on.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_describe_studio/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_describe_studio(StudioId)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The Amazon EMR Studio ID. |
Returns the auto-termination policy for an Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Returns the auto-termination policy for an Amazon EMR cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_get_auto_termination_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_get_auto_termination_policy(ClusterId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the Amazon EMR cluster for which the auto-termination policy will be fetched. |
Returns the Amazon EMR block public access configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region
Description
Returns the Amazon EMR block public access configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region. For more information see Configure Block Public Access for Amazon EMR in the Amazon EMR Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_get_block_public_access_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_get_block_public_access_configuration()
Provides temporary, HTTP basic credentials that are associated with a given runtime IAM role and used by a cluster with fine-grained access control activated
Description
Provides temporary, HTTP basic credentials that are associated with a given runtime IAM role and used by a cluster with fine-grained access control activated. You can use these credentials to connect to cluster endpoints that support username and password authentication.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_get_cluster_session_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_get_cluster_session_credentials(ClusterId, ExecutionRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster. |
ExecutionRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the runtime role for interactive
workload submission on the cluster. The runtime role can be a
cross-account IAM role. The runtime role ARN is a combination of account
ID, role name, and role type using the following format:
|
Fetches the attached managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Fetches the attached managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_get_managed_scaling_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_get_managed_scaling_policy(ClusterId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the cluster for which the managed scaling policy will be fetched. |
Fetches mapping details for the specified Amazon EMR Studio and identity (user or group)
Description
Fetches mapping details for the specified Amazon EMR Studio and identity (user or group).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_get_studio_session_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_get_studio_session_mapping(
StudioId,
IdentityId = NULL,
IdentityName = NULL,
IdentityType
)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio. |
IdentityId |
The globally unique identifier (GUID) of the user or group. For more
information, see
UserId
and
GroupId
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityName |
The name of the user or group to fetch. For more information, see
UserName
and
DisplayName
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityType |
[required] Specifies whether the identity to fetch is a user or a group. |
Provides information about the bootstrap actions associated with a cluster
Description
Provides information about the bootstrap actions associated with a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_bootstrap_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_bootstrap_actions(ClusterId, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The cluster identifier for the bootstrap actions to list. |
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the next set of results to retrieve. |
Provides the status of all clusters visible to this Amazon Web Services account
Description
Provides the status of all clusters visible to this Amazon Web Services account. Allows you to filter the list of clusters based on certain criteria; for example, filtering by cluster creation date and time or by status. This call returns a maximum of 50 clusters in unsorted order per call, but returns a marker to track the paging of the cluster list across multiple ListClusters calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_clusters(
CreatedAfter = NULL,
CreatedBefore = NULL,
ClusterStates = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CreatedAfter |
The creation date and time beginning value filter for listing clusters. |
CreatedBefore |
The creation date and time end value filter for listing clusters. |
ClusterStates |
The cluster state filters to apply when listing clusters. Clusters that change state while this action runs may be not be returned as expected in the list of clusters. |
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the next set of results to retrieve. |
Lists all available details about the instance fleets in a cluster
Description
Lists all available details about the instance fleets in a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_instance_fleets/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_instance_fleets(ClusterId, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster. |
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the next set of results to retrieve. |
Provides all available details about the instance groups in a cluster
Description
Provides all available details about the instance groups in a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_instance_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_instance_groups(ClusterId, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier of the cluster for which to list the instance groups. |
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the next set of results to retrieve. |
Provides information for all active Amazon EC2 instances and Amazon EC2 instances terminated in the last 30 days, up to a maximum of 2,000
Description
Provides information for all active Amazon EC2 instances and Amazon EC2 instances terminated in the last 30 days, up to a maximum of 2,000. Amazon EC2 instances in any of the following states are considered active: AWAITING_FULFILLMENT, PROVISIONING, BOOTSTRAPPING, RUNNING.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_instances(
ClusterId,
InstanceGroupId = NULL,
InstanceGroupTypes = NULL,
InstanceFleetId = NULL,
InstanceFleetType = NULL,
InstanceStates = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier of the cluster for which to list the instances. |
InstanceGroupId |
The identifier of the instance group for which to list the instances. |
InstanceGroupTypes |
The type of instance group for which to list the instances. |
InstanceFleetId |
The unique identifier of the instance fleet. |
InstanceFleetType |
The node type of the instance fleet. For example MASTER, CORE, or TASK. |
InstanceStates |
A list of instance states that will filter the instances returned with this request. |
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the next set of results to retrieve. |
Provides summaries of all notebook executions
Description
Provides summaries of all notebook executions. You can filter the list based on multiple criteria such as status, time range, and editor id. Returns a maximum of 50 notebook executions and a marker to track the paging of a longer notebook execution list across multiple list_notebook_executions
calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_notebook_executions/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_notebook_executions(
EditorId = NULL,
Status = NULL,
From = NULL,
To = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
ExecutionEngineId = NULL
)
Arguments
EditorId |
The unique ID of the editor associated with the notebook execution. |
Status |
The status filter for listing notebook executions.
|
From |
The beginning of time range filter for listing notebook executions. The default is the timestamp of 30 days ago. |
To |
The end of time range filter for listing notebook executions. The default is the current timestamp. |
Marker |
The pagination token, returned by a previous
|
ExecutionEngineId |
The unique ID of the execution engine. |
Retrieves release labels of Amazon EMR services in the Region where the API is called
Description
Retrieves release labels of Amazon EMR services in the Region where the API is called.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_release_labels/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_release_labels(Filters = NULL, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
Filters |
Filters the results of the request. |
NextToken |
Specifies the next page of results. If |
MaxResults |
Defines the maximum number of release labels to return in a single
response. The default is |
Lists all the security configurations visible to this account, providing their creation dates and times, and their names
Description
Lists all the security configurations visible to this account, providing their creation dates and times, and their names. This call returns a maximum of 50 clusters per call, but returns a marker to track the paging of the cluster list across multiple ListSecurityConfigurations calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_security_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_security_configurations(Marker = NULL)
Arguments
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the set of results to retrieve. |
Provides a list of steps for the cluster in reverse order unless you specify stepIds with the request or filter by StepStates
Description
Provides a list of steps for the cluster in reverse order unless you specify stepIds
with the request or filter by StepStates
. You can specify a maximum of 10 stepIDs
. The CLI automatically paginates results to return a list greater than 50 steps. To return more than 50 steps using the CLI, specify a Marker
, which is a pagination token that indicates the next set of steps to retrieve.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_steps/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_steps(ClusterId, StepStates = NULL, StepIds = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The identifier of the cluster for which to list the steps. |
StepStates |
The filter to limit the step list based on certain states. |
StepIds |
The filter to limit the step list based on the identifier of the steps. You can specify a maximum of ten Step IDs. The character constraint applies to the overall length of the array. |
Marker |
The maximum number of steps that a single |
Returns a list of all user or group session mappings for the Amazon EMR Studio specified by StudioId
Description
Returns a list of all user or group session mappings for the Amazon EMR Studio specified by StudioId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_studio_session_mappings/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_studio_session_mappings(
StudioId = NULL,
IdentityType = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
StudioId |
The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio. |
IdentityType |
Specifies whether to return session mappings for users or groups. If not specified, the results include session mapping details for both users and groups. |
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the set of results to retrieve. |
Returns a list of all Amazon EMR Studios associated with the Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a list of all Amazon EMR Studios associated with the Amazon Web Services account. The list includes details such as ID, Studio Access URL, and creation time for each Studio.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_studios/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_studios(Marker = NULL)
Arguments
Marker |
The pagination token that indicates the set of results to retrieve. |
A list of the instance types that Amazon EMR supports
Description
A list of the instance types that Amazon EMR supports. You can filter the list by Amazon Web Services Region and Amazon EMR release.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_list_supported_instance_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_list_supported_instance_types(ReleaseLabel, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
ReleaseLabel |
[required] The Amazon EMR release label determines the versions of open-source application packages
that Amazon EMR has installed on the cluster. Release labels are in the
format |
Marker |
The pagination token that marks the next set of results to retrieve. |
Modifies the number of steps that can be executed concurrently for the cluster specified using ClusterID
Description
Modifies the number of steps that can be executed concurrently for the cluster specified using ClusterID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_modify_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_modify_cluster(ClusterId, StepConcurrencyLevel = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster. |
StepConcurrencyLevel |
The number of steps that can be executed concurrently. You can specify a
minimum of 1 step and a maximum of 256 steps. We recommend that you do
not change this parameter while steps are running or the
|
Modifies the target On-Demand and target Spot capacities for the instance fleet with the specified InstanceFleetID within the cluster specified using ClusterID
Description
Modifies the target On-Demand and target Spot capacities for the instance fleet with the specified InstanceFleetID within the cluster specified using ClusterID. The call either succeeds or fails atomically.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_modify_instance_fleet/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_modify_instance_fleet(ClusterId, InstanceFleet)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster. |
InstanceFleet |
[required] The configuration parameters of the instance fleet. |
ModifyInstanceGroups modifies the number of nodes and configuration settings of an instance group
Description
ModifyInstanceGroups modifies the number of nodes and configuration settings of an instance group. The input parameters include the new target instance count for the group and the instance group ID. The call will either succeed or fail atomically.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_modify_instance_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_modify_instance_groups(ClusterId = NULL, InstanceGroups = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
The ID of the cluster to which the instance group belongs. |
InstanceGroups |
Instance groups to change. |
Creates or updates an automatic scaling policy for a core instance group or task instance group in an Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Creates or updates an automatic scaling policy for a core instance group or task instance group in an Amazon EMR cluster. The automatic scaling policy defines how an instance group dynamically adds and terminates Amazon EC2 instances in response to the value of a CloudWatch metric.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_put_auto_scaling_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_put_auto_scaling_policy(ClusterId, InstanceGroupId, AutoScalingPolicy)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of a cluster. The instance group to which the automatic scaling policy is applied is within this cluster. |
InstanceGroupId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the instance group to which the automatic scaling policy is applied. |
AutoScalingPolicy |
[required] Specifies the definition of the automatic scaling policy. |
Auto-termination is supported in Amazon EMR releases 5
Description
Auto-termination is supported in Amazon EMR releases 5.30.0 and 6.1.0 and later. For more information, see Using an auto-termination policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_put_auto_termination_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_put_auto_termination_policy(ClusterId, AutoTerminationPolicy = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the Amazon EMR cluster to which the auto-termination policy will be attached. |
AutoTerminationPolicy |
Specifies the auto-termination policy to attach to the cluster. |
Creates or updates an Amazon EMR block public access configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region
Description
Creates or updates an Amazon EMR block public access configuration for your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region. For more information see Configure Block Public Access for Amazon EMR in the Amazon EMR Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_put_block_public_access_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_put_block_public_access_configuration(BlockPublicAccessConfiguration)
Arguments
BlockPublicAccessConfiguration |
[required] A configuration for Amazon EMR block public access. The configuration
applies to all clusters created in your account for the current Region.
The configuration specifies whether block public access is enabled. If
block public access is enabled, security groups associated with the
cluster cannot have rules that allow inbound traffic from 0.0.0.0/0 or
::/0 on a port, unless the port is specified as an exception using
For accounts that created clusters in a Region before November 25, 2019, block public access is disabled by default in that Region. To use this feature, you must manually enable and configure it. For accounts that did not create an Amazon EMR cluster in a Region before this date, block public access is enabled by default in that Region. |
Creates or updates a managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Creates or updates a managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster. The managed scaling policy defines the limits for resources, such as Amazon EC2 instances that can be added or terminated from a cluster. The policy only applies to the core and task nodes. The master node cannot be scaled after initial configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_put_managed_scaling_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_put_managed_scaling_policy(ClusterId, ManagedScalingPolicy)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of an Amazon EMR cluster where the managed scaling policy is attached. |
ManagedScalingPolicy |
[required] Specifies the constraints for the managed scaling policy. |
Removes an automatic scaling policy from a specified instance group within an Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Removes an automatic scaling policy from a specified instance group within an Amazon EMR cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_remove_auto_scaling_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_remove_auto_scaling_policy(ClusterId, InstanceGroupId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of a cluster. The instance group to which the automatic scaling policy is applied is within this cluster. |
InstanceGroupId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the instance group to which the scaling policy is applied. |
Removes an auto-termination policy from an Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Removes an auto-termination policy from an Amazon EMR cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_remove_auto_termination_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_remove_auto_termination_policy(ClusterId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the Amazon EMR cluster from which the auto-termination policy will be removed. |
Removes a managed scaling policy from a specified Amazon EMR cluster
Description
Removes a managed scaling policy from a specified Amazon EMR cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_remove_managed_scaling_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_remove_managed_scaling_policy(ClusterId)
Arguments
ClusterId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the cluster from which the managed scaling policy will be removed. |
Removes tags from an Amazon EMR resource, such as a cluster or Amazon EMR Studio
Description
Removes tags from an Amazon EMR resource, such as a cluster or Amazon EMR Studio. Tags make it easier to associate resources in various ways, such as grouping clusters to track your Amazon EMR resource allocation costs. For more information, see Tag Clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_remove_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_remove_tags(ResourceId, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] The Amazon EMR resource identifier from which tags will be removed. For example, a cluster identifier or an Amazon EMR Studio ID. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys to remove from the resource. |
RunJobFlow creates and starts running a new cluster (job flow)
Description
RunJobFlow creates and starts running a new cluster (job flow). The cluster runs the steps specified. After the steps complete, the cluster stops and the HDFS partition is lost. To prevent loss of data, configure the last step of the job flow to store results in Amazon S3. If the JobFlowInstancesConfig KeepJobFlowAliveWhenNoSteps
parameter is set to TRUE
, the cluster transitions to the WAITING state rather than shutting down after the steps have completed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_run_job_flow/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_run_job_flow(
Name,
LogUri = NULL,
LogEncryptionKmsKeyId = NULL,
AdditionalInfo = NULL,
AmiVersion = NULL,
ReleaseLabel = NULL,
Instances,
Steps = NULL,
BootstrapActions = NULL,
SupportedProducts = NULL,
NewSupportedProducts = NULL,
Applications = NULL,
Configurations = NULL,
VisibleToAllUsers = NULL,
JobFlowRole = NULL,
ServiceRole = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL,
AutoScalingRole = NULL,
ScaleDownBehavior = NULL,
CustomAmiId = NULL,
EbsRootVolumeSize = NULL,
RepoUpgradeOnBoot = NULL,
KerberosAttributes = NULL,
StepConcurrencyLevel = NULL,
ManagedScalingPolicy = NULL,
PlacementGroupConfigs = NULL,
AutoTerminationPolicy = NULL,
OSReleaseLabel = NULL,
EbsRootVolumeIops = NULL,
EbsRootVolumeThroughput = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job flow. |
LogUri |
The location in Amazon S3 to write the log files of the job flow. If a value is not provided, logs are not created. |
LogEncryptionKmsKeyId |
The KMS key used for encrypting log files. If a value is not provided, the logs remain encrypted by AES-256. This attribute is only available with Amazon EMR releases 5.30.0 and later, excluding Amazon EMR 6.0.0. |
AdditionalInfo |
A JSON string for selecting additional features. |
AmiVersion |
Applies only to Amazon EMR AMI versions 3.x and 2.x. For Amazon EMR
releases 4.0 and later, |
ReleaseLabel |
The Amazon EMR release label, which determines the version of
open-source application packages installed on the cluster. Release
labels are in the form |
Instances |
[required] A specification of the number and type of Amazon EC2 instances. |
Steps |
A list of steps to run. |
BootstrapActions |
A list of bootstrap actions to run before Hadoop starts on the cluster nodes. |
SupportedProducts |
For Amazon EMR releases 3.x and 2.x. For Amazon EMR releases 4.x and later, use Applications. A list of strings that indicates third-party software to use. For more information, see the Amazon EMR Developer Guide. Currently supported values are:
|
NewSupportedProducts |
For Amazon EMR releases 3.x and 2.x. For Amazon EMR releases 4.x and later, use Applications. A list of strings that indicates third-party software to use with the job flow that accepts a user argument list. Amazon EMR accepts and forwards the argument list to the corresponding installation script as bootstrap action arguments. For more information, see "Launch a Job Flow on the MapR Distribution for Hadoop" in the Amazon EMR Developer Guide. Supported values are:
|
Applications |
Applies to Amazon EMR releases 4.0 and later. A case-insensitive list of applications for Amazon EMR to install and configure when launching the cluster. For a list of applications available for each Amazon EMR release version, see the Amazon EMRRelease Guide. |
Configurations |
For Amazon EMR releases 4.0 and later. The list of configurations supplied for the Amazon EMR cluster that you are creating. |
VisibleToAllUsers |
The VisibleToAllUsers parameter is no longer supported. By default, the
value is set to Set this value to When set to |
JobFlowRole |
Also called instance profile and Amazon EC2 role. An IAM role for an
Amazon EMR cluster. The Amazon EC2 instances of the cluster assume this
role. The default role is |
ServiceRole |
The IAM role that Amazon EMR assumes in order to access Amazon Web Services resources on your behalf. If you've created a custom service role path, you must specify it for the service role when you launch your cluster. |
Tags |
A list of tags to associate with a cluster and propagate to Amazon EC2 instances. |
SecurityConfiguration |
The name of a security configuration to apply to the cluster. |
AutoScalingRole |
An IAM role for automatic scaling policies. The default role is
|
ScaleDownBehavior |
Specifies the way that individual Amazon EC2 instances terminate when an
automatic scale-in activity occurs or an instance group is resized.
|
CustomAmiId |
Available only in Amazon EMR releases 5.7.0 and later. The ID of a
custom Amazon EBS-backed Linux AMI. If specified, Amazon EMR uses this
AMI when it launches cluster Amazon EC2 instances. For more information
about custom AMIs in Amazon EMR, see Using a Custom AMI
in the Amazon EMR Management Guide. If omitted, the cluster uses the
base Linux AMI for the For information about creating a custom AMI, see Creating an Amazon EBS-Backed Linux AMI in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide for Linux Instances. For information about finding an AMI ID, see Finding a Linux AMI. |
EbsRootVolumeSize |
The size, in GiB, of the Amazon EBS root device volume of the Linux AMI that is used for each Amazon EC2 instance. Available in Amazon EMR releases 4.x and later. |
RepoUpgradeOnBoot |
Applies only when |
KerberosAttributes |
Attributes for Kerberos configuration when Kerberos authentication is enabled using a security configuration. For more information see Use Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon EMR Management Guide. |
StepConcurrencyLevel |
Specifies the number of steps that can be executed concurrently. The
default value is |
ManagedScalingPolicy |
The specified managed scaling policy for an Amazon EMR cluster. |
PlacementGroupConfigs |
The specified placement group configuration for an Amazon EMR cluster. |
AutoTerminationPolicy |
|
OSReleaseLabel |
Specifies a particular Amazon Linux release for all nodes in a cluster launch RunJobFlow request. If a release is not specified, Amazon EMR uses the latest validated Amazon Linux release for cluster launch. |
EbsRootVolumeIops |
The IOPS, of the Amazon EBS root device volume of the Linux AMI that is used for each Amazon EC2 instance. Available in Amazon EMR releases 6.15.0 and later. |
EbsRootVolumeThroughput |
The throughput, in MiB/s, of the Amazon EBS root device volume of the Linux AMI that is used for each Amazon EC2 instance. Available in Amazon EMR releases 6.15.0 and later. |
You can use the SetKeepJobFlowAliveWhenNoSteps to configure a cluster (job flow) to terminate after the step execution, i
Description
You can use the set_keep_job_flow_alive_when_no_steps
to configure a cluster (job flow) to terminate after the step execution, i.e., all your steps are executed. If you want a transient cluster that shuts down after the last of the current executing steps are completed, you can configure set_keep_job_flow_alive_when_no_steps
to false. If you want a long running cluster, configure set_keep_job_flow_alive_when_no_steps
to true.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_set_keep_job_flow_alive_when_no_steps/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_set_keep_job_flow_alive_when_no_steps(
JobFlowIds,
KeepJobFlowAliveWhenNoSteps
)
Arguments
JobFlowIds |
[required] A list of strings that uniquely identify the clusters to protect. This
identifier is returned by |
KeepJobFlowAliveWhenNoSteps |
[required] A Boolean that indicates whether to terminate the cluster after all steps are executed. |
SetTerminationProtection locks a cluster (job flow) so the Amazon EC2 instances in the cluster cannot be terminated by user intervention, an API call, or in the event of a job-flow error
Description
SetTerminationProtection locks a cluster (job flow) so the Amazon EC2 instances in the cluster cannot be terminated by user intervention, an API call, or in the event of a job-flow error. The cluster still terminates upon successful completion of the job flow. Calling set_termination_protection
on a cluster is similar to calling the Amazon EC2 DisableAPITermination
API on all Amazon EC2 instances in a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_set_termination_protection/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_set_termination_protection(JobFlowIds, TerminationProtected)
Arguments
JobFlowIds |
[required] A list of strings that uniquely identify the clusters to protect. This
identifier is returned by |
TerminationProtected |
[required] A Boolean that indicates whether to protect the cluster and prevent the Amazon EC2 instances in the cluster from shutting down due to API calls, user intervention, or job-flow error. |
Specify whether to enable unhealthy node replacement, which lets Amazon EMR gracefully replace core nodes on a cluster if any nodes become unhealthy
Description
Specify whether to enable unhealthy node replacement, which lets Amazon EMR gracefully replace core nodes on a cluster if any nodes become unhealthy. For example, a node becomes unhealthy if disk usage is above 90%. If unhealthy node replacement is on and TerminationProtected
are off, Amazon EMR immediately terminates the unhealthy core nodes. To use unhealthy node replacement and retain unhealthy core nodes, use to turn on termination protection. In such cases, Amazon EMR adds the unhealthy nodes to a denylist, reducing job interruptions and failures.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_set_unhealthy_node_replacement/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_set_unhealthy_node_replacement(JobFlowIds, UnhealthyNodeReplacement)
Arguments
JobFlowIds |
[required] The list of strings that uniquely identify the clusters for which to
turn on unhealthy node replacement. You can get these identifiers by
running the |
UnhealthyNodeReplacement |
[required] Indicates whether to turn on or turn off graceful unhealthy node replacement. |
The SetVisibleToAllUsers parameter is no longer supported
Description
The SetVisibleToAllUsers parameter is no longer supported. Your cluster may be visible to all users in your account. To restrict cluster access using an IAM policy, see Identity and Access Management for Amazon EMR.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_set_visible_to_all_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_set_visible_to_all_users(JobFlowIds, VisibleToAllUsers)
Arguments
JobFlowIds |
[required] The unique identifier of the job flow (cluster). |
VisibleToAllUsers |
[required] A value of |
Starts a notebook execution
Description
Starts a notebook execution.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_start_notebook_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_start_notebook_execution(
EditorId = NULL,
RelativePath = NULL,
NotebookExecutionName = NULL,
NotebookParams = NULL,
ExecutionEngine,
ServiceRole,
NotebookInstanceSecurityGroupId = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
NotebookS3Location = NULL,
OutputNotebookS3Location = NULL,
OutputNotebookFormat = NULL,
EnvironmentVariables = NULL
)
Arguments
EditorId |
The unique identifier of the Amazon EMR Notebook to use for notebook execution. |
RelativePath |
The path and file name of the notebook file for this execution, relative
to the path specified for the Amazon EMR Notebook. For example, if you
specify a path of |
NotebookExecutionName |
An optional name for the notebook execution. |
NotebookParams |
Input parameters in JSON format passed to the Amazon EMR Notebook at runtime for execution. |
ExecutionEngine |
[required] Specifies the execution engine (cluster) that runs the notebook execution. |
ServiceRole |
[required] The name or ARN of the IAM role that is used as the service role for Amazon EMR (the Amazon EMR role) for the notebook execution. |
NotebookInstanceSecurityGroupId |
The unique identifier of the Amazon EC2 security group to associate with the Amazon EMR Notebook for this notebook execution. |
Tags |
A list of tags associated with a notebook execution. Tags are user-defined key-value pairs that consist of a required key string with a maximum of 128 characters and an optional value string with a maximum of 256 characters. |
NotebookS3Location |
The Amazon S3 location for the notebook execution input. |
OutputNotebookS3Location |
The Amazon S3 location for the notebook execution output. |
OutputNotebookFormat |
The output format for the notebook execution. |
EnvironmentVariables |
The environment variables associated with the notebook execution. |
Stops a notebook execution
Description
Stops a notebook execution.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_stop_notebook_execution/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_stop_notebook_execution(NotebookExecutionId)
Arguments
NotebookExecutionId |
[required] The unique identifier of the notebook execution. |
TerminateJobFlows shuts a list of clusters (job flows) down
Description
TerminateJobFlows shuts a list of clusters (job flows) down. When a job flow is shut down, any step not yet completed is canceled and the Amazon EC2 instances on which the cluster is running are stopped. Any log files not already saved are uploaded to Amazon S3 if a LogUri was specified when the cluster was created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_terminate_job_flows/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_terminate_job_flows(JobFlowIds)
Arguments
JobFlowIds |
[required] A list of job flows to be shut down. |
Updates an Amazon EMR Studio configuration, including attributes such as name, description, and subnets
Description
Updates an Amazon EMR Studio configuration, including attributes such as name, description, and subnets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_update_studio/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_update_studio(
StudioId,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL,
SubnetIds = NULL,
DefaultS3Location = NULL,
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL
)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio to update. |
Name |
A descriptive name for the Amazon EMR Studio. |
Description |
A detailed description to assign to the Amazon EMR Studio. |
SubnetIds |
A list of subnet IDs to associate with the Amazon EMR Studio. The list can include new subnet IDs, but must also include all of the subnet IDs previously associated with the Studio. The list order does not matter. A Studio can have a maximum of 5 subnets. The subnets must belong to the same VPC as the Studio. |
DefaultS3Location |
The Amazon S3 location to back up Workspaces and notebook files for the Amazon EMR Studio. |
EncryptionKeyArn |
The KMS key identifier (ARN) used to encrypt Amazon EMR Studio workspace and notebook files when backed up to Amazon S3. |
Updates the session policy attached to the user or group for the specified Amazon EMR Studio
Description
Updates the session policy attached to the user or group for the specified Amazon EMR Studio.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/emr_update_studio_session_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
emr_update_studio_session_mapping(
StudioId,
IdentityId = NULL,
IdentityName = NULL,
IdentityType,
SessionPolicyArn
)
Arguments
StudioId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon EMR Studio. |
IdentityId |
The globally unique identifier (GUID) of the user or group. For more
information, see
UserId
and
GroupId
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityName |
The name of the user or group to update. For more information, see
UserName
and
DisplayName
in the IAM Identity Center Identity Store API Reference. Either
|
IdentityType |
[required] Specifies whether the identity to update is a user or a group. |
SessionPolicyArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the session policy to associate with the specified user or group. |
AWS EntityResolution
Description
Welcome to the Entity Resolution API Reference.
Entity Resolution is an Amazon Web Services service that provides pre-configured entity resolution capabilities that enable developers and analysts at advertising and marketing companies to build an accurate and complete view of their consumers.
With Entity Resolution, you can match source records containing consumer identifiers, such as name, email address, and phone number. This is true even when these records have incomplete or conflicting identifiers. For example, Entity Resolution can effectively match a source record from a customer relationship management (CRM) system with a source record from a marketing system containing campaign information.
To learn more about Entity Resolution concepts, procedures, and best practices, see the Entity Resolution User Guide.
Usage
entityresolution(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- entityresolution( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_policy_statement | Adds a policy statement object |
batch_delete_unique_id | Deletes multiple unique IDs in a matching workflow |
create_id_mapping_workflow | Creates an IdMappingWorkflow object which stores the configuration of the data processing job to be run |
create_id_namespace | Creates an ID namespace object which will help customers provide metadata explaining their dataset and how to use it |
create_matching_workflow | Creates a MatchingWorkflow object which stores the configuration of the data processing job to be run |
create_schema_mapping | Creates a schema mapping, which defines the schema of the input customer records table |
delete_id_mapping_workflow | Deletes the IdMappingWorkflow with a given name |
delete_id_namespace | Deletes the IdNamespace with a given name |
delete_matching_workflow | Deletes the MatchingWorkflow with a given name |
delete_policy_statement | Deletes the policy statement |
delete_schema_mapping | Deletes the SchemaMapping with a given name |
get_id_mapping_job | Gets the status, metrics, and errors (if there are any) that are associated with a job |
get_id_mapping_workflow | Returns the IdMappingWorkflow with a given name, if it exists |
get_id_namespace | Returns the IdNamespace with a given name, if it exists |
get_match_id | Returns the corresponding Match ID of a customer record if the record has been processed |
get_matching_job | Gets the status, metrics, and errors (if there are any) that are associated with a job |
get_matching_workflow | Returns the MatchingWorkflow with a given name, if it exists |
get_policy | Returns the resource-based policy |
get_provider_service | Returns the ProviderService of a given name |
get_schema_mapping | Returns the SchemaMapping of a given name |
list_id_mapping_jobs | Lists all ID mapping jobs for a given workflow |
list_id_mapping_workflows | Returns a list of all the IdMappingWorkflows that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account |
list_id_namespaces | Returns a list of all ID namespaces |
list_matching_jobs | Lists all jobs for a given workflow |
list_matching_workflows | Returns a list of all the MatchingWorkflows that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account |
list_provider_services | Returns a list of all the ProviderServices that are available in this Amazon Web Services Region |
list_schema_mappings | Returns a list of all the SchemaMappings that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account |
list_tags_for_resource | Displays the tags associated with an Entity Resolution resource |
put_policy | Updates the resource-based policy |
start_id_mapping_job | Starts the IdMappingJob of a workflow |
start_matching_job | Starts the MatchingJob of a workflow |
tag_resource | Assigns one or more tags (key-value pairs) to the specified Entity Resolution resource |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from the specified Entity Resolution resource |
update_id_mapping_workflow | Updates an existing IdMappingWorkflow |
update_id_namespace | Updates an existing ID namespace |
update_matching_workflow | Updates an existing MatchingWorkflow |
update_schema_mapping | Updates a schema mapping |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- entityresolution()
svc$add_policy_statement(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds a policy statement object
Description
Adds a policy statement object. To retrieve a list of existing policy statements, use the get_policy
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_add_policy_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_add_policy_statement(
action,
arn,
condition = NULL,
effect,
principal,
statementId
)
Arguments
action |
[required] The action that the principal can use on the resource. For example, |
arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that will be accessed by the principal. |
condition |
A set of condition keys that you can use in key policies. |
effect |
[required] Determines whether the permissions specified in the policy are to be
allowed ( If you set the value of the |
principal |
[required] The Amazon Web Services service or Amazon Web Services account that can access the resource defined as ARN. |
statementId |
[required] A statement identifier that differentiates the statement from others in the same policy. |
Deletes multiple unique IDs in a matching workflow
Description
Deletes multiple unique IDs in a matching workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_batch_delete_unique_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_batch_delete_unique_id(
inputSource = NULL,
uniqueIds,
workflowName
)
Arguments
inputSource |
The input source for the batch delete unique ID operation. |
uniqueIds |
[required] The unique IDs to delete. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Creates an IdMappingWorkflow object which stores the configuration of the data processing job to be run
Description
Creates an IdMappingWorkflow
object which stores the configuration of the data processing job to be run. Each IdMappingWorkflow
must have a unique workflow name. To modify an existing workflow, use the update_id_mapping_workflow
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_create_id_mapping_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_create_id_mapping_workflow(
description = NULL,
idMappingTechniques,
inputSourceConfig,
outputSourceConfig = NULL,
roleArn = NULL,
tags = NULL,
workflowName
)
Arguments
description |
A description of the workflow. |
idMappingTechniques |
[required] An object which defines the ID mapping technique and any additional configurations. |
inputSourceConfig |
[required] A list of |
outputSourceConfig |
A list of |
roleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role. Entity Resolution assumes this role to create resources on your behalf as part of workflow execution. |
tags |
The tags used to organize, track, or control access for this resource. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. There can't be multiple |
Creates an ID namespace object which will help customers provide metadata explaining their dataset and how to use it
Description
Creates an ID namespace object which will help customers provide metadata explaining their dataset and how to use it. Each ID namespace must have a unique name. To modify an existing ID namespace, use the update_id_namespace
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_create_id_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_create_id_namespace(
description = NULL,
idMappingWorkflowProperties = NULL,
idNamespaceName,
inputSourceConfig = NULL,
roleArn = NULL,
tags = NULL,
type
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the ID namespace. |
idMappingWorkflowProperties |
Determines the properties of |
idNamespaceName |
[required] The name of the ID namespace. |
inputSourceConfig |
A list of |
roleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role. Entity Resolution
assumes this role to access the resources defined in this |
tags |
The tags used to organize, track, or control access for this resource. |
type |
[required] The type of ID namespace. There are two types: The The |
Creates a MatchingWorkflow object which stores the configuration of the data processing job to be run
Description
Creates a MatchingWorkflow
object which stores the configuration of the data processing job to be run. It is important to note that there should not be a pre-existing MatchingWorkflow
with the same name. To modify an existing workflow, utilize the update_matching_workflow
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_create_matching_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_create_matching_workflow(
description = NULL,
incrementalRunConfig = NULL,
inputSourceConfig,
outputSourceConfig,
resolutionTechniques,
roleArn,
tags = NULL,
workflowName
)
Arguments
description |
A description of the workflow. |
incrementalRunConfig |
An object which defines an incremental run type and has only
|
inputSourceConfig |
[required] A list of |
outputSourceConfig |
[required] A list of |
resolutionTechniques |
[required] An object which defines the |
roleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role. Entity Resolution assumes this role to create resources on your behalf as part of workflow execution. |
tags |
The tags used to organize, track, or control access for this resource. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. There can't be multiple |
Creates a schema mapping, which defines the schema of the input customer records table
Description
Creates a schema mapping, which defines the schema of the input customer records table. The SchemaMapping
also provides Entity Resolution with some metadata about the table, such as the attribute types of the columns and which columns to match on.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_create_schema_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_create_schema_mapping(
description = NULL,
mappedInputFields,
schemaName,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
A description of the schema. |
mappedInputFields |
[required] A list of |
schemaName |
[required] The name of the schema. There can't be multiple |
tags |
The tags used to organize, track, or control access for this resource. |
Deletes the IdMappingWorkflow with a given name
Description
Deletes the IdMappingWorkflow
with a given name. This operation will succeed even if a workflow with the given name does not exist.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_delete_id_mapping_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_delete_id_mapping_workflow(workflowName)
Arguments
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow to be deleted. |
Deletes the IdNamespace with a given name
Description
Deletes the IdNamespace
with a given name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_delete_id_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_delete_id_namespace(idNamespaceName)
Arguments
idNamespaceName |
[required] The name of the ID namespace. |
Deletes the MatchingWorkflow with a given name
Description
Deletes the MatchingWorkflow
with a given name. This operation will succeed even if a workflow with the given name does not exist.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_delete_matching_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_delete_matching_workflow(workflowName)
Arguments
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow to be retrieved. |
Deletes the policy statement
Description
Deletes the policy statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_delete_policy_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_delete_policy_statement(arn, statementId)
Arguments
arn |
[required] The ARN of the resource for which the policy need to be deleted. |
statementId |
[required] A statement identifier that differentiates the statement from others in the same policy. |
Deletes the SchemaMapping with a given name
Description
Deletes the SchemaMapping
with a given name. This operation will succeed even if a schema with the given name does not exist. This operation will fail if there is a MatchingWorkflow
object that references the SchemaMapping
in the workflow's InputSourceConfig
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_delete_schema_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_delete_schema_mapping(schemaName)
Arguments
schemaName |
[required] The name of the schema to delete. |
Gets the status, metrics, and errors (if there are any) that are associated with a job
Description
Gets the status, metrics, and errors (if there are any) that are associated with a job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_id_mapping_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_id_mapping_job(jobId, workflowName)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The ID of the job. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Returns the IdMappingWorkflow with a given name, if it exists
Description
Returns the IdMappingWorkflow
with a given name, if it exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_id_mapping_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_id_mapping_workflow(workflowName)
Arguments
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Returns the IdNamespace with a given name, if it exists
Description
Returns the IdNamespace
with a given name, if it exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_id_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_id_namespace(idNamespaceName)
Arguments
idNamespaceName |
[required] The name of the ID namespace. |
Returns the corresponding Match ID of a customer record if the record has been processed
Description
Returns the corresponding Match ID of a customer record if the record has been processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_match_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_match_id(applyNormalization = NULL, record, workflowName)
Arguments
applyNormalization |
Normalizes the attributes defined in the schema in the input data. For
example, if an attribute has an |
record |
[required] The record to fetch the Match ID for. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Gets the status, metrics, and errors (if there are any) that are associated with a job
Description
Gets the status, metrics, and errors (if there are any) that are associated with a job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_matching_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_matching_job(jobId, workflowName)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The ID of the job. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Returns the MatchingWorkflow with a given name, if it exists
Description
Returns the MatchingWorkflow
with a given name, if it exists.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_matching_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_matching_workflow(workflowName)
Arguments
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Returns the resource-based policy
Description
Returns the resource-based policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_policy(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which the policy need to be returned. |
Returns the ProviderService of a given name
Description
Returns the ProviderService
of a given name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_provider_service/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_provider_service(providerName, providerServiceName)
Arguments
providerName |
[required] The name of the provider. This name is typically the company name. |
providerServiceName |
[required] The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the product that the provider service provides. |
Returns the SchemaMapping of a given name
Description
Returns the SchemaMapping of a given name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_get_schema_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_get_schema_mapping(schemaName)
Arguments
schemaName |
[required] The name of the schema to be retrieved. |
Lists all ID mapping jobs for a given workflow
Description
Lists all ID mapping jobs for a given workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_id_mapping_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_id_mapping_jobs(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
workflowName
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of objects returned per page. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow to be retrieved. |
Returns a list of all the IdMappingWorkflows that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a list of all the IdMappingWorkflows
that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_id_mapping_workflows/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_id_mapping_workflows(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of objects returned per page. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
Returns a list of all ID namespaces
Description
Returns a list of all ID namespaces.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_id_namespaces/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_id_namespaces(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
Lists all jobs for a given workflow
Description
Lists all jobs for a given workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_matching_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_matching_jobs(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
workflowName
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of objects returned per page. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow to be retrieved. |
Returns a list of all the MatchingWorkflows that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a list of all the MatchingWorkflows
that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_matching_workflows/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_matching_workflows(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of objects returned per page. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
Returns a list of all the ProviderServices that are available in this Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Returns a list of all the ProviderServices
that are available in this Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_provider_services/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_provider_services(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
providerName = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of objects returned per page. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
providerName |
The name of the provider. This name is typically the company name. |
Returns a list of all the SchemaMappings that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a list of all the SchemaMappings
that have been created for an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_schema_mappings/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_schema_mappings(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of objects returned per page. |
nextToken |
The pagination token from the previous API call. |
Displays the tags associated with an Entity Resolution resource
Description
Displays the tags associated with an Entity Resolution resource. In Entity Resolution, SchemaMapping
, and MatchingWorkflow
can be tagged.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource for which you want to view tags. |
Updates the resource-based policy
Description
Updates the resource-based policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_put_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_put_policy(arn, policy, token = NULL)
Arguments
arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which the policy needs to be updated. |
policy |
[required] The resource-based policy. If you set the value of the |
token |
A unique identifier for the current revision of the policy. |
Starts the IdMappingJob of a workflow
Description
Starts the IdMappingJob
of a workflow. The workflow must have previously been created using the create_id_mapping_workflow
endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_start_id_mapping_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_start_id_mapping_job(outputSourceConfig = NULL, workflowName)
Arguments
outputSourceConfig |
A list of |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the ID mapping job to be retrieved. |
Starts the MatchingJob of a workflow
Description
Starts the MatchingJob
of a workflow. The workflow must have previously been created using the create_matching_workflow
endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_start_matching_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_start_matching_job(workflowName)
Arguments
workflowName |
[required] The name of the matching job to be retrieved. |
Assigns one or more tags (key-value pairs) to the specified Entity Resolution resource
Description
Assigns one or more tags (key-value pairs) to the specified Entity Resolution resource. Tags can help you organize and categorize your resources. You can also use them to scope user permissions by granting a user permission to access or change only resources with certain tag values. In Entity Resolution, SchemaMapping
and MatchingWorkflow
can be tagged. Tags don't have any semantic meaning to Amazon Web Services and are interpreted strictly as strings of characters. You can use the tag_resource
action with a resource that already has tags. If you specify a new tag key, this tag is appended to the list of tags associated with the resource. If you specify a tag key that is already associated with the resource, the new tag value that you specify replaces the previous value for that tag.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource for which you want to view tags. |
tags |
[required] The tags used to organize, track, or control access for this resource. |
Removes one or more tags from the specified Entity Resolution resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from the specified Entity Resolution resource. In Entity Resolution, SchemaMapping
, and MatchingWorkflow
can be tagged.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource for which you want to untag. |
tagKeys |
[required] The list of tag keys to remove from the resource. |
Updates an existing IdMappingWorkflow
Description
Updates an existing IdMappingWorkflow
. This method is identical to create_id_mapping_workflow
, except it uses an HTTP PUT
request instead of a POST
request, and the IdMappingWorkflow
must already exist for the method to succeed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_update_id_mapping_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_update_id_mapping_workflow(
description = NULL,
idMappingTechniques,
inputSourceConfig,
outputSourceConfig = NULL,
roleArn = NULL,
workflowName
)
Arguments
description |
A description of the workflow. |
idMappingTechniques |
[required] An object which defines the ID mapping technique and any additional configurations. |
inputSourceConfig |
[required] A list of |
outputSourceConfig |
A list of |
roleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role. Entity Resolution assumes this role to access Amazon Web Services resources on your behalf. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow. |
Updates an existing ID namespace
Description
Updates an existing ID namespace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_update_id_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_update_id_namespace(
description = NULL,
idMappingWorkflowProperties = NULL,
idNamespaceName,
inputSourceConfig = NULL,
roleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
The description of the ID namespace. |
idMappingWorkflowProperties |
Determines the properties of |
idNamespaceName |
[required] The name of the ID namespace. |
inputSourceConfig |
A list of |
roleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role. Entity Resolution
assumes this role to access the resources defined in this |
Updates an existing MatchingWorkflow
Description
Updates an existing MatchingWorkflow
. This method is identical to create_matching_workflow
, except it uses an HTTP PUT
request instead of a POST
request, and the MatchingWorkflow
must already exist for the method to succeed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_update_matching_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_update_matching_workflow(
description = NULL,
incrementalRunConfig = NULL,
inputSourceConfig,
outputSourceConfig,
resolutionTechniques,
roleArn,
workflowName
)
Arguments
description |
A description of the workflow. |
incrementalRunConfig |
An object which defines an incremental run type and has only
|
inputSourceConfig |
[required] A list of |
outputSourceConfig |
[required] A list of |
resolutionTechniques |
[required] An object which defines the |
roleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role. Entity Resolution assumes this role to create resources on your behalf as part of workflow execution. |
workflowName |
[required] The name of the workflow to be retrieved. |
Updates a schema mapping
Description
Updates a schema mapping.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/entityresolution_update_schema_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
entityresolution_update_schema_mapping(
description = NULL,
mappedInputFields,
schemaName
)
Arguments
description |
A description of the schema. |
mappedInputFields |
[required] A list of |
schemaName |
[required] The name of the schema. There can't be multiple |
Amazon Kinesis Firehose
Description
Amazon Data Firehose
Amazon Data Firehose was previously known as Amazon Kinesis Data Firehose.
Amazon Data Firehose is a fully managed service that delivers real-time streaming data to destinations such as Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), Amazon OpenSearch Service, Amazon Redshift, Splunk, and various other supported destinations.
Usage
firehose(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- firehose( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_delivery_stream | Creates a Firehose stream |
delete_delivery_stream | Deletes a Firehose stream and its data |
describe_delivery_stream | Describes the specified Firehose stream and its status |
list_delivery_streams | Lists your Firehose streams in alphabetical order of their names |
list_tags_for_delivery_stream | Lists the tags for the specified Firehose stream |
put_record | Writes a single data record into an Firehose stream |
put_record_batch | Writes multiple data records into a Firehose stream in a single call, which can achieve higher throughput per producer than when writing single records |
start_delivery_stream_encryption | Enables server-side encryption (SSE) for the Firehose stream |
stop_delivery_stream_encryption | Disables server-side encryption (SSE) for the Firehose stream |
tag_delivery_stream | Adds or updates tags for the specified Firehose stream |
untag_delivery_stream | Removes tags from the specified Firehose stream |
update_destination | Updates the specified destination of the specified Firehose stream |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- firehose()
svc$create_delivery_stream(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a Firehose stream
Description
Creates a Firehose stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_create_delivery_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_create_delivery_stream(
DeliveryStreamName,
DeliveryStreamType = NULL,
DirectPutSourceConfiguration = NULL,
KinesisStreamSourceConfiguration = NULL,
DeliveryStreamEncryptionConfigurationInput = NULL,
S3DestinationConfiguration = NULL,
ExtendedS3DestinationConfiguration = NULL,
RedshiftDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
ElasticsearchDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
AmazonopensearchserviceDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
SplunkDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
HttpEndpointDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
AmazonOpenSearchServerlessDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
MSKSourceConfiguration = NULL,
SnowflakeDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
IcebergDestinationConfiguration = NULL,
DatabaseSourceConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. This name must be unique per Amazon Web Services account in the same Amazon Web Services Region. If the Firehose streams are in different accounts or different Regions, you can have multiple Firehose streams with the same name. |
DeliveryStreamType |
The Firehose stream type. This parameter can be one of the following values:
|
DirectPutSourceConfiguration |
The structure that configures parameters such as |
KinesisStreamSourceConfiguration |
When a Kinesis data stream is used as the source for the Firehose stream, a KinesisStreamSourceConfiguration containing the Kinesis data stream Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and the role ARN for the source stream. |
DeliveryStreamEncryptionConfigurationInput |
Used to specify the type and Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key needed for Server-Side Encryption (SSE). |
S3DestinationConfiguration |
[Deprecated] The destination in Amazon S3. You can specify only one destination. |
ExtendedS3DestinationConfiguration |
The destination in Amazon S3. You can specify only one destination. |
RedshiftDestinationConfiguration |
The destination in Amazon Redshift. You can specify only one destination. |
ElasticsearchDestinationConfiguration |
The destination in Amazon OpenSearch Service. You can specify only one destination. |
AmazonopensearchserviceDestinationConfiguration |
The destination in Amazon OpenSearch Service. You can specify only one destination. |
SplunkDestinationConfiguration |
The destination in Splunk. You can specify only one destination. |
HttpEndpointDestinationConfiguration |
Enables configuring Kinesis Firehose to deliver data to any HTTP endpoint destination. You can specify only one destination. |
Tags |
A set of tags to assign to the Firehose stream. A tag is a key-value pair that you can define and assign to Amazon Web Services resources. Tags are metadata. For example, you can add friendly names and descriptions or other types of information that can help you distinguish the Firehose stream. For more information about tags, see Using Cost Allocation Tags in the Amazon Web Services Billing and Cost Management User Guide. You can specify up to 50 tags when creating a Firehose stream. If you specify tags in the
AccessDeniedException User: arn:aws:sts::x:assumed-role/x/x is not authorized to perform: firehose:TagDeliveryStream on resource: arn:aws:firehose:us-east-1:x:deliverystream/x with an explicit deny in an identity-based policy. For an example IAM policy, see Tag example. |
AmazonOpenSearchServerlessDestinationConfiguration |
The destination in the Serverless offering for Amazon OpenSearch Service. You can specify only one destination. |
MSKSourceConfiguration |
|
SnowflakeDestinationConfiguration |
Configure Snowflake destination |
IcebergDestinationConfiguration |
Configure Apache Iceberg Tables destination. |
DatabaseSourceConfiguration |
The top level object for configuring streams with database as a source. Amazon Data Firehose is in preview release and is subject to change. |
Deletes a Firehose stream and its data
Description
Deletes a Firehose stream and its data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_delete_delivery_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_delete_delivery_stream(DeliveryStreamName, AllowForceDelete = NULL)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. |
AllowForceDelete |
Set this to true if you want to delete the Firehose stream even if Firehose is unable to retire the grant for the CMK. Firehose might be unable to retire the grant due to a customer error, such as when the CMK or the grant are in an invalid state. If you force deletion, you can then use the RevokeGrant operation to revoke the grant you gave to Firehose. If a failure to retire the grant happens due to an Amazon Web Services KMS issue, Firehose keeps retrying the delete operation. The default value is false. |
Describes the specified Firehose stream and its status
Description
Describes the specified Firehose stream and its status. For example, after your Firehose stream is created, call describe_delivery_stream
to see whether the Firehose stream is ACTIVE
and therefore ready for data to be sent to it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_describe_delivery_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_describe_delivery_stream(
DeliveryStreamName,
Limit = NULL,
ExclusiveStartDestinationId = NULL
)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. |
Limit |
The limit on the number of destinations to return. You can have one destination per Firehose stream. |
ExclusiveStartDestinationId |
The ID of the destination to start returning the destination information. Firehose supports one destination per Firehose stream. |
Lists your Firehose streams in alphabetical order of their names
Description
Lists your Firehose streams in alphabetical order of their names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_list_delivery_streams/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_list_delivery_streams(
Limit = NULL,
DeliveryStreamType = NULL,
ExclusiveStartDeliveryStreamName = NULL
)
Arguments
Limit |
The maximum number of Firehose streams to list. The default value is 10. |
DeliveryStreamType |
The Firehose stream type. This can be one of the following values:
This parameter is optional. If this parameter is omitted, Firehose streams of all types are returned. |
ExclusiveStartDeliveryStreamName |
The list of Firehose streams returned by this call to
|
Lists the tags for the specified Firehose stream
Description
Lists the tags for the specified Firehose stream. This operation has a limit of five transactions per second per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_list_tags_for_delivery_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_list_tags_for_delivery_stream(
DeliveryStreamName,
ExclusiveStartTagKey = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream whose tags you want to list. |
ExclusiveStartTagKey |
The key to use as the starting point for the list of tags. If you set
this parameter,
|
Limit |
The number of tags to return. If this number is less than the total
number of tags associated with the Firehose stream, |
Writes a single data record into an Firehose stream
Description
Writes a single data record into an Firehose stream. To write multiple data records into a Firehose stream, use put_record_batch
. Applications using these operations are referred to as producers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_put_record/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_put_record(DeliveryStreamName, Record)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. |
Record |
[required] The record. |
Writes multiple data records into a Firehose stream in a single call, which can achieve higher throughput per producer than when writing single records
Description
Writes multiple data records into a Firehose stream in a single call, which can achieve higher throughput per producer than when writing single records. To write single data records into a Firehose stream, use put_record
. Applications using these operations are referred to as producers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_put_record_batch/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_put_record_batch(DeliveryStreamName, Records)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. |
Records |
[required] One or more records. |
Enables server-side encryption (SSE) for the Firehose stream
Description
Enables server-side encryption (SSE) for the Firehose stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_start_delivery_stream_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_start_delivery_stream_encryption(
DeliveryStreamName,
DeliveryStreamEncryptionConfigurationInput = NULL
)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream for which you want to enable server-side encryption (SSE). |
DeliveryStreamEncryptionConfigurationInput |
Used to specify the type and Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the KMS key needed for Server-Side Encryption (SSE). |
Disables server-side encryption (SSE) for the Firehose stream
Description
Disables server-side encryption (SSE) for the Firehose stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_stop_delivery_stream_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_stop_delivery_stream_encryption(DeliveryStreamName)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream for which you want to disable server-side encryption (SSE). |
Adds or updates tags for the specified Firehose stream
Description
Adds or updates tags for the specified Firehose stream. A tag is a key-value pair that you can define and assign to Amazon Web Services resources. If you specify a tag that already exists, the tag value is replaced with the value that you specify in the request. Tags are metadata. For example, you can add friendly names and descriptions or other types of information that can help you distinguish the Firehose stream. For more information about tags, see Using Cost Allocation Tags in the Amazon Web Services Billing and Cost Management User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_tag_delivery_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_tag_delivery_stream(DeliveryStreamName, Tags)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream to which you want to add the tags. |
Tags |
[required] A set of key-value pairs to use to create the tags. |
Removes tags from the specified Firehose stream
Description
Removes tags from the specified Firehose stream. Removed tags are deleted, and you can't recover them after this operation successfully completes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_untag_delivery_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_untag_delivery_stream(DeliveryStreamName, TagKeys)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys. Each corresponding tag is removed from the delivery stream. |
Updates the specified destination of the specified Firehose stream
Description
Updates the specified destination of the specified Firehose stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/firehose_update_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
firehose_update_destination(
DeliveryStreamName,
CurrentDeliveryStreamVersionId,
DestinationId,
S3DestinationUpdate = NULL,
ExtendedS3DestinationUpdate = NULL,
RedshiftDestinationUpdate = NULL,
ElasticsearchDestinationUpdate = NULL,
AmazonopensearchserviceDestinationUpdate = NULL,
SplunkDestinationUpdate = NULL,
HttpEndpointDestinationUpdate = NULL,
AmazonOpenSearchServerlessDestinationUpdate = NULL,
SnowflakeDestinationUpdate = NULL,
IcebergDestinationUpdate = NULL
)
Arguments
DeliveryStreamName |
[required] The name of the Firehose stream. |
CurrentDeliveryStreamVersionId |
[required] Obtain this value from the |
DestinationId |
[required] The ID of the destination. |
S3DestinationUpdate |
[Deprecated] Describes an update for a destination in Amazon S3. |
ExtendedS3DestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in Amazon S3. |
RedshiftDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in Amazon Redshift. |
ElasticsearchDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in Amazon OpenSearch Service. |
AmazonopensearchserviceDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in Amazon OpenSearch Service. |
SplunkDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in Splunk. |
HttpEndpointDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update to the specified HTTP endpoint destination. |
AmazonOpenSearchServerlessDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in the Serverless offering for Amazon OpenSearch Service. |
SnowflakeDestinationUpdate |
Update to the Snowflake destination configuration settings. |
IcebergDestinationUpdate |
Describes an update for a destination in Apache Iceberg Tables. |
AWS Glue
Description
Glue
Defines the public endpoint for the Glue service.
Usage
glue(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- glue( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_create_partition | Creates one or more partitions in a batch operation |
batch_delete_connection | Deletes a list of connection definitions from the Data Catalog |
batch_delete_partition | Deletes one or more partitions in a batch operation |
batch_delete_table | Deletes multiple tables at once |
batch_delete_table_version | Deletes a specified batch of versions of a table |
batch_get_blueprints | Retrieves information about a list of blueprints |
batch_get_crawlers | Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of crawler names |
batch_get_custom_entity_types | Retrieves the details for the custom patterns specified by a list of names |
batch_get_data_quality_result | Retrieves a list of data quality results for the specified result IDs |
batch_get_dev_endpoints | Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of development endpoint names |
batch_get_jobs | Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of job names |
batch_get_partition | Retrieves partitions in a batch request |
batch_get_table_optimizer | Returns the configuration for the specified table optimizers |
batch_get_triggers | Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of trigger names |
batch_get_workflows | Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of workflow names |
batch_put_data_quality_statistic_annotation | Annotate datapoints over time for a specific data quality statistic |
batch_stop_job_run | Stops one or more job runs for a specified job definition |
batch_update_partition | Updates one or more partitions in a batch operation |
cancel_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run | Cancels the specified recommendation run that was being used to generate rules |
cancel_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run | Cancels a run where a ruleset is being evaluated against a data source |
cancel_ml_task_run | Cancels (stops) a task run |
cancel_statement | Cancels the statement |
check_schema_version_validity | Validates the supplied schema |
create_blueprint | Registers a blueprint with Glue |
create_catalog | Creates a new catalog in the Glue Data Catalog |
create_classifier | Creates a classifier in the user's account |
create_column_statistics_task_settings | Creates settings for a column statistics task |
create_connection | Creates a connection definition in the Data Catalog |
create_crawler | Creates a new crawler with specified targets, role, configuration, and optional schedule |
create_custom_entity_type | Creates a custom pattern that is used to detect sensitive data across the columns and rows of your structured data |
create_database | Creates a new database in a Data Catalog |
create_data_quality_ruleset | Creates a data quality ruleset with DQDL rules applied to a specified Glue table |
create_dev_endpoint | Creates a new development endpoint |
create_integration | Creates a Zero-ETL integration in the caller's account between two resources with Amazon Resource Names (ARNs): the SourceArn and TargetArn |
create_integration_resource_property | This API can be used for setting up the ResourceProperty of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target) |
create_integration_table_properties | This API is used to provide optional override properties for the the tables that need to be replicated |
create_job | Creates a new job definition |
create_ml_transform | Creates an Glue machine learning transform |
create_partition | Creates a new partition |
create_partition_index | Creates a specified partition index in an existing table |
create_registry | Creates a new registry which may be used to hold a collection of schemas |
create_schema | Creates a new schema set and registers the schema definition |
create_script | Transforms a directed acyclic graph (DAG) into code |
create_security_configuration | Creates a new security configuration |
create_session | Creates a new session |
create_table | Creates a new table definition in the Data Catalog |
create_table_optimizer | Creates a new table optimizer for a specific function |
create_trigger | Creates a new trigger |
create_usage_profile | Creates an Glue usage profile |
create_user_defined_function | Creates a new function definition in the Data Catalog |
create_workflow | Creates a new workflow |
delete_blueprint | Deletes an existing blueprint |
delete_catalog | Removes the specified catalog from the Glue Data Catalog |
delete_classifier | Removes a classifier from the Data Catalog |
delete_column_statistics_for_partition | Delete the partition column statistics of a column |
delete_column_statistics_for_table | Retrieves table statistics of columns |
delete_column_statistics_task_settings | Deletes settings for a column statistics task |
delete_connection | Deletes a connection from the Data Catalog |
delete_crawler | Removes a specified crawler from the Glue Data Catalog, unless the crawler state is RUNNING |
delete_custom_entity_type | Deletes a custom pattern by specifying its name |
delete_database | Removes a specified database from a Data Catalog |
delete_data_quality_ruleset | Deletes a data quality ruleset |
delete_dev_endpoint | Deletes a specified development endpoint |
delete_integration | Deletes the specified Zero-ETL integration |
delete_integration_table_properties | Deletes the table properties that have been created for the tables that need to be replicated |
delete_job | Deletes a specified job definition |
delete_ml_transform | Deletes an Glue machine learning transform |
delete_partition | Deletes a specified partition |
delete_partition_index | Deletes a specified partition index from an existing table |
delete_registry | Delete the entire registry including schema and all of its versions |
delete_resource_policy | Deletes a specified policy |
delete_schema | Deletes the entire schema set, including the schema set and all of its versions |
delete_schema_versions | Remove versions from the specified schema |
delete_security_configuration | Deletes a specified security configuration |
delete_session | Deletes the session |
delete_table | Removes a table definition from the Data Catalog |
delete_table_optimizer | Deletes an optimizer and all associated metadata for a table |
delete_table_version | Deletes a specified version of a table |
delete_trigger | Deletes a specified trigger |
delete_usage_profile | Deletes the Glue specified usage profile |
delete_user_defined_function | Deletes an existing function definition from the Data Catalog |
delete_workflow | Deletes a workflow |
describe_connection_type | The DescribeConnectionType API provides full details of the supported options for a given connection type in Glue |
describe_entity | Provides details regarding the entity used with the connection type, with a description of the data model for each field in the selected entity |
describe_inbound_integrations | Returns a list of inbound integrations for the specified integration |
describe_integrations | The API is used to retrieve a list of integrations |
get_blueprint | Retrieves the details of a blueprint |
get_blueprint_run | Retrieves the details of a blueprint run |
get_blueprint_runs | Retrieves the details of blueprint runs for a specified blueprint |
get_catalog | The name of the Catalog to retrieve |
get_catalog_import_status | Retrieves the status of a migration operation |
get_catalogs | Retrieves all catalogs defined in a catalog in the Glue Data Catalog |
get_classifier | Retrieve a classifier by name |
get_classifiers | Lists all classifier objects in the Data Catalog |
get_column_statistics_for_partition | Retrieves partition statistics of columns |
get_column_statistics_for_table | Retrieves table statistics of columns |
get_column_statistics_task_run | Get the associated metadata/information for a task run, given a task run ID |
get_column_statistics_task_runs | Retrieves information about all runs associated with the specified table |
get_column_statistics_task_settings | Gets settings for a column statistics task |
get_connection | Retrieves a connection definition from the Data Catalog |
get_connections | Retrieves a list of connection definitions from the Data Catalog |
get_crawler | Retrieves metadata for a specified crawler |
get_crawler_metrics | Retrieves metrics about specified crawlers |
get_crawlers | Retrieves metadata for all crawlers defined in the customer account |
get_custom_entity_type | Retrieves the details of a custom pattern by specifying its name |
get_database | Retrieves the definition of a specified database |
get_databases | Retrieves all databases defined in a given Data Catalog |
get_data_catalog_encryption_settings | Retrieves the security configuration for a specified catalog |
get_dataflow_graph | Transforms a Python script into a directed acyclic graph (DAG) |
get_data_quality_model | Retrieve the training status of the model along with more information (CompletedOn, StartedOn, FailureReason) |
get_data_quality_model_result | Retrieve a statistic's predictions for a given Profile ID |
get_data_quality_result | Retrieves the result of a data quality rule evaluation |
get_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run | Gets the specified recommendation run that was used to generate rules |
get_data_quality_ruleset | Returns an existing ruleset by identifier or name |
get_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run | Retrieves a specific run where a ruleset is evaluated against a data source |
get_dev_endpoint | Retrieves information about a specified development endpoint |
get_dev_endpoints | Retrieves all the development endpoints in this Amazon Web Services account |
get_entity_records | This API is used to query preview data from a given connection type or from a native Amazon S3 based Glue Data Catalog |
get_integration_resource_property | This API is used for fetching the ResourceProperty of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target) |
get_integration_table_properties | This API is used to retrieve optional override properties for the tables that need to be replicated |
get_job | Retrieves an existing job definition |
get_job_bookmark | Returns information on a job bookmark entry |
get_job_run | Retrieves the metadata for a given job run |
get_job_runs | Retrieves metadata for all runs of a given job definition |
get_jobs | Retrieves all current job definitions |
get_mapping | Creates mappings |
get_ml_task_run | Gets details for a specific task run on a machine learning transform |
get_ml_task_runs | Gets a list of runs for a machine learning transform |
get_ml_transform | Gets an Glue machine learning transform artifact and all its corresponding metadata |
get_ml_transforms | Gets a sortable, filterable list of existing Glue machine learning transforms |
get_partition | Retrieves information about a specified partition |
get_partition_indexes | Retrieves the partition indexes associated with a table |
get_partitions | Retrieves information about the partitions in a table |
get_plan | Gets code to perform a specified mapping |
get_registry | Describes the specified registry in detail |
get_resource_policies | Retrieves the resource policies set on individual resources by Resource Access Manager during cross-account permission grants |
get_resource_policy | Retrieves a specified resource policy |
get_schema | Describes the specified schema in detail |
get_schema_by_definition | Retrieves a schema by the SchemaDefinition |
get_schema_version | Get the specified schema by its unique ID assigned when a version of the schema is created or registered |
get_schema_versions_diff | Fetches the schema version difference in the specified difference type between two stored schema versions in the Schema Registry |
get_security_configuration | Retrieves a specified security configuration |
get_security_configurations | Retrieves a list of all security configurations |
get_session | Retrieves the session |
get_statement | Retrieves the statement |
get_table | Retrieves the Table definition in a Data Catalog for a specified table |
get_table_optimizer | Returns the configuration of all optimizers associated with a specified table |
get_tables | Retrieves the definitions of some or all of the tables in a given Database |
get_table_version | Retrieves a specified version of a table |
get_table_versions | Retrieves a list of strings that identify available versions of a specified table |
get_tags | Retrieves a list of tags associated with a resource |
get_trigger | Retrieves the definition of a trigger |
get_triggers | Gets all the triggers associated with a job |
get_unfiltered_partition_metadata | Retrieves partition metadata from the Data Catalog that contains unfiltered metadata |
get_unfiltered_partitions_metadata | Retrieves partition metadata from the Data Catalog that contains unfiltered metadata |
get_unfiltered_table_metadata | Allows a third-party analytical engine to retrieve unfiltered table metadata from the Data Catalog |
get_usage_profile | Retrieves information about the specified Glue usage profile |
get_user_defined_function | Retrieves a specified function definition from the Data Catalog |
get_user_defined_functions | Retrieves multiple function definitions from the Data Catalog |
get_workflow | Retrieves resource metadata for a workflow |
get_workflow_run | Retrieves the metadata for a given workflow run |
get_workflow_run_properties | Retrieves the workflow run properties which were set during the run |
get_workflow_runs | Retrieves metadata for all runs of a given workflow |
import_catalog_to_glue | Imports an existing Amazon Athena Data Catalog to Glue |
list_blueprints | Lists all the blueprint names in an account |
list_column_statistics_task_runs | List all task runs for a particular account |
list_connection_types | The ListConnectionTypes API provides a discovery mechanism to learn available connection types in Glue |
list_crawlers | Retrieves the names of all crawler resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag |
list_crawls | Returns all the crawls of a specified crawler |
list_custom_entity_types | Lists all the custom patterns that have been created |
list_data_quality_results | Returns all data quality execution results for your account |
list_data_quality_rule_recommendation_runs | Lists the recommendation runs meeting the filter criteria |
list_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_runs | Lists all the runs meeting the filter criteria, where a ruleset is evaluated against a data source |
list_data_quality_rulesets | Returns a paginated list of rulesets for the specified list of Glue tables |
list_data_quality_statistic_annotations | Retrieve annotations for a data quality statistic |
list_data_quality_statistics | Retrieves a list of data quality statistics |
list_dev_endpoints | Retrieves the names of all DevEndpoint resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag |
list_entities | Returns the available entities supported by the connection type |
list_jobs | Retrieves the names of all job resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag |
list_ml_transforms | Retrieves a sortable, filterable list of existing Glue machine learning transforms in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag |
list_registries | Returns a list of registries that you have created, with minimal registry information |
list_schemas | Returns a list of schemas with minimal details |
list_schema_versions | Returns a list of schema versions that you have created, with minimal information |
list_sessions | Retrieve a list of sessions |
list_statements | Lists statements for the session |
list_table_optimizer_runs | Lists the history of previous optimizer runs for a specific table |
list_triggers | Retrieves the names of all trigger resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag |
list_usage_profiles | List all the Glue usage profiles |
list_workflows | Lists names of workflows created in the account |
modify_integration | Modifies a Zero-ETL integration in the caller's account |
put_data_catalog_encryption_settings | Sets the security configuration for a specified catalog |
put_data_quality_profile_annotation | Annotate all datapoints for a Profile |
put_resource_policy | Sets the Data Catalog resource policy for access control |
put_schema_version_metadata | Puts the metadata key value pair for a specified schema version ID |
put_workflow_run_properties | Puts the specified workflow run properties for the given workflow run |
query_schema_version_metadata | Queries for the schema version metadata information |
register_schema_version | Adds a new version to the existing schema |
remove_schema_version_metadata | Removes a key value pair from the schema version metadata for the specified schema version ID |
reset_job_bookmark | Resets a bookmark entry |
resume_workflow_run | Restarts selected nodes of a previous partially completed workflow run and resumes the workflow run |
run_statement | Executes the statement |
search_tables | Searches a set of tables based on properties in the table metadata as well as on the parent database |
start_blueprint_run | Starts a new run of the specified blueprint |
start_column_statistics_task_run | Starts a column statistics task run, for a specified table and columns |
start_column_statistics_task_run_schedule | Starts a column statistics task run schedule |
start_crawler | Starts a crawl using the specified crawler, regardless of what is scheduled |
start_crawler_schedule | Changes the schedule state of the specified crawler to SCHEDULED, unless the crawler is already running or the schedule state is already SCHEDULED |
start_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run | Starts a recommendation run that is used to generate rules when you don't know what rules to write |
start_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run | Once you have a ruleset definition (either recommended or your own), you call this operation to evaluate the ruleset against a data source (Glue table) |
start_export_labels_task_run | Begins an asynchronous task to export all labeled data for a particular transform |
start_import_labels_task_run | Enables you to provide additional labels (examples of truth) to be used to teach the machine learning transform and improve its quality |
start_job_run | Starts a job run using a job definition |
start_ml_evaluation_task_run | Starts a task to estimate the quality of the transform |
start_ml_labeling_set_generation_task_run | Starts the active learning workflow for your machine learning transform to improve the transform's quality by generating label sets and adding labels |
start_trigger | Starts an existing trigger |
start_workflow_run | Starts a new run of the specified workflow |
stop_column_statistics_task_run | Stops a task run for the specified table |
stop_column_statistics_task_run_schedule | Stops a column statistics task run schedule |
stop_crawler | If the specified crawler is running, stops the crawl |
stop_crawler_schedule | Sets the schedule state of the specified crawler to NOT_SCHEDULED, but does not stop the crawler if it is already running |
stop_session | Stops the session |
stop_trigger | Stops a specified trigger |
stop_workflow_run | Stops the execution of the specified workflow run |
tag_resource | Adds tags to a resource |
test_connection | Tests a connection to a service to validate the service credentials that you provide |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a resource |
update_blueprint | Updates a registered blueprint |
update_catalog | Updates an existing catalog's properties in the Glue Data Catalog |
update_classifier | Modifies an existing classifier (a GrokClassifier, an XMLClassifier, a JsonClassifier, or a CsvClassifier, depending on which field is present) |
update_column_statistics_for_partition | Creates or updates partition statistics of columns |
update_column_statistics_for_table | Creates or updates table statistics of columns |
update_column_statistics_task_settings | Updates settings for a column statistics task |
update_connection | Updates a connection definition in the Data Catalog |
update_crawler | Updates a crawler |
update_crawler_schedule | Updates the schedule of a crawler using a cron expression |
update_database | Updates an existing database definition in a Data Catalog |
update_data_quality_ruleset | Updates the specified data quality ruleset |
update_dev_endpoint | Updates a specified development endpoint |
update_integration_resource_property | This API can be used for updating the ResourceProperty of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target) |
update_integration_table_properties | This API is used to provide optional override properties for the tables that need to be replicated |
update_job | Updates an existing job definition |
update_job_from_source_control | Synchronizes a job from the source control repository |
update_ml_transform | Updates an existing machine learning transform |
update_partition | Updates a partition |
update_registry | Updates an existing registry which is used to hold a collection of schemas |
update_schema | Updates the description, compatibility setting, or version checkpoint for a schema set |
update_source_control_from_job | Synchronizes a job to the source control repository |
update_table | Updates a metadata table in the Data Catalog |
update_table_optimizer | Updates the configuration for an existing table optimizer |
update_trigger | Updates a trigger definition |
update_usage_profile | Update an Glue usage profile |
update_user_defined_function | Updates an existing function definition in the Data Catalog |
update_workflow | Updates an existing workflow |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- glue()
svc$batch_create_partition(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates one or more partitions in a batch operation
Description
Creates one or more partitions in a batch operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_create_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_create_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionInputList
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the catalog in which the partition is to be created. Currently, this should be the Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the metadata database in which the partition is to be created. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the metadata table in which the partition is to be created. |
PartitionInputList |
[required] A list of |
Deletes a list of connection definitions from the Data Catalog
Description
Deletes a list of connection definitions from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_delete_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_delete_connection(CatalogId = NULL, ConnectionNameList)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the connections reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
ConnectionNameList |
[required] A list of names of the connections to delete. |
Deletes one or more partitions in a batch operation
Description
Deletes one or more partitions in a batch operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_delete_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_delete_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionsToDelete
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partition to be deleted resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which the table in question resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table that contains the partitions to be deleted. |
PartitionsToDelete |
[required] A list of |
Deletes multiple tables at once
Description
Deletes multiple tables at once.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_delete_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_delete_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TablesToDelete,
TransactionId = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the table resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which the tables to delete reside. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TablesToDelete |
[required] A list of the table to delete. |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to delete the table contents. |
Deletes a specified batch of versions of a table
Description
Deletes a specified batch of versions of a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_delete_table_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_delete_table_version(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
VersionIds
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the tables reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database in the catalog in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
VersionIds |
[required] A list of the IDs of versions to be deleted. A |
Retrieves information about a list of blueprints
Description
Retrieves information about a list of blueprints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_blueprints/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_blueprints(
Names,
IncludeBlueprint = NULL,
IncludeParameterSpec = NULL
)
Arguments
Names |
[required] A list of blueprint names. |
IncludeBlueprint |
Specifies whether or not to include the blueprint in the response. |
IncludeParameterSpec |
Specifies whether or not to include the parameters, as a JSON string, for the blueprint in the response. |
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of crawler names
Description
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of crawler names. After calling the list_crawlers
operation, you can call this operation to access the data to which you have been granted permissions. This operation supports all IAM permissions, including permission conditions that uses tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_crawlers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_crawlers(CrawlerNames)
Arguments
CrawlerNames |
[required] A list of crawler names, which might be the names returned from the
|
Retrieves the details for the custom patterns specified by a list of names
Description
Retrieves the details for the custom patterns specified by a list of names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_custom_entity_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_custom_entity_types(Names)
Arguments
Names |
[required] A list of names of the custom patterns that you want to retrieve. |
Retrieves a list of data quality results for the specified result IDs
Description
Retrieves a list of data quality results for the specified result IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_data_quality_result/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_data_quality_result(ResultIds)
Arguments
ResultIds |
[required] A list of unique result IDs for the data quality results. |
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of development endpoint names
Description
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of development endpoint names. After calling the list_dev_endpoints
operation, you can call this operation to access the data to which you have been granted permissions. This operation supports all IAM permissions, including permission conditions that uses tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_dev_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_dev_endpoints(DevEndpointNames)
Arguments
DevEndpointNames |
[required] The list of |
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of job names
Description
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of job names. After calling the list_jobs
operation, you can call this operation to access the data to which you have been granted permissions. This operation supports all IAM permissions, including permission conditions that uses tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_jobs(JobNames)
Arguments
JobNames |
[required] A list of job names, which might be the names returned from the
|
Retrieves partitions in a batch request
Description
Retrieves partitions in a batch request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionsToGet
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
PartitionsToGet |
[required] A list of partition values identifying the partitions to retrieve. |
Returns the configuration for the specified table optimizers
Description
Returns the configuration for the specified table optimizers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_table_optimizer/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_table_optimizer(Entries)
Arguments
Entries |
[required] A list of |
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of trigger names
Description
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of trigger names. After calling the list_triggers
operation, you can call this operation to access the data to which you have been granted permissions. This operation supports all IAM permissions, including permission conditions that uses tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_triggers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_triggers(TriggerNames)
Arguments
TriggerNames |
[required] A list of trigger names, which may be the names returned from the
|
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of workflow names
Description
Returns a list of resource metadata for a given list of workflow names. After calling the list_workflows
operation, you can call this operation to access the data to which you have been granted permissions. This operation supports all IAM permissions, including permission conditions that uses tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_get_workflows/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_get_workflows(Names, IncludeGraph = NULL)
Arguments
Names |
[required] A list of workflow names, which may be the names returned from the
|
IncludeGraph |
Specifies whether to include a graph when returning the workflow resource metadata. |
Annotate datapoints over time for a specific data quality statistic
Description
Annotate datapoints over time for a specific data quality statistic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_put_data_quality_statistic_annotation/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_put_data_quality_statistic_annotation(
InclusionAnnotations,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
InclusionAnnotations |
[required] A list of |
ClientToken |
Client Token. |
Stops one or more job runs for a specified job definition
Description
Stops one or more job runs for a specified job definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_stop_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_stop_job_run(JobName, JobRunIds)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job definition for which to stop job runs. |
JobRunIds |
[required] A list of the |
Updates one or more partitions in a batch operation
Description
Updates one or more partitions in a batch operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_batch_update_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_batch_update_partition(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseName, TableName, Entries)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the catalog in which the partition is to be updated. Currently, this should be the Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the metadata database in which the partition is to be updated. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the metadata table in which the partition is to be updated. |
Entries |
[required] A list of up to 100 |
Cancels the specified recommendation run that was being used to generate rules
Description
Cancels the specified recommendation run that was being used to generate rules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_cancel_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_cancel_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run(RunId)
Arguments
RunId |
[required] The unique run identifier associated with this run. |
Cancels a run where a ruleset is being evaluated against a data source
Description
Cancels a run where a ruleset is being evaluated against a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_cancel_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_cancel_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run(RunId)
Arguments
RunId |
[required] The unique run identifier associated with this run. |
Cancels (stops) a task run
Description
Cancels (stops) a task run. Machine learning task runs are asynchronous tasks that Glue runs on your behalf as part of various machine learning workflows. You can cancel a machine learning task run at any time by calling cancel_ml_task_run
with a task run's parent transform's TransformID
and the task run's TaskRunId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_cancel_ml_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_cancel_ml_task_run(TransformId, TaskRunId)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
TaskRunId |
[required] A unique identifier for the task run. |
Cancels the statement
Description
Cancels the statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_cancel_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_cancel_statement(SessionId, Id, RequestOrigin = NULL)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The Session ID of the statement to be cancelled. |
Id |
[required] The ID of the statement to be cancelled. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request to cancel the statement. |
Validates the supplied schema
Description
Validates the supplied schema. This call has no side effects, it simply validates using the supplied schema using DataFormat
as the format. Since it does not take a schema set name, no compatibility checks are performed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_check_schema_version_validity/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_check_schema_version_validity(DataFormat, SchemaDefinition)
Arguments
DataFormat |
[required] The data format of the schema definition. Currently |
SchemaDefinition |
[required] The definition of the schema that has to be validated. |
Registers a blueprint with Glue
Description
Registers a blueprint with Glue.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_blueprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_blueprint(Name, Description = NULL, BlueprintLocation, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the blueprint. |
Description |
A description of the blueprint. |
BlueprintLocation |
[required] Specifies a path in Amazon S3 where the blueprint is published. |
Tags |
The tags to be applied to this blueprint. |
Creates a new catalog in the Glue Data Catalog
Description
Creates a new catalog in the Glue Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_catalog(Name, CatalogInput, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the catalog to create. |
CatalogInput |
[required] A |
Tags |
A map array of key-value pairs, not more than 50 pairs. Each key is a UTF-8 string, not less than 1 or more than 128 bytes long. Each value is a UTF-8 string, not more than 256 bytes long. The tags you assign to the catalog. |
Creates a classifier in the user's account
Description
Creates a classifier in the user's account. This can be a GrokClassifier
, an XMLClassifier
, a JsonClassifier
, or a CsvClassifier
, depending on which field of the request is present.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_classifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_classifier(
GrokClassifier = NULL,
XMLClassifier = NULL,
JsonClassifier = NULL,
CsvClassifier = NULL
)
Arguments
GrokClassifier |
A |
XMLClassifier |
An |
JsonClassifier |
A |
CsvClassifier |
A |
Creates settings for a column statistics task
Description
Creates settings for a column statistics task.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_column_statistics_task_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_column_statistics_task_settings(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Role,
Schedule = NULL,
ColumnNameList = NULL,
SampleSize = NULL,
CatalogID = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which to generate column statistics. |
Role |
[required] The role used for running the column statistics. |
Schedule |
A schedule for running the column statistics, specified in CRON syntax. |
ColumnNameList |
A list of column names for which to run statistics. |
SampleSize |
The percentage of data to sample. |
CatalogID |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the database resides. |
SecurityConfiguration |
Name of the security configuration that is used to encrypt CloudWatch logs. |
Tags |
A map of tags. |
Creates a connection definition in the Data Catalog
Description
Creates a connection definition in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_connection(CatalogId = NULL, ConnectionInput, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which to create the connection. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
ConnectionInput |
[required] A |
Tags |
The tags you assign to the connection. |
Creates a new crawler with specified targets, role, configuration, and optional schedule
Description
Creates a new crawler with specified targets, role, configuration, and optional schedule. At least one crawl target must be specified, in the s3Targets
field, the jdbcTargets
field, or the DynamoDBTargets
field.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_crawler/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_crawler(
Name,
Role,
DatabaseName = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Targets,
Schedule = NULL,
Classifiers = NULL,
TablePrefix = NULL,
SchemaChangePolicy = NULL,
RecrawlPolicy = NULL,
LineageConfiguration = NULL,
LakeFormationConfiguration = NULL,
Configuration = NULL,
CrawlerSecurityConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the new crawler. |
Role |
[required] The IAM role or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role used by the new crawler to access customer resources. |
DatabaseName |
The Glue database where results are written, such as:
|
Description |
A description of the new crawler. |
Targets |
[required] A list of collection of targets to crawl. |
Schedule |
A |
Classifiers |
A list of custom classifiers that the user has registered. By default, all built-in classifiers are included in a crawl, but these custom classifiers always override the default classifiers for a given classification. |
TablePrefix |
The table prefix used for catalog tables that are created. |
SchemaChangePolicy |
The policy for the crawler's update and deletion behavior. |
RecrawlPolicy |
A policy that specifies whether to crawl the entire dataset again, or to crawl only folders that were added since the last crawler run. |
LineageConfiguration |
Specifies data lineage configuration settings for the crawler. |
LakeFormationConfiguration |
Specifies Lake Formation configuration settings for the crawler. |
Configuration |
Crawler configuration information. This versioned JSON string allows users to specify aspects of a crawler's behavior. For more information, see Setting crawler configuration options. |
CrawlerSecurityConfiguration |
The name of the |
Tags |
The tags to use with this crawler request. You may use tags to limit access to the crawler. For more information about tags in Glue, see Amazon Web Services Tags in Glue in the developer guide. |
Creates a custom pattern that is used to detect sensitive data across the columns and rows of your structured data
Description
Creates a custom pattern that is used to detect sensitive data across the columns and rows of your structured data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_custom_entity_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_custom_entity_type(
Name,
RegexString,
ContextWords = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for the custom pattern that allows it to be retrieved or deleted later. This name must be unique per Amazon Web Services account. |
RegexString |
[required] A regular expression string that is used for detecting sensitive data in a custom pattern. |
ContextWords |
A list of context words. If none of these context words are found within the vicinity of the regular expression the data will not be detected as sensitive data. If no context words are passed only a regular expression is checked. |
Tags |
A list of tags applied to the custom entity type. |
Creates a data quality ruleset with DQDL rules applied to a specified Glue table
Description
Creates a data quality ruleset with DQDL rules applied to a specified Glue table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_data_quality_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_data_quality_ruleset(
Name,
Description = NULL,
Ruleset,
Tags = NULL,
TargetTable = NULL,
DataQualitySecurityConfiguration = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A unique name for the data quality ruleset. |
Description |
A description of the data quality ruleset. |
Ruleset |
[required] A Data Quality Definition Language (DQDL) ruleset. For more information, see the Glue developer guide. |
Tags |
A list of tags applied to the data quality ruleset. |
TargetTable |
A target table associated with the data quality ruleset. |
DataQualitySecurityConfiguration |
The name of the security configuration created with the data quality encryption option. |
ClientToken |
Used for idempotency and is recommended to be set to a random ID (such as a UUID) to avoid creating or starting multiple instances of the same resource. |
Creates a new database in a Data Catalog
Description
Creates a new database in a Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_database(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseInput, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which to create the database. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseInput |
[required] The metadata for the database. |
Tags |
The tags you assign to the database. |
Creates a new development endpoint
Description
Creates a new development endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_dev_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_dev_endpoint(
EndpointName,
RoleArn,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
SubnetId = NULL,
PublicKey = NULL,
PublicKeys = NULL,
NumberOfNodes = NULL,
WorkerType = NULL,
GlueVersion = NULL,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
ExtraPythonLibsS3Path = NULL,
ExtraJarsS3Path = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
Arguments = NULL
)
Arguments
EndpointName |
[required] The name to be assigned to the new |
RoleArn |
[required] The IAM role for the |
SecurityGroupIds |
Security group IDs for the security groups to be used by the new
|
SubnetId |
The subnet ID for the new |
PublicKey |
The public key to be used by this |
PublicKeys |
A list of public keys to be used by the development endpoints for authentication. The use of this attribute is preferred over a single public key because the public keys allow you to have a different private key per client. If you previously created an endpoint with a public key, you must remove
that key to be able to set a list of public keys. Call the
|
NumberOfNodes |
The number of Glue Data Processing Units (DPUs) to allocate to this
|
WorkerType |
The type of predefined worker that is allocated to the development endpoint. Accepts a value of Standard, G.1X, or G.2X.
Known issue: when a development endpoint is created with the |
GlueVersion |
Glue version determines the versions of Apache Spark and Python that Glue supports. The Python version indicates the version supported for running your ETL scripts on development endpoints. For more information about the available Glue versions and corresponding Spark and Python versions, see Glue version in the developer guide. Development endpoints that are created without specifying a Glue version default to Glue 0.9. You can specify a version of Python support for development endpoints by
using the |
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of workers of a defined The maximum number of workers you can define are 299 for |
ExtraPythonLibsS3Path |
The paths to one or more Python libraries in an Amazon S3 bucket that
should be loaded in your You can only use pure Python libraries with a |
ExtraJarsS3Path |
The path to one or more Java |
SecurityConfiguration |
The name of the |
Tags |
The tags to use with this DevEndpoint. You may use tags to limit access to the DevEndpoint. For more information about tags in Glue, see Amazon Web Services Tags in Glue in the developer guide. |
Arguments |
A map of arguments used to configure the |
Creates a Zero-ETL integration in the caller's account between two resources with Amazon Resource Names (ARNs): the SourceArn and TargetArn
Description
Creates a Zero-ETL integration in the caller's account between two resources with Amazon Resource Names (ARNs): the SourceArn
and TargetArn
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_integration(
IntegrationName,
SourceArn,
TargetArn,
Description = NULL,
DataFilter = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
AdditionalEncryptionContext = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationName |
[required] A unique name for an integration in Glue. |
SourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the source resource for the integration. |
TargetArn |
[required] The ARN of the target resource for the integration. |
Description |
A description of the integration. |
DataFilter |
Selects source tables for the integration using Maxwell filter syntax. |
KmsKeyId |
The ARN of a KMS key used for encrypting the channel. |
AdditionalEncryptionContext |
An optional set of non-secret key–value pairs that contains additional
contextual information for encryption. This can only be provided if
|
Tags |
Metadata assigned to the resource consisting of a list of key-value pairs. |
This API can be used for setting up the ResourceProperty of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target)
Description
This API can be used for setting up the ResourceProperty
of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target). These properties can include the role to access the connection or database. To set both source and target properties the same API needs to be invoked with the Glue connection ARN as ResourceArn
with SourceProcessingProperties
and the Glue database ARN as ResourceArn
with TargetProcessingProperties
respectively.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_integration_resource_property/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_integration_resource_property(
ResourceArn,
SourceProcessingProperties = NULL,
TargetProcessingProperties = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
SourceProcessingProperties |
The resource properties associated with the integration source. |
TargetProcessingProperties |
The resource properties associated with the integration target. |
This API is used to provide optional override properties for the the tables that need to be replicated
Description
This API is used to provide optional override properties for the the tables that need to be replicated. These properties can include properties for filtering and partitioning for the source and target tables. To set both source and target properties the same API need to be invoked with the Glue connection ARN as ResourceArn
with SourceTableConfig
, and the Glue database ARN as ResourceArn
with TargetTableConfig
respectively.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_integration_table_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_integration_table_properties(
ResourceArn,
TableName,
SourceTableConfig = NULL,
TargetTableConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be replicated. |
SourceTableConfig |
A structure for the source table configuration. |
TargetTableConfig |
A structure for the target table configuration. |
Creates a new job definition
Description
Creates a new job definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_job(
Name,
JobMode = NULL,
JobRunQueuingEnabled = NULL,
Description = NULL,
LogUri = NULL,
Role,
ExecutionProperty = NULL,
Command,
DefaultArguments = NULL,
NonOverridableArguments = NULL,
Connections = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL,
AllocatedCapacity = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
NotificationProperty = NULL,
GlueVersion = NULL,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
WorkerType = NULL,
CodeGenConfigurationNodes = NULL,
ExecutionClass = NULL,
SourceControlDetails = NULL,
MaintenanceWindow = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name you assign to this job definition. It must be unique in your account. |
JobMode |
A mode that describes how a job was created. Valid values are:
When the |
JobRunQueuingEnabled |
Specifies whether job run queuing is enabled for the job runs for this job. A value of true means job run queuing is enabled for the job runs. If false or not populated, the job runs will not be considered for queueing. If this field does not match the value set in the job run, then the value from the job run field will be used. |
Description |
Description of the job being defined. |
LogUri |
This field is reserved for future use. |
Role |
[required] The name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role associated with this job. |
ExecutionProperty |
An |
Command |
[required] The |
DefaultArguments |
The default arguments for every run of this job, specified as name-value pairs. You can specify arguments here that your own job-execution script consumes, as well as arguments that Glue itself consumes. Job arguments may be logged. Do not pass plaintext secrets as arguments. Retrieve secrets from a Glue Connection, Secrets Manager or other secret management mechanism if you intend to keep them within the Job. For information about how to specify and consume your own Job arguments, see the Calling Glue APIs in Python topic in the developer guide. For information about the arguments you can provide to this field when configuring Spark jobs, see the Special Parameters Used by Glue topic in the developer guide. For information about the arguments you can provide to this field when configuring Ray jobs, see Using job parameters in Ray jobs in the developer guide. |
NonOverridableArguments |
Arguments for this job that are not overridden when providing job arguments in a job run, specified as name-value pairs. |
Connections |
The connections used for this job. |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry this job if it fails. |
AllocatedCapacity |
This parameter is deprecated. Use The number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) to allocate to this Job. You can allocate a minimum of 2 DPUs; the default is 10. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB of memory. For more information, see the Glue pricing page. |
Timeout |
The job timeout in minutes. This is the maximum time that a job run can
consume resources before it is terminated and enters Jobs must have timeout values less than 7 days or 10080 minutes. Otherwise, the jobs will throw an exception. When the value is left blank, the timeout is defaulted to 2880 minutes. Any existing Glue jobs that had a timeout value greater than 7 days will be defaulted to 7 days. For instance if you have specified a timeout of 20 days for a batch job, it will be stopped on the 7th day. For streaming jobs, if you have set up a maintenance window, it will be restarted during the maintenance window after 7 days. |
MaxCapacity |
For Glue version 1.0 or earlier jobs, using the standard worker type, the number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) that can be allocated when this job runs. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB of memory. For more information, see the Glue pricing page. For Glue version 2.0+ jobs, you cannot specify a Do not set The value that can be allocated for
|
SecurityConfiguration |
The name of the |
Tags |
The tags to use with this job. You may use tags to limit access to the job. For more information about tags in Glue, see Amazon Web Services Tags in Glue in the developer guide. |
NotificationProperty |
Specifies configuration properties of a job notification. |
GlueVersion |
In Spark jobs, Ray jobs should set For more information about the available Glue versions and corresponding Spark and Python versions, see Glue version in the developer guide. Jobs that are created without specifying a Glue version default to Glue 0.9. |
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of workers of a defined |
WorkerType |
The type of predefined worker that is allocated when a job runs. Accepts a value of G.1X, G.2X, G.4X, G.8X or G.025X for Spark jobs. Accepts the value Z.2X for Ray jobs.
|
CodeGenConfigurationNodes |
The representation of a directed acyclic graph on which both the Glue Studio visual component and Glue Studio code generation is based. |
ExecutionClass |
Indicates whether the job is run with a standard or flexible execution class. The standard execution-class is ideal for time-sensitive workloads that require fast job startup and dedicated resources. The flexible execution class is appropriate for time-insensitive jobs whose start and completion times may vary. Only jobs with Glue version 3.0 and above and command type |
SourceControlDetails |
The details for a source control configuration for a job, allowing synchronization of job artifacts to or from a remote repository. |
MaintenanceWindow |
This field specifies a day of the week and hour for a maintenance window for streaming jobs. Glue periodically performs maintenance activities. During these maintenance windows, Glue will need to restart your streaming jobs. Glue will restart the job within 3 hours of the specified maintenance window. For instance, if you set up the maintenance window for Monday at 10:00AM GMT, your jobs will be restarted between 10:00AM GMT to 1:00PM GMT. |
Creates an Glue machine learning transform
Description
Creates an Glue machine learning transform. This operation creates the transform and all the necessary parameters to train it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_ml_transform/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_ml_transform(
Name,
Description = NULL,
InputRecordTables,
Parameters,
Role,
GlueVersion = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
WorkerType = NULL,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
TransformEncryption = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The unique name that you give the transform when you create it. |
Description |
A description of the machine learning transform that is being defined. The default is an empty string. |
InputRecordTables |
[required] A list of Glue table definitions used by the transform. |
Parameters |
[required] The algorithmic parameters that are specific to the transform type used. Conditionally dependent on the transform type. |
Role |
[required] The name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role with the required permissions. The required permissions include both Glue service role permissions to Glue resources, and Amazon S3 permissions required by the transform.
|
GlueVersion |
This value determines which version of Glue this machine learning transform is compatible with. Glue 1.0 is recommended for most customers. If the value is not set, the Glue compatibility defaults to Glue 0.9. For more information, see Glue Versions in the developer guide. |
MaxCapacity |
The number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) that are allocated to task runs for this transform. You can allocate from 2 to 100 DPUs; the default is 10. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB of memory. For more information, see the Glue pricing page.
When the When the |
WorkerType |
The type of predefined worker that is allocated when this task runs. Accepts a value of Standard, G.1X, or G.2X.
|
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of workers of a defined If |
Timeout |
The timeout of the task run for this transform in minutes. This is the
maximum time that a task run for this transform can consume resources
before it is terminated and enters |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry a task for this transform after a task run fails. |
Tags |
The tags to use with this machine learning transform. You may use tags to limit access to the machine learning transform. For more information about tags in Glue, see Amazon Web Services Tags in Glue in the developer guide. |
TransformEncryption |
The encryption-at-rest settings of the transform that apply to accessing user data. Machine learning transforms can access user data encrypted in Amazon S3 using KMS. |
Creates a new partition
Description
Creates a new partition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionInput
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The Amazon Web Services account ID of the catalog in which the partition is to be created. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the metadata database in which the partition is to be created. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the metadata table in which the partition is to be created. |
PartitionInput |
[required] A |
Creates a specified partition index in an existing table
Description
Creates a specified partition index in an existing table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_partition_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_partition_index(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionIndex
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The catalog ID where the table resides. |
DatabaseName |
[required] Specifies the name of a database in which you want to create a partition index. |
TableName |
[required] Specifies the name of a table in which you want to create a partition index. |
PartitionIndex |
[required] Specifies a |
Creates a new registry which may be used to hold a collection of schemas
Description
Creates a new registry which may be used to hold a collection of schemas.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_registry/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_registry(RegistryName, Description = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
RegistryName |
[required] Name of the registry to be created of max length of 255, and may only contain letters, numbers, hyphen, underscore, dollar sign, or hash mark. No whitespace. |
Description |
A description of the registry. If description is not provided, there will not be any default value for this. |
Tags |
Amazon Web Services tags that contain a key value pair and may be searched by console, command line, or API. |
Creates a new schema set and registers the schema definition
Description
Creates a new schema set and registers the schema definition. Returns an error if the schema set already exists without actually registering the version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_schema(
RegistryId = NULL,
SchemaName,
DataFormat,
Compatibility = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SchemaDefinition = NULL
)
Arguments
RegistryId |
This is a wrapper shape to contain the registry identity fields. If this
is not provided, the default registry will be used. The ARN format for
the same will be:
|
SchemaName |
[required] Name of the schema to be created of max length of 255, and may only contain letters, numbers, hyphen, underscore, dollar sign, or hash mark. No whitespace. |
DataFormat |
[required] The data format of the schema definition. Currently |
Compatibility |
The compatibility mode of the schema. The possible values are:
|
Description |
An optional description of the schema. If description is not provided, there will not be any automatic default value for this. |
Tags |
Amazon Web Services tags that contain a key value pair and may be searched by console, command line, or API. If specified, follows the Amazon Web Services tags-on-create pattern. |
SchemaDefinition |
The schema definition using the |
Transforms a directed acyclic graph (DAG) into code
Description
Transforms a directed acyclic graph (DAG) into code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_script/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_script(DagNodes = NULL, DagEdges = NULL, Language = NULL)
Arguments
DagNodes |
A list of the nodes in the DAG. |
DagEdges |
A list of the edges in the DAG. |
Language |
The programming language of the resulting code from the DAG. |
Creates a new security configuration
Description
Creates a new security configuration. A security configuration is a set of security properties that can be used by Glue. You can use a security configuration to encrypt data at rest. For information about using security configurations in Glue, see Encrypting Data Written by Crawlers, Jobs, and Development Endpoints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_security_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_security_configuration(Name, EncryptionConfiguration)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name for the new security configuration. |
EncryptionConfiguration |
[required] The encryption configuration for the new security configuration. |
Creates a new session
Description
Creates a new session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_session(
Id,
Description = NULL,
Role,
Command,
Timeout = NULL,
IdleTimeout = NULL,
DefaultArguments = NULL,
Connections = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
WorkerType = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL,
GlueVersion = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
RequestOrigin = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The ID of the session request. |
Description |
The description of the session. |
Role |
[required] The IAM Role ARN |
Command |
[required] The |
Timeout |
The number of minutes before session times out. Default for Spark ETL jobs is 48 hours (2880 minutes). Consult the documentation for other job types. |
IdleTimeout |
The number of minutes when idle before session times out. Default for Spark ETL jobs is value of Timeout. Consult the documentation for other job types. |
DefaultArguments |
A map array of key-value pairs. Max is 75 pairs. |
Connections |
The number of connections to use for the session. |
MaxCapacity |
The number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) that can be allocated when the job runs. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB memory. |
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of workers of a defined |
WorkerType |
The type of predefined worker that is allocated when a job runs. Accepts a value of G.1X, G.2X, G.4X, or G.8X for Spark jobs. Accepts the value Z.2X for Ray notebooks.
|
SecurityConfiguration |
The name of the SecurityConfiguration structure to be used with the session |
GlueVersion |
The Glue version determines the versions of Apache Spark and Python that Glue supports. The GlueVersion must be greater than 2.0. |
Tags |
The map of key value pairs (tags) belonging to the session. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request. |
Creates a new table definition in the Data Catalog
Description
Creates a new table definition in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableInput,
PartitionIndexes = NULL,
TransactionId = NULL,
OpenTableFormatInput = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which to create the |
DatabaseName |
[required] The catalog database in which to create the new table. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TableInput |
[required] The |
PartitionIndexes |
A list of partition indexes, |
TransactionId |
The ID of the transaction. |
OpenTableFormatInput |
Specifies an |
Creates a new table optimizer for a specific function
Description
Creates a new table optimizer for a specific function.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_table_optimizer/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_table_optimizer(
CatalogId,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Type,
TableOptimizerConfiguration
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database in the catalog in which the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Type |
[required] The type of table optimizer. |
TableOptimizerConfiguration |
[required] A |
Creates a new trigger
Description
Creates a new trigger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_trigger/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_trigger(
Name,
WorkflowName = NULL,
Type,
Schedule = NULL,
Predicate = NULL,
Actions,
Description = NULL,
StartOnCreation = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
EventBatchingCondition = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the trigger. |
WorkflowName |
The name of the workflow associated with the trigger. |
Type |
[required] The type of the new trigger. |
Schedule |
A This field is required when the trigger type is SCHEDULED. |
Predicate |
A predicate to specify when the new trigger should fire. This field is required when the trigger type is |
Actions |
[required] The actions initiated by this trigger when it fires. |
Description |
A description of the new trigger. |
StartOnCreation |
Set to |
Tags |
The tags to use with this trigger. You may use tags to limit access to the trigger. For more information about tags in Glue, see Amazon Web Services Tags in Glue in the developer guide. |
EventBatchingCondition |
Batch condition that must be met (specified number of events received or batch time window expired) before EventBridge event trigger fires. |
Creates an Glue usage profile
Description
Creates an Glue usage profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_usage_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_usage_profile(Name, Description = NULL, Configuration, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the usage profile. |
Description |
A description of the usage profile. |
Configuration |
[required] A |
Tags |
A list of tags applied to the usage profile. |
Creates a new function definition in the Data Catalog
Description
Creates a new function definition in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_user_defined_function/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_user_defined_function(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
FunctionInput
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which to create the function. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which to create the function. |
FunctionInput |
[required] A |
Creates a new workflow
Description
Creates a new workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_create_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_create_workflow(
Name,
Description = NULL,
DefaultRunProperties = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
MaxConcurrentRuns = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name to be assigned to the workflow. It should be unique within your account. |
Description |
A description of the workflow. |
DefaultRunProperties |
A collection of properties to be used as part of each execution of the workflow. Run properties may be logged. Do not pass plaintext secrets as properties. Retrieve secrets from a Glue Connection, Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager or other secret management mechanism if you intend to use them within the workflow run. |
Tags |
The tags to be used with this workflow. |
MaxConcurrentRuns |
You can use this parameter to prevent unwanted multiple updates to data, to control costs, or in some cases, to prevent exceeding the maximum number of concurrent runs of any of the component jobs. If you leave this parameter blank, there is no limit to the number of concurrent workflow runs. |
Deletes an existing blueprint
Description
Deletes an existing blueprint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_blueprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_blueprint(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the blueprint to delete. |
Removes the specified catalog from the Glue Data Catalog
Description
Removes the specified catalog from the Glue Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_catalog(CatalogId)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The ID of the catalog. |
Removes a classifier from the Data Catalog
Description
Removes a classifier from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_classifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_classifier(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the classifier to remove. |
Delete the partition column statistics of a column
Description
Delete the partition column statistics of a column.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_column_statistics_for_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_column_statistics_for_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionValues,
ColumnName
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
PartitionValues |
[required] A list of partition values identifying the partition. |
ColumnName |
[required] Name of the column. |
Retrieves table statistics of columns
Description
Retrieves table statistics of columns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_column_statistics_for_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_column_statistics_for_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
ColumnName
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
ColumnName |
[required] The name of the column. |
Deletes settings for a column statistics task
Description
Deletes settings for a column statistics task.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_column_statistics_task_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_column_statistics_task_settings(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which to delete column statistics. |
Deletes a connection from the Data Catalog
Description
Deletes a connection from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_connection(CatalogId = NULL, ConnectionName)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the connection resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
ConnectionName |
[required] The name of the connection to delete. |
Removes a specified crawler from the Glue Data Catalog, unless the crawler state is RUNNING
Description
Removes a specified crawler from the Glue Data Catalog, unless the crawler state is RUNNING
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_crawler/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_crawler(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the crawler to remove. |
Deletes a custom pattern by specifying its name
Description
Deletes a custom pattern by specifying its name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_custom_entity_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_custom_entity_type(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the custom pattern that you want to delete. |
Deletes a data quality ruleset
Description
Deletes a data quality ruleset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_data_quality_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_data_quality_ruleset(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for the data quality ruleset. |
Removes a specified database from a Data Catalog
Description
Removes a specified database from a Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_database(CatalogId = NULL, Name)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the database resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Name |
[required] The name of the database to delete. For Hive compatibility, this must be all lowercase. |
Deletes a specified development endpoint
Description
Deletes a specified development endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_dev_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_dev_endpoint(EndpointName)
Arguments
EndpointName |
[required] The name of the |
Deletes the specified Zero-ETL integration
Description
Deletes the specified Zero-ETL integration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_integration(IntegrationIdentifier)
Arguments
IntegrationIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the integration. |
Deletes the table properties that have been created for the tables that need to be replicated
Description
Deletes the table properties that have been created for the tables that need to be replicated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_integration_table_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_integration_table_properties(ResourceArn, TableName)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be replicated. |
Deletes a specified job definition
Description
Deletes a specified job definition. If the job definition is not found, no exception is thrown.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_job(JobName)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job definition to delete. |
Deletes an Glue machine learning transform
Description
Deletes an Glue machine learning transform. Machine learning transforms are a special type of transform that use machine learning to learn the details of the transformation to be performed by learning from examples provided by humans. These transformations are then saved by Glue. If you no longer need a transform, you can delete it by calling DeleteMLTransforms
. However, any Glue jobs that still reference the deleted transform will no longer succeed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_ml_transform/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_ml_transform(TransformId)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the transform to delete. |
Deletes a specified partition
Description
Deletes a specified partition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionValues
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partition to be deleted resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which the table in question resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table that contains the partition to be deleted. |
PartitionValues |
[required] The values that define the partition. |
Deletes a specified partition index from an existing table
Description
Deletes a specified partition index from an existing table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_partition_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_partition_index(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
IndexName
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The catalog ID where the table resides. |
DatabaseName |
[required] Specifies the name of a database from which you want to delete a partition index. |
TableName |
[required] Specifies the name of a table from which you want to delete a partition index. |
IndexName |
[required] The name of the partition index to be deleted. |
Delete the entire registry including schema and all of its versions
Description
Delete the entire registry including schema and all of its versions. To get the status of the delete operation, you can call the get_registry
API after the asynchronous call. Deleting a registry will deactivate all online operations for the registry such as the update_registry
, create_schema
, update_schema
, and register_schema_version
APIs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_registry/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_registry(RegistryId)
Arguments
RegistryId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure that may contain the registry name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Deletes a specified policy
Description
Deletes a specified policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_resource_policy(PolicyHashCondition = NULL, ResourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
PolicyHashCondition |
The hash value returned when this policy was set. |
ResourceArn |
The ARN of the Glue resource for the resource policy to be deleted. |
Deletes the entire schema set, including the schema set and all of its versions
Description
Deletes the entire schema set, including the schema set and all of its versions. To get the status of the delete operation, you can call get_schema
API after the asynchronous call. Deleting a registry will deactivate all online operations for the schema, such as the get_schema_by_definition
, and register_schema_version
APIs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_schema(SchemaId)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure that may contain the schema name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Remove versions from the specified schema
Description
Remove versions from the specified schema. A version number or range may be supplied. If the compatibility mode forbids deleting of a version that is necessary, such as BACKWARDS_FULL, an error is returned. Calling the GetSchemaVersions
API after this call will list the status of the deleted versions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_schema_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_schema_versions(SchemaId, Versions)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure that may contain the schema name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Versions |
[required] A version range may be supplied which may be of the format:
|
Deletes a specified security configuration
Description
Deletes a specified security configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_security_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_security_configuration(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the security configuration to delete. |
Deletes the session
Description
Deletes the session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_session(Id, RequestOrigin = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The ID of the session to be deleted. |
RequestOrigin |
The name of the origin of the delete session request. |
Removes a table definition from the Data Catalog
Description
Removes a table definition from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_table(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseName, Name, TransactionId = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the table resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
Name |
[required] The name of the table to be deleted. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to delete the table contents. |
Deletes an optimizer and all associated metadata for a table
Description
Deletes an optimizer and all associated metadata for a table. The optimization will no longer be performed on the table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_table_optimizer/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_table_optimizer(CatalogId, DatabaseName, TableName, Type)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database in the catalog in which the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Type |
[required] The type of table optimizer. |
Deletes a specified version of a table
Description
Deletes a specified version of a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_table_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_table_version(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseName, TableName, VersionId)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the tables reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database in the catalog in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
VersionId |
[required] The ID of the table version to be deleted. A |
Deletes a specified trigger
Description
Deletes a specified trigger. If the trigger is not found, no exception is thrown.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_trigger/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_trigger(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the trigger to delete. |
Deletes the Glue specified usage profile
Description
Deletes the Glue specified usage profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_usage_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_usage_profile(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the usage profile to delete. |
Deletes an existing function definition from the Data Catalog
Description
Deletes an existing function definition from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_user_defined_function/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_user_defined_function(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseName, FunctionName)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the function to be deleted is located. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the function is located. |
FunctionName |
[required] The name of the function definition to be deleted. |
Deletes a workflow
Description
Deletes a workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_delete_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_delete_workflow(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the workflow to be deleted. |
The DescribeConnectionType API provides full details of the supported options for a given connection type in Glue
Description
The describe_connection_type
API provides full details of the supported options for a given connection type in Glue.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_describe_connection_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_describe_connection_type(ConnectionType)
Arguments
ConnectionType |
[required] The name of the connection type to be described. |
Provides details regarding the entity used with the connection type, with a description of the data model for each field in the selected entity
Description
Provides details regarding the entity used with the connection type, with a description of the data model for each field in the selected entity.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_describe_entity/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_describe_entity(
ConnectionName,
CatalogId = NULL,
EntityName,
NextToken = NULL,
DataStoreApiVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
ConnectionName |
[required] The name of the connection that contains the connection type credentials. |
CatalogId |
The catalog ID of the catalog that contains the connection. This can be null, By default, the Amazon Web Services Account ID is the catalog ID. |
EntityName |
[required] The name of the entity that you want to describe from the connection type. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
DataStoreApiVersion |
The version of the API used for the data store. |
Returns a list of inbound integrations for the specified integration
Description
Returns a list of inbound integrations for the specified integration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_describe_inbound_integrations/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_describe_inbound_integrations(
IntegrationArn = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
TargetArn = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the integration. |
Marker |
A token to specify where to start paginating. This is the marker from a previously truncated response. |
MaxRecords |
The total number of items to return in the output. |
TargetArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the target resource in the integration. |
The API is used to retrieve a list of integrations
Description
The API is used to retrieve a list of integrations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_describe_integrations/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_describe_integrations(
IntegrationIdentifier = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Filters = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationIdentifier |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the integration. |
Marker |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. |
MaxRecords |
The total number of items to return in the output. |
Filters |
A list of key and values, to filter down the results. Supported keys are "Status", "IntegrationName", and "SourceArn". IntegrationName is limited to only one value. |
Retrieves the details of a blueprint
Description
Retrieves the details of a blueprint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_blueprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_blueprint(Name, IncludeBlueprint = NULL, IncludeParameterSpec = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the blueprint. |
IncludeBlueprint |
Specifies whether or not to include the blueprint in the response. |
IncludeParameterSpec |
Specifies whether or not to include the parameter specification. |
Retrieves the details of a blueprint run
Description
Retrieves the details of a blueprint run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_blueprint_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_blueprint_run(BlueprintName, RunId)
Arguments
BlueprintName |
[required] The name of the blueprint. |
RunId |
[required] The run ID for the blueprint run you want to retrieve. |
Retrieves the details of blueprint runs for a specified blueprint
Description
Retrieves the details of blueprint runs for a specified blueprint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_blueprint_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_blueprint_runs(BlueprintName, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
BlueprintName |
[required] The name of the blueprint. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
The name of the Catalog to retrieve
Description
The name of the Catalog to retrieve. This should be all lowercase.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_catalog(CatalogId)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The ID of the parent catalog in which the catalog resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services Account Number is used by default. |
Retrieves the status of a migration operation
Description
Retrieves the status of a migration operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_catalog_import_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_catalog_import_status(CatalogId = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the catalog to migrate. Currently, this should be the Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Retrieves all catalogs defined in a catalog in the Glue Data Catalog
Description
Retrieves all catalogs defined in a catalog in the Glue Data Catalog. For a Redshift-federated catalog use case, this operation returns the list of catalogs mapped to Redshift databases in the Redshift namespace catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_catalogs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_catalogs(
ParentCatalogId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Recursive = NULL,
IncludeRoot = NULL
)
Arguments
ParentCatalogId |
The ID of the parent catalog in which the catalog resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services Account Number is used by default. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of catalogs to return in one response. |
Recursive |
Whether to list all catalogs across the catalog hierarchy, starting from
the |
IncludeRoot |
Whether to list the default catalog in the account and region in the
response. Defaults to When the |
Retrieve a classifier by name
Description
Retrieve a classifier by name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_classifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_classifier(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the classifier to retrieve. |
Lists all classifier objects in the Data Catalog
Description
Lists all classifier objects in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_classifiers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_classifiers(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The size of the list to return (optional). |
NextToken |
An optional continuation token. |
Retrieves partition statistics of columns
Description
Retrieves partition statistics of columns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_column_statistics_for_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_column_statistics_for_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionValues,
ColumnNames
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
PartitionValues |
[required] A list of partition values identifying the partition. |
ColumnNames |
[required] A list of the column names. |
Retrieves table statistics of columns
Description
Retrieves table statistics of columns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_column_statistics_for_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_column_statistics_for_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
ColumnNames
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
ColumnNames |
[required] A list of the column names. |
Get the associated metadata/information for a task run, given a task run ID
Description
Get the associated metadata/information for a task run, given a task run ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_column_statistics_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_column_statistics_task_run(ColumnStatisticsTaskRunId)
Arguments
ColumnStatisticsTaskRunId |
[required] The identifier for the particular column statistics task run. |
Retrieves information about all runs associated with the specified table
Description
Retrieves information about all runs associated with the specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_column_statistics_task_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_column_statistics_task_runs(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of the response. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Gets settings for a column statistics task
Description
Gets settings for a column statistics task.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_column_statistics_task_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_column_statistics_task_settings(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which to retrieve column statistics. |
Retrieves a connection definition from the Data Catalog
Description
Retrieves a connection definition from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_connection(
CatalogId = NULL,
Name,
HidePassword = NULL,
ApplyOverrideForComputeEnvironment = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the connection resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Name |
[required] The name of the connection definition to retrieve. |
HidePassword |
Allows you to retrieve the connection metadata without returning the password. For instance, the Glue console uses this flag to retrieve the connection, and does not display the password. Set this parameter when the caller might not have permission to use the KMS key to decrypt the password, but it does have permission to access the rest of the connection properties. |
ApplyOverrideForComputeEnvironment |
For connections that may be used in multiple services, specifies returning properties for the specified compute environment. |
Retrieves a list of connection definitions from the Data Catalog
Description
Retrieves a list of connection definitions from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_connections(
CatalogId = NULL,
Filter = NULL,
HidePassword = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the connections reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Filter |
A filter that controls which connections are returned. |
HidePassword |
Allows you to retrieve the connection metadata without returning the password. For instance, the Glue console uses this flag to retrieve the connection, and does not display the password. Set this parameter when the caller might not have permission to use the KMS key to decrypt the password, but it does have permission to access the rest of the connection properties. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of connections to return in one response. |
Retrieves metadata for a specified crawler
Description
Retrieves metadata for a specified crawler.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_crawler/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_crawler(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the crawler to retrieve metadata for. |
Retrieves metrics about specified crawlers
Description
Retrieves metrics about specified crawlers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_crawler_metrics/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_crawler_metrics(
CrawlerNameList = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CrawlerNameList |
A list of the names of crawlers about which to retrieve metrics. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Retrieves metadata for all crawlers defined in the customer account
Description
Retrieves metadata for all crawlers defined in the customer account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_crawlers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_crawlers(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The number of crawlers to return on each call. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
Retrieves the details of a custom pattern by specifying its name
Description
Retrieves the details of a custom pattern by specifying its name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_custom_entity_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_custom_entity_type(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the custom pattern that you want to retrieve. |
Retrieves the security configuration for a specified catalog
Description
Retrieves the security configuration for a specified catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_catalog_encryption_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_catalog_encryption_settings(CatalogId = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog to retrieve the security configuration for. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Retrieve the training status of the model along with more information (CompletedOn, StartedOn, FailureReason)
Description
Retrieve the training status of the model along with more information (CompletedOn, StartedOn, FailureReason).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_quality_model/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_quality_model(StatisticId = NULL, ProfileId)
Arguments
StatisticId |
The Statistic ID. |
ProfileId |
[required] The Profile ID. |
Retrieve a statistic's predictions for a given Profile ID
Description
Retrieve a statistic's predictions for a given Profile ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_quality_model_result/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_quality_model_result(StatisticId, ProfileId)
Arguments
StatisticId |
[required] The Statistic ID. |
ProfileId |
[required] The Profile ID. |
Retrieves the result of a data quality rule evaluation
Description
Retrieves the result of a data quality rule evaluation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_quality_result/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_quality_result(ResultId)
Arguments
ResultId |
[required] A unique result ID for the data quality result. |
Gets the specified recommendation run that was used to generate rules
Description
Gets the specified recommendation run that was used to generate rules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run(RunId)
Arguments
RunId |
[required] The unique run identifier associated with this run. |
Returns an existing ruleset by identifier or name
Description
Returns an existing ruleset by identifier or name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_quality_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_quality_ruleset(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ruleset. |
Retrieves a specific run where a ruleset is evaluated against a data source
Description
Retrieves a specific run where a ruleset is evaluated against a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run(RunId)
Arguments
RunId |
[required] The unique run identifier associated with this run. |
Retrieves the definition of a specified database
Description
Retrieves the definition of a specified database.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_database(CatalogId = NULL, Name)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the database resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Name |
[required] The name of the database to retrieve. For Hive compatibility, this should be all lowercase. |
Retrieves all databases defined in a given Data Catalog
Description
Retrieves all databases defined in a given Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_databases/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_databases(
CatalogId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ResourceShareType = NULL,
AttributesToGet = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog from which to retrieve |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of databases to return in one response. |
ResourceShareType |
Allows you to specify that you want to list the databases shared with
your account. The allowable values are
|
AttributesToGet |
Specifies the database fields returned by the
|
Transforms a Python script into a directed acyclic graph (DAG)
Description
Transforms a Python script into a directed acyclic graph (DAG).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_dataflow_graph/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_dataflow_graph(PythonScript = NULL)
Arguments
PythonScript |
The Python script to transform. |
Retrieves information about a specified development endpoint
Description
Retrieves information about a specified development endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_dev_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_dev_endpoint(EndpointName)
Arguments
EndpointName |
[required] Name of the |
Retrieves all the development endpoints in this Amazon Web Services account
Description
Retrieves all the development endpoints in this Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_dev_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_dev_endpoints(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum size of information to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
This API is used to query preview data from a given connection type or from a native Amazon S3 based Glue Data Catalog
Description
This API is used to query preview data from a given connection type or from a native Amazon S3 based Glue Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_entity_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_entity_records(
ConnectionName = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
EntityName,
NextToken = NULL,
DataStoreApiVersion = NULL,
ConnectionOptions = NULL,
FilterPredicate = NULL,
Limit,
OrderBy = NULL,
SelectedFields = NULL
)
Arguments
ConnectionName |
The name of the connection that contains the connection type credentials. |
CatalogId |
The catalog ID of the catalog that contains the connection. This can be null, By default, the Amazon Web Services Account ID is the catalog ID. |
EntityName |
[required] Name of the entity that we want to query the preview data from the given connection type. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
DataStoreApiVersion |
The API version of the SaaS connector. |
ConnectionOptions |
Connector options that are required to query the data. |
FilterPredicate |
A filter predicate that you can apply in the query request. |
Limit |
[required] Limits the number of records fetched with the request. |
OrderBy |
A parameter that orders the response preview data. |
SelectedFields |
List of fields that we want to fetch as part of preview data. |
This API is used for fetching the ResourceProperty of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target)
Description
This API is used for fetching the ResourceProperty
of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target)
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_integration_resource_property/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_integration_resource_property(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
This API is used to retrieve optional override properties for the tables that need to be replicated
Description
This API is used to retrieve optional override properties for the tables that need to be replicated. These properties can include properties for filtering and partition for source and target tables.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_integration_table_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_integration_table_properties(ResourceArn, TableName)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be replicated. |
Retrieves an existing job definition
Description
Retrieves an existing job definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_job(JobName)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job definition to retrieve. |
Returns information on a job bookmark entry
Description
Returns information on a job bookmark entry.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_job_bookmark/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_job_bookmark(JobName, RunId = NULL)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job in question. |
RunId |
The unique run identifier associated with this job run. |
Retrieves the metadata for a given job run
Description
Retrieves the metadata for a given job run. Job run history is accessible for 365 days for your workflow and job run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_job_run(JobName, RunId, PredecessorsIncluded = NULL)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] Name of the job definition being run. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the job run. |
PredecessorsIncluded |
True if a list of predecessor runs should be returned. |
Retrieves metadata for all runs of a given job definition
Description
Retrieves metadata for all runs of a given job definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_job_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_job_runs(JobName, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job definition for which to retrieve all job runs. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of the response. |
Retrieves all current job definitions
Description
Retrieves all current job definitions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_jobs(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of the response. |
Creates mappings
Description
Creates mappings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_mapping(Source, Sinks = NULL, Location = NULL)
Arguments
Source |
[required] Specifies the source table. |
Sinks |
A list of target tables. |
Location |
Parameters for the mapping. |
Gets details for a specific task run on a machine learning transform
Description
Gets details for a specific task run on a machine learning transform. Machine learning task runs are asynchronous tasks that Glue runs on your behalf as part of various machine learning workflows. You can check the stats of any task run by calling get_ml_task_run
with the TaskRunID
and its parent transform's TransformID
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_ml_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_ml_task_run(TransformId, TaskRunId)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
TaskRunId |
[required] The unique identifier of the task run. |
Gets a list of runs for a machine learning transform
Description
Gets a list of runs for a machine learning transform. Machine learning task runs are asynchronous tasks that Glue runs on your behalf as part of various machine learning workflows. You can get a sortable, filterable list of machine learning task runs by calling get_ml_task_runs
with their parent transform's TransformID
and other optional parameters as documented in this section.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_ml_task_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_ml_task_runs(
TransformId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filter = NULL,
Sort = NULL
)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
NextToken |
A token for pagination of the results. The default is empty. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Filter |
The filter criteria, in the |
Sort |
The sorting criteria, in the |
Gets an Glue machine learning transform artifact and all its corresponding metadata
Description
Gets an Glue machine learning transform artifact and all its corresponding metadata. Machine learning transforms are a special type of transform that use machine learning to learn the details of the transformation to be performed by learning from examples provided by humans. These transformations are then saved by Glue. You can retrieve their metadata by calling get_ml_transform
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_ml_transform/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_ml_transform(TransformId)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the transform, generated at the time that the transform was created. |
Gets a sortable, filterable list of existing Glue machine learning transforms
Description
Gets a sortable, filterable list of existing Glue machine learning transforms. Machine learning transforms are a special type of transform that use machine learning to learn the details of the transformation to be performed by learning from examples provided by humans. These transformations are then saved by Glue, and you can retrieve their metadata by calling get_ml_transforms
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_ml_transforms/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_ml_transforms(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filter = NULL,
Sort = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A paginated token to offset the results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Filter |
The filter transformation criteria. |
Sort |
The sorting criteria. |
Retrieves information about a specified partition
Description
Retrieves information about a specified partition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_partition(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseName, TableName, PartitionValues)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partition in question resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partition resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partition's table. |
PartitionValues |
[required] The values that define the partition. |
Retrieves the partition indexes associated with a table
Description
Retrieves the partition indexes associated with a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_partition_indexes/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_partition_indexes(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The catalog ID where the table resides. |
DatabaseName |
[required] Specifies the name of a database from which you want to retrieve partition indexes. |
TableName |
[required] Specifies the name of a table for which you want to retrieve the partition indexes. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
Retrieves information about the partitions in a table
Description
Retrieves information about the partitions in a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_partitions/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_partitions(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Expression = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Segment = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ExcludeColumnSchema = NULL,
TransactionId = NULL,
QueryAsOfTime = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
Expression |
An expression that filters the partitions to be returned. The expression uses SQL syntax similar to the SQL Operators: The following are the operators that you can use in the
= Checks whether the values of the two operands are equal; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: Assume 'variable a' holds 10 and 'variable b' holds 20. (a = b) is not true. \< \> Checks whether the values of two operands are equal; if the values are not equal, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \< \> b) is true. \> Checks whether the value of the left operand is greater than the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \> b) is not true. \< Checks whether the value of the left operand is less than the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \< b) is true. \>= Checks whether the value of the left operand is greater than or equal to the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \>= b) is not true. \<= Checks whether the value of the left operand is less than or equal to the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \<= b) is true. AND, OR, IN, BETWEEN, LIKE, NOT, IS NULL Logical operators. Supported Partition Key Types: The following are the supported partition keys.
If an type is encountered that is not valid, an exception is thrown. The following list shows the valid operators on each type. When you
define a crawler, the Sample API Call: |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve these partitions. |
Segment |
The segment of the table's partitions to scan in this request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of partitions to return in a single response. |
ExcludeColumnSchema |
When true, specifies not returning the partition column schema. Useful when you are interested only in other partition attributes such as partition values or location. This approach avoids the problem of a large response by not returning duplicate data. |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to read the partition contents. |
QueryAsOfTime |
The time as of when to read the partition contents. If not set, the most
recent transaction commit time will be used. Cannot be specified along
with |
Gets code to perform a specified mapping
Description
Gets code to perform a specified mapping.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_plan(
Mapping,
Source,
Sinks = NULL,
Location = NULL,
Language = NULL,
AdditionalPlanOptionsMap = NULL
)
Arguments
Mapping |
[required] The list of mappings from a source table to target tables. |
Source |
[required] The source table. |
Sinks |
The target tables. |
Location |
The parameters for the mapping. |
Language |
The programming language of the code to perform the mapping. |
AdditionalPlanOptionsMap |
A map to hold additional optional key-value parameters. Currently, these key-value pairs are supported:
|
Describes the specified registry in detail
Description
Describes the specified registry in detail.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_registry/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_registry(RegistryId)
Arguments
RegistryId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure that may contain the registry name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Retrieves the resource policies set on individual resources by Resource Access Manager during cross-account permission grants
Description
Retrieves the resource policies set on individual resources by Resource Access Manager during cross-account permission grants. Also retrieves the Data Catalog resource policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_resource_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_resource_policies(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Retrieves a specified resource policy
Description
Retrieves a specified resource policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_resource_policy(ResourceArn = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
The ARN of the Glue resource for which to retrieve the resource policy.
If not supplied, the Data Catalog resource policy is returned. Use
|
Describes the specified schema in detail
Description
Describes the specified schema in detail.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_schema(SchemaId)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
Retrieves a schema by the SchemaDefinition
Description
Retrieves a schema by the SchemaDefinition
. The schema definition is sent to the Schema Registry, canonicalized, and hashed. If the hash is matched within the scope of the SchemaName
or ARN (or the default registry, if none is supplied), that schema’s metadata is returned. Otherwise, a 404 or NotFound error is returned. Schema versions in Deleted
statuses will not be included in the results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_schema_by_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_schema_by_definition(SchemaId, SchemaDefinition)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
SchemaDefinition |
[required] The definition of the schema for which schema details are required. |
Get the specified schema by its unique ID assigned when a version of the schema is created or registered
Description
Get the specified schema by its unique ID assigned when a version of the schema is created or registered. Schema versions in Deleted status will not be included in the results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_schema_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_schema_version(
SchemaId = NULL,
SchemaVersionId = NULL,
SchemaVersionNumber = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaId |
This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
SchemaVersionId |
The |
SchemaVersionNumber |
The version number of the schema. |
Fetches the schema version difference in the specified difference type between two stored schema versions in the Schema Registry
Description
Fetches the schema version difference in the specified difference type between two stored schema versions in the Schema Registry.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_schema_versions_diff/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_schema_versions_diff(
SchemaId,
FirstSchemaVersionNumber,
SecondSchemaVersionNumber,
SchemaDiffType
)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
FirstSchemaVersionNumber |
[required] The first of the two schema versions to be compared. |
SecondSchemaVersionNumber |
[required] The second of the two schema versions to be compared. |
SchemaDiffType |
[required] Refers to |
Retrieves a specified security configuration
Description
Retrieves a specified security configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_security_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_security_configuration(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the security configuration to retrieve. |
Retrieves a list of all security configurations
Description
Retrieves a list of all security configurations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_security_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_security_configurations(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Retrieves the session
Description
Retrieves the session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_session(Id, RequestOrigin = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The ID of the session. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request. |
Retrieves the statement
Description
Retrieves the statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_statement(SessionId, Id, RequestOrigin = NULL)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The Session ID of the statement. |
Id |
[required] The Id of the statement. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request. |
Retrieves the Table definition in a Data Catalog for a specified table
Description
Retrieves the Table
definition in a Data Catalog for a specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
Name,
TransactionId = NULL,
QueryAsOfTime = NULL,
IncludeStatusDetails = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the table resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database in the catalog in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
Name |
[required] The name of the table for which to retrieve the definition. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to read the table contents. |
QueryAsOfTime |
The time as of when to read the table contents. If not set, the most
recent transaction commit time will be used. Cannot be specified along
with |
IncludeStatusDetails |
Specifies whether to include status details related to a request to create or update an Glue Data Catalog view. |
Returns the configuration of all optimizers associated with a specified table
Description
Returns the configuration of all optimizers associated with a specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_table_optimizer/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_table_optimizer(CatalogId, DatabaseName, TableName, Type)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database in the catalog in which the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Type |
[required] The type of table optimizer. |
Retrieves a specified version of a table
Description
Retrieves a specified version of a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_table_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_table_version(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
VersionId = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the tables reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database in the catalog in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
VersionId |
The ID value of the table version to be retrieved. A |
Retrieves a list of strings that identify available versions of a specified table
Description
Retrieves a list of strings that identify available versions of a specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_table_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_table_versions(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the tables reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database in the catalog in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of table versions to return in one response. |
Retrieves the definitions of some or all of the tables in a given Database
Description
Retrieves the definitions of some or all of the tables in a given Database
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_tables(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
Expression = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
TransactionId = NULL,
QueryAsOfTime = NULL,
IncludeStatusDetails = NULL,
AttributesToGet = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the tables reside. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database in the catalog whose tables to list. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
Expression |
A regular expression pattern. If present, only those tables whose names match the pattern are returned. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of tables to return in a single response. |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to read the table contents. |
QueryAsOfTime |
The time as of when to read the table contents. If not set, the most
recent transaction commit time will be used. Cannot be specified along
with |
IncludeStatusDetails |
Specifies whether to include status details related to a request to create or update an Glue Data Catalog view. |
AttributesToGet |
Specifies the table fields returned by the
The following are the valid combinations of values:
|
Retrieves a list of tags associated with a resource
Description
Retrieves a list of tags associated with a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_tags(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which to retrieve tags. |
Retrieves the definition of a trigger
Description
Retrieves the definition of a trigger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_trigger/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_trigger(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the trigger to retrieve. |
Gets all the triggers associated with a job
Description
Gets all the triggers associated with a job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_triggers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_triggers(NextToken = NULL, DependentJobName = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
DependentJobName |
The name of the job to retrieve triggers for. The trigger that can start this job is returned, and if there is no such trigger, all triggers are returned. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of the response. |
Retrieves partition metadata from the Data Catalog that contains unfiltered metadata
Description
Retrieves partition metadata from the Data Catalog that contains unfiltered metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_unfiltered_partition_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_unfiltered_partition_metadata(
Region = NULL,
CatalogId,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionValues,
AuditContext = NULL,
SupportedPermissionTypes,
QuerySessionContext = NULL
)
Arguments
Region |
Specified only if the base tables belong to a different Amazon Web Services Region. |
CatalogId |
[required] The catalog ID where the partition resides. |
DatabaseName |
[required] (Required) Specifies the name of a database that contains the partition. |
TableName |
[required] (Required) Specifies the name of a table that contains the partition. |
PartitionValues |
[required] (Required) A list of partition key values. |
AuditContext |
A structure containing Lake Formation audit context information. |
SupportedPermissionTypes |
[required] (Required) A list of supported permission types. |
QuerySessionContext |
A structure used as a protocol between query engines and Lake Formation or Glue. Contains both a Lake Formation generated authorization identifier and information from the request's authorization context. |
Retrieves partition metadata from the Data Catalog that contains unfiltered metadata
Description
Retrieves partition metadata from the Data Catalog that contains unfiltered metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_unfiltered_partitions_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_unfiltered_partitions_metadata(
Region = NULL,
CatalogId,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Expression = NULL,
AuditContext = NULL,
SupportedPermissionTypes,
NextToken = NULL,
Segment = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
QuerySessionContext = NULL
)
Arguments
Region |
Specified only if the base tables belong to a different Amazon Web Services Region. |
CatalogId |
[required] The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is provided, the AWS account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table that contains the partition. |
Expression |
An expression that filters the partitions to be returned. The expression uses SQL syntax similar to the SQL Operators: The following are the operators that you can use in the
= Checks whether the values of the two operands are equal; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: Assume 'variable a' holds 10 and 'variable b' holds 20. (a = b) is not true. \< \> Checks whether the values of two operands are equal; if the values are not equal, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \< \> b) is true. \> Checks whether the value of the left operand is greater than the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \> b) is not true. \< Checks whether the value of the left operand is less than the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \< b) is true. \>= Checks whether the value of the left operand is greater than or equal to the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \>= b) is not true. \<= Checks whether the value of the left operand is less than or equal to the value of the right operand; if yes, then the condition becomes true. Example: (a \<= b) is true. AND, OR, IN, BETWEEN, LIKE, NOT, IS NULL Logical operators. Supported Partition Key Types: The following are the supported partition keys.
If an type is encountered that is not valid, an exception is thrown. |
AuditContext |
A structure containing Lake Formation audit context information. |
SupportedPermissionTypes |
[required] A list of supported permission types. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve these partitions. |
Segment |
The segment of the table's partitions to scan in this request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of partitions to return in a single response. |
QuerySessionContext |
A structure used as a protocol between query engines and Lake Formation or Glue. Contains both a Lake Formation generated authorization identifier and information from the request's authorization context. |
Allows a third-party analytical engine to retrieve unfiltered table metadata from the Data Catalog
Description
Allows a third-party analytical engine to retrieve unfiltered table metadata from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_unfiltered_table_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_unfiltered_table_metadata(
Region = NULL,
CatalogId,
DatabaseName,
Name,
AuditContext = NULL,
SupportedPermissionTypes,
ParentResourceArn = NULL,
RootResourceArn = NULL,
SupportedDialect = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
QuerySessionContext = NULL
)
Arguments
Region |
Specified only if the base tables belong to a different Amazon Web Services Region. |
CatalogId |
[required] The catalog ID where the table resides. |
DatabaseName |
[required] (Required) Specifies the name of a database that contains the table. |
Name |
[required] (Required) Specifies the name of a table for which you are requesting metadata. |
AuditContext |
A structure containing Lake Formation audit context information. |
SupportedPermissionTypes |
[required] Indicates the level of filtering a third-party analytical engine is
capable of enforcing when calling the
Note: Each of these permission types follows a hierarchical order where each subsequent permission type includes all permission of the previous type. Important: If you provide a supported permission type that doesn't match
the user's level of permissions on the table, then Lake Formation raises
an exception. For example, if the third-party engine calling the
|
ParentResourceArn |
The resource ARN of the view. |
RootResourceArn |
The resource ARN of the root view in a chain of nested views. |
SupportedDialect |
A structure specifying the dialect and dialect version used by the query engine. |
Permissions |
The Lake Formation data permissions of the caller on the table. Used to authorize the call when no view context is found. |
QuerySessionContext |
A structure used as a protocol between query engines and Lake Formation or Glue. Contains both a Lake Formation generated authorization identifier and information from the request's authorization context. |
Retrieves information about the specified Glue usage profile
Description
Retrieves information about the specified Glue usage profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_usage_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_usage_profile(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the usage profile to retrieve. |
Retrieves a specified function definition from the Data Catalog
Description
Retrieves a specified function definition from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_user_defined_function/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_user_defined_function(CatalogId = NULL, DatabaseName, FunctionName)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the function to be retrieved is located. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the function is located. |
FunctionName |
[required] The name of the function. |
Retrieves multiple function definitions from the Data Catalog
Description
Retrieves multiple function definitions from the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_user_defined_functions/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_user_defined_functions(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
Pattern,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the functions to be retrieved are located. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
The name of the catalog database where the functions are located. If none is provided, functions from all the databases across the catalog will be returned. |
Pattern |
[required] An optional function-name pattern string that filters the function definitions returned. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of functions to return in one response. |
Retrieves resource metadata for a workflow
Description
Retrieves resource metadata for a workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_workflow(Name, IncludeGraph = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the workflow to retrieve. |
IncludeGraph |
Specifies whether to include a graph when returning the workflow resource metadata. |
Retrieves the metadata for a given workflow run
Description
Retrieves the metadata for a given workflow run. Job run history is accessible for 90 days for your workflow and job run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_workflow_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_workflow_run(Name, RunId, IncludeGraph = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the workflow being run. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the workflow run. |
IncludeGraph |
Specifies whether to include the workflow graph in response or not. |
Retrieves the workflow run properties which were set during the run
Description
Retrieves the workflow run properties which were set during the run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_workflow_run_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_workflow_run_properties(Name, RunId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the workflow which was run. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the workflow run whose run properties should be returned. |
Retrieves metadata for all runs of a given workflow
Description
Retrieves metadata for all runs of a given workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_get_workflow_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_get_workflow_runs(
Name,
IncludeGraph = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the workflow whose metadata of runs should be returned. |
IncludeGraph |
Specifies whether to include the workflow graph in response or not. |
NextToken |
The maximum size of the response. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of workflow runs to be included in the response. |
Imports an existing Amazon Athena Data Catalog to Glue
Description
Imports an existing Amazon Athena Data Catalog to Glue.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_import_catalog_to_glue/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_import_catalog_to_glue(CatalogId = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the catalog to import. Currently, this should be the Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Lists all the blueprint names in an account
Description
Lists all the blueprint names in an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_blueprints/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_blueprints(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Tags |
Filters the list by an Amazon Web Services resource tag. |
List all task runs for a particular account
Description
List all task runs for a particular account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_column_statistics_task_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_column_statistics_task_runs(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum size of the response. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
The ListConnectionTypes API provides a discovery mechanism to learn available connection types in Glue
Description
The list_connection_types
API provides a discovery mechanism to learn available connection types in Glue. The response contains a list of connection types with high-level details of what is supported for each connection type. The connection types listed are the set of supported options for the ConnectionType
value in the create_connection
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_connection_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_connection_types(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Retrieves the names of all crawler resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag
Description
Retrieves the names of all crawler resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag. This operation allows you to see which resources are available in your account, and their names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_crawlers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_crawlers(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
Tags |
Specifies to return only these tagged resources. |
Returns all the crawls of a specified crawler
Description
Returns all the crawls of a specified crawler. Returns only the crawls that have occurred since the launch date of the crawler history feature, and only retains up to 12 months of crawls. Older crawls will not be returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_crawls/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_crawls(
CrawlerName,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CrawlerName |
[required] The name of the crawler whose runs you want to retrieve. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. The default is 20, and maximum is 100. |
Filters |
Filters the crawls by the criteria you specify in a list of
|
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Lists all the custom patterns that have been created
Description
Lists all the custom patterns that have been created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_custom_entity_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_custom_entity_types(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A paginated token to offset the results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pair tags. |
Returns all data quality execution results for your account
Description
Returns all data quality execution results for your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_data_quality_results/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_data_quality_results(
Filter = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
The filter criteria. |
NextToken |
A paginated token to offset the results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Lists the recommendation runs meeting the filter criteria
Description
Lists the recommendation runs meeting the filter criteria.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_data_quality_rule_recommendation_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_data_quality_rule_recommendation_runs(
Filter = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
The filter criteria. |
NextToken |
A paginated token to offset the results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Lists all the runs meeting the filter criteria, where a ruleset is evaluated against a data source
Description
Lists all the runs meeting the filter criteria, where a ruleset is evaluated against a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_runs(
Filter = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
The filter criteria. |
NextToken |
A paginated token to offset the results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Returns a paginated list of rulesets for the specified list of Glue tables
Description
Returns a paginated list of rulesets for the specified list of Glue tables.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_data_quality_rulesets/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_data_quality_rulesets(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filter = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A paginated token to offset the results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Filter |
The filter criteria. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pair tags. |
Retrieve annotations for a data quality statistic
Description
Retrieve annotations for a data quality statistic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_data_quality_statistic_annotations/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_data_quality_statistic_annotations(
StatisticId = NULL,
ProfileId = NULL,
TimestampFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
StatisticId |
The Statistic ID. |
ProfileId |
The Profile ID. |
TimestampFilter |
A timestamp filter. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to retrieve the next set of results. |
Retrieves a list of data quality statistics
Description
Retrieves a list of data quality statistics.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_data_quality_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_data_quality_statistics(
StatisticId = NULL,
ProfileId = NULL,
TimestampFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
StatisticId |
The Statistic ID. |
ProfileId |
The Profile ID. |
TimestampFilter |
A timestamp filter. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. |
Retrieves the names of all DevEndpoint resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag
Description
Retrieves the names of all DevEndpoint
resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag. This operation allows you to see which resources are available in your account, and their names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_dev_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_dev_endpoints(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Tags |
Specifies to return only these tagged resources. |
Returns the available entities supported by the connection type
Description
Returns the available entities supported by the connection type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_entities/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_entities(
ConnectionName = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
ParentEntityName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
DataStoreApiVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
ConnectionName |
A name for the connection that has required credentials to query any connection type. |
CatalogId |
The catalog ID of the catalog that contains the connection. This can be null, By default, the Amazon Web Services Account ID is the catalog ID. |
ParentEntityName |
Name of the parent entity for which you want to list the children. This parameter takes a fully-qualified path of the entity in order to list the child entities. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
DataStoreApiVersion |
The API version of the SaaS connector. |
Retrieves the names of all job resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag
Description
Retrieves the names of all job resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag. This operation allows you to see which resources are available in your account, and their names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_jobs(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Tags |
Specifies to return only these tagged resources. |
Retrieves a sortable, filterable list of existing Glue machine learning transforms in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag
Description
Retrieves a sortable, filterable list of existing Glue machine learning transforms in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag. This operation takes the optional Tags
field, which you can use as a filter of the responses so that tagged resources can be retrieved as a group. If you choose to use tag filtering, only resources with the tags are retrieved.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_ml_transforms/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_ml_transforms(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Filter = NULL,
Sort = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Filter |
A |
Sort |
A |
Tags |
Specifies to return only these tagged resources. |
Returns a list of registries that you have created, with minimal registry information
Description
Returns a list of registries that you have created, with minimal registry information. Registries in the Deleting
status will not be included in the results. Empty results will be returned if there are no registries available.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_registries/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_registries(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
Maximum number of results required per page. If the value is not supplied, this will be defaulted to 25 per page. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Returns a list of schema versions that you have created, with minimal information
Description
Returns a list of schema versions that you have created, with minimal information. Schema versions in Deleted status will not be included in the results. Empty results will be returned if there are no schema versions available.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_schema_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_schema_versions(SchemaId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
MaxResults |
Maximum number of results required per page. If the value is not supplied, this will be defaulted to 25 per page. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Returns a list of schemas with minimal details
Description
Returns a list of schemas with minimal details. Schemas in Deleting status will not be included in the results. Empty results will be returned if there are no schemas available.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_schemas/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_schemas(RegistryId = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
RegistryId |
A wrapper structure that may contain the registry name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of results required per page. If the value is not supplied, this will be defaulted to 25 per page. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Retrieve a list of sessions
Description
Retrieve a list of sessions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_sessions(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
RequestOrigin = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more result. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results. |
Tags |
Tags belonging to the session. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request. |
Lists statements for the session
Description
Lists statements for the session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_statements/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_statements(SessionId, RequestOrigin = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The Session ID of the statements. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request to list statements. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Lists the history of previous optimizer runs for a specific table
Description
Lists the history of previous optimizer runs for a specific table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_table_optimizer_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_table_optimizer_runs(
CatalogId,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Type,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database in the catalog in which the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Type |
[required] The type of table optimizer. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of optimizer runs to return on each call. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Retrieves the names of all trigger resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag
Description
Retrieves the names of all trigger resources in this Amazon Web Services account, or the resources with the specified tag. This operation allows you to see which resources are available in your account, and their names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_triggers/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_triggers(
NextToken = NULL,
DependentJobName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
DependentJobName |
The name of the job for which to retrieve triggers. The trigger that can start this job is returned. If there is no such trigger, all triggers are returned. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Tags |
Specifies to return only these tagged resources. |
List all the Glue usage profiles
Description
List all the Glue usage profiles.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_usage_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_usage_profiles(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of usage profiles to return in a single response. |
Lists names of workflows created in the account
Description
Lists names of workflows created in the account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_list_workflows/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_list_workflows(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of a list to return. |
Modifies a Zero-ETL integration in the caller's account
Description
Modifies a Zero-ETL integration in the caller's account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_modify_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_modify_integration(
IntegrationIdentifier,
Description = NULL,
DataFilter = NULL,
IntegrationName = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the integration. |
Description |
A description of the integration. |
DataFilter |
Selects source tables for the integration using Maxwell filter syntax. |
IntegrationName |
A unique name for an integration in Glue. |
Sets the security configuration for a specified catalog
Description
Sets the security configuration for a specified catalog. After the configuration has been set, the specified encryption is applied to every catalog write thereafter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_put_data_catalog_encryption_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_put_data_catalog_encryption_settings(
CatalogId = NULL,
DataCatalogEncryptionSettings
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog to set the security configuration for. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DataCatalogEncryptionSettings |
[required] The security configuration to set. |
Annotate all datapoints for a Profile
Description
Annotate all datapoints for a Profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_put_data_quality_profile_annotation/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_put_data_quality_profile_annotation(ProfileId, InclusionAnnotation)
Arguments
ProfileId |
[required] The ID of the data quality monitoring profile to annotate. |
InclusionAnnotation |
[required] The inclusion annotation value to apply to the profile. |
Sets the Data Catalog resource policy for access control
Description
Sets the Data Catalog resource policy for access control.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_put_resource_policy(
PolicyInJson,
ResourceArn = NULL,
PolicyHashCondition = NULL,
PolicyExistsCondition = NULL,
EnableHybrid = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyInJson |
[required] Contains the policy document to set, in JSON format. |
ResourceArn |
Do not use. For internal use only. |
PolicyHashCondition |
The hash value returned when the previous policy was set using
|
PolicyExistsCondition |
A value of |
EnableHybrid |
If
Must be set to |
Puts the metadata key value pair for a specified schema version ID
Description
Puts the metadata key value pair for a specified schema version ID. A maximum of 10 key value pairs will be allowed per schema version. They can be added over one or more calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_put_schema_version_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_put_schema_version_metadata(
SchemaId = NULL,
SchemaVersionNumber = NULL,
SchemaVersionId = NULL,
MetadataKeyValue
)
Arguments
SchemaId |
The unique ID for the schema. |
SchemaVersionNumber |
The version number of the schema. |
SchemaVersionId |
The unique version ID of the schema version. |
MetadataKeyValue |
[required] The metadata key's corresponding value. |
Puts the specified workflow run properties for the given workflow run
Description
Puts the specified workflow run properties for the given workflow run. If a property already exists for the specified run, then it overrides the value otherwise adds the property to existing properties.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_put_workflow_run_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_put_workflow_run_properties(Name, RunId, RunProperties)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the workflow which was run. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the workflow run for which the run properties should be updated. |
RunProperties |
[required] The properties to put for the specified run. Run properties may be logged. Do not pass plaintext secrets as properties. Retrieve secrets from a Glue Connection, Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager or other secret management mechanism if you intend to use them within the workflow run. |
Queries for the schema version metadata information
Description
Queries for the schema version metadata information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_query_schema_version_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_query_schema_version_metadata(
SchemaId = NULL,
SchemaVersionNumber = NULL,
SchemaVersionId = NULL,
MetadataList = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaId |
A wrapper structure that may contain the schema name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
SchemaVersionNumber |
The version number of the schema. |
SchemaVersionId |
The unique version ID of the schema version. |
MetadataList |
Search key-value pairs for metadata, if they are not provided all the metadata information will be fetched. |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of results required per page. If the value is not supplied, this will be defaulted to 25 per page. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Adds a new version to the existing schema
Description
Adds a new version to the existing schema. Returns an error if new version of schema does not meet the compatibility requirements of the schema set. This API will not create a new schema set and will return a 404 error if the schema set is not already present in the Schema Registry.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_register_schema_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_register_schema_version(SchemaId, SchemaDefinition)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
SchemaDefinition |
[required] The schema definition using the |
Removes a key value pair from the schema version metadata for the specified schema version ID
Description
Removes a key value pair from the schema version metadata for the specified schema version ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_remove_schema_version_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_remove_schema_version_metadata(
SchemaId = NULL,
SchemaVersionNumber = NULL,
SchemaVersionId = NULL,
MetadataKeyValue
)
Arguments
SchemaId |
A wrapper structure that may contain the schema name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
SchemaVersionNumber |
The version number of the schema. |
SchemaVersionId |
The unique version ID of the schema version. |
MetadataKeyValue |
[required] The value of the metadata key. |
Resets a bookmark entry
Description
Resets a bookmark entry.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_reset_job_bookmark/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_reset_job_bookmark(JobName, RunId = NULL)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job in question. |
RunId |
The unique run identifier associated with this job run. |
Restarts selected nodes of a previous partially completed workflow run and resumes the workflow run
Description
Restarts selected nodes of a previous partially completed workflow run and resumes the workflow run. The selected nodes and all nodes that are downstream from the selected nodes are run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_resume_workflow_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_resume_workflow_run(Name, RunId, NodeIds)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the workflow to resume. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the workflow run to resume. |
NodeIds |
[required] A list of the node IDs for the nodes you want to restart. The nodes that are to be restarted must have a run attempt in the original run. |
Executes the statement
Description
Executes the statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_run_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_run_statement(SessionId, Code, RequestOrigin = NULL)
Arguments
SessionId |
[required] The Session Id of the statement to be run. |
Code |
[required] The statement code to be run. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request. |
Searches a set of tables based on properties in the table metadata as well as on the parent database
Description
Searches a set of tables based on properties in the table metadata as well as on the parent database. You can search against text or filter conditions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_search_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_search_tables(
CatalogId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
SearchText = NULL,
SortCriteria = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ResourceShareType = NULL,
IncludeStatusDetails = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
A unique identifier, consisting of |
NextToken |
A continuation token, included if this is a continuation call. |
Filters |
A list of key-value pairs, and a comparator used to filter the search results. Returns all entities matching the predicate. The |
SearchText |
A string used for a text search. Specifying a value in quotes filters based on an exact match to the value. |
SortCriteria |
A list of criteria for sorting the results by a field name, in an ascending or descending order. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of tables to return in a single response. |
ResourceShareType |
Allows you to specify that you want to search the tables shared with
your account. The allowable values are
|
IncludeStatusDetails |
Specifies whether to include status details related to a request to create or update an Glue Data Catalog view. |
Starts a new run of the specified blueprint
Description
Starts a new run of the specified blueprint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_blueprint_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_blueprint_run(BlueprintName, Parameters = NULL, RoleArn)
Arguments
BlueprintName |
[required] The name of the blueprint. |
Parameters |
Specifies the parameters as a |
RoleArn |
[required] Specifies the IAM role used to create the workflow. |
Starts a column statistics task run, for a specified table and columns
Description
Starts a column statistics task run, for a specified table and columns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_column_statistics_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_column_statistics_task_run(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
ColumnNameList = NULL,
Role,
SampleSize = NULL,
CatalogID = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to generate statistics. |
ColumnNameList |
A list of the column names to generate statistics. If none is supplied, all column names for the table will be used by default. |
Role |
[required] The IAM role that the service assumes to generate statistics. |
SampleSize |
The percentage of rows used to generate statistics. If none is supplied, the entire table will be used to generate stats. |
CatalogID |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the table reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
SecurityConfiguration |
Name of the security configuration that is used to encrypt CloudWatch logs for the column stats task run. |
Starts a column statistics task run schedule
Description
Starts a column statistics task run schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_column_statistics_task_run_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_column_statistics_task_run_schedule(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which to start a column statistic task run schedule. |
Starts a crawl using the specified crawler, regardless of what is scheduled
Description
Starts a crawl using the specified crawler, regardless of what is scheduled. If the crawler is already running, returns a CrawlerRunningException.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_crawler/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_crawler(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the crawler to start. |
Changes the schedule state of the specified crawler to SCHEDULED, unless the crawler is already running or the schedule state is already SCHEDULED
Description
Changes the schedule state of the specified crawler to SCHEDULED
, unless the crawler is already running or the schedule state is already SCHEDULED
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_crawler_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_crawler_schedule(CrawlerName)
Arguments
CrawlerName |
[required] Name of the crawler to schedule. |
Starts a recommendation run that is used to generate rules when you don't know what rules to write
Description
Starts a recommendation run that is used to generate rules when you don't know what rules to write. Glue Data Quality analyzes the data and comes up with recommendations for a potential ruleset. You can then triage the ruleset and modify the generated ruleset to your liking.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_data_quality_rule_recommendation_run(
DataSource,
Role,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
CreatedRulesetName = NULL,
DataQualitySecurityConfiguration = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DataSource |
[required] The data source (Glue table) associated with this run. |
Role |
[required] An IAM role supplied to encrypt the results of the run. |
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of |
Timeout |
The timeout for a run in minutes. This is the maximum time that a run
can consume resources before it is terminated and enters |
CreatedRulesetName |
A name for the ruleset. |
DataQualitySecurityConfiguration |
The name of the security configuration created with the data quality encryption option. |
ClientToken |
Used for idempotency and is recommended to be set to a random ID (such as a UUID) to avoid creating or starting multiple instances of the same resource. |
Once you have a ruleset definition (either recommended or your own), you call this operation to evaluate the ruleset against a data source (Glue table)
Description
Once you have a ruleset definition (either recommended or your own), you call this operation to evaluate the ruleset against a data source (Glue table). The evaluation computes results which you can retrieve with the get_data_quality_result
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_data_quality_ruleset_evaluation_run(
DataSource,
Role,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
AdditionalRunOptions = NULL,
RulesetNames,
AdditionalDataSources = NULL
)
Arguments
DataSource |
[required] The data source (Glue table) associated with this run. |
Role |
[required] An IAM role supplied to encrypt the results of the run. |
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of |
Timeout |
The timeout for a run in minutes. This is the maximum time that a run
can consume resources before it is terminated and enters |
ClientToken |
Used for idempotency and is recommended to be set to a random ID (such as a UUID) to avoid creating or starting multiple instances of the same resource. |
AdditionalRunOptions |
Additional run options you can specify for an evaluation run. |
RulesetNames |
[required] A list of ruleset names. |
AdditionalDataSources |
A map of reference strings to additional data sources you can specify for an evaluation run. |
Begins an asynchronous task to export all labeled data for a particular transform
Description
Begins an asynchronous task to export all labeled data for a particular transform. This task is the only label-related API call that is not part of the typical active learning workflow. You typically use start_export_labels_task_run
when you want to work with all of your existing labels at the same time, such as when you want to remove or change labels that were previously submitted as truth. This API operation accepts the TransformId
whose labels you want to export and an Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) path to export the labels to. The operation returns a TaskRunId
. You can check on the status of your task run by calling the get_ml_task_run
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_export_labels_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_export_labels_task_run(TransformId, OutputS3Path)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
OutputS3Path |
[required] The Amazon S3 path where you export the labels. |
Enables you to provide additional labels (examples of truth) to be used to teach the machine learning transform and improve its quality
Description
Enables you to provide additional labels (examples of truth) to be used to teach the machine learning transform and improve its quality. This API operation is generally used as part of the active learning workflow that starts with the start_ml_labeling_set_generation_task_run
call and that ultimately results in improving the quality of your machine learning transform.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_import_labels_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_import_labels_task_run(
TransformId,
InputS3Path,
ReplaceAllLabels = NULL
)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
InputS3Path |
[required] The Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) path from where you import the labels. |
ReplaceAllLabels |
Indicates whether to overwrite your existing labels. |
Starts a job run using a job definition
Description
Starts a job run using a job definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_job_run(
JobName,
JobRunQueuingEnabled = NULL,
JobRunId = NULL,
Arguments = NULL,
AllocatedCapacity = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL,
NotificationProperty = NULL,
WorkerType = NULL,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
ExecutionClass = NULL
)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job definition to use. |
JobRunQueuingEnabled |
Specifies whether job run queuing is enabled for the job run. A value of true means job run queuing is enabled for the job run. If false or not populated, the job run will not be considered for queueing. |
JobRunId |
The ID of a previous |
Arguments |
The job arguments associated with this run. For this job run, they replace the default arguments set in the job definition itself. You can specify arguments here that your own job-execution script consumes, as well as arguments that Glue itself consumes. Job arguments may be logged. Do not pass plaintext secrets as arguments. Retrieve secrets from a Glue Connection, Secrets Manager or other secret management mechanism if you intend to keep them within the Job. For information about how to specify and consume your own Job arguments, see the Calling Glue APIs in Python topic in the developer guide. For information about the arguments you can provide to this field when configuring Spark jobs, see the Special Parameters Used by Glue topic in the developer guide. For information about the arguments you can provide to this field when configuring Ray jobs, see Using job parameters in Ray jobs in the developer guide. |
AllocatedCapacity |
This field is deprecated. Use The number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) to allocate to this JobRun. You can allocate a minimum of 2 DPUs; the default is 10. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB of memory. For more information, see the Glue pricing page. |
Timeout |
The Jobs must have timeout values less than 7 days or 10080 minutes. Otherwise, the jobs will throw an exception. When the value is left blank, the timeout is defaulted to 2880 minutes. Any existing Glue jobs that had a timeout value greater than 7 days will be defaulted to 7 days. For instance if you have specified a timeout of 20 days for a batch job, it will be stopped on the 7th day. For streaming jobs, if you have set up a maintenance window, it will be restarted during the maintenance window after 7 days. |
MaxCapacity |
For Glue version 1.0 or earlier jobs, using the standard worker type, the number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) that can be allocated when this job runs. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB of memory. For more information, see the Glue pricing page. For Glue version 2.0+ jobs, you cannot specify a Do not set The value that can be allocated for
|
SecurityConfiguration |
The name of the |
NotificationProperty |
Specifies configuration properties of a job run notification. |
WorkerType |
The type of predefined worker that is allocated when a job runs. Accepts a value of G.1X, G.2X, G.4X, G.8X or G.025X for Spark jobs. Accepts the value Z.2X for Ray jobs.
|
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of workers of a defined |
ExecutionClass |
Indicates whether the job is run with a standard or flexible execution class. The standard execution-class is ideal for time-sensitive workloads that require fast job startup and dedicated resources. The flexible execution class is appropriate for time-insensitive jobs whose start and completion times may vary. Only jobs with Glue version 3.0 and above and command type |
Starts a task to estimate the quality of the transform
Description
Starts a task to estimate the quality of the transform.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_ml_evaluation_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_ml_evaluation_task_run(TransformId)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
Starts the active learning workflow for your machine learning transform to improve the transform's quality by generating label sets and adding labels
Description
Starts the active learning workflow for your machine learning transform to improve the transform's quality by generating label sets and adding labels.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_ml_labeling_set_generation_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_ml_labeling_set_generation_task_run(TransformId, OutputS3Path)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] The unique identifier of the machine learning transform. |
OutputS3Path |
[required] The Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) path where you generate the labeling set. |
Starts an existing trigger
Description
Starts an existing trigger. See Triggering Jobs for information about how different types of trigger are started.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_trigger/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_trigger(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the trigger to start. |
Starts a new run of the specified workflow
Description
Starts a new run of the specified workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_start_workflow_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_start_workflow_run(Name, RunProperties = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the workflow to start. |
RunProperties |
The workflow run properties for the new workflow run. Run properties may be logged. Do not pass plaintext secrets as properties. Retrieve secrets from a Glue Connection, Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager or other secret management mechanism if you intend to use them within the workflow run. |
Stops a task run for the specified table
Description
Stops a task run for the specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_column_statistics_task_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_column_statistics_task_run(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Stops a column statistics task run schedule
Description
Stops a column statistics task run schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_column_statistics_task_run_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_column_statistics_task_run_schedule(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which to stop a column statistic task run schedule. |
If the specified crawler is running, stops the crawl
Description
If the specified crawler is running, stops the crawl.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_crawler/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_crawler(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the crawler to stop. |
Sets the schedule state of the specified crawler to NOT_SCHEDULED, but does not stop the crawler if it is already running
Description
Sets the schedule state of the specified crawler to NOT_SCHEDULED
, but does not stop the crawler if it is already running.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_crawler_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_crawler_schedule(CrawlerName)
Arguments
CrawlerName |
[required] Name of the crawler whose schedule state to set. |
Stops the session
Description
Stops the session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_session(Id, RequestOrigin = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The ID of the session to be stopped. |
RequestOrigin |
The origin of the request. |
Stops a specified trigger
Description
Stops a specified trigger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_trigger/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_trigger(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the trigger to stop. |
Stops the execution of the specified workflow run
Description
Stops the execution of the specified workflow run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_stop_workflow_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_stop_workflow_run(Name, RunId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the workflow to stop. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the workflow run to stop. |
Adds tags to a resource
Description
Adds tags to a resource. A tag is a label you can assign to an Amazon Web Services resource. In Glue, you can tag only certain resources. For information about what resources you can tag, see Amazon Web Services Tags in Glue.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_tag_resource(ResourceArn, TagsToAdd)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the Glue resource to which to add the tags. For more information about Glue resource ARNs, see the Glue ARN string pattern. |
TagsToAdd |
[required] Tags to add to this resource. |
Tests a connection to a service to validate the service credentials that you provide
Description
Tests a connection to a service to validate the service credentials that you provide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_test_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_test_connection(
ConnectionName = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
TestConnectionInput = NULL
)
Arguments
ConnectionName |
Optional. The name of the connection to test. If only name is provided, the operation will get the connection and use that for testing. |
CatalogId |
The catalog ID where the connection resides. |
TestConnectionInput |
A structure that is used to specify testing a connection to a service. |
Removes tags from a resource
Description
Removes tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagsToRemove)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource from which to remove the tags. |
TagsToRemove |
[required] Tags to remove from this resource. |
Updates a registered blueprint
Description
Updates a registered blueprint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_blueprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_blueprint(Name, Description = NULL, BlueprintLocation)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the blueprint. |
Description |
A description of the blueprint. |
BlueprintLocation |
[required] Specifies a path in Amazon S3 where the blueprint is published. |
Updates an existing catalog's properties in the Glue Data Catalog
Description
Updates an existing catalog's properties in the Glue Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_catalog/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_catalog(CatalogId, CatalogInput)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The ID of the catalog. |
CatalogInput |
[required] A |
Modifies an existing classifier (a GrokClassifier, an XMLClassifier, a JsonClassifier, or a CsvClassifier, depending on which field is present)
Description
Modifies an existing classifier (a GrokClassifier
, an XMLClassifier
, a JsonClassifier
, or a CsvClassifier
, depending on which field is present).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_classifier/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_classifier(
GrokClassifier = NULL,
XMLClassifier = NULL,
JsonClassifier = NULL,
CsvClassifier = NULL
)
Arguments
GrokClassifier |
A |
XMLClassifier |
An |
JsonClassifier |
A |
CsvClassifier |
A |
Creates or updates partition statistics of columns
Description
Creates or updates partition statistics of columns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_column_statistics_for_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_column_statistics_for_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionValues,
ColumnStatisticsList
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
PartitionValues |
[required] A list of partition values identifying the partition. |
ColumnStatisticsList |
[required] A list of the column statistics. |
Creates or updates table statistics of columns
Description
Creates or updates table statistics of columns.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_column_statistics_for_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_column_statistics_for_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
ColumnStatisticsList
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partitions in question reside. If none is supplied, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the partitions reside. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the partitions' table. |
ColumnStatisticsList |
[required] A list of the column statistics. |
Updates settings for a column statistics task
Description
Updates settings for a column statistics task.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_column_statistics_task_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_column_statistics_task_settings(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Role = NULL,
Schedule = NULL,
ColumnNameList = NULL,
SampleSize = NULL,
CatalogID = NULL,
SecurityConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table for which to generate column statistics. |
Role |
The role used for running the column statistics. |
Schedule |
A schedule for running the column statistics, specified in CRON syntax. |
ColumnNameList |
A list of column names for which to run statistics. |
SampleSize |
The percentage of data to sample. |
CatalogID |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the database resides. |
SecurityConfiguration |
Name of the security configuration that is used to encrypt CloudWatch logs. |
Updates a connection definition in the Data Catalog
Description
Updates a connection definition in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_connection(CatalogId = NULL, Name, ConnectionInput)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the connection resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Name |
[required] The name of the connection definition to update. |
ConnectionInput |
[required] A |
Updates a crawler
Description
Updates a crawler. If a crawler is running, you must stop it using stop_crawler
before updating it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_crawler/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_crawler(
Name,
Role = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Targets = NULL,
Schedule = NULL,
Classifiers = NULL,
TablePrefix = NULL,
SchemaChangePolicy = NULL,
RecrawlPolicy = NULL,
LineageConfiguration = NULL,
LakeFormationConfiguration = NULL,
Configuration = NULL,
CrawlerSecurityConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the new crawler. |
Role |
The IAM role or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role that is used by the new crawler to access customer resources. |
DatabaseName |
The Glue database where results are stored, such as:
|
Description |
A description of the new crawler. |
Targets |
A list of targets to crawl. |
Schedule |
A |
Classifiers |
A list of custom classifiers that the user has registered. By default, all built-in classifiers are included in a crawl, but these custom classifiers always override the default classifiers for a given classification. |
TablePrefix |
The table prefix used for catalog tables that are created. |
SchemaChangePolicy |
The policy for the crawler's update and deletion behavior. |
RecrawlPolicy |
A policy that specifies whether to crawl the entire dataset again, or to crawl only folders that were added since the last crawler run. |
LineageConfiguration |
Specifies data lineage configuration settings for the crawler. |
LakeFormationConfiguration |
Specifies Lake Formation configuration settings for the crawler. |
Configuration |
Crawler configuration information. This versioned JSON string allows users to specify aspects of a crawler's behavior. For more information, see Setting crawler configuration options. |
CrawlerSecurityConfiguration |
The name of the |
Updates the schedule of a crawler using a cron expression
Description
Updates the schedule of a crawler using a cron
expression.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_crawler_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_crawler_schedule(CrawlerName, Schedule = NULL)
Arguments
CrawlerName |
[required] The name of the crawler whose schedule to update. |
Schedule |
The updated |
Updates the specified data quality ruleset
Description
Updates the specified data quality ruleset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_data_quality_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_data_quality_ruleset(Name, Description = NULL, Ruleset = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the data quality ruleset. |
Description |
A description of the ruleset. |
Ruleset |
A Data Quality Definition Language (DQDL) ruleset. For more information, see the Glue developer guide. |
Updates an existing database definition in a Data Catalog
Description
Updates an existing database definition in a Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_database(CatalogId = NULL, Name, DatabaseInput)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog in which the metadata database resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
Name |
[required] The name of the database to update in the catalog. For Hive compatibility, this is folded to lowercase. |
DatabaseInput |
[required] A |
Updates a specified development endpoint
Description
Updates a specified development endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_dev_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_dev_endpoint(
EndpointName,
PublicKey = NULL,
AddPublicKeys = NULL,
DeletePublicKeys = NULL,
CustomLibraries = NULL,
UpdateEtlLibraries = NULL,
DeleteArguments = NULL,
AddArguments = NULL
)
Arguments
EndpointName |
[required] The name of the |
PublicKey |
The public key for the |
AddPublicKeys |
The list of public keys for the |
DeletePublicKeys |
The list of public keys to be deleted from the |
CustomLibraries |
Custom Python or Java libraries to be loaded in the |
UpdateEtlLibraries |
|
DeleteArguments |
The list of argument keys to be deleted from the map of arguments used
to configure the |
AddArguments |
The map of arguments to add the map of arguments used to configure the
Valid arguments are:
You can specify a version of Python support for development endpoints by
using the |
This API can be used for updating the ResourceProperty of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target)
Description
This API can be used for updating the ResourceProperty
of the Glue connection (for the source) or Glue database ARN (for the target). These properties can include the role to access the connection or database. Since the same resource can be used across multiple integrations, updating resource properties will impact all the integrations using it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_integration_resource_property/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_integration_resource_property(
ResourceArn,
SourceProcessingProperties = NULL,
TargetProcessingProperties = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
SourceProcessingProperties |
The resource properties associated with the integration source. |
TargetProcessingProperties |
The resource properties associated with the integration target. |
This API is used to provide optional override properties for the tables that need to be replicated
Description
This API is used to provide optional override properties for the tables that need to be replicated. These properties can include properties for filtering and partitioning for the source and target tables. To set both source and target properties the same API need to be invoked with the Glue connection ARN as ResourceArn
with SourceTableConfig
, and the Glue database ARN as ResourceArn
with TargetTableConfig
respectively.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_integration_table_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_integration_table_properties(
ResourceArn,
TableName,
SourceTableConfig = NULL,
TargetTableConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The connection ARN of the source, or the database ARN of the target. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be replicated. |
SourceTableConfig |
A structure for the source table configuration. |
TargetTableConfig |
A structure for the target table configuration. |
Updates an existing job definition
Description
Updates an existing job definition. The previous job definition is completely overwritten by this information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_job(JobName, JobUpdate)
Arguments
JobName |
[required] The name of the job definition to update. |
JobUpdate |
[required] Specifies the values with which to update the job definition. Unspecified configuration is removed or reset to default values. |
Synchronizes a job from the source control repository
Description
Synchronizes a job from the source control repository. This operation takes the job artifacts that are located in the remote repository and updates the Glue internal stores with these artifacts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_job_from_source_control/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_job_from_source_control(
JobName = NULL,
Provider = NULL,
RepositoryName = NULL,
RepositoryOwner = NULL,
BranchName = NULL,
Folder = NULL,
CommitId = NULL,
AuthStrategy = NULL,
AuthToken = NULL
)
Arguments
JobName |
The name of the Glue job to be synchronized to or from the remote repository. |
Provider |
The provider for the remote repository. Possible values: GITHUB, AWS_CODE_COMMIT, GITLAB, BITBUCKET. |
RepositoryName |
The name of the remote repository that contains the job artifacts. For
BitBucket providers, |
RepositoryOwner |
The owner of the remote repository that contains the job artifacts. |
BranchName |
An optional branch in the remote repository. |
Folder |
An optional folder in the remote repository. |
CommitId |
A commit ID for a commit in the remote repository. |
AuthStrategy |
The type of authentication, which can be an authentication token stored in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, or a personal access token. |
AuthToken |
The value of the authorization token. |
Updates an existing machine learning transform
Description
Updates an existing machine learning transform. Call this operation to tune the algorithm parameters to achieve better results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_ml_transform/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_ml_transform(
TransformId,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Parameters = NULL,
Role = NULL,
GlueVersion = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
WorkerType = NULL,
NumberOfWorkers = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL
)
Arguments
TransformId |
[required] A unique identifier that was generated when the transform was created. |
Name |
The unique name that you gave the transform when you created it. |
Description |
A description of the transform. The default is an empty string. |
Parameters |
The configuration parameters that are specific to the transform type (algorithm) used. Conditionally dependent on the transform type. |
Role |
The name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role with the required permissions. |
GlueVersion |
This value determines which version of Glue this machine learning transform is compatible with. Glue 1.0 is recommended for most customers. If the value is not set, the Glue compatibility defaults to Glue 0.9. For more information, see Glue Versions in the developer guide. |
MaxCapacity |
The number of Glue data processing units (DPUs) that are allocated to task runs for this transform. You can allocate from 2 to 100 DPUs; the default is 10. A DPU is a relative measure of processing power that consists of 4 vCPUs of compute capacity and 16 GB of memory. For more information, see the Glue pricing page. When the |
WorkerType |
The type of predefined worker that is allocated when this task runs. Accepts a value of Standard, G.1X, or G.2X.
|
NumberOfWorkers |
The number of workers of a defined |
Timeout |
The timeout for a task run for this transform in minutes. This is the
maximum time that a task run for this transform can consume resources
before it is terminated and enters |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry a task for this transform after a task run fails. |
Updates a partition
Description
Updates a partition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_partition/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_partition(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
PartitionValueList,
PartitionInput
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the partition to be updated resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which the table in question resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table in which the partition to be updated is located. |
PartitionValueList |
[required] List of partition key values that define the partition to update. |
PartitionInput |
[required] The new partition object to update the partition to. The |
Updates an existing registry which is used to hold a collection of schemas
Description
Updates an existing registry which is used to hold a collection of schemas. The updated properties relate to the registry, and do not modify any of the schemas within the registry.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_registry/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_registry(RegistryId, Description)
Arguments
RegistryId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure that may contain the registry name and Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Description |
[required] A description of the registry. If description is not provided, this field will not be updated. |
Updates the description, compatibility setting, or version checkpoint for a schema set
Description
Updates the description, compatibility setting, or version checkpoint for a schema set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_schema(
SchemaId,
SchemaVersionNumber = NULL,
Compatibility = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
SchemaId |
[required] This is a wrapper structure to contain schema identity fields. The structure contains:
|
SchemaVersionNumber |
Version number required for check pointing. One of |
Compatibility |
The new compatibility setting for the schema. |
Description |
The new description for the schema. |
Synchronizes a job to the source control repository
Description
Synchronizes a job to the source control repository. This operation takes the job artifacts from the Glue internal stores and makes a commit to the remote repository that is configured on the job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_source_control_from_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_source_control_from_job(
JobName = NULL,
Provider = NULL,
RepositoryName = NULL,
RepositoryOwner = NULL,
BranchName = NULL,
Folder = NULL,
CommitId = NULL,
AuthStrategy = NULL,
AuthToken = NULL
)
Arguments
JobName |
The name of the Glue job to be synchronized to or from the remote repository. |
Provider |
The provider for the remote repository. Possible values: GITHUB, AWS_CODE_COMMIT, GITLAB, BITBUCKET. |
RepositoryName |
The name of the remote repository that contains the job artifacts. For
BitBucket providers, |
RepositoryOwner |
The owner of the remote repository that contains the job artifacts. |
BranchName |
An optional branch in the remote repository. |
Folder |
An optional folder in the remote repository. |
CommitId |
A commit ID for a commit in the remote repository. |
AuthStrategy |
The type of authentication, which can be an authentication token stored in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, or a personal access token. |
AuthToken |
The value of the authorization token. |
Updates a metadata table in the Data Catalog
Description
Updates a metadata table in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_table(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableInput,
SkipArchive = NULL,
TransactionId = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
ViewUpdateAction = NULL,
Force = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the table resides. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database in which the table resides. For Hive compatibility, this name is entirely lowercase. |
TableInput |
[required] An updated |
SkipArchive |
By default, |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to update the table contents. |
VersionId |
The version ID at which to update the table contents. |
ViewUpdateAction |
The operation to be performed when updating the view. |
Force |
A flag that can be set to true to ignore matching storage descriptor and subobject matching requirements. |
Updates the configuration for an existing table optimizer
Description
Updates the configuration for an existing table optimizer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_table_optimizer/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_table_optimizer(
CatalogId,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Type,
TableOptimizerConfiguration
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
[required] The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database in the catalog in which the table resides. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Type |
[required] The type of table optimizer. |
TableOptimizerConfiguration |
[required] A |
Updates a trigger definition
Description
Updates a trigger definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_trigger/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_trigger(Name, TriggerUpdate)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the trigger to update. |
TriggerUpdate |
[required] The new values with which to update the trigger. |
Update an Glue usage profile
Description
Update an Glue usage profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_usage_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_usage_profile(Name, Description = NULL, Configuration)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the usage profile. |
Description |
A description of the usage profile. |
Configuration |
[required] A |
Updates an existing function definition in the Data Catalog
Description
Updates an existing function definition in the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_user_defined_function/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_user_defined_function(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
FunctionName,
FunctionInput
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The ID of the Data Catalog where the function to be updated is located. If none is provided, the Amazon Web Services account ID is used by default. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the catalog database where the function to be updated is located. |
FunctionName |
[required] The name of the function. |
FunctionInput |
[required] A |
Updates an existing workflow
Description
Updates an existing workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glue_update_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
glue_update_workflow(
Name,
Description = NULL,
DefaultRunProperties = NULL,
MaxConcurrentRuns = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the workflow to be updated. |
Description |
The description of the workflow. |
DefaultRunProperties |
A collection of properties to be used as part of each execution of the workflow. Run properties may be logged. Do not pass plaintext secrets as properties. Retrieve secrets from a Glue Connection, Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager or other secret management mechanism if you intend to use them within the workflow run. |
MaxConcurrentRuns |
You can use this parameter to prevent unwanted multiple updates to data, to control costs, or in some cases, to prevent exceeding the maximum number of concurrent runs of any of the component jobs. If you leave this parameter blank, there is no limit to the number of concurrent workflow runs. |
AWS Glue DataBrew
Description
Glue DataBrew is a visual, cloud-scale data-preparation service. DataBrew simplifies data preparation tasks, targeting data issues that are hard to spot and time-consuming to fix. DataBrew empowers users of all technical levels to visualize the data and perform one-click data transformations, with no coding required.
Usage
gluedatabrew(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- gluedatabrew( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_delete_recipe_version | Deletes one or more versions of a recipe at a time |
create_dataset | Creates a new DataBrew dataset |
create_profile_job | Creates a new job to analyze a dataset and create its data profile |
create_project | Creates a new DataBrew project |
create_recipe | Creates a new DataBrew recipe |
create_recipe_job | Creates a new job to transform input data, using steps defined in an existing Glue DataBrew recipe |
create_ruleset | Creates a new ruleset that can be used in a profile job to validate the data quality of a dataset |
create_schedule | Creates a new schedule for one or more DataBrew jobs |
delete_dataset | Deletes a dataset from DataBrew |
delete_job | Deletes the specified DataBrew job |
delete_project | Deletes an existing DataBrew project |
delete_recipe_version | Deletes a single version of a DataBrew recipe |
delete_ruleset | Deletes a ruleset |
delete_schedule | Deletes the specified DataBrew schedule |
describe_dataset | Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew dataset |
describe_job | Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew job |
describe_job_run | Represents one run of a DataBrew job |
describe_project | Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew project |
describe_recipe | Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew recipe corresponding to a particular version |
describe_ruleset | Retrieves detailed information about the ruleset |
describe_schedule | Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew schedule |
list_datasets | Lists all of the DataBrew datasets |
list_job_runs | Lists all of the previous runs of a particular DataBrew job |
list_jobs | Lists all of the DataBrew jobs that are defined |
list_projects | Lists all of the DataBrew projects that are defined |
list_recipes | Lists all of the DataBrew recipes that are defined |
list_recipe_versions | Lists the versions of a particular DataBrew recipe, except for LATEST_WORKING |
list_rulesets | List all rulesets available in the current account or rulesets associated with a specific resource (dataset) |
list_schedules | Lists the DataBrew schedules that are defined |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all the tags for a DataBrew resource |
publish_recipe | Publishes a new version of a DataBrew recipe |
send_project_session_action | Performs a recipe step within an interactive DataBrew session that's currently open |
start_job_run | Runs a DataBrew job |
start_project_session | Creates an interactive session, enabling you to manipulate data in a DataBrew project |
stop_job_run | Stops a particular run of a job |
tag_resource | Adds metadata tags to a DataBrew resource, such as a dataset, project, recipe, job, or schedule |
untag_resource | Removes metadata tags from a DataBrew resource |
update_dataset | Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew dataset |
update_profile_job | Modifies the definition of an existing profile job |
update_project | Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew project |
update_recipe | Modifies the definition of the LATEST_WORKING version of a DataBrew recipe |
update_recipe_job | Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew recipe job |
update_ruleset | Updates specified ruleset |
update_schedule | Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew schedule |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- gluedatabrew()
svc$batch_delete_recipe_version(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Deletes one or more versions of a recipe at a time
Description
Deletes one or more versions of a recipe at a time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_batch_delete_recipe_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_batch_delete_recipe_version(Name, RecipeVersions)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the recipe whose versions are to be deleted. |
RecipeVersions |
[required] An array of version identifiers, for the recipe versions to be deleted.
You can specify numeric versions ( |
Creates a new DataBrew dataset
Description
Creates a new DataBrew dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_dataset(
Name,
Format = NULL,
FormatOptions = NULL,
Input,
PathOptions = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the dataset to be created. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
Format |
The file format of a dataset that is created from an Amazon S3 file or folder. |
FormatOptions |
|
Input |
[required] |
PathOptions |
A set of options that defines how DataBrew interprets an Amazon S3 path of the dataset. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to this dataset. |
Creates a new job to analyze a dataset and create its data profile
Description
Creates a new job to analyze a dataset and create its data profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_profile_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_profile_job(
DatasetName,
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL,
EncryptionMode = NULL,
Name,
LogSubscription = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL,
OutputLocation,
Configuration = NULL,
ValidationConfigurations = NULL,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
Timeout = NULL,
JobSample = NULL
)
Arguments
DatasetName |
[required] The name of the dataset that this job is to act upon. |
EncryptionKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an encryption key that is used to protect the job. |
EncryptionMode |
The encryption mode for the job, which can be one of the following:
|
Name |
[required] The name of the job to be created. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
LogSubscription |
Enables or disables Amazon CloudWatch logging for the job. If logging is enabled, CloudWatch writes one log stream for each job run. |
MaxCapacity |
The maximum number of nodes that DataBrew can use when the job processes data. |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry the job after a job run fails. |
OutputLocation |
[required] |
Configuration |
Configuration for profile jobs. Used to select columns, do evaluations, and override default parameters of evaluations. When configuration is null, the profile job will run with default settings. |
ValidationConfigurations |
List of validation configurations that are applied to the profile job. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role to be assumed when DataBrew runs the job. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to this job. |
Timeout |
The job's timeout in minutes. A job that attempts to run longer than
this timeout period ends with a status of |
JobSample |
Sample configuration for profile jobs only. Determines the number of rows on which the profile job will be executed. If a JobSample value is not provided, the default value will be used. The default value is CUSTOM_ROWS for the mode parameter and 20000 for the size parameter. |
Creates a new DataBrew project
Description
Creates a new DataBrew project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_project(
DatasetName,
Name,
RecipeName,
Sample = NULL,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DatasetName |
[required] The name of an existing dataset to associate this project with. |
Name |
[required] A unique name for the new project. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
RecipeName |
[required] The name of an existing recipe to associate with the project. |
Sample |
|
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role to be assumed for this request. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to this project. |
Creates a new DataBrew recipe
Description
Creates a new DataBrew recipe.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_recipe/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_recipe(Description = NULL, Name, Steps, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
Description |
A description for the recipe. |
Name |
[required] A unique name for the recipe. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
Steps |
[required] An array containing the steps to be performed by the recipe. Each recipe step consists of one recipe action and (optionally) an array of condition expressions. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to this recipe. |
Creates a new job to transform input data, using steps defined in an existing Glue DataBrew recipe
Description
Creates a new job to transform input data, using steps defined in an existing Glue DataBrew recipe
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_recipe_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_recipe_job(
DatasetName = NULL,
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL,
EncryptionMode = NULL,
Name,
LogSubscription = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL,
Outputs = NULL,
DataCatalogOutputs = NULL,
DatabaseOutputs = NULL,
ProjectName = NULL,
RecipeReference = NULL,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
Timeout = NULL
)
Arguments
DatasetName |
The name of the dataset that this job processes. |
EncryptionKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an encryption key that is used to protect the job. |
EncryptionMode |
The encryption mode for the job, which can be one of the following:
|
Name |
[required] A unique name for the job. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
LogSubscription |
Enables or disables Amazon CloudWatch logging for the job. If logging is enabled, CloudWatch writes one log stream for each job run. |
MaxCapacity |
The maximum number of nodes that DataBrew can consume when the job processes data. |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry the job after a job run fails. |
Outputs |
One or more artifacts that represent the output from running the job. |
DataCatalogOutputs |
One or more artifacts that represent the Glue Data Catalog output from running the job. |
DatabaseOutputs |
Represents a list of JDBC database output objects which defines the output destination for a DataBrew recipe job to write to. |
ProjectName |
Either the name of an existing project, or a combination of a recipe and a dataset to associate with the recipe. |
RecipeReference |
|
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role to be assumed when DataBrew runs the job. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to this job. |
Timeout |
The job's timeout in minutes. A job that attempts to run longer than
this timeout period ends with a status of |
Creates a new ruleset that can be used in a profile job to validate the data quality of a dataset
Description
Creates a new ruleset that can be used in a profile job to validate the data quality of a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_ruleset(
Name,
Description = NULL,
TargetArn,
Rules,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ruleset to be created. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
Description |
The description of the ruleset. |
TargetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a resource (dataset) that the ruleset is associated with. |
Rules |
[required] A list of rules that are defined with the ruleset. A rule includes one or more checks to be validated on a DataBrew dataset. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to the ruleset. |
Creates a new schedule for one or more DataBrew jobs
Description
Creates a new schedule for one or more DataBrew jobs. Jobs can be run at a specific date and time, or at regular intervals.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_create_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_create_schedule(
JobNames = NULL,
CronExpression,
Tags = NULL,
Name
)
Arguments
JobNames |
The name or names of one or more jobs to be run. |
CronExpression |
[required] The date or dates and time or times when the jobs are to be run. For more information, see Cron expressions in the Glue DataBrew Developer Guide. |
Tags |
Metadata tags to apply to this schedule. |
Name |
[required] A unique name for the schedule. Valid characters are alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), hyphen (-), period (.), and space. |
Deletes a dataset from DataBrew
Description
Deletes a dataset from DataBrew.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_delete_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_delete_dataset(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the dataset to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified DataBrew job
Description
Deletes the specified DataBrew job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_delete_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_delete_job(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job to be deleted. |
Deletes an existing DataBrew project
Description
Deletes an existing DataBrew project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_delete_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_delete_project(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the project to be deleted. |
Deletes a single version of a DataBrew recipe
Description
Deletes a single version of a DataBrew recipe.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_delete_recipe_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_delete_recipe_version(Name, RecipeVersion)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the recipe. |
RecipeVersion |
[required] The version of the recipe to be deleted. You can specify a numeric
versions ( |
Deletes a ruleset
Description
Deletes a ruleset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_delete_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_delete_ruleset(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ruleset to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified DataBrew schedule
Description
Deletes the specified DataBrew schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_delete_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_delete_schedule(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the schedule to be deleted. |
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew dataset
Description
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_dataset(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the dataset to be described. |
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew job
Description
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_job(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job to be described. |
Represents one run of a DataBrew job
Description
Represents one run of a DataBrew job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_job_run(Name, RunId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job being processed during this run. |
RunId |
[required] The unique identifier of the job run. |
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew project
Description
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_project(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the project to be described. |
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew recipe corresponding to a particular version
Description
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew recipe corresponding to a particular version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_recipe/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_recipe(Name, RecipeVersion = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the recipe to be described. |
RecipeVersion |
The recipe version identifier. If this parameter isn't specified, then the latest published version is returned. |
Retrieves detailed information about the ruleset
Description
Retrieves detailed information about the ruleset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_ruleset(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ruleset to be described. |
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew schedule
Description
Returns the definition of a specific DataBrew schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_describe_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_describe_schedule(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the schedule to be described. |
Lists all of the DataBrew datasets
Description
Lists all of the DataBrew datasets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_datasets/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_datasets(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
The token returned by a previous call to retrieve the next set of results. |
Lists all of the previous runs of a particular DataBrew job
Description
Lists all of the previous runs of a particular DataBrew job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_job_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_job_runs(Name, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
The token returned by a previous call to retrieve the next set of results. |
Lists all of the DataBrew jobs that are defined
Description
Lists all of the DataBrew jobs that are defined.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_jobs(
DatasetName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ProjectName = NULL
)
Arguments
DatasetName |
The name of a dataset. Using this parameter indicates to return only those jobs that act on the specified dataset. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
A token generated by DataBrew that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. To get the next set of pages, pass in the NextToken value from the response object of the previous page call. |
ProjectName |
The name of a project. Using this parameter indicates to return only those jobs that are associated with the specified project. |
Lists all of the DataBrew projects that are defined
Description
Lists all of the DataBrew projects that are defined.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_projects/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_projects(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The token returned by a previous call to retrieve the next set of results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
Lists the versions of a particular DataBrew recipe, except for LATEST_WORKING
Description
Lists the versions of a particular DataBrew recipe, except for LATEST_WORKING
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_recipe_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_recipe_versions(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL, Name)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
The token returned by a previous call to retrieve the next set of results. |
Name |
[required] The name of the recipe for which to return version information. |
Lists all of the DataBrew recipes that are defined
Description
Lists all of the DataBrew recipes that are defined.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_recipes/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_recipes(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
RecipeVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
The token returned by a previous call to retrieve the next set of results. |
RecipeVersion |
Return only those recipes with a version identifier of Valid values: |
List all rulesets available in the current account or rulesets associated with a specific resource (dataset)
Description
List all rulesets available in the current account or rulesets associated with a specific resource (dataset).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_rulesets/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_rulesets(
TargetArn = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
TargetArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a resource (dataset). Using this parameter indicates to return only those rulesets that are associated with the specified resource. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
A token generated by DataBrew that specifies where to continue pagination if a previous request was truncated. To get the next set of pages, pass in the NextToken value from the response object of the previous page call. |
Lists the DataBrew schedules that are defined
Description
Lists the DataBrew schedules that are defined.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_schedules/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_schedules(
JobName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
JobName |
The name of the job that these schedules apply to. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in this request. |
NextToken |
The token returned by a previous call to retrieve the next set of results. |
Lists all the tags for a DataBrew resource
Description
Lists all the tags for a DataBrew resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) string that uniquely identifies the DataBrew resource. |
Publishes a new version of a DataBrew recipe
Description
Publishes a new version of a DataBrew recipe.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_publish_recipe/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_publish_recipe(Description = NULL, Name)
Arguments
Description |
A description of the recipe to be published, for this version of the recipe. |
Name |
[required] The name of the recipe to be published. |
Performs a recipe step within an interactive DataBrew session that's currently open
Description
Performs a recipe step within an interactive DataBrew session that's currently open.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_send_project_session_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_send_project_session_action(
Preview = NULL,
Name,
RecipeStep = NULL,
StepIndex = NULL,
ClientSessionId = NULL,
ViewFrame = NULL
)
Arguments
Preview |
If true, the result of the recipe step will be returned, but not applied. |
Name |
[required] The name of the project to apply the action to. |
RecipeStep |
|
StepIndex |
The index from which to preview a step. This index is used to preview the result of steps that have already been applied, so that the resulting view frame is from earlier in the view frame stack. |
ClientSessionId |
A unique identifier for an interactive session that's currently open and ready for work. The action will be performed on this session. |
ViewFrame |
Runs a DataBrew job
Description
Runs a DataBrew job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_start_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_start_job_run(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job to be run. |
Creates an interactive session, enabling you to manipulate data in a DataBrew project
Description
Creates an interactive session, enabling you to manipulate data in a DataBrew project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_start_project_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_start_project_session(Name, AssumeControl = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the project to act upon. |
AssumeControl |
A value that, if true, enables you to take control of a session, even if a different client is currently accessing the project. |
Stops a particular run of a job
Description
Stops a particular run of a job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_stop_job_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_stop_job_run(Name, RunId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the job to be stopped. |
RunId |
[required] The ID of the job run to be stopped. |
Adds metadata tags to a DataBrew resource, such as a dataset, project, recipe, job, or schedule
Description
Adds metadata tags to a DataBrew resource, such as a dataset, project, recipe, job, or schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The DataBrew resource to which tags should be added. The value for this parameter is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For DataBrew, you can tag a dataset, a job, a project, or a recipe. |
Tags |
[required] One or more tags to be assigned to the resource. |
Removes metadata tags from a DataBrew resource
Description
Removes metadata tags from a DataBrew resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] A DataBrew resource from which you want to remove a tag or tags. The value for this parameter is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys (names) of one or more tags to be removed. |
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew dataset
Description
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_dataset(
Name,
Format = NULL,
FormatOptions = NULL,
Input,
PathOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the dataset to be updated. |
Format |
The file format of a dataset that is created from an Amazon S3 file or folder. |
FormatOptions |
|
Input |
[required] |
PathOptions |
A set of options that defines how DataBrew interprets an Amazon S3 path of the dataset. |
Modifies the definition of an existing profile job
Description
Modifies the definition of an existing profile job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_profile_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_profile_job(
Configuration = NULL,
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL,
EncryptionMode = NULL,
Name,
LogSubscription = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL,
OutputLocation,
ValidationConfigurations = NULL,
RoleArn,
Timeout = NULL,
JobSample = NULL
)
Arguments
Configuration |
Configuration for profile jobs. Used to select columns, do evaluations, and override default parameters of evaluations. When configuration is null, the profile job will run with default settings. |
EncryptionKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an encryption key that is used to protect the job. |
EncryptionMode |
The encryption mode for the job, which can be one of the following:
|
Name |
[required] The name of the job to be updated. |
LogSubscription |
Enables or disables Amazon CloudWatch logging for the job. If logging is enabled, CloudWatch writes one log stream for each job run. |
MaxCapacity |
The maximum number of compute nodes that DataBrew can use when the job processes data. |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry the job after a job run fails. |
OutputLocation |
[required] |
ValidationConfigurations |
List of validation configurations that are applied to the profile job. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role to be assumed when DataBrew runs the job. |
Timeout |
The job's timeout in minutes. A job that attempts to run longer than
this timeout period ends with a status of |
JobSample |
Sample configuration for Profile Jobs only. Determines the number of rows on which the Profile job will be executed. If a JobSample value is not provided for profile jobs, the default value will be used. The default value is CUSTOM_ROWS for the mode parameter and 20000 for the size parameter. |
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew project
Description
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew project.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_project/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_project(Sample = NULL, RoleArn, Name)
Arguments
Sample |
|
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to be assumed for this request. |
Name |
[required] The name of the project to be updated. |
Modifies the definition of the LATEST_WORKING version of a DataBrew recipe
Description
Modifies the definition of the LATEST_WORKING
version of a DataBrew recipe.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_recipe/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_recipe(Description = NULL, Name, Steps = NULL)
Arguments
Description |
A description of the recipe. |
Name |
[required] The name of the recipe to be updated. |
Steps |
One or more steps to be performed by the recipe. Each step consists of an action, and the conditions under which the action should succeed. |
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew recipe job
Description
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew recipe job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_recipe_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_recipe_job(
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL,
EncryptionMode = NULL,
Name,
LogSubscription = NULL,
MaxCapacity = NULL,
MaxRetries = NULL,
Outputs = NULL,
DataCatalogOutputs = NULL,
DatabaseOutputs = NULL,
RoleArn,
Timeout = NULL
)
Arguments
EncryptionKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an encryption key that is used to protect the job. |
EncryptionMode |
The encryption mode for the job, which can be one of the following:
|
Name |
[required] The name of the job to update. |
LogSubscription |
Enables or disables Amazon CloudWatch logging for the job. If logging is enabled, CloudWatch writes one log stream for each job run. |
MaxCapacity |
The maximum number of nodes that DataBrew can consume when the job processes data. |
MaxRetries |
The maximum number of times to retry the job after a job run fails. |
Outputs |
One or more artifacts that represent the output from running the job. |
DataCatalogOutputs |
One or more artifacts that represent the Glue Data Catalog output from running the job. |
DatabaseOutputs |
Represents a list of JDBC database output objects which defines the output destination for a DataBrew recipe job to write into. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role to be assumed when DataBrew runs the job. |
Timeout |
The job's timeout in minutes. A job that attempts to run longer than
this timeout period ends with a status of |
Updates specified ruleset
Description
Updates specified ruleset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_ruleset/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_ruleset(Name, Description = NULL, Rules)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ruleset to be updated. |
Description |
The description of the ruleset. |
Rules |
[required] A list of rules that are defined with the ruleset. A rule includes one or more checks to be validated on a DataBrew dataset. |
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew schedule
Description
Modifies the definition of an existing DataBrew schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/gluedatabrew_update_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
gluedatabrew_update_schedule(JobNames = NULL, CronExpression, Name)
Arguments
JobNames |
The name or names of one or more jobs to be run for this schedule. |
CronExpression |
[required] The date or dates and time or times when the jobs are to be run. For more information, see Cron expressions in the Glue DataBrew Developer Guide. |
Name |
[required] The name of the schedule to update. |
Amazon HealthLake
Description
AWS HealthLake is a HIPAA eligibile service that allows customers to store, transform, query, and analyze their FHIR-formatted data in a consistent fashion in the cloud.
Usage
healthlake(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- healthlake( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_fhir_datastore | Creates a data store that can ingest and export FHIR formatted data |
delete_fhir_datastore | Deletes a data store |
describe_fhir_datastore | Gets the properties associated with the FHIR data store, including the data store ID, data store ARN, data store name, data store status, when the data store was created, data store type version, and the data store's endpoint |
describe_fhir_export_job | Displays the properties of a FHIR export job, including the ID, ARN, name, and the status of the job |
describe_fhir_import_job | Displays the properties of a FHIR import job, including the ID, ARN, name, and the status of the job |
list_fhir_datastores | Lists all FHIR data stores that are in the user’s account, regardless of data store status |
list_fhir_export_jobs | Lists all FHIR export jobs associated with an account and their statuses |
list_fhir_import_jobs | Lists all FHIR import jobs associated with an account and their statuses |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns a list of all existing tags associated with a data store |
start_fhir_export_job | Begins a FHIR export job |
start_fhir_import_job | Begins a FHIR Import job |
tag_resource | Adds a user specified key and value tag to a data store |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a data store |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- healthlake()
svc$create_fhir_datastore(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a data store that can ingest and export FHIR formatted data
Description
Creates a data store that can ingest and export FHIR formatted data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_create_fhir_datastore/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_create_fhir_datastore(
DatastoreName = NULL,
DatastoreTypeVersion,
SseConfiguration = NULL,
PreloadDataConfig = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
IdentityProviderConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
DatastoreName |
The user generated name for the data store. |
DatastoreTypeVersion |
[required] The FHIR version of the data store. The only supported version is R4. |
SseConfiguration |
The server-side encryption key configuration for a customer provided encryption key specified for creating a data store. |
PreloadDataConfig |
Optional parameter to preload data upon creation of the data store. Currently, the only supported preloaded data is synthetic data generated from Synthea. |
ClientToken |
Optional user provided token used for ensuring idempotency. |
Tags |
Resource tags that are applied to a data store when it is created. |
IdentityProviderConfiguration |
The configuration of the identity provider that you want to use for your data store. |
Deletes a data store
Description
Deletes a data store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_delete_fhir_datastore/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_delete_fhir_datastore(DatastoreId)
Arguments
DatastoreId |
[required] The AWS-generated ID for the data store to be deleted. |
Gets the properties associated with the FHIR data store, including the data store ID, data store ARN, data store name, data store status, when the data store was created, data store type version, and the data store's endpoint
Description
Gets the properties associated with the FHIR data store, including the data store ID, data store ARN, data store name, data store status, when the data store was created, data store type version, and the data store's endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_describe_fhir_datastore/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_describe_fhir_datastore(DatastoreId)
Arguments
DatastoreId |
[required] The AWS-generated data store ID. |
Displays the properties of a FHIR export job, including the ID, ARN, name, and the status of the job
Description
Displays the properties of a FHIR export job, including the ID, ARN, name, and the status of the job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_describe_fhir_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_describe_fhir_export_job(DatastoreId, JobId)
Arguments
DatastoreId |
[required] The AWS generated ID for the data store from which files are being exported from for an export job. |
JobId |
[required] The AWS generated ID for an export job. |
Displays the properties of a FHIR import job, including the ID, ARN, name, and the status of the job
Description
Displays the properties of a FHIR import job, including the ID, ARN, name, and the status of the job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_describe_fhir_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_describe_fhir_import_job(DatastoreId, JobId)
Arguments
DatastoreId |
[required] The AWS-generated ID of the data store. |
JobId |
[required] The AWS-generated job ID. |
Lists all FHIR data stores that are in the user’s account, regardless of data store status
Description
Lists all FHIR data stores that are in the user’s account, regardless of data store status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_list_fhir_datastores/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_list_fhir_datastores(
Filter = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Filter |
Lists all filters associated with a FHIR data store request. |
NextToken |
Fetches the next page of data stores when results are paginated. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of data stores returned in a single page of a ListFHIRDatastoresRequest call. |
Lists all FHIR export jobs associated with an account and their statuses
Description
Lists all FHIR export jobs associated with an account and their statuses.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_list_fhir_export_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_list_fhir_export_jobs(
DatastoreId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
JobName = NULL,
JobStatus = NULL,
SubmittedBefore = NULL,
SubmittedAfter = NULL
)
Arguments
DatastoreId |
[required] This parameter limits the response to the export job with the specified data store ID. |
NextToken |
A pagination token used to identify the next page of results to return for a ListFHIRExportJobs query. |
MaxResults |
This parameter limits the number of results returned for a ListFHIRExportJobs to a maximum quantity specified by the user. |
JobName |
This parameter limits the response to the export job with the specified job name. |
JobStatus |
This parameter limits the response to the export jobs with the specified job status. |
SubmittedBefore |
This parameter limits the response to FHIR export jobs submitted before a user specified date. |
SubmittedAfter |
This parameter limits the response to FHIR export jobs submitted after a user specified date. |
Lists all FHIR import jobs associated with an account and their statuses
Description
Lists all FHIR import jobs associated with an account and their statuses.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_list_fhir_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_list_fhir_import_jobs(
DatastoreId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
JobName = NULL,
JobStatus = NULL,
SubmittedBefore = NULL,
SubmittedAfter = NULL
)
Arguments
DatastoreId |
[required] This parameter limits the response to the import job with the specified data store ID. |
NextToken |
A pagination token used to identify the next page of results to return for a ListFHIRImportJobs query. |
MaxResults |
This parameter limits the number of results returned for a ListFHIRImportJobs to a maximum quantity specified by the user. |
JobName |
This parameter limits the response to the import job with the specified job name. |
JobStatus |
This parameter limits the response to the import job with the specified job status. |
SubmittedBefore |
This parameter limits the response to FHIR import jobs submitted before a user specified date. |
SubmittedAfter |
This parameter limits the response to FHIR import jobs submitted after a user specified date. |
Returns a list of all existing tags associated with a data store
Description
Returns a list of all existing tags associated with a data store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name(ARN) of the data store for which tags are being added. |
Begins a FHIR export job
Description
Begins a FHIR export job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_start_fhir_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_start_fhir_export_job(
JobName = NULL,
OutputDataConfig,
DatastoreId,
DataAccessRoleArn,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
JobName |
The user generated name for an export job. |
OutputDataConfig |
[required] The output data configuration that was supplied when the export job was created. |
DatastoreId |
[required] The AWS generated ID for the data store from which files are being exported for an export job. |
DataAccessRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name used during the initiation of the job. |
ClientToken |
An optional user provided token used for ensuring idempotency. |
Begins a FHIR Import job
Description
Begins a FHIR Import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_start_fhir_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_start_fhir_import_job(
JobName = NULL,
InputDataConfig,
JobOutputDataConfig,
DatastoreId,
DataAccessRoleArn,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
JobName |
The name of the FHIR Import job in the StartFHIRImport job request. |
InputDataConfig |
[required] The input properties of the FHIR Import job in the StartFHIRImport job request. |
JobOutputDataConfig |
[required] |
DatastoreId |
[required] The AWS-generated data store ID. |
DataAccessRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that gives AWS HealthLake access permission. |
ClientToken |
Optional user provided token used for ensuring idempotency. |
Adds a user specified key and value tag to a data store
Description
Adds a user specified key and value tag to a data store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name(ARN)that gives AWS HealthLake access to the data store which tags are being added to. |
Tags |
[required] The user specified key and value pair tags being added to a data store. |
Removes tags from a data store
Description
Removes tags from a data store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/healthlake_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
healthlake_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name(ARN) of the data store for which tags are being removed. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys for the tags to be removed from the HealthLake data store. |
Amazon Interactive Video Service
Description
Introduction
The Amazon Interactive Video Service (IVS) API is REST compatible, using a standard HTTP API and an Amazon Web Services EventBridge event stream for responses. JSON is used for both requests and responses, including errors.
The API is an Amazon Web Services regional service. For a list of supported regions and Amazon IVS HTTPS service endpoints, see the Amazon IVS page in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.
*All API request parameters and URLs are case sensitive. *
For a summary of notable documentation changes in each release, see Document History.
Allowed Header Values
-
Accept:
application/json -
Accept-Encoding:
gzip, deflate -
Content-Type:
application/json
Key Concepts
-
Channel — Stores configuration data related to your live stream. You first create a channel and then use the channel’s stream key to start your live stream.
-
Stream key — An identifier assigned by Amazon IVS when you create a channel, which is then used to authorize streaming. Treat the stream key like a secret, since it allows anyone to stream to the channel.
-
Playback key pair — Video playback may be restricted using playback-authorization tokens, which use public-key encryption. A playback key pair is the public-private pair of keys used to sign and validate the playback-authorization token.
-
Recording configuration — Stores configuration related to recording a live stream and where to store the recorded content. Multiple channels can reference the same recording configuration.
-
Playback restriction policy — Restricts playback by countries and/or origin sites.
For more information about your IVS live stream, also see Getting Started with IVS Low-Latency Streaming.
Tagging
A tag is a metadata label that you assign to an Amazon Web Services
resource. A tag comprises a key and a value, both set by you. For
example, you might set a tag as topic:nature
to label a particular
video category. See Best practices and strategies
in Tagging Amazon Web Services Resources and Tag Editor for details,
including restrictions that apply to tags and "Tag naming limits and
requirements"; Amazon IVS has no service-specific constraints beyond
what is documented there.
Tags can help you identify and organize your Amazon Web Services resources. For example, you can use the same tag for different resources to indicate that they are related. You can also use tags to manage access (see Access Tags).
The Amazon IVS API has these tag-related operations:
tag_resource
,
untag_resource
, and
list_tags_for_resource
. The following
resources support tagging: Channels, Stream Keys, Playback Key Pairs,
and Recording Configurations.
At most 50 tags can be applied to a resource.
Authentication versus Authorization
Note the differences between these concepts:
-
Authentication is about verifying identity. You need to be authenticated to sign Amazon IVS API requests.
-
Authorization is about granting permissions. Your IAM roles need to have permissions for Amazon IVS API requests. In addition, authorization is needed to view Amazon IVS private channels. (Private channels are channels that are enabled for "playback authorization.")
Authentication
All Amazon IVS API requests must be authenticated with a signature. The Amazon Web Services Command-Line Interface (CLI) and Amazon IVS Player SDKs take care of signing the underlying API calls for you. However, if your application calls the Amazon IVS API directly, it’s your responsibility to sign the requests.
You generate a signature using valid Amazon Web Services credentials
that have permission to perform the requested action. For example, you
must sign PutMetadata requests with a signature generated from a user
account that has the ivs:PutMetadata
permission.
For more information:
Authentication and generating signatures — See Authenticating Requests (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.
Managing Amazon IVS permissions — See Identity and Access Management on the Security page of the Amazon IVS User Guide.
Amazon Resource Names (ARNs)
ARNs uniquely identify AWS resources. An ARN is required when you need to specify a resource unambiguously across all of AWS, such as in IAM policies and API calls. For more information, see Amazon Resource Names in the AWS General Reference.
Usage
ivs(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- ivs( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_get_channel | Performs GetChannel on multiple ARNs simultaneously |
batch_get_stream_key | Performs GetStreamKey on multiple ARNs simultaneously |
batch_start_viewer_session_revocation | Performs StartViewerSessionRevocation on multiple channel ARN and viewer ID pairs simultaneously |
create_channel | Creates a new channel and an associated stream key to start streaming |
create_playback_restriction_policy | Creates a new playback restriction policy, for constraining playback by countries and/or origins |
create_recording_configuration | Creates a new recording configuration, used to enable recording to Amazon S3 |
create_stream_key | Creates a stream key, used to initiate a stream, for the specified channel ARN |
delete_channel | Deletes the specified channel and its associated stream keys |
delete_playback_key_pair | Deletes a specified authorization key pair |
delete_playback_restriction_policy | Deletes the specified playback restriction policy |
delete_recording_configuration | Deletes the recording configuration for the specified ARN |
delete_stream_key | Deletes the stream key for the specified ARN, so it can no longer be used to stream |
get_channel | Gets the channel configuration for the specified channel ARN |
get_playback_key_pair | Gets a specified playback authorization key pair and returns the arn and fingerprint |
get_playback_restriction_policy | Gets the specified playback restriction policy |
get_recording_configuration | Gets the recording configuration for the specified ARN |
get_stream | Gets information about the active (live) stream on a specified channel |
get_stream_key | Gets stream-key information for a specified ARN |
get_stream_session | Gets metadata on a specified stream |
import_playback_key_pair | Imports the public portion of a new key pair and returns its arn and fingerprint |
list_channels | Gets summary information about all channels in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed |
list_playback_key_pairs | Gets summary information about playback key pairs |
list_playback_restriction_policies | Gets summary information about playback restriction policies |
list_recording_configurations | Gets summary information about all recording configurations in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed |
list_stream_keys | Gets summary information about stream keys for the specified channel |
list_streams | Gets summary information about live streams in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed |
list_stream_sessions | Gets a summary of current and previous streams for a specified channel in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_tags_for_resource | Gets information about Amazon Web Services tags for the specified ARN |
put_metadata | Inserts metadata into the active stream of the specified channel |
start_viewer_session_revocation | Starts the process of revoking the viewer session associated with a specified channel ARN and viewer ID |
stop_stream | Disconnects the incoming RTMPS stream for the specified channel |
tag_resource | Adds or updates tags for the Amazon Web Services resource with the specified ARN |
untag_resource | Removes tags from the resource with the specified ARN |
update_channel | Updates a channel's configuration |
update_playback_restriction_policy | Updates a specified playback restriction policy |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- ivs()
svc$batch_get_channel(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Performs GetChannel on multiple ARNs simultaneously
Description
Performs get_channel
on multiple ARNs simultaneously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_batch_get_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_batch_get_channel(arns)
Arguments
arns |
[required] Array of ARNs, one per channel. |
Performs GetStreamKey on multiple ARNs simultaneously
Description
Performs get_stream_key
on multiple ARNs simultaneously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_batch_get_stream_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_batch_get_stream_key(arns)
Arguments
arns |
[required] Array of ARNs, one per stream key. |
Performs StartViewerSessionRevocation on multiple channel ARN and viewer ID pairs simultaneously
Description
Performs start_viewer_session_revocation
on multiple channel ARN and viewer ID pairs simultaneously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_batch_start_viewer_session_revocation/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_batch_start_viewer_session_revocation(viewerSessions)
Arguments
viewerSessions |
[required] Array of viewer sessions, one per channel-ARN and viewer-ID pair. |
Creates a new channel and an associated stream key to start streaming
Description
Creates a new channel and an associated stream key to start streaming.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_create_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_create_channel(
authorized = NULL,
containerFormat = NULL,
insecureIngest = NULL,
latencyMode = NULL,
multitrackInputConfiguration = NULL,
name = NULL,
playbackRestrictionPolicyArn = NULL,
preset = NULL,
recordingConfigurationArn = NULL,
tags = NULL,
type = NULL
)
Arguments
authorized |
Whether the channel is private (enabled for playback authorization).
Default: |
containerFormat |
Indicates which content-packaging format is used (MPEG-TS or fMP4). If
|
insecureIngest |
Whether the channel allows insecure RTMP and SRT ingest. Default:
|
latencyMode |
Channel latency mode. Use |
multitrackInputConfiguration |
Object specifying multitrack input configuration. Default: no multitrack input configuration is specified. |
name |
Channel name. |
playbackRestrictionPolicyArn |
Playback-restriction-policy ARN. A valid ARN value here both specifies the ARN and enables playback restriction. Default: "" (empty string, no playback restriction policy is applied). |
preset |
Optional transcode preset for the channel. This is selectable only for
|
recordingConfigurationArn |
Recording-configuration ARN. A valid ARN value here both specifies the ARN and enables recording. Default: "" (empty string, recording is disabled). |
tags |
Array of 1-50 maps, each of the form |
type |
Channel type, which determines the allowable resolution and bitrate. If
you exceed the allowable input resolution or bitrate, the stream
probably will disconnect immediately. Default: |
Creates a new playback restriction policy, for constraining playback by countries and/or origins
Description
Creates a new playback restriction policy, for constraining playback by countries and/or origins.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_create_playback_restriction_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_create_playback_restriction_policy(
allowedCountries = NULL,
allowedOrigins = NULL,
enableStrictOriginEnforcement = NULL,
name = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
allowedCountries |
A list of country codes that control geoblocking restriction. Allowed values are the officially assigned ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 codes. Default: All countries (an empty array). |
allowedOrigins |
A list of origin sites that control CORS restriction. Allowed values are the same as valid values of the Origin header defined at https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Headers/Origin. Default: All origins (an empty array). |
enableStrictOriginEnforcement |
Whether channel playback is constrained by origin site. Default:
|
name |
Playback-restriction-policy name. The value does not need to be unique. |
tags |
Array of 1-50 maps, each of the form |
Creates a new recording configuration, used to enable recording to Amazon S3
Description
Creates a new recording configuration, used to enable recording to Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_create_recording_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_create_recording_configuration(
destinationConfiguration,
name = NULL,
recordingReconnectWindowSeconds = NULL,
renditionConfiguration = NULL,
tags = NULL,
thumbnailConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
destinationConfiguration |
[required] A complex type that contains a destination configuration for where recorded video will be stored. |
name |
Recording-configuration name. The value does not need to be unique. |
recordingReconnectWindowSeconds |
If a broadcast disconnects and then reconnects within the specified interval, the multiple streams will be considered a single broadcast and merged together. Default: 0. |
renditionConfiguration |
Object that describes which renditions should be recorded for a stream. |
tags |
Array of 1-50 maps, each of the form |
thumbnailConfiguration |
A complex type that allows you to enable/disable the recording of thumbnails for a live session and modify the interval at which thumbnails are generated for the live session. |
Creates a stream key, used to initiate a stream, for the specified channel ARN
Description
Creates a stream key, used to initiate a stream, for the specified channel ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_create_stream_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_create_stream_key(channelArn, tags = NULL)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] ARN of the channel for which to create the stream key. |
tags |
Array of 1-50 maps, each of the form |
Deletes the specified channel and its associated stream keys
Description
Deletes the specified channel and its associated stream keys.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_delete_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_delete_channel(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the channel to be deleted. |
Deletes a specified authorization key pair
Description
Deletes a specified authorization key pair. This invalidates future viewer tokens generated using the key pair’s privateKey
. For more information, see Setting Up Private Channels in the Amazon IVS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_delete_playback_key_pair/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_delete_playback_key_pair(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the key pair to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified playback restriction policy
Description
Deletes the specified playback restriction policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_delete_playback_restriction_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_delete_playback_restriction_policy(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the playback restriction policy to be deleted. |
Deletes the recording configuration for the specified ARN
Description
Deletes the recording configuration for the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_delete_recording_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_delete_recording_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the recording configuration to be deleted. |
Deletes the stream key for the specified ARN, so it can no longer be used to stream
Description
Deletes the stream key for the specified ARN, so it can no longer be used to stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_delete_stream_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_delete_stream_key(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the stream key to be deleted. |
Gets the channel configuration for the specified channel ARN
Description
Gets the channel configuration for the specified channel ARN. See also batch_get_channel
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_channel(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the channel for which the configuration is to be retrieved. |
Gets a specified playback authorization key pair and returns the arn and fingerprint
Description
Gets a specified playback authorization key pair and returns the arn
and fingerprint
. The privateKey
held by the caller can be used to generate viewer authorization tokens, to grant viewers access to private channels. For more information, see Setting Up Private Channels in the Amazon IVS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_playback_key_pair/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_playback_key_pair(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the key pair to be returned. |
Gets the specified playback restriction policy
Description
Gets the specified playback restriction policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_playback_restriction_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_playback_restriction_policy(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the playback restriction policy to be returned. |
Gets the recording configuration for the specified ARN
Description
Gets the recording configuration for the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_recording_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_recording_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the recording configuration to be retrieved. |
Gets information about the active (live) stream on a specified channel
Description
Gets information about the active (live) stream on a specified channel.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_stream(channelArn)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] Channel ARN for stream to be accessed. |
Gets stream-key information for a specified ARN
Description
Gets stream-key information for a specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_stream_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_stream_key(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN for the stream key to be retrieved. |
Gets metadata on a specified stream
Description
Gets metadata on a specified stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_get_stream_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_get_stream_session(channelArn, streamId = NULL)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] ARN of the channel resource |
streamId |
Unique identifier for a live or previously live stream in the specified
channel. If no |
Imports the public portion of a new key pair and returns its arn and fingerprint
Description
Imports the public portion of a new key pair and returns its arn
and fingerprint
. The privateKey
can then be used to generate viewer authorization tokens, to grant viewers access to private channels. For more information, see Setting Up Private Channels in the Amazon IVS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_import_playback_key_pair/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_import_playback_key_pair(name = NULL, publicKeyMaterial, tags = NULL)
Arguments
name |
Playback-key-pair name. The value does not need to be unique. |
publicKeyMaterial |
[required] The public portion of a customer-generated key pair. |
tags |
Any tags provided with the request are added to the playback key pair tags. See Best practices and strategies in Tagging Amazon Web Services Resources and Tag Editor for details, including restrictions that apply to tags and "Tag naming limits and requirements"; Amazon IVS has no service-specific constraints beyond what is documented there. |
Gets summary information about all channels in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all channels in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed. This list can be filtered to match a specified name or recording-configuration ARN. Filters are mutually exclusive and cannot be used together. If you try to use both filters, you will get an error (409 ConflictException).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_channels/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_channels(
filterByName = NULL,
filterByPlaybackRestrictionPolicyArn = NULL,
filterByRecordingConfigurationArn = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
filterByName |
Filters the channel list to match the specified name. |
filterByPlaybackRestrictionPolicyArn |
Filters the channel list to match the specified policy. |
filterByRecordingConfigurationArn |
Filters the channel list to match the specified recording-configuration ARN. |
maxResults |
Maximum number of channels to return. Default: 100. |
nextToken |
The first channel to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
Gets summary information about playback key pairs
Description
Gets summary information about playback key pairs. For more information, see Setting Up Private Channels in the Amazon IVS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_playback_key_pairs/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_playback_key_pairs(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
Maximum number of key pairs to return. Default: your service quota or 100, whichever is smaller. |
nextToken |
The first key pair to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
Gets summary information about playback restriction policies
Description
Gets summary information about playback restriction policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_playback_restriction_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_playback_restriction_policies(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
Maximum number of policies to return. Default: 1. |
nextToken |
The first policy to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
Gets summary information about all recording configurations in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all recording configurations in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_recording_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_recording_configurations(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
Maximum number of recording configurations to return. Default: your service quota or 100, whichever is smaller. |
nextToken |
The first recording configuration to retrieve. This is used for
pagination; see the |
Gets summary information about stream keys for the specified channel
Description
Gets summary information about stream keys for the specified channel.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_stream_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_stream_keys(channelArn, maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] Channel ARN used to filter the list. |
maxResults |
Maximum number of streamKeys to return. Default: 1. |
nextToken |
The first stream key to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
Gets a summary of current and previous streams for a specified channel in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets a summary of current and previous streams for a specified channel in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_stream_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_stream_sessions(channelArn, maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] Channel ARN used to filter the list. |
maxResults |
Maximum number of streams to return. Default: 100. |
nextToken |
The first stream to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
Gets summary information about live streams in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about live streams in your account, in the Amazon Web Services region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_streams/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_streams(filterBy = NULL, maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
filterBy |
Filters the stream list to match the specified criterion. |
maxResults |
Maximum number of streams to return. Default: 100. |
nextToken |
The first stream to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
Gets information about Amazon Web Services tags for the specified ARN
Description
Gets information about Amazon Web Services tags for the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be retrieved. The ARN must be URL-encoded. |
Inserts metadata into the active stream of the specified channel
Description
Inserts metadata into the active stream of the specified channel. At most 5 requests per second per channel are allowed, each with a maximum 1 KB payload. (If 5 TPS is not sufficient for your needs, we recommend batching your data into a single PutMetadata call.) At most 155 requests per second per account are allowed. Also see Embedding Metadata within a Video Stream in the Amazon IVS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_put_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_put_metadata(channelArn, metadata)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] ARN of the channel into which metadata is inserted. This channel must have an active stream. |
metadata |
[required] Metadata to insert into the stream. Maximum: 1 KB per request. |
Starts the process of revoking the viewer session associated with a specified channel ARN and viewer ID
Description
Starts the process of revoking the viewer session associated with a specified channel ARN and viewer ID. Optionally, you can provide a version to revoke viewer sessions less than and including that version. For instructions on associating a viewer ID with a viewer session, see Setting Up Private Channels.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_start_viewer_session_revocation/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_start_viewer_session_revocation(
channelArn,
viewerId,
viewerSessionVersionsLessThanOrEqualTo = NULL
)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] The ARN of the channel associated with the viewer session to revoke. |
viewerId |
[required] The ID of the viewer associated with the viewer session to revoke. Do not use this field for personally identifying, confidential, or sensitive information. |
viewerSessionVersionsLessThanOrEqualTo |
An optional filter on which versions of the viewer session to revoke. All versions less than or equal to the specified version will be revoked. Default: 0. |
Disconnects the incoming RTMPS stream for the specified channel
Description
Disconnects the incoming RTMPS stream for the specified channel. Can be used in conjunction with delete_stream_key
to prevent further streaming to a channel.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_stop_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_stop_stream(channelArn)
Arguments
channelArn |
[required] ARN of the channel for which the stream is to be stopped. |
Adds or updates tags for the Amazon Web Services resource with the specified ARN
Description
Adds or updates tags for the Amazon Web Services resource with the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] ARN of the resource for which tags are to be added or updated. The ARN must be URL-encoded. |
tags |
[required] Array of tags to be added or updated. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Removes tags from the resource with the specified ARN
Description
Removes tags from the resource with the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] ARN of the resource for which tags are to be removed. The ARN must be URL-encoded. |
tagKeys |
[required] Array of tags to be removed. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Updates a channel's configuration
Description
Updates a channel's configuration. Live channels cannot be updated. You must stop the ongoing stream, update the channel, and restart the stream for the changes to take effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_update_channel/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_update_channel(
arn,
authorized = NULL,
containerFormat = NULL,
insecureIngest = NULL,
latencyMode = NULL,
multitrackInputConfiguration = NULL,
name = NULL,
playbackRestrictionPolicyArn = NULL,
preset = NULL,
recordingConfigurationArn = NULL,
type = NULL
)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the channel to be updated. |
authorized |
Whether the channel is private (enabled for playback authorization). |
containerFormat |
Indicates which content-packaging format is used (MPEG-TS or fMP4). If
|
insecureIngest |
Whether the channel allows insecure RTMP and SRT ingest. Default:
|
latencyMode |
Channel latency mode. Use |
multitrackInputConfiguration |
Object specifying multitrack input configuration. Default: no multitrack input configuration is specified. |
name |
Channel name. |
playbackRestrictionPolicyArn |
Playback-restriction-policy ARN. A valid ARN value here both specifies the ARN and enables playback restriction. If this is set to an empty string, playback restriction policy is disabled. |
preset |
Optional transcode preset for the channel. This is selectable only for
|
recordingConfigurationArn |
Recording-configuration ARN. A valid ARN value here both specifies the ARN and enables recording. If this is set to an empty string, recording is disabled. |
type |
Channel type, which determines the allowable resolution and bitrate. If
you exceed the allowable input resolution or bitrate, the stream
probably will disconnect immediately. Default: |
Updates a specified playback restriction policy
Description
Updates a specified playback restriction policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivs_update_playback_restriction_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivs_update_playback_restriction_policy(
allowedCountries = NULL,
allowedOrigins = NULL,
arn,
enableStrictOriginEnforcement = NULL,
name = NULL
)
Arguments
allowedCountries |
A list of country codes that control geoblocking restriction. Allowed values are the officially assigned ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 codes. Default: All countries (an empty array). |
allowedOrigins |
A list of origin sites that control CORS restriction. Allowed values are the same as valid values of the Origin header defined at https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Headers/Origin. Default: All origins (an empty array). |
arn |
[required] ARN of the playback-restriction-policy to be updated. |
enableStrictOriginEnforcement |
Whether channel playback is constrained by origin site. Default:
|
name |
Playback-restriction-policy name. The value does not need to be unique. |
Amazon Interactive Video Service RealTime
Description
The Amazon Interactive Video Service (IVS) real-time API is REST compatible, using a standard HTTP API and an AWS EventBridge event stream for responses. JSON is used for both requests and responses, including errors.
Key Concepts
-
Stage — A virtual space where participants can exchange video in real time.
-
Participant token — A token that authenticates a participant when they join a stage.
-
Participant object — Represents participants (people) in the stage and contains information about them. When a token is created, it includes a participant ID; when a participant uses that token to join a stage, the participant is associated with that participant ID. There is a 1:1 mapping between participant tokens and participants.
For server-side composition:
-
Composition process — Composites participants of a stage into a single video and forwards it to a set of outputs (e.g., IVS channels). Composition operations support this process.
-
Composition — Controls the look of the outputs, including how participants are positioned in the video.
For more information about your IVS live stream, also see Getting Started with Amazon IVS Real-Time Streaming.
Tagging
A tag is a metadata label that you assign to an AWS resource. A tag
comprises a key and a value, both set by you. For example, you might
set a tag as topic:nature
to label a particular video category. See
Best practices and strategies
in Tagging AWS Resources and Tag Editor for details, including
restrictions that apply to tags and "Tag naming limits and
requirements"; Amazon IVS stages has no service-specific constraints
beyond what is documented there.
Tags can help you identify and organize your AWS resources. For example, you can use the same tag for different resources to indicate that they are related. You can also use tags to manage access (see Access Tags).
The Amazon IVS real-time API has these tag-related operations:
tag_resource
,
untag_resource
, and
list_tags_for_resource
. The
following resource supports tagging: Stage.
At most 50 tags can be applied to a resource.
Usage
ivsrealtime(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- ivsrealtime( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_encoder_configuration | Creates an EncoderConfiguration object |
create_ingest_configuration | Creates a new IngestConfiguration resource, used to specify the ingest protocol for a stage |
create_participant_token | Creates an additional token for a specified stage |
create_stage | Creates a new stage (and optionally participant tokens) |
create_storage_configuration | Creates a new storage configuration, used to enable recording to Amazon S3 |
delete_encoder_configuration | Deletes an EncoderConfiguration resource |
delete_ingest_configuration | Deletes a specified IngestConfiguration, so it can no longer be used to broadcast |
delete_public_key | Deletes the specified public key used to sign stage participant tokens |
delete_stage | Shuts down and deletes the specified stage (disconnecting all participants) |
delete_storage_configuration | Deletes the storage configuration for the specified ARN |
disconnect_participant | Disconnects a specified participant from a specified stage |
get_composition | Get information about the specified Composition resource |
get_encoder_configuration | Gets information about the specified EncoderConfiguration resource |
get_ingest_configuration | Gets information about the specified IngestConfiguration |
get_participant | Gets information about the specified participant token |
get_public_key | Gets information for the specified public key |
get_stage | Gets information for the specified stage |
get_stage_session | Gets information for the specified stage session |
get_storage_configuration | Gets the storage configuration for the specified ARN |
import_public_key | Import a public key to be used for signing stage participant tokens |
list_compositions | Gets summary information about all Compositions in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_encoder_configurations | Gets summary information about all EncoderConfigurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_ingest_configurations | Lists all IngestConfigurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_participant_events | Lists events for a specified participant that occurred during a specified stage session |
list_participants | Lists all participants in a specified stage session |
list_public_keys | Gets summary information about all public keys in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_stages | Gets summary information about all stages in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_stage_sessions | Gets all sessions for a specified stage |
list_storage_configurations | Gets summary information about all storage configurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed |
list_tags_for_resource | Gets information about AWS tags for the specified ARN |
start_composition | Starts a Composition from a stage based on the configuration provided in the request |
stop_composition | Stops and deletes a Composition resource |
tag_resource | Adds or updates tags for the AWS resource with the specified ARN |
untag_resource | Removes tags from the resource with the specified ARN |
update_ingest_configuration | Updates a specified IngestConfiguration |
update_stage | Updates a stage’s configuration |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- ivsrealtime()
svc$create_encoder_configuration(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates an EncoderConfiguration object
Description
Creates an EncoderConfiguration object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_create_encoder_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_create_encoder_configuration(
name = NULL,
video = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
Optional name to identify the resource. |
video |
Video configuration. Default: video resolution 1280x720, bitrate 2500 kbps, 30 fps. |
tags |
Tags attached to the resource. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Creates a new IngestConfiguration resource, used to specify the ingest protocol for a stage
Description
Creates a new IngestConfiguration resource, used to specify the ingest protocol for a stage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_create_ingest_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_create_ingest_configuration(
name = NULL,
stageArn = NULL,
userId = NULL,
attributes = NULL,
ingestProtocol,
insecureIngest = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
Optional name that can be specified for the IngestConfiguration being created. |
stageArn |
ARN of the stage with which the IngestConfiguration is associated. |
userId |
Customer-assigned name to help identify the participant using the IngestConfiguration; this can be used to link a participant to a user in the customer’s own systems. This can be any UTF-8 encoded text. This field is exposed to all stage participants and should not be used for personally identifying, confidential, or sensitive information. |
attributes |
Application-provided attributes to store in the IngestConfiguration and attach to a stage. Map keys and values can contain UTF-8 encoded text. The maximum length of this field is 1 KB total. This field is exposed to all stage participants and should not be used for personally identifying, confidential, or sensitive information. |
ingestProtocol |
[required] Type of ingest protocol that the user employs to broadcast. If this is
set to |
insecureIngest |
Whether the stage allows insecure RTMP ingest. This must be set to
|
tags |
Tags attached to the resource. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Creates an additional token for a specified stage
Description
Creates an additional token for a specified stage. This can be done after stage creation or when tokens expire. Tokens always are scoped to the stage for which they are created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_create_participant_token/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_create_participant_token(
stageArn,
duration = NULL,
userId = NULL,
attributes = NULL,
capabilities = NULL
)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] ARN of the stage to which this token is scoped. |
duration |
Duration (in minutes), after which the token expires. Default: 720 (12 hours). |
userId |
Name that can be specified to help identify the token. This can be any UTF-8 encoded text. This field is exposed to all stage participants and should not be used for personally identifying, confidential, or sensitive information. |
attributes |
Application-provided attributes to encode into the token and attach to a stage. Map keys and values can contain UTF-8 encoded text. The maximum length of this field is 1 KB total. This field is exposed to all stage participants and should not be used for personally identifying, confidential, or sensitive information. |
capabilities |
Set of capabilities that the user is allowed to perform in the stage.
Default: |
Creates a new stage (and optionally participant tokens)
Description
Creates a new stage (and optionally participant tokens).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_create_stage/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_create_stage(
name = NULL,
participantTokenConfigurations = NULL,
tags = NULL,
autoParticipantRecordingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
Optional name that can be specified for the stage being created. |
participantTokenConfigurations |
Array of participant token configuration objects to attach to the new stage. |
tags |
Tags attached to the resource. Array of maps, each of the form
|
autoParticipantRecordingConfiguration |
Configuration object for individual participant recording, to attach to the new stage. |
Creates a new storage configuration, used to enable recording to Amazon S3
Description
Creates a new storage configuration, used to enable recording to Amazon S3. When a StorageConfiguration is created, IVS will modify the S3 bucketPolicy of the provided bucket. This will ensure that IVS has sufficient permissions to write content to the provided bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_create_storage_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_create_storage_configuration(name = NULL, s3, tags = NULL)
Arguments
name |
Storage configuration name. The value does not need to be unique. |
s3 |
[required] A complex type that contains a storage configuration for where recorded video will be stored. |
tags |
Tags attached to the resource. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Deletes an EncoderConfiguration resource
Description
Deletes an EncoderConfiguration resource. Ensures that no Compositions are using this template; otherwise, returns an error.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_delete_encoder_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_delete_encoder_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the EncoderConfiguration. |
Deletes a specified IngestConfiguration, so it can no longer be used to broadcast
Description
Deletes a specified IngestConfiguration, so it can no longer be used to broadcast. An IngestConfiguration cannot be deleted if the publisher is actively streaming to a stage, unless force
is set to true
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_delete_ingest_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_delete_ingest_configuration(arn, force = NULL)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the IngestConfiguration. |
force |
Optional field to force deletion of the IngestConfiguration. If this is
set to |
Deletes the specified public key used to sign stage participant tokens
Description
Deletes the specified public key used to sign stage participant tokens. This invalidates future participant tokens generated using the key pair’s private key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_delete_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_delete_public_key(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the public key to be deleted. |
Shuts down and deletes the specified stage (disconnecting all participants)
Description
Shuts down and deletes the specified stage (disconnecting all participants). This operation also removes the stageArn
from the associated IngestConfiguration, if there are participants using the IngestConfiguration to publish to the stage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_delete_stage/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_delete_stage(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the stage to be deleted. |
Deletes the storage configuration for the specified ARN
Description
Deletes the storage configuration for the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_delete_storage_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_delete_storage_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the storage configuration to be deleted. |
Disconnects a specified participant from a specified stage
Description
Disconnects a specified participant from a specified stage. If the participant is publishing using an IngestConfiguration, DisconnectParticipant also updates the stageArn
in the IngestConfiguration to be an empty string.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_disconnect_participant/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_disconnect_participant(stageArn, participantId, reason = NULL)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] ARN of the stage to which the participant is attached. |
participantId |
[required] Identifier of the participant to be disconnected. IVS assigns this; it
is returned by
|
reason |
Description of why this participant is being disconnected. |
Get information about the specified Composition resource
Description
Get information about the specified Composition resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_composition/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_composition(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the Composition resource. |
Gets information about the specified EncoderConfiguration resource
Description
Gets information about the specified EncoderConfiguration resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_encoder_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_encoder_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the EncoderConfiguration resource. |
Gets information about the specified IngestConfiguration
Description
Gets information about the specified IngestConfiguration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_ingest_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_ingest_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the ingest for which the information is to be retrieved. |
Gets information about the specified participant token
Description
Gets information about the specified participant token.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_participant/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_participant(stageArn, sessionId, participantId)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] Stage ARN. |
sessionId |
[required] ID of a session within the stage. |
participantId |
[required] Unique identifier for the participant. This is assigned by IVS and
returned by
|
Gets information for the specified public key
Description
Gets information for the specified public key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_public_key(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the public key for which the information is to be retrieved. |
Gets information for the specified stage
Description
Gets information for the specified stage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_stage/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_stage(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the stage for which the information is to be retrieved. |
Gets information for the specified stage session
Description
Gets information for the specified stage session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_stage_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_stage_session(stageArn, sessionId)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] ARN of the stage for which the information is to be retrieved. |
sessionId |
[required] ID of a session within the stage. |
Gets the storage configuration for the specified ARN
Description
Gets the storage configuration for the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_get_storage_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_get_storage_configuration(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the storage configuration to be retrieved. |
Import a public key to be used for signing stage participant tokens
Description
Import a public key to be used for signing stage participant tokens.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_import_public_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_import_public_key(publicKeyMaterial, name = NULL, tags = NULL)
Arguments
publicKeyMaterial |
[required] The content of the public key to be imported. |
name |
Name of the public key to be imported. |
tags |
Tags attached to the resource. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Gets summary information about all Compositions in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all Compositions in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_compositions/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_compositions(
filterByStageArn = NULL,
filterByEncoderConfigurationArn = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
filterByStageArn |
Filters the Composition list to match the specified Stage ARN. |
filterByEncoderConfigurationArn |
Filters the Composition list to match the specified EncoderConfiguration attached to at least one of its output. |
nextToken |
The first Composition to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 100. |
Gets summary information about all EncoderConfigurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all EncoderConfigurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_encoder_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_encoder_configurations(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The first encoder configuration to retrieve. This is used for
pagination; see the |
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 100. |
Lists all IngestConfigurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Lists all IngestConfigurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_ingest_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_ingest_configurations(
filterByStageArn = NULL,
filterByState = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
filterByStageArn |
Filters the response list to match the specified stage ARN. Only one filter (by stage ARN or by state) can be used at a time. |
filterByState |
Filters the response list to match the specified state. Only one filter (by stage ARN or by state) can be used at a time. |
nextToken |
The first IngestConfiguration to retrieve. This is used for pagination;
see the |
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 50. |
Lists events for a specified participant that occurred during a specified stage session
Description
Lists events for a specified participant that occurred during a specified stage session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_participant_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_participant_events(
stageArn,
sessionId,
participantId,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] Stage ARN. |
sessionId |
[required] ID of a session within the stage. |
participantId |
[required] Unique identifier for this participant. This is assigned by IVS and
returned by
|
nextToken |
The first participant event to retrieve. This is used for pagination;
see the |
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 50. |
Lists all participants in a specified stage session
Description
Lists all participants in a specified stage session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_participants/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_participants(
stageArn,
sessionId,
filterByUserId = NULL,
filterByPublished = NULL,
filterByState = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
filterByRecordingState = NULL
)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] Stage ARN. |
sessionId |
[required] ID of the session within the stage. |
filterByUserId |
Filters the response list to match the specified user ID. Only one of
|
filterByPublished |
Filters the response list to only show participants who published during
the stage session. Only one of |
filterByState |
Filters the response list to only show participants in the specified
state. Only one of |
nextToken |
The first participant to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 50. |
filterByRecordingState |
Filters the response list to only show participants with the specified
recording state. Only one of |
Gets summary information about all public keys in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all public keys in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_public_keys/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_public_keys(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The first public key to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 50. |
Gets all sessions for a specified stage
Description
Gets all sessions for a specified stage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_stage_sessions/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_stage_sessions(stageArn, nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] Stage ARN. |
nextToken |
The first stage session to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see
the |
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 50. |
Gets summary information about all stages in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all stages in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_stages/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_stages(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The first stage to retrieve. This is used for pagination; see the
|
maxResults |
Maximum number of results to return. Default: 50. |
Gets summary information about all storage configurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed
Description
Gets summary information about all storage configurations in your account, in the AWS region where the API request is processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_storage_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_storage_configurations(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The first storage configuration to retrieve. This is used for
pagination; see the |
maxResults |
Maximum number of storage configurations to return. Default: your service quota or 100, whichever is smaller. |
Gets information about AWS tags for the specified ARN
Description
Gets information about AWS tags for the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be retrieved. The ARN must be URL-encoded. |
Starts a Composition from a stage based on the configuration provided in the request
Description
Starts a Composition from a stage based on the configuration provided in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_start_composition/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_start_composition(
stageArn,
idempotencyToken = NULL,
layout = NULL,
destinations,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
stageArn |
[required] ARN of the stage to be used for compositing. |
idempotencyToken |
Idempotency token. |
layout |
Layout object to configure composition parameters. |
destinations |
[required] Array of destination configuration. |
tags |
Tags attached to the resource. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Stops and deletes a Composition resource
Description
Stops and deletes a Composition resource. Any broadcast from the Composition resource is stopped.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_stop_composition/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_stop_composition(arn)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the Composition. |
Adds or updates tags for the AWS resource with the specified ARN
Description
Adds or updates tags for the AWS resource with the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be tagged. The ARN must be URL-encoded. |
tags |
[required] Array of tags to be added or updated. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Removes tags from the resource with the specified ARN
Description
Removes tags from the resource with the specified ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be untagged. The ARN must be URL-encoded. |
tagKeys |
[required] Array of tags to be removed. Array of maps, each of the form
|
Updates a specified IngestConfiguration
Description
Updates a specified IngestConfiguration. Only the stage ARN attached to the IngestConfiguration can be updated. An IngestConfiguration that is active cannot be updated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_update_ingest_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_update_ingest_configuration(arn, stageArn = NULL)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the IngestConfiguration, for which the related stage ARN needs to be updated. |
stageArn |
Stage ARN that needs to be updated. |
Updates a stage’s configuration
Description
Updates a stage’s configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ivsrealtime_update_stage/ for full documentation.
Usage
ivsrealtime_update_stage(
arn,
name = NULL,
autoParticipantRecordingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
arn |
[required] ARN of the stage to be updated. |
name |
Name of the stage to be updated. |
autoParticipantRecordingConfiguration |
Configuration object for individual participant recording, to attach to the stage. Note that this cannot be updated while recording is active. |
Managed Streaming for Kafka
Description
The operations for managing an Amazon MSK cluster.
Usage
kafka(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kafka( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_associate_scram_secret | Associates one or more Scram Secrets with an Amazon MSK cluster |
batch_disassociate_scram_secret | Disassociates one or more Scram Secrets from an Amazon MSK cluster |
create_cluster | Creates a new MSK cluster |
create_cluster_v2 | Creates a new MSK cluster |
create_configuration | Creates a new MSK configuration |
create_replicator | Creates the replicator |
create_vpc_connection | Creates a new MSK VPC connection |
delete_cluster | Deletes the MSK cluster specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request |
delete_cluster_policy | Deletes the MSK cluster policy specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request |
delete_configuration | Deletes an MSK Configuration |
delete_replicator | Deletes a replicator |
delete_vpc_connection | Deletes a MSK VPC connection |
describe_cluster | Returns a description of the MSK cluster whose Amazon Resource Name (ARN) is specified in the request |
describe_cluster_operation | Returns a description of the cluster operation specified by the ARN |
describe_cluster_operation_v2 | Returns a description of the cluster operation specified by the ARN |
describe_cluster_v2 | Returns a description of the MSK cluster whose Amazon Resource Name (ARN) is specified in the request |
describe_configuration | Returns a description of this MSK configuration |
describe_configuration_revision | Returns a description of this revision of the configuration |
describe_replicator | Describes a replicator |
describe_vpc_connection | Returns a description of this MSK VPC connection |
get_bootstrap_brokers | A list of brokers that a client application can use to bootstrap |
get_cluster_policy | Get the MSK cluster policy specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request |
get_compatible_kafka_versions | Gets the Apache Kafka versions to which you can update the MSK cluster |
list_client_vpc_connections | Returns a list of all the VPC connections in this Region |
list_cluster_operations | Returns a list of all the operations that have been performed on the specified MSK cluster |
list_cluster_operations_v2 | Returns a list of all the operations that have been performed on the specified MSK cluster |
list_clusters | Returns a list of all the MSK clusters in the current Region |
list_clusters_v2 | Returns a list of all the MSK clusters in the current Region |
list_configuration_revisions | Returns a list of all the MSK configurations in this Region |
list_configurations | Returns a list of all the MSK configurations in this Region |
list_kafka_versions | Returns a list of Apache Kafka versions |
list_nodes | Returns a list of the broker nodes in the cluster |
list_replicators | Lists the replicators |
list_scram_secrets | Returns a list of the Scram Secrets associated with an Amazon MSK cluster |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns a list of the tags associated with the specified resource |
list_vpc_connections | Returns a list of all the VPC connections in this Region |
put_cluster_policy | Creates or updates the MSK cluster policy specified by the cluster Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request |
reboot_broker | Reboots brokers |
reject_client_vpc_connection | Returns empty response |
tag_resource | Adds tags to the specified MSK resource |
untag_resource | Removes the tags associated with the keys that are provided in the query |
update_broker_count | Updates the number of broker nodes in the cluster |
update_broker_storage | Updates the EBS storage associated with MSK brokers |
update_broker_type | Updates EC2 instance type |
update_cluster_configuration | Updates the cluster with the configuration that is specified in the request body |
update_cluster_kafka_version | Updates the Apache Kafka version for the cluster |
update_configuration | Updates an MSK configuration |
update_connectivity | Updates the cluster's connectivity configuration |
update_monitoring | Updates the monitoring settings for the cluster |
update_replication_info | Updates replication info of a replicator |
update_security | Updates the security settings for the cluster |
update_storage | Updates cluster broker volume size (or) sets cluster storage mode to TIERED |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kafka()
svc$batch_associate_scram_secret(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Associates one or more Scram Secrets with an Amazon MSK cluster
Description
Associates one or more Scram Secrets with an Amazon MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_batch_associate_scram_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_batch_associate_scram_secret(ClusterArn, SecretArnList)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster to be updated. |
SecretArnList |
[required] List of AWS Secrets Manager secret ARNs. |
Disassociates one or more Scram Secrets from an Amazon MSK cluster
Description
Disassociates one or more Scram Secrets from an Amazon MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_batch_disassociate_scram_secret/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_batch_disassociate_scram_secret(ClusterArn, SecretArnList)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster to be updated. |
SecretArnList |
[required] List of AWS Secrets Manager secret ARNs. |
Creates a new MSK cluster
Description
Creates a new MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_create_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_create_cluster(
BrokerNodeGroupInfo,
ClientAuthentication = NULL,
ClusterName,
ConfigurationInfo = NULL,
EncryptionInfo = NULL,
EnhancedMonitoring = NULL,
OpenMonitoring = NULL,
KafkaVersion,
LoggingInfo = NULL,
NumberOfBrokerNodes,
Tags = NULL,
StorageMode = NULL
)
Arguments
BrokerNodeGroupInfo |
[required] Information about the broker nodes in the cluster. |
ClientAuthentication |
Includes all client authentication related information. |
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster. |
ConfigurationInfo |
Represents the configuration that you want MSK to use for the brokers in a cluster. |
EncryptionInfo |
Includes all encryption-related information. |
EnhancedMonitoring |
Specifies the level of monitoring for the MSK cluster. The possible values are DEFAULT, PER_BROKER, PER_TOPIC_PER_BROKER, and PER_TOPIC_PER_PARTITION. |
OpenMonitoring |
The settings for open monitoring. |
KafkaVersion |
[required] The version of Apache Kafka. |
LoggingInfo |
|
NumberOfBrokerNodes |
[required] The number of broker nodes in the cluster. |
Tags |
Create tags when creating the cluster. |
StorageMode |
This controls storage mode for supported storage tiers. |
Creates a new MSK cluster
Description
Creates a new MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_create_cluster_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_create_cluster_v2(
ClusterName,
Tags = NULL,
Provisioned = NULL,
Serverless = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster. |
Tags |
A map of tags that you want the cluster to have. |
Provisioned |
Information about the provisioned cluster. |
Serverless |
Information about the serverless cluster. |
Creates a new MSK configuration
Description
Creates a new MSK configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_create_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_create_configuration(
Description = NULL,
KafkaVersions = NULL,
Name,
ServerProperties
)
Arguments
Description |
The description of the configuration. |
KafkaVersions |
The versions of Apache Kafka with which you can use this MSK configuration. |
Name |
[required] The name of the configuration. |
ServerProperties |
[required] Contents of the server.properties file. When using the API, you must ensure that the contents of the file are base64 encoded. When using the AWS Management Console, the SDK, or the AWS CLI, the contents of server.properties can be in plaintext. |
Creates the replicator
Description
Creates the replicator.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_create_replicator/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_create_replicator(
Description = NULL,
KafkaClusters,
ReplicationInfoList,
ReplicatorName,
ServiceExecutionRoleArn,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Description |
A summary description of the replicator. |
KafkaClusters |
[required] Kafka Clusters to use in setting up sources / targets for replication. |
ReplicationInfoList |
[required] A list of replication configurations, where each configuration targets a given source cluster to target cluster replication flow. |
ReplicatorName |
[required] The name of the replicator. Alpha-numeric characters with '-' are allowed. |
ServiceExecutionRoleArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM role used by the replicator to access resources in the customer's account (e.g source and target clusters) |
Tags |
List of tags to attach to created Replicator. |
Creates a new MSK VPC connection
Description
Creates a new MSK VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_create_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_create_vpc_connection(
TargetClusterArn,
Authentication,
VpcId,
ClientSubnets,
SecurityGroups,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
TargetClusterArn |
[required] The cluster Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the VPC connection. |
Authentication |
[required] The authentication type of VPC connection. |
VpcId |
[required] The VPC ID of VPC connection. |
ClientSubnets |
[required] The list of client subnets. |
SecurityGroups |
[required] The list of security groups. |
Tags |
A map of tags for the VPC connection. |
Deletes the MSK cluster specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request
Description
Deletes the MSK cluster specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_delete_cluster(ClusterArn, CurrentVersion = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
The current version of the MSK cluster. |
Deletes the MSK cluster policy specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request
Description
Deletes the MSK cluster policy specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_delete_cluster_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_delete_cluster_policy(ClusterArn)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster. |
Deletes an MSK Configuration
Description
Deletes an MSK Configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_delete_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_delete_configuration(Arn)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an MSK configuration. |
Deletes a replicator
Description
Deletes a replicator.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_delete_replicator/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_delete_replicator(CurrentVersion = NULL, ReplicatorArn)
Arguments
CurrentVersion |
The current version of the replicator. |
ReplicatorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicator to be deleted. |
Deletes a MSK VPC connection
Description
Deletes a MSK VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_delete_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_delete_vpc_connection(Arn)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an MSK VPC connection. |
Returns a description of the MSK cluster whose Amazon Resource Name (ARN) is specified in the request
Description
Returns a description of the MSK cluster whose Amazon Resource Name (ARN) is specified in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_cluster(ClusterArn)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
Returns a description of the cluster operation specified by the ARN
Description
Returns a description of the cluster operation specified by the ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_cluster_operation/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_cluster_operation(ClusterOperationArn)
Arguments
ClusterOperationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the MSK cluster operation. |
Returns a description of the cluster operation specified by the ARN
Description
Returns a description of the cluster operation specified by the ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_cluster_operation_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_cluster_operation_v2(ClusterOperationArn)
Arguments
ClusterOperationArn |
[required] ARN of the cluster operation to describe. |
Returns a description of the MSK cluster whose Amazon Resource Name (ARN) is specified in the request
Description
Returns a description of the MSK cluster whose Amazon Resource Name (ARN) is specified in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_cluster_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_cluster_v2(ClusterArn)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
Returns a description of this MSK configuration
Description
Returns a description of this MSK configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_configuration(Arn)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an MSK configuration and all of its revisions. |
Returns a description of this revision of the configuration
Description
Returns a description of this revision of the configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_configuration_revision/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_configuration_revision(Arn, Revision)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an MSK configuration and all of its revisions. |
Revision |
[required] A string that uniquely identifies a revision of an MSK configuration. |
Describes a replicator
Description
Describes a replicator.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_replicator/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_replicator(ReplicatorArn)
Arguments
ReplicatorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicator to be described. |
Returns a description of this MSK VPC connection
Description
Returns a description of this MSK VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_describe_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_describe_vpc_connection(Arn)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a MSK VPC connection. |
A list of brokers that a client application can use to bootstrap
Description
A list of brokers that a client application can use to bootstrap. This list doesn't necessarily include all of the brokers in the cluster. The following Python 3.6 example shows how you can use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a cluster to get its bootstrap brokers. If you don't know the ARN of your cluster, you can use the list_clusters
operation to get the ARNs of all the clusters in this account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_get_bootstrap_brokers/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_get_bootstrap_brokers(ClusterArn)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
Get the MSK cluster policy specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request
Description
Get the MSK cluster policy specified by the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_get_cluster_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_get_cluster_policy(ClusterArn)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster. |
Gets the Apache Kafka versions to which you can update the MSK cluster
Description
Gets the Apache Kafka versions to which you can update the MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_get_compatible_kafka_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_get_compatible_kafka_versions(ClusterArn = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster check. |
Returns a list of all the VPC connections in this Region
Description
Returns a list of all the VPC connections in this Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_client_vpc_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_client_vpc_connections(
ClusterArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of all the operations that have been performed on the specified MSK cluster
Description
Returns a list of all the operations that have been performed on the specified MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_cluster_operations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_cluster_operations(ClusterArn, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of all the operations that have been performed on the specified MSK cluster
Description
Returns a list of all the operations that have been performed on the specified MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_cluster_operations_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_cluster_operations_v2(
ClusterArn,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The arn of the cluster whose operations are being requested. |
MaxResults |
The maxResults of the query. |
NextToken |
The nextToken of the query. |
Returns a list of all the MSK clusters in the current Region
Description
Returns a list of all the MSK clusters in the current Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_clusters(
ClusterNameFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterNameFilter |
Specify a prefix of the name of the clusters that you want to list. The service lists all the clusters whose names start with this prefix. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of all the MSK clusters in the current Region
Description
Returns a list of all the MSK clusters in the current Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_clusters_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_clusters_v2(
ClusterNameFilter = NULL,
ClusterTypeFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterNameFilter |
Specify a prefix of the names of the clusters that you want to list. The service lists all the clusters whose names start with this prefix. |
ClusterTypeFilter |
Specify either PROVISIONED or SERVERLESS. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of all the MSK configurations in this Region
Description
Returns a list of all the MSK configurations in this Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_configuration_revisions/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_configuration_revisions(Arn, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an MSK configuration and all of its revisions. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of all the MSK configurations in this Region
Description
Returns a list of all the MSK configurations in this Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_configurations(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of Apache Kafka versions
Description
Returns a list of Apache Kafka versions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_kafka_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_kafka_versions(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Returns a list of the broker nodes in the cluster
Description
Returns a list of the broker nodes in the cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_nodes/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_nodes(ClusterArn, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Lists the replicators
Description
Lists the replicators.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_replicators/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_replicators(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ReplicatorNameFilter = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
If the response of ListReplicators is truncated, it returns a NextToken in the response. This NextToken should be sent in the subsequent request to ListReplicators. |
ReplicatorNameFilter |
Returns replicators starting with given name. |
Returns a list of the Scram Secrets associated with an Amazon MSK cluster
Description
Returns a list of the Scram Secrets associated with an Amazon MSK cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_scram_secrets/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_scram_secrets(ClusterArn, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The arn of the cluster. |
MaxResults |
The maxResults of the query. |
NextToken |
The nextToken of the query. |
Returns a list of the tags associated with the specified resource
Description
Returns a list of the tags associated with the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the resource that's associated with the tags. |
Returns a list of all the VPC connections in this Region
Description
Returns a list of all the VPC connections in this Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_list_vpc_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_list_vpc_connections(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in the response. If there are more results, the response includes a NextToken parameter. |
NextToken |
The paginated results marker. When the result of the operation is truncated, the call returns NextToken in the response. To get the next batch, provide this token in your next request. |
Creates or updates the MSK cluster policy specified by the cluster Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request
Description
Creates or updates the MSK cluster policy specified by the cluster Amazon Resource Name (ARN) in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_put_cluster_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_put_cluster_policy(ClusterArn, CurrentVersion = NULL, Policy)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
The policy version. |
Policy |
[required] The policy. |
Reboots brokers
Description
Reboots brokers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_reboot_broker/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_reboot_broker(BrokerIds, ClusterArn)
Arguments
BrokerIds |
[required] The list of broker IDs to be rebooted. The reboot-broker operation supports rebooting one broker at a time. |
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster to be updated. |
Returns empty response
Description
Returns empty response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_reject_client_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_reject_client_vpc_connection(ClusterArn, VpcConnectionArn)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster. |
VpcConnectionArn |
[required] The VPC connection ARN. |
Adds tags to the specified MSK resource
Description
Adds tags to the specified MSK resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the resource that's associated with the tags. |
Tags |
[required] The key-value pair for the resource tag. |
Removes the tags associated with the keys that are provided in the query
Description
Removes the tags associated with the keys that are provided in the query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the resource that's associated with the tags. |
TagKeys |
[required] Tag keys must be unique for a given cluster. In addition, the following restrictions apply:
|
Updates the number of broker nodes in the cluster
Description
Updates the number of broker nodes in the cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_broker_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_broker_count(
ClusterArn,
CurrentVersion,
TargetNumberOfBrokerNodes
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of cluster to update from. A successful operation will then generate a new version. |
TargetNumberOfBrokerNodes |
[required] The number of broker nodes that you want the cluster to have after this operation completes successfully. |
Updates the EBS storage associated with MSK brokers
Description
Updates the EBS storage associated with MSK brokers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_broker_storage/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_broker_storage(
ClusterArn,
CurrentVersion,
TargetBrokerEBSVolumeInfo
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of cluster to update from. A successful operation will then generate a new version. |
TargetBrokerEBSVolumeInfo |
[required] Describes the target volume size and the ID of the broker to apply the update to. |
Updates EC2 instance type
Description
Updates EC2 instance type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_broker_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_broker_type(ClusterArn, CurrentVersion, TargetInstanceType)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The cluster version that you want to change. After this operation completes successfully, the cluster will have a new version. |
TargetInstanceType |
[required] The Amazon MSK broker type that you want all of the brokers in this cluster to be. |
Updates the cluster with the configuration that is specified in the request body
Description
Updates the cluster with the configuration that is specified in the request body.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_cluster_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_cluster_configuration(
ClusterArn,
ConfigurationInfo,
CurrentVersion
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
ConfigurationInfo |
[required] Represents the configuration that you want MSK to use for the brokers in a cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of the cluster that needs to be updated. |
Updates the Apache Kafka version for the cluster
Description
Updates the Apache Kafka version for the cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_cluster_kafka_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_cluster_kafka_version(
ClusterArn,
ConfigurationInfo = NULL,
CurrentVersion,
TargetKafkaVersion
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster to be updated. |
ConfigurationInfo |
The custom configuration that should be applied on the new version of cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] Current cluster version. |
TargetKafkaVersion |
[required] Target Kafka version. |
Updates an MSK configuration
Description
Updates an MSK configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_configuration(Arn, Description = NULL, ServerProperties)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configuration. |
Description |
The description of the configuration revision. |
ServerProperties |
[required] Contents of the server.properties file. When using the API, you must ensure that the contents of the file are base64 encoded. When using the AWS Management Console, the SDK, or the AWS CLI, the contents of server.properties can be in plaintext. |
Updates the cluster's connectivity configuration
Description
Updates the cluster's connectivity configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_connectivity/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_connectivity(ClusterArn, ConnectivityInfo, CurrentVersion)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the configuration. |
ConnectivityInfo |
[required] Information about the broker access configuration. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of the MSK cluster to update. Cluster versions aren't simple numbers. You can describe an MSK cluster to find its version. When this update operation is successful, it generates a new cluster version. |
Updates the monitoring settings for the cluster
Description
Updates the monitoring settings for the cluster. You can use this operation to specify which Apache Kafka metrics you want Amazon MSK to send to Amazon CloudWatch. You can also specify settings for open monitoring with Prometheus.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_monitoring/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_monitoring(
ClusterArn,
CurrentVersion,
EnhancedMonitoring = NULL,
OpenMonitoring = NULL,
LoggingInfo = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of the MSK cluster to update. Cluster versions aren't simple numbers. You can describe an MSK cluster to find its version. When this update operation is successful, it generates a new cluster version. |
EnhancedMonitoring |
Specifies which Apache Kafka metrics Amazon MSK gathers and sends to Amazon CloudWatch for this cluster. |
OpenMonitoring |
The settings for open monitoring. |
LoggingInfo |
Updates replication info of a replicator
Description
Updates replication info of a replicator.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_replication_info/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_replication_info(
ConsumerGroupReplication = NULL,
CurrentVersion,
ReplicatorArn,
SourceKafkaClusterArn,
TargetKafkaClusterArn,
TopicReplication = NULL
)
Arguments
ConsumerGroupReplication |
Updated consumer group replication information. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] Current replicator version. |
ReplicatorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicator to be updated. |
SourceKafkaClusterArn |
[required] The ARN of the source Kafka cluster. |
TargetKafkaClusterArn |
[required] The ARN of the target Kafka cluster. |
TopicReplication |
Updated topic replication information. |
Updates the security settings for the cluster
Description
Updates the security settings for the cluster. You can use this operation to specify encryption and authentication on existing clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_security/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_security(
ClientAuthentication = NULL,
ClusterArn,
CurrentVersion,
EncryptionInfo = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientAuthentication |
Includes all client authentication related information. |
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the cluster. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of the MSK cluster to update. Cluster versions aren't simple numbers. You can describe an MSK cluster to find its version. When this update operation is successful, it generates a new cluster version. |
EncryptionInfo |
Includes all encryption-related information. |
Updates cluster broker volume size (or) sets cluster storage mode to TIERED
Description
Updates cluster broker volume size (or) sets cluster storage mode to TIERED.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafka_update_storage/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafka_update_storage(
ClusterArn,
CurrentVersion,
ProvisionedThroughput = NULL,
StorageMode = NULL,
VolumeSizeGB = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cluster to be updated. |
CurrentVersion |
[required] The version of cluster to update from. A successful operation will then generate a new version. |
ProvisionedThroughput |
EBS volume provisioned throughput information. |
StorageMode |
Controls storage mode for supported storage tiers. |
VolumeSizeGB |
size of the EBS volume to update. |
Managed Streaming for Kafka Connect
Description
Managed Streaming for Kafka Connect
Usage
kafkaconnect(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kafkaconnect( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_connector | Creates a connector using the specified properties |
create_custom_plugin | Creates a custom plugin using the specified properties |
create_worker_configuration | Creates a worker configuration using the specified properties |
delete_connector | Deletes the specified connector |
delete_custom_plugin | Deletes a custom plugin |
delete_worker_configuration | Deletes the specified worker configuration |
describe_connector | Returns summary information about the connector |
describe_connector_operation | Returns information about the specified connector's operations |
describe_custom_plugin | A summary description of the custom plugin |
describe_worker_configuration | Returns information about a worker configuration |
list_connector_operations | Lists information about a connector's operation(s) |
list_connectors | Returns a list of all the connectors in this account and Region |
list_custom_plugins | Returns a list of all of the custom plugins in this account and Region |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all the tags attached to the specified resource |
list_worker_configurations | Returns a list of all of the worker configurations in this account and Region |
tag_resource | Attaches tags to the specified resource |
untag_resource | Removes tags from the specified resource |
update_connector | Updates the specified connector |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kafkaconnect()
svc$create_connector(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a connector using the specified properties
Description
Creates a connector using the specified properties.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_create_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_create_connector(
capacity,
connectorConfiguration,
connectorDescription = NULL,
connectorName,
kafkaCluster,
kafkaClusterClientAuthentication,
kafkaClusterEncryptionInTransit,
kafkaConnectVersion,
logDelivery = NULL,
plugins,
serviceExecutionRoleArn,
workerConfiguration = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
capacity |
[required] Information about the capacity allocated to the connector. Exactly one of the two properties must be specified. |
connectorConfiguration |
[required] A map of keys to values that represent the configuration for the connector. |
connectorDescription |
A summary description of the connector. |
connectorName |
[required] The name of the connector. |
kafkaCluster |
[required] Specifies which Apache Kafka cluster to connect to. |
kafkaClusterClientAuthentication |
[required] Details of the client authentication used by the Apache Kafka cluster. |
kafkaClusterEncryptionInTransit |
[required] Details of encryption in transit to the Apache Kafka cluster. |
kafkaConnectVersion |
[required] The version of Kafka Connect. It has to be compatible with both the Apache Kafka cluster's version and the plugins. |
logDelivery |
Details about log delivery. |
plugins |
[required] Amazon MSK Connect does not currently support specifying multiple plugins as a list. To use more than one plugin for your connector, you can create a single custom plugin using a ZIP file that bundles multiple plugins together. Specifies which plugin to use for the connector. You must specify a
single-element list containing one |
serviceExecutionRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role used by the connector to access the Amazon Web Services resources that it needs. The types of resources depends on the logic of the connector. For example, a connector that has Amazon S3 as a destination must have permissions that allow it to write to the S3 destination bucket. |
workerConfiguration |
Specifies which worker configuration to use with the connector. |
tags |
The tags you want to attach to the connector. |
Creates a custom plugin using the specified properties
Description
Creates a custom plugin using the specified properties.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_create_custom_plugin/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_create_custom_plugin(
contentType,
description = NULL,
location,
name,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
contentType |
[required] The type of the plugin file. |
description |
A summary description of the custom plugin. |
location |
[required] Information about the location of a custom plugin. |
name |
[required] The name of the custom plugin. |
tags |
The tags you want to attach to the custom plugin. |
Creates a worker configuration using the specified properties
Description
Creates a worker configuration using the specified properties.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_create_worker_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_create_worker_configuration(
description = NULL,
name,
propertiesFileContent,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
description |
A summary description of the worker configuration. |
name |
[required] The name of the worker configuration. |
propertiesFileContent |
[required] Base64 encoded contents of connect-distributed.properties file. |
tags |
The tags you want to attach to the worker configuration. |
Deletes the specified connector
Description
Deletes the specified connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_delete_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_delete_connector(connectorArn, currentVersion = NULL)
Arguments
connectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the connector that you want to delete. |
currentVersion |
The current version of the connector that you want to delete. |
Deletes a custom plugin
Description
Deletes a custom plugin.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_delete_custom_plugin/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_delete_custom_plugin(customPluginArn)
Arguments
customPluginArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the custom plugin that you want to delete. |
Deletes the specified worker configuration
Description
Deletes the specified worker configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_delete_worker_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_delete_worker_configuration(workerConfigurationArn)
Arguments
workerConfigurationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the worker configuration that you want to delete. |
Returns summary information about the connector
Description
Returns summary information about the connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_describe_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_describe_connector(connectorArn)
Arguments
connectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the connector that you want to describe. |
Returns information about the specified connector's operations
Description
Returns information about the specified connector's operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_describe_connector_operation/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_describe_connector_operation(connectorOperationArn)
Arguments
connectorOperationArn |
[required] ARN of the connector operation to be described. |
A summary description of the custom plugin
Description
A summary description of the custom plugin.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_describe_custom_plugin/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_describe_custom_plugin(customPluginArn)
Arguments
customPluginArn |
[required] Returns information about a custom plugin. |
Returns information about a worker configuration
Description
Returns information about a worker configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_describe_worker_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_describe_worker_configuration(workerConfigurationArn)
Arguments
workerConfigurationArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the worker configuration that you want to get information about. |
Lists information about a connector's operation(s)
Description
Lists information about a connector's operation(s).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_list_connector_operations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_list_connector_operations(
connectorArn,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
connectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the connector for which to list operations. |
maxResults |
Maximum number of connector operations to fetch in one get request. |
nextToken |
If the response is truncated, it includes a NextToken. Send this NextToken in a subsequent request to continue listing from where it left off. |
Returns a list of all the connectors in this account and Region
Description
Returns a list of all the connectors in this account and Region. The list is limited to connectors whose name starts with the specified prefix. The response also includes a description of each of the listed connectors.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_list_connectors/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_list_connectors(
connectorNamePrefix = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
connectorNamePrefix |
The name prefix that you want to use to search for and list connectors. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of connectors to list in one response. |
nextToken |
If the response of a ListConnectors operation is truncated, it will include a NextToken. Send this NextToken in a subsequent request to continue listing from where the previous operation left off. |
Returns a list of all of the custom plugins in this account and Region
Description
Returns a list of all of the custom plugins in this account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_list_custom_plugins/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_list_custom_plugins(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
namePrefix = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of custom plugins to list in one response. |
nextToken |
If the response of a ListCustomPlugins operation is truncated, it will include a NextToken. Send this NextToken in a subsequent request to continue listing from where the previous operation left off. |
namePrefix |
Lists custom plugin names that start with the specified text string. |
Lists all the tags attached to the specified resource
Description
Lists all the tags attached to the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want to list all attached tags. |
Returns a list of all of the worker configurations in this account and Region
Description
Returns a list of all of the worker configurations in this account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_list_worker_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_list_worker_configurations(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
namePrefix = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of worker configurations to list in one response. |
nextToken |
If the response of a ListWorkerConfigurations operation is truncated, it will include a NextToken. Send this NextToken in a subsequent request to continue listing from where the previous operation left off. |
namePrefix |
Lists worker configuration names that start with the specified text string. |
Attaches tags to the specified resource
Description
Attaches tags to the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which you want to attach tags. |
tags |
[required] The tags that you want to attach to the resource. |
Removes tags from the specified resource
Description
Removes tags from the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource from which you want to remove tags. |
tagKeys |
[required] The keys of the tags that you want to remove from the resource. |
Updates the specified connector
Description
Updates the specified connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kafkaconnect_update_connector/ for full documentation.
Usage
kafkaconnect_update_connector(
capacity = NULL,
connectorConfiguration = NULL,
connectorArn,
currentVersion
)
Arguments
capacity |
The target capacity. |
connectorConfiguration |
A map of keys to values that represent the configuration for the connector. |
connectorArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the connector that you want to update. |
currentVersion |
[required] The current version of the connector that you want to update. |
AWSKendraFrontendService
Description
Amazon Kendra is a service for indexing large document sets.
Usage
kendra(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kendra( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_entities_to_experience | Grants users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source access to your Amazon Kendra experience |
associate_personas_to_entities | Defines the specific permissions of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source with access to your Amazon Kendra experience |
batch_delete_document | Removes one or more documents from an index |
batch_delete_featured_results_set | Removes one or more sets of featured results |
batch_get_document_status | Returns the indexing status for one or more documents submitted with the BatchPutDocument API |
batch_put_document | Adds one or more documents to an index |
clear_query_suggestions | Clears existing query suggestions from an index |
create_access_control_configuration | Creates an access configuration for your documents |
create_data_source | Creates a data source connector that you want to use with an Amazon Kendra index |
create_experience | Creates an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application |
create_faq | Creates a set of frequently ask questions (FAQs) using a specified FAQ file stored in an Amazon S3 bucket |
create_featured_results_set | Creates a set of featured results to display at the top of the search results page |
create_index | Creates an Amazon Kendra index |
create_query_suggestions_block_list | Creates a block list to exlcude certain queries from suggestions |
create_thesaurus | Creates a thesaurus for an index |
delete_access_control_configuration | Deletes an access control configuration that you created for your documents in an index |
delete_data_source | Deletes an Amazon Kendra data source connector |
delete_experience | Deletes your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application |
delete_faq | Removes a FAQ from an index |
delete_index | Deletes an Amazon Kendra index |
delete_principal_mapping | Deletes a group so that all users that belong to the group can no longer access documents only available to that group |
delete_query_suggestions_block_list | Deletes a block list used for query suggestions for an index |
delete_thesaurus | Deletes an Amazon Kendra thesaurus |
describe_access_control_configuration | Gets information about an access control configuration that you created for your documents in an index |
describe_data_source | Gets information about an Amazon Kendra data source connector |
describe_experience | Gets information about your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application |
describe_faq | Gets information about a FAQ |
describe_featured_results_set | Gets information about a set of featured results |
describe_index | Gets information about an Amazon Kendra index |
describe_principal_mapping | Describes the processing of PUT and DELETE actions for mapping users to their groups |
describe_query_suggestions_block_list | Gets information about a block list used for query suggestions for an index |
describe_query_suggestions_config | Gets information on the settings of query suggestions for an index |
describe_thesaurus | Gets information about an Amazon Kendra thesaurus |
disassociate_entities_from_experience | Prevents users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source from accessing your Amazon Kendra experience |
disassociate_personas_from_entities | Removes the specific permissions of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source with access to your Amazon Kendra experience |
get_query_suggestions | Fetches the queries that are suggested to your users |
get_snapshots | Retrieves search metrics data |
list_access_control_configurations | Lists one or more access control configurations for an index |
list_data_sources | Lists the data source connectors that you have created |
list_data_source_sync_jobs | Gets statistics about synchronizing a data source connector |
list_entity_personas | Lists specific permissions of users and groups with access to your Amazon Kendra experience |
list_experience_entities | Lists users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source that are granted access to your Amazon Kendra experience |
list_experiences | Lists one or more Amazon Kendra experiences |
list_faqs | Gets a list of FAQs associated with an index |
list_featured_results_sets | Lists all your sets of featured results for a given index |
list_groups_older_than_ordering_id | Provides a list of groups that are mapped to users before a given ordering or timestamp identifier |
list_indices | Lists the Amazon Kendra indexes that you created |
list_query_suggestions_block_lists | Lists the block lists used for query suggestions for an index |
list_tags_for_resource | Gets a list of tags associated with a resource |
list_thesauri | Lists the thesauri for an index |
put_principal_mapping | Maps users to their groups so that you only need to provide the user ID when you issue the query |
query | Searches an index given an input query |
retrieve | Retrieves relevant passages or text excerpts given an input query |
start_data_source_sync_job | Starts a synchronization job for a data source connector |
stop_data_source_sync_job | Stops a synchronization job that is currently running |
submit_feedback | Enables you to provide feedback to Amazon Kendra to improve the performance of your index |
tag_resource | Adds the specified tag to the specified index, FAQ, data source, or other resource |
untag_resource | Removes a tag from an index, FAQ, data source, or other resource |
update_access_control_configuration | Updates an access control configuration for your documents in an index |
update_data_source | Updates an Amazon Kendra data source connector |
update_experience | Updates your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application |
update_featured_results_set | Updates a set of featured results |
update_index | Updates an Amazon Kendra index |
update_query_suggestions_block_list | Updates a block list used for query suggestions for an index |
update_query_suggestions_config | Updates the settings of query suggestions for an index |
update_thesaurus | Updates a thesaurus for an index |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kendra()
svc$associate_entities_to_experience(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Grants users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source access to your Amazon Kendra experience
Description
Grants users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source access to your Amazon Kendra experience. You can create an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_associate_entities_to_experience/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_associate_entities_to_experience(Id, IndexId, EntityList)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
EntityList |
[required] Lists users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source. |
Defines the specific permissions of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source with access to your Amazon Kendra experience
Description
Defines the specific permissions of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source with access to your Amazon Kendra experience. You can create an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_associate_personas_to_entities/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_associate_personas_to_entities(Id, IndexId, Personas)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
Personas |
[required] The personas that define the specific permissions of users or groups in
your IAM Identity Center identity source. The available personas or
access roles are |
Removes one or more documents from an index
Description
Removes one or more documents from an index. The documents must have been added with the batch_put_document
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_batch_delete_document/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_batch_delete_document(
IndexId,
DocumentIdList,
DataSourceSyncJobMetricTarget = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index that contains the documents to delete. |
DocumentIdList |
[required] One or more identifiers for documents to delete from the index. |
DataSourceSyncJobMetricTarget |
Removes one or more sets of featured results
Description
Removes one or more sets of featured results. Features results are placed above all other results for certain queries. If there's an exact match of a query, then one or more specific documents are featured in the search results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_batch_delete_featured_results_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_batch_delete_featured_results_set(IndexId, FeaturedResultsSetIds)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used for featuring results. |
FeaturedResultsSetIds |
[required] The identifiers of the featured results sets that you want to delete. |
Returns the indexing status for one or more documents submitted with the BatchPutDocument API
Description
Returns the indexing status for one or more documents submitted with the BatchPutDocument API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_batch_get_document_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_batch_get_document_status(IndexId, DocumentInfoList)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index to add documents to. The index ID is returned by the CreateIndex API. |
DocumentInfoList |
[required] A list of |
Adds one or more documents to an index
Description
Adds one or more documents to an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_batch_put_document/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_batch_put_document(
IndexId,
RoleArn = NULL,
Documents,
CustomDocumentEnrichmentConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index to add the documents to. You need to create
the index first using the |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access your S3 bucket. For more information, see IAM access roles for Amazon Kendra. |
Documents |
[required] One or more documents to add to the index. Documents have the following file size limits.
For more information, see Quotas. |
CustomDocumentEnrichmentConfiguration |
Configuration information for altering your document metadata and
content during the document ingestion process when you use the
For more information on how to create, modify and delete document metadata, or make other content alterations when you ingest documents into Amazon Kendra, see Customizing document metadata during the ingestion process. |
Clears existing query suggestions from an index
Description
Clears existing query suggestions from an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_clear_query_suggestions/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_clear_query_suggestions(IndexId)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to clear query suggestions from. |
Creates an access configuration for your documents
Description
Creates an access configuration for your documents. This includes user and group access information for your documents. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_access_control_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_access_control_configuration(
IndexId,
Name,
Description = NULL,
AccessControlList = NULL,
HierarchicalAccessControlList = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index to create an access control configuration for your documents. |
Name |
[required] A name for the access control configuration. |
Description |
A description for the access control configuration. |
AccessControlList |
Information on principals (users and/or groups) and which documents they should have access to. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents. |
HierarchicalAccessControlList |
The list of principal lists that define the hierarchy for which documents users should have access to. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create an access
control configuration. Multiple calls to the
|
Creates a data source connector that you want to use with an Amazon Kendra index
Description
Creates a data source connector that you want to use with an Amazon Kendra index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_data_source(
Name,
IndexId,
Type,
Configuration = NULL,
VpcConfiguration = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Schedule = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
LanguageCode = NULL,
CustomDocumentEnrichmentConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for the data source connector. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to use with the data source connector. |
Type |
[required] The type of data source repository. For example, |
Configuration |
Configuration information to connect to your data source repository. You can't specify the The |
VpcConfiguration |
Configuration information for an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud to connect to your data source. For more information, see Configuring a VPC. |
Description |
A description for the data source connector. |
Schedule |
Sets the frequency for Amazon Kendra to check the documents in your data
source repository and update the index. If you don't set a schedule
Amazon Kendra will not periodically update the index. You can call the
Specify a You can't specify the |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access the data source and required resources. For more information, see IAM access roles for Amazon Kendra.. You can't specify the The |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify or categorize the data source connector. You can also use tags to help control access to the data source connector. Tag keys and values can consist of Unicode letters, digits, white space, and any of the following symbols: _ . : / = + - @. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create a data source
connector. Multiple calls to the
|
LanguageCode |
The code for a language. This allows you to support a language for all documents when creating the data source connector. English is supported by default. For more information on supported languages, including their codes, see Adding documents in languages other than English. |
CustomDocumentEnrichmentConfiguration |
Configuration information for altering document metadata and content during the document ingestion process. For more information on how to create, modify and delete document metadata, or make other content alterations when you ingest documents into Amazon Kendra, see Customizing document metadata during the ingestion process. |
Creates an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application
Description
Creates an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, including using the Python and Java SDKs, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_experience/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_experience(
Name,
IndexId,
RoleArn = NULL,
Configuration = NULL,
Description = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access
|
Configuration |
Configuration information for your Amazon Kendra experience. This
includes |
Description |
A description for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create your Amazon
Kendra experience. Multiple calls to the
|
Creates a set of frequently ask questions (FAQs) using a specified FAQ file stored in an Amazon S3 bucket
Description
Creates a set of frequently ask questions (FAQs) using a specified FAQ file stored in an Amazon S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_faq/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_faq(
IndexId,
Name,
Description = NULL,
S3Path,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
FileFormat = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
LanguageCode = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the FAQ. |
Name |
[required] A name for the FAQ. |
Description |
A description for the FAQ. |
S3Path |
[required] The path to the FAQ file in S3. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access the S3 bucket that contains the FAQ file. For more information, see IAM access roles for Amazon Kendra. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify the FAQ. You can use the tags to identify and organize your resources and to control access to resources. |
FileFormat |
The format of the FAQ input file. You can choose between a basic CSV format, a CSV format that includes customs attributes in a header, and a JSON format that includes custom attributes. The default format is CSV. The format must match the format of the file stored in the S3 bucket
identified in the For more information, see Adding questions and answers. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create a FAQ.
Multiple calls to the |
LanguageCode |
The code for a language. This allows you to support a language for the FAQ document. English is supported by default. For more information on supported languages, including their codes, see Adding documents in languages other than English. |
Creates a set of featured results to display at the top of the search results page
Description
Creates a set of featured results to display at the top of the search results page. Featured results are placed above all other results for certain queries. You map specific queries to specific documents for featuring in the results. If a query contains an exact match, then one or more specific documents are featured in the search results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_featured_results_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_featured_results_set(
IndexId,
FeaturedResultsSetName,
Description = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
Status = NULL,
QueryTexts = NULL,
FeaturedDocuments = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index that you want to use for featuring results. |
FeaturedResultsSetName |
[required] A name for the set of featured results. |
Description |
A description for the set of featured results. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create a set of
featured results. Multiple calls to the
|
Status |
The current status of the set of featured results. When the value is
|
QueryTexts |
A list of queries for featuring results. For more information on the list of queries, see FeaturedResultsSet. |
FeaturedDocuments |
A list of document IDs for the documents you want to feature at the top of the search results page. For more information on the list of documents, see FeaturedResultsSet. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify or categorize the featured results set. You can also use tags to help control access to the featured results set. Tag keys and values can consist of Unicode letters, digits, white space, and any of the following symbols:_ . : / = + - @. |
Creates an Amazon Kendra index
Description
Creates an Amazon Kendra index. Index creation is an asynchronous API. To determine if index creation has completed, check the Status
field returned from a call to describe_index
. The Status
field is set to ACTIVE
when the index is ready to use.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_index(
Name,
Edition = NULL,
RoleArn,
ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration = NULL,
Description = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
UserTokenConfigurations = NULL,
UserContextPolicy = NULL,
UserGroupResolutionConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for the index. |
Edition |
The Amazon Kendra edition to use for the index. Choose
The For more information on quota limits for Gen AI Enterprise Edition, Enterprise Edition, and Developer Edition indices, see Quotas. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access your Amazon CloudWatch logs and metrics. For more information, see IAM access roles for Amazon Kendra. |
ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration |
The identifier of the KMS customer managed key (CMK) that's used to encrypt data indexed by Amazon Kendra. Amazon Kendra doesn't support asymmetric CMKs. |
Description |
A description for the index. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create an index.
Multiple calls to the |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify or categorize the index. You can also use tags to help control access to the index. Tag keys and values can consist of Unicode letters, digits, white space, and any of the following symbols: _ . : / = + - @. |
UserTokenConfigurations |
The user token configuration. If you're using an Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition index and you
try to use |
UserContextPolicy |
The user context policy. If you're using an Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition index, you
can only use ATTRIBUTE_FILTER All indexed content is searchable and displayable for all users. If you
want to filter search results on user context, you can use the attribute
filters of USER_TOKEN Enables token-based user access control to filter search results on user context. All documents with no access control and all documents accessible to the user will be searchable and displayable. |
UserGroupResolutionConfiguration |
Gets users and groups from IAM Identity Center identity source. To configure this, see UserGroupResolutionConfiguration. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents. If you're using an Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition index,
|
Creates a block list to exlcude certain queries from suggestions
Description
Creates a block list to exlcude certain queries from suggestions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_query_suggestions_block_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_query_suggestions_block_list(
IndexId,
Name,
Description = NULL,
SourceS3Path,
ClientToken = NULL,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to create a query suggestions block list for. |
Name |
[required] A name for the block list. For example, the name 'offensive-words', which includes all offensive words that could appear in user queries and need to be blocked from suggestions. |
Description |
A description for the block list. For example, the description "List of all offensive words that can appear in user queries and need to be blocked from suggestions." |
SourceS3Path |
[required] The S3 path to your block list text file in your S3 bucket. Each block word or phrase should be on a separate line in a text file. For information on the current quota limits for block lists, see Quotas for Amazon Kendra. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create a query suggestions block list. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access your S3 bucket that contains the block list text file. For more information, see IAM access roles for Amazon Kendra. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify or categorize the block list. Tag keys and values can consist of Unicode letters, digits, white space, and any of the following symbols: _ . : / = + - @. |
Creates a thesaurus for an index
Description
Creates a thesaurus for an index. The thesaurus contains a list of synonyms in Solr format.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_create_thesaurus/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_create_thesaurus(
IndexId,
Name,
Description = NULL,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
SourceS3Path,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the thesaurus. |
Name |
[required] A name for the thesaurus. |
Description |
A description for the thesaurus. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access your S3 bucket that contains the thesaurus file. For more information, see IAM access roles for Amazon Kendra. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify or categorize the thesaurus. You can also use tags to help control access to the thesaurus. Tag keys and values can consist of Unicode letters, digits, white space, and any of the following symbols: _ . : / = + - @. |
SourceS3Path |
[required] The path to the thesaurus file in S3. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create a thesaurus.
Multiple calls to the |
Deletes an access control configuration that you created for your documents in an index
Description
Deletes an access control configuration that you created for your documents in an index. This includes user and group access information for your documents. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_access_control_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_access_control_configuration(IndexId, Id)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for an access control configuration. |
Id |
[required] The identifier of the access control configuration you want to delete. |
Deletes an Amazon Kendra data source connector
Description
Deletes an Amazon Kendra data source connector. An exception is not thrown if the data source is already being deleted. While the data source is being deleted, the Status
field returned by a call to the describe_data_source
API is set to DELETING
. For more information, see Deleting Data Sources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_data_source(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the data source connector you want to delete. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with the data source connector. |
Deletes your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application
Description
Deletes your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_experience/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_experience(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience you want to delete. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
Removes a FAQ from an index
Description
Removes a FAQ from an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_faq/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_faq(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the FAQ you want to remove. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the FAQ. |
Deletes an Amazon Kendra index
Description
Deletes an Amazon Kendra index. An exception is not thrown if the index is already being deleted. While the index is being deleted, the Status
field returned by a call to the describe_index
API is set to DELETING
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_index(Id)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to delete. |
Deletes a group so that all users that belong to the group can no longer access documents only available to that group
Description
Deletes a group so that all users that belong to the group can no longer access documents only available to that group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_principal_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_principal_mapping(
IndexId,
DataSourceId = NULL,
GroupId,
OrderingId = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to delete a group from. |
DataSourceId |
The identifier of the data source you want to delete a group from. A group can be tied to multiple data sources. You can delete a group from accessing documents in a certain data source. For example, the groups "Research", "Engineering", and "Sales and Marketing" are all tied to the company's documents stored in the data sources Confluence and Salesforce. You want to delete "Research" and "Engineering" groups from Salesforce, so that these groups cannot access customer-related documents stored in Salesforce. Only "Sales and Marketing" should access documents in the Salesforce data source. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier of the group you want to delete. |
OrderingId |
The timestamp identifier you specify to ensure Amazon Kendra does not
override the latest The ordering ID can be the Unix time of the last update you made to a
group members list. You would then provide this list when calling
The default ordering ID is the current Unix time in milliseconds that the action was received by Amazon Kendra. |
Deletes a block list used for query suggestions for an index
Description
Deletes a block list used for query suggestions for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_query_suggestions_block_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_query_suggestions_block_list(IndexId, Id)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the block list. |
Id |
[required] The identifier of the block list you want to delete. |
Deletes an Amazon Kendra thesaurus
Description
Deletes an Amazon Kendra thesaurus.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_delete_thesaurus/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_delete_thesaurus(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the thesaurus you want to delete. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the thesaurus. |
Gets information about an access control configuration that you created for your documents in an index
Description
Gets information about an access control configuration that you created for your documents in an index. This includes user and group access information for your documents. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_access_control_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_access_control_configuration(IndexId, Id)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for an access control configuration. |
Id |
[required] The identifier of the access control configuration you want to get information on. |
Gets information about an Amazon Kendra data source connector
Description
Gets information about an Amazon Kendra data source connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_data_source(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the data source connector. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with the data source connector. |
Gets information about your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application
Description
Gets information about your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_experience/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_experience(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience you want to get information on. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
Gets information about a FAQ
Description
Gets information about a FAQ.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_faq/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_faq(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the FAQ you want to get information on. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the FAQ. |
Gets information about a set of featured results
Description
Gets information about a set of featured results. Features results are placed above all other results for certain queries. If there's an exact match of a query, then one or more specific documents are featured in the search results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_featured_results_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_featured_results_set(IndexId, FeaturedResultsSetId)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used for featuring results. |
FeaturedResultsSetId |
[required] The identifier of the set of featured results that you want to get information on. |
Gets information about an Amazon Kendra index
Description
Gets information about an Amazon Kendra index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_index(Id)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to get information on. |
Describes the processing of PUT and DELETE actions for mapping users to their groups
Description
Describes the processing of PUT
and DELETE
actions for mapping users to their groups. This includes information on the status of actions currently processing or yet to be processed, when actions were last updated, when actions were received by Amazon Kendra, the latest action that should process and apply after other actions, and useful error messages if an action could not be processed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_principal_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_principal_mapping(IndexId, DataSourceId = NULL, GroupId)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index required to check the processing of |
DataSourceId |
The identifier of the data source to check the processing of |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier of the group required to check the processing of |
Gets information about a block list used for query suggestions for an index
Description
Gets information about a block list used for query suggestions for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_query_suggestions_block_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_query_suggestions_block_list(IndexId, Id)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the block list. |
Id |
[required] The identifier of the block list you want to get information on. |
Gets information on the settings of query suggestions for an index
Description
Gets information on the settings of query suggestions for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_query_suggestions_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_query_suggestions_config(IndexId)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index with query suggestions that you want to get information on. |
Gets information about an Amazon Kendra thesaurus
Description
Gets information about an Amazon Kendra thesaurus.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_describe_thesaurus/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_describe_thesaurus(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the thesaurus you want to get information on. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the thesaurus. |
Prevents users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source from accessing your Amazon Kendra experience
Description
Prevents users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source from accessing your Amazon Kendra experience. You can create an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_disassociate_entities_from_experience/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_disassociate_entities_from_experience(Id, IndexId, EntityList)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
EntityList |
[required] Lists users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source. |
Removes the specific permissions of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source with access to your Amazon Kendra experience
Description
Removes the specific permissions of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source with access to your Amazon Kendra experience. You can create an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_disassociate_personas_from_entities/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_disassociate_personas_from_entities(Id, IndexId, EntityIds)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
EntityIds |
[required] The identifiers of users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source. For example, user IDs could be user emails. |
Fetches the queries that are suggested to your users
Description
Fetches the queries that are suggested to your users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_get_query_suggestions/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_get_query_suggestions(
IndexId,
QueryText,
MaxSuggestionsCount = NULL,
SuggestionTypes = NULL,
AttributeSuggestionsConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to get query suggestions from. |
QueryText |
[required] The text of a user's query to generate query suggestions. A query is suggested if the query prefix matches what a user starts to type as their query. Amazon Kendra does not show any suggestions if a user types fewer than two characters or more than 60 characters. A query must also have at least one search result and contain at least one word of more than four characters. |
MaxSuggestionsCount |
The maximum number of query suggestions you want to show to your users. |
SuggestionTypes |
The suggestions type to base query suggestions on. The suggestion types are query history or document fields/attributes. You can set one type or the other. If you set query history as your suggestions type, Amazon Kendra suggests queries relevant to your users based on popular queries in the query history. If you set document fields/attributes as your suggestions type, Amazon Kendra suggests queries relevant to your users based on the contents of document fields. |
AttributeSuggestionsConfig |
Configuration information for the document fields/attributes that you want to base query suggestions on. |
Retrieves search metrics data
Description
Retrieves search metrics data. The data provides a snapshot of how your users interact with your search application and how effective the application is.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_get_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_get_snapshots(
IndexId,
Interval,
MetricType,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index to get search metrics data. |
Interval |
[required] The time interval or time window to get search metrics data. The time interval uses the time zone of your index. You can view data in the following time windows:
|
MetricType |
[required] The metric you want to retrieve. You can specify only one metric per call. For more information about the metrics you can view, see Gaining insights with search analytics. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of search metrics data. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of returned data for the metric. |
Lists one or more access control configurations for an index
Description
Lists one or more access control configurations for an index. This includes user and group access information for your documents. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_access_control_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_access_control_configurations(
IndexId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the access control configuration. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there's more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of access control configurations. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access control configurations to return. |
Gets statistics about synchronizing a data source connector
Description
Gets statistics about synchronizing a data source connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_data_source_sync_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_data_source_sync_jobs(
Id,
IndexId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
StartTimeFilter = NULL,
StatusFilter = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the data source connector. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with the data source connector. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of jobs. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of synchronization jobs to return in the response. If there are fewer results in the list, this response contains only the actual results. |
StartTimeFilter |
When specified, the synchronization jobs returned in the list are limited to jobs between the specified dates. |
StatusFilter |
Only returns synchronization jobs with the |
Lists the data source connectors that you have created
Description
Lists the data source connectors that you have created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_data_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_data_sources(IndexId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with one or more data source connectors. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of data source connectors. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of data source connectors to return. |
Lists specific permissions of users and groups with access to your Amazon Kendra experience
Description
Lists specific permissions of users and groups with access to your Amazon Kendra experience.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_entity_personas/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_entity_personas(Id, IndexId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of users or groups. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of returned users or groups. |
Lists users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source that are granted access to your Amazon Kendra experience
Description
Lists users or groups in your IAM Identity Center identity source that are granted access to your Amazon Kendra experience. You can create an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_experience_entities/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_experience_entities(Id, IndexId, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of users or groups. |
Lists one or more Amazon Kendra experiences
Description
Lists one or more Amazon Kendra experiences. You can create an Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_experiences/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_experiences(IndexId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of Amazon Kendra experiences. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of returned Amazon Kendra experiences. |
Gets a list of FAQs associated with an index
Description
Gets a list of FAQs associated with an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_faqs/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_faqs(IndexId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The index for the FAQs. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of FAQs. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of FAQs to return in the response. If there are fewer results in the list, this response contains only the actual results. |
Lists all your sets of featured results for a given index
Description
Lists all your sets of featured results for a given index. Features results are placed above all other results for certain queries. If there's an exact match of a query, then one or more specific documents are featured in the search results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_featured_results_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_featured_results_sets(IndexId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used for featuring results. |
NextToken |
If the response is truncated, Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of featured results sets. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of featured results sets to return. |
Provides a list of groups that are mapped to users before a given ordering or timestamp identifier
Description
Provides a list of groups that are mapped to users before a given ordering or timestamp identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_groups_older_than_ordering_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_groups_older_than_ordering_id(
IndexId,
DataSourceId = NULL,
OrderingId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for getting a list of groups mapped to users before a given ordering or timestamp identifier. |
DataSourceId |
The identifier of the data source for getting a list of groups mapped to users before a given ordering timestamp identifier. |
OrderingId |
[required] The timestamp identifier used for the latest |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of groups that are mapped to users before a given ordering or timestamp identifier. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of returned groups that are mapped to users before a given ordering or timestamp identifier. |
Lists the Amazon Kendra indexes that you created
Description
Lists the Amazon Kendra indexes that you created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_indices/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_indices(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of indexes. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of indices to return. |
Lists the block lists used for query suggestions for an index
Description
Lists the block lists used for query suggestions for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_query_suggestions_block_lists/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_query_suggestions_block_lists(
IndexId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for a list of all block lists that exist for that index. For information on the current quota limits for block lists, see Quotas for Amazon Kendra. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to
retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You
can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of block lists
( |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of block lists to return. |
Gets a list of tags associated with a resource
Description
Gets a list of tags associated with a resource. Indexes, FAQs, data sources, and other resources can have tags associated with them.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the index, FAQ, data source, or other resource to get a list of tags for. For example, the ARN of an index is constructed as follows: arn:aws:kendra:your-region:your-account-id:index/index-id For information on how to construct an ARN for all types of Amazon Kendra resources, see Resource types. |
Lists the thesauri for an index
Description
Lists the thesauri for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_list_thesauri/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_list_thesauri(IndexId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index with one or more thesauri. |
NextToken |
If the previous response was incomplete (because there is more data to
retrieve), Amazon Kendra returns a pagination token in the response. You
can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of thesauri
( |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of thesauri to return. |
Maps users to their groups so that you only need to provide the user ID when you issue the query
Description
Maps users to their groups so that you only need to provide the user ID when you issue the query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_put_principal_mapping/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_put_principal_mapping(
IndexId,
DataSourceId = NULL,
GroupId,
GroupMembers,
OrderingId = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to map users to their groups. |
DataSourceId |
The identifier of the data source you want to map users to their groups. This is useful if a group is tied to multiple data sources, but you only want the group to access documents of a certain data source. For example, the groups "Research", "Engineering", and "Sales and Marketing" are all tied to the company's documents stored in the data sources Confluence and Salesforce. However, "Sales and Marketing" team only needs access to customer-related documents stored in Salesforce. |
GroupId |
[required] The identifier of the group you want to map its users to. |
GroupMembers |
[required] The list that contains your users that belong the same group. This can include sub groups that belong to a group. For example, the group "Company A" includes the user "CEO" and the sub groups "Research", "Engineering", and "Sales and Marketing". If you have more than 1000 users and/or sub groups for a single group, you need to provide the path to the S3 file that lists your users and sub groups for a group. Your sub groups can contain more than 1000 users, but the list of sub groups that belong to a group (and/or users) must be no more than 1000. |
OrderingId |
The timestamp identifier you specify to ensure Amazon Kendra doesn't
override the latest The ordering ID can be the Unix time of the last update you made to a
group members list. You would then provide this list when calling
The default ordering ID is the current Unix time in milliseconds that the action was received by Amazon Kendra. |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role that has access to the S3 file that contains your list of users that belong to a group. For more information, see IAM roles for Amazon Kendra. |
Searches an index given an input query
Description
Searches an index given an input query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_query(
IndexId,
QueryText = NULL,
AttributeFilter = NULL,
Facets = NULL,
RequestedDocumentAttributes = NULL,
QueryResultTypeFilter = NULL,
DocumentRelevanceOverrideConfigurations = NULL,
PageNumber = NULL,
PageSize = NULL,
SortingConfiguration = NULL,
SortingConfigurations = NULL,
UserContext = NULL,
VisitorId = NULL,
SpellCorrectionConfiguration = NULL,
CollapseConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the search. |
QueryText |
The input query text for the search. Amazon Kendra truncates queries at
30 token words, which excludes punctuation and stop words. Truncation
still applies if you use Boolean or more advanced, complex queries. For
example, |
AttributeFilter |
Filters search results by document fields/attributes. You can only
provide one attribute filter; however, the The For Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition indices use
|
Facets |
An array of documents fields/attributes for faceted search. Amazon Kendra returns a count for each field key specified. This helps your users narrow their search. |
RequestedDocumentAttributes |
An array of document fields/attributes to include in the response. You can limit the response to include certain document fields. By default, all document attributes are included in the response. |
QueryResultTypeFilter |
Sets the type of query result or response. Only results for the specified type are returned. |
DocumentRelevanceOverrideConfigurations |
Overrides relevance tuning configurations of fields/attributes set at the index level. If you use this API to override the relevance tuning configured at the index level, but there is no relevance tuning configured at the index level, then Amazon Kendra does not apply any relevance tuning. If there is relevance tuning configured for fields at the index level, and you use this API to override only some of these fields, then for the fields you did not override, the importance is set to 1. |
PageNumber |
Query results are returned in pages the size of the |
PageSize |
Sets the number of results that are returned in each page of results. The default page size is 10. The maximum number of results returned is 100. If you ask for more than 100 results, only 100 are returned. |
SortingConfiguration |
Provides information that determines how the results of the query are sorted. You can set the field that Amazon Kendra should sort the results on, and specify whether the results should be sorted in ascending or descending order. In the case of ties in sorting the results, the results are sorted by relevance. If you don't provide sorting configuration, the results are sorted by the relevance that Amazon Kendra determines for the result. |
SortingConfigurations |
Provides configuration information to determine how the results of a query are sorted. You can set upto 3 fields that Amazon Kendra should sort the results on, and specify whether the results should be sorted in ascending or descending order. The sort field quota can be increased. If you don't provide a sorting configuration, the results are sorted by the relevance that Amazon Kendra determines for the result. In the case of ties in sorting the results, the results are sorted by relevance. |
UserContext |
The user context token or user and group information. |
VisitorId |
Provides an identifier for a specific user. The |
SpellCorrectionConfiguration |
Enables suggested spell corrections for queries. |
CollapseConfiguration |
Provides configuration to determine how to group results by document attribute value, and how to display them (collapsed or expanded) under a designated primary document for each group. |
Retrieves relevant passages or text excerpts given an input query
Description
Retrieves relevant passages or text excerpts given an input query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_retrieve/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_retrieve(
IndexId,
QueryText,
AttributeFilter = NULL,
RequestedDocumentAttributes = NULL,
DocumentRelevanceOverrideConfigurations = NULL,
PageNumber = NULL,
PageSize = NULL,
UserContext = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index to retrieve relevant passages for the search. |
QueryText |
[required] The input query text to retrieve relevant passages for the search.
Amazon Kendra truncates queries at 30 token words, which excludes
punctuation and stop words. Truncation still applies if you use Boolean
or more advanced, complex queries. For example,
|
AttributeFilter |
Filters search results by document fields/attributes. You can only
provide one attribute filter; however, the The For Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition indices use
|
RequestedDocumentAttributes |
A list of document fields/attributes to include in the response. You can limit the response to include certain document fields. By default, all document fields are included in the response. |
DocumentRelevanceOverrideConfigurations |
Overrides relevance tuning configurations of fields/attributes set at the index level. If you use this API to override the relevance tuning configured at the index level, but there is no relevance tuning configured at the index level, then Amazon Kendra does not apply any relevance tuning. If there is relevance tuning configured for fields at the index level, and you use this API to override only some of these fields, then for the fields you did not override, the importance is set to 1. |
PageNumber |
Retrieved relevant passages are returned in pages the size of the
|
PageSize |
Sets the number of retrieved relevant passages that are returned in each page of results. The default page size is 10. The maximum number of results returned is 100. If you ask for more than 100 results, only 100 are returned. |
UserContext |
The user context token or user and group information. |
Starts a synchronization job for a data source connector
Description
Starts a synchronization job for a data source connector. If a synchronization job is already in progress, Amazon Kendra returns a ResourceInUseException
exception.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_start_data_source_sync_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_start_data_source_sync_job(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the data source connector to synchronize. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with the data source connector. |
Stops a synchronization job that is currently running
Description
Stops a synchronization job that is currently running. You can't stop a scheduled synchronization job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_stop_data_source_sync_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_stop_data_source_sync_job(Id, IndexId)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the data source connector for which to stop the synchronization jobs. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with the data source connector. |
Enables you to provide feedback to Amazon Kendra to improve the performance of your index
Description
Enables you to provide feedback to Amazon Kendra to improve the performance of your index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_submit_feedback/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_submit_feedback(
IndexId,
QueryId,
ClickFeedbackItems = NULL,
RelevanceFeedbackItems = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index that was queried. |
QueryId |
[required] The identifier of the specific query for which you are submitting
feedback. The query ID is returned in the response to the
|
ClickFeedbackItems |
Tells Amazon Kendra that a particular search result link was chosen by the user. |
RelevanceFeedbackItems |
Provides Amazon Kendra with relevant or not relevant feedback for whether a particular item was relevant to the search. |
Adds the specified tag to the specified index, FAQ, data source, or other resource
Description
Adds the specified tag to the specified index, FAQ, data source, or other resource. If the tag already exists, the existing value is replaced with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the index, FAQ, data source, or other resource to add a tag. For example, the ARN of an index is constructed as follows: arn:aws:kendra:your-region:your-account-id:index/index-id For information on how to construct an ARN for all types of Amazon Kendra resources, see Resource types. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tag keys to add to the index, FAQ, data source, or other resource. If a tag already exists, the existing value is replaced with the new value. |
Removes a tag from an index, FAQ, data source, or other resource
Description
Removes a tag from an index, FAQ, data source, or other resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the index, FAQ, data source, or other resource to remove a tag. For example, the ARN of an index is constructed as follows: arn:aws:kendra:your-region:your-account-id:index/index-id For information on how to construct an ARN for all types of Amazon Kendra resources, see Resource types. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys to remove from the index, FAQ, data source, or other resource. If a tag key doesn't exist for the resource, it is ignored. |
Updates an access control configuration for your documents in an index
Description
Updates an access control configuration for your documents in an index. This includes user and group access information for your documents. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_access_control_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_access_control_configuration(
IndexId,
Id,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL,
AccessControlList = NULL,
HierarchicalAccessControlList = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for an access control configuration. |
Id |
[required] The identifier of the access control configuration you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for the access control configuration. |
Description |
A new description for the access control configuration. |
AccessControlList |
Information you want to update on principals (users and/or groups) and which documents they should have access to. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents. |
HierarchicalAccessControlList |
The updated list of principal lists that define the hierarchy for which documents users should have access to. |
Updates an Amazon Kendra data source connector
Description
Updates an Amazon Kendra data source connector.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_data_source(
Id,
Name = NULL,
IndexId,
Configuration = NULL,
VpcConfiguration = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Schedule = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
LanguageCode = NULL,
CustomDocumentEnrichmentConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the data source connector you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for the data source connector. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used with the data source connector. |
Configuration |
Configuration information you want to update for the data source connector. |
VpcConfiguration |
Configuration information for an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud to connect to your data source. For more information, see Configuring a VPC. |
Description |
A new description for the data source connector. |
Schedule |
The sync schedule you want to update for the data source connector. |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access the data source and required resources. For more information, see IAM roles for Amazon Kendra. |
LanguageCode |
The code for a language you want to update for the data source connector. This allows you to support a language for all documents when updating the data source. English is supported by default. For more information on supported languages, including their codes, see Adding documents in languages other than English. |
CustomDocumentEnrichmentConfiguration |
Configuration information you want to update for altering document metadata and content during the document ingestion process. For more information on how to create, modify and delete document metadata, or make other content alterations when you ingest documents into Amazon Kendra, see Customizing document metadata during the ingestion process. |
Updates your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application
Description
Updates your Amazon Kendra experience such as a search application. For more information on creating a search application experience, see Building a search experience with no code.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_experience/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_experience(
Id,
Name = NULL,
IndexId,
RoleArn = NULL,
Configuration = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of your Amazon Kendra experience you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role with permission to access
the |
Configuration |
Configuration information you want to update for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
Description |
A new description for your Amazon Kendra experience. |
Updates a set of featured results
Description
Updates a set of featured results. Features results are placed above all other results for certain queries. You map specific queries to specific documents for featuring in the results. If a query contains an exact match of a query, then one or more specific documents are featured in the search results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_featured_results_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_featured_results_set(
IndexId,
FeaturedResultsSetId,
FeaturedResultsSetName = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Status = NULL,
QueryTexts = NULL,
FeaturedDocuments = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index used for featuring results. |
FeaturedResultsSetId |
[required] The identifier of the set of featured results that you want to update. |
FeaturedResultsSetName |
A new name for the set of featured results. |
Description |
A new description for the set of featured results. |
Status |
You can set the status to |
QueryTexts |
A list of queries for featuring results. For more information on the list of queries, see FeaturedResultsSet. |
FeaturedDocuments |
A list of document IDs for the documents you want to feature at the top of the search results page. For more information on the list of featured documents, see FeaturedResultsSet. |
Updates an Amazon Kendra index
Description
Updates an Amazon Kendra index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_index/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_index(
Id,
Name = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
Description = NULL,
DocumentMetadataConfigurationUpdates = NULL,
CapacityUnits = NULL,
UserTokenConfigurations = NULL,
UserContextPolicy = NULL,
UserGroupResolutionConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the index you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for the index. |
RoleArn |
An Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that gives Amazon Kendra permission to access Amazon CloudWatch logs and metrics. |
Description |
A new description for the index. |
DocumentMetadataConfigurationUpdates |
The document metadata configuration you want to update for the index. Document metadata are fields or attributes associated with your documents. For example, the company department name associated with each document. |
CapacityUnits |
Sets the number of additional document storage and query capacity units that should be used by the index. You can change the capacity of the index up to 5 times per day, or make 5 API calls. If you are using extra storage units, you can't reduce the storage capacity below what is required to meet the storage needs for your index. |
UserTokenConfigurations |
The user token configuration. If you're using an Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition index and you
try to use |
UserContextPolicy |
The user context policy. If you're using an Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition index, you
can only use |
UserGroupResolutionConfiguration |
Gets users and groups from IAM Identity Center identity source. To configure this, see UserGroupResolutionConfiguration. This is useful for user context filtering, where search results are filtered based on the user or their group access to documents. If you're using an Amazon Kendra Gen AI Enterprise Edition index,
|
Updates a block list used for query suggestions for an index
Description
Updates a block list used for query suggestions for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_query_suggestions_block_list/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_query_suggestions_block_list(
IndexId,
Id,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL,
SourceS3Path = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the block list. |
Id |
[required] The identifier of the block list you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for the block list. |
Description |
A new description for the block list. |
SourceS3Path |
The S3 path where your block list text file sits in S3. If you update your block list and provide the same path to the block
list text file in S3, then Amazon Kendra reloads the file to refresh the
block list. Amazon Kendra does not automatically refresh your block
list. You need to call the
If you update your block list, then Amazon Kendra asynchronously refreshes all query suggestions with the latest content in the S3 file. This means changes might not take effect immediately. |
RoleArn |
The IAM (Identity and Access Management) role used to access the block list text file in S3. |
Updates the settings of query suggestions for an index
Description
Updates the settings of query suggestions for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_query_suggestions_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_query_suggestions_config(
IndexId,
Mode = NULL,
QueryLogLookBackWindowInDays = NULL,
IncludeQueriesWithoutUserInformation = NULL,
MinimumNumberOfQueryingUsers = NULL,
MinimumQueryCount = NULL,
AttributeSuggestionsConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index with query suggestions you want to update. |
Mode |
Set the mode to By default, Amazon Kendra enables query suggestions. In |
QueryLogLookBackWindowInDays |
How recent your queries are in your query log time window. The time window is the number of days from current day to past days. By default, Amazon Kendra sets this to 180. |
IncludeQueriesWithoutUserInformation |
If you pass user information to Amazon Kendra along with the queries,
you can set this flag to If you set to If you set to |
MinimumNumberOfQueryingUsers |
The minimum number of unique users who must search a query in order for the query to be eligible to suggest to your users. Increasing this number might decrease the number of suggestions. However, this ensures a query is searched by many users and is truly popular to suggest to users. How you tune this setting depends on your specific needs. |
MinimumQueryCount |
The the minimum number of times a query must be searched in order to be eligible to suggest to your users. Decreasing this number increases the number of suggestions. However, this affects the quality of suggestions as it sets a low bar for a query to be considered popular to suggest to users. How you tune this setting depends on your specific needs. |
AttributeSuggestionsConfig |
Configuration information for the document fields/attributes that you want to base query suggestions on. |
Updates a thesaurus for an index
Description
Updates a thesaurus for an index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendra_update_thesaurus/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendra_update_thesaurus(
Id,
Name = NULL,
IndexId,
Description = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
SourceS3Path = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the thesaurus you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for the thesaurus. |
IndexId |
[required] The identifier of the index for the thesaurus. |
Description |
A new description for the thesaurus. |
RoleArn |
An IAM role that gives Amazon Kendra permissions to access thesaurus
file specified in |
SourceS3Path |
Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking
Description
Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking uses Amazon Kendra semantic search capabilities to intelligently re-rank a search service's results.
Usage
kendraranking(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kendraranking( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_rescore_execution_plan | Creates a rescore execution plan |
delete_rescore_execution_plan | Deletes a rescore execution plan |
describe_rescore_execution_plan | Gets information about a rescore execution plan |
list_rescore_execution_plans | Lists your rescore execution plans |
list_tags_for_resource | Gets a list of tags associated with a specified resource |
rescore | Rescores or re-ranks search results from a search service such as OpenSearch (self managed) |
tag_resource | Adds a specified tag to a specified rescore execution plan |
untag_resource | Removes a tag from a rescore execution plan |
update_rescore_execution_plan | Updates a rescore execution plan |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kendraranking()
svc$create_rescore_execution_plan(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a rescore execution plan
Description
Creates a rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
API. You set the number of capacity units that you require for Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking to rescore or re-rank a search service's results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_create_rescore_execution_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_create_rescore_execution_plan(
Name,
Description = NULL,
CapacityUnits = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for the rescore execution plan. |
Description |
A description for the rescore execution plan. |
CapacityUnits |
You can set additional capacity units to meet the needs of your rescore execution plan. You are given a single capacity unit by default. If you want to use the default capacity, you don't set additional capacity units. For more information on the default capacity and additional capacity units, see Adjusting capacity. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs that identify or categorize your rescore execution plan. You can also use tags to help control access to the rescore execution plan. Tag keys and values can consist of Unicode letters, digits, white space, and any of the following symbols: _ . : / = + - @. |
ClientToken |
A token that you provide to identify the request to create a rescore
execution plan. Multiple calls to the
|
Deletes a rescore execution plan
Description
Deletes a rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_delete_rescore_execution_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_delete_rescore_execution_plan(Id)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the rescore execution plan that you want to delete. |
Gets information about a rescore execution plan
Description
Gets information about a rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_describe_rescore_execution_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_describe_rescore_execution_plan(Id)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the rescore execution plan that you want to get information on. |
Lists your rescore execution plans
Description
Lists your rescore execution plans. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_list_rescore_execution_plans/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_list_rescore_execution_plans(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
If the response is truncated, Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking returns a pagination token in the response. You can use this pagination token to retrieve the next set of rescore execution plans. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of rescore execution plans to return. |
Gets a list of tags associated with a specified resource
Description
Gets a list of tags associated with a specified resource. A rescore execution plan is an example of a resource that can have tags associated with it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the rescore execution plan to get a list of tags for. |
Rescores or re-ranks search results from a search service such as OpenSearch (self managed)
Description
Rescores or re-ranks search results from a search service such as OpenSearch (self managed). You use the semantic search capabilities of Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking to improve the search service's results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_rescore/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_rescore(RescoreExecutionPlanId, SearchQuery, Documents)
Arguments
RescoreExecutionPlanId |
[required] The identifier of the rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan
is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning
the |
SearchQuery |
[required] The input query from the search service. |
Documents |
[required] The list of documents for Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking to rescore or rank on. |
Adds a specified tag to a specified rescore execution plan
Description
Adds a specified tag to a specified rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
API. If the tag already exists, the existing value is replaced with the new value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the rescore execution plan to tag. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tag keys to add to a rescore execution plan. If a tag already exists, the existing value is replaced with the new value. |
Removes a tag from a rescore execution plan
Description
Removes a tag from a rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the rescore execution plan to remove the tag. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys to remove from the rescore execution plan. If a tag key does not exist on the resource, it is ignored. |
Updates a rescore execution plan
Description
Updates a rescore execution plan. A rescore execution plan is an Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking resource used for provisioning the rescore
API. You can update the number of capacity units you require for Amazon Kendra Intelligent Ranking to rescore or re-rank a search service's results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kendraranking_update_rescore_execution_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
kendraranking_update_rescore_execution_plan(
Id,
Name = NULL,
Description = NULL,
CapacityUnits = NULL
)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the rescore execution plan that you want to update. |
Name |
A new name for the rescore execution plan. |
Description |
A new description for the rescore execution plan. |
CapacityUnits |
You can set additional capacity units to meet the needs of your rescore execution plan. You are given a single capacity unit by default. If you want to use the default capacity, you don't set additional capacity units. For more information on the default capacity and additional capacity units, see Adjusting capacity. |
Amazon Kinesis
Description
Amazon Kinesis Data Streams Service API Reference
Amazon Kinesis Data Streams is a managed service that scales elastically for real-time processing of streaming big data.
Usage
kinesis(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kinesis( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_tags_to_stream | Adds or updates tags for the specified Kinesis data stream |
create_stream | Creates a Kinesis data stream |
decrease_stream_retention_period | Decreases the Kinesis data stream's retention period, which is the length of time data records are accessible after they are added to the stream |
delete_resource_policy | Delete a policy for the specified data stream or consumer |
delete_stream | Deletes a Kinesis data stream and all its shards and data |
deregister_stream_consumer | To deregister a consumer, provide its ARN |
describe_limits | Describes the shard limits and usage for the account |
describe_stream | Describes the specified Kinesis data stream |
describe_stream_consumer | To get the description of a registered consumer, provide the ARN of the consumer |
describe_stream_summary | Provides a summarized description of the specified Kinesis data stream without the shard list |
disable_enhanced_monitoring | Disables enhanced monitoring |
enable_enhanced_monitoring | Enables enhanced Kinesis data stream monitoring for shard-level metrics |
get_records | Gets data records from a Kinesis data stream's shard |
get_resource_policy | Returns a policy attached to the specified data stream or consumer |
get_shard_iterator | Gets an Amazon Kinesis shard iterator |
increase_stream_retention_period | Increases the Kinesis data stream's retention period, which is the length of time data records are accessible after they are added to the stream |
list_shards | Lists the shards in a stream and provides information about each shard |
list_stream_consumers | Lists the consumers registered to receive data from a stream using enhanced fan-out, and provides information about each consumer |
list_streams | Lists your Kinesis data streams |
list_tags_for_stream | Lists the tags for the specified Kinesis data stream |
merge_shards | Merges two adjacent shards in a Kinesis data stream and combines them into a single shard to reduce the stream's capacity to ingest and transport data |
put_record | Writes a single data record into an Amazon Kinesis data stream |
put_records | Writes multiple data records into a Kinesis data stream in a single call (also referred to as a PutRecords request) |
put_resource_policy | Attaches a resource-based policy to a data stream or registered consumer |
register_stream_consumer | Registers a consumer with a Kinesis data stream |
remove_tags_from_stream | Removes tags from the specified Kinesis data stream |
split_shard | Splits a shard into two new shards in the Kinesis data stream, to increase the stream's capacity to ingest and transport data |
start_stream_encryption | Enables or updates server-side encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS key for a specified stream |
stop_stream_encryption | Disables server-side encryption for a specified stream |
subscribe_to_shard | This operation establishes an HTTP/2 connection between the consumer you specify in the ConsumerARN parameter and the shard you specify in the ShardId parameter |
update_shard_count | Updates the shard count of the specified stream to the specified number of shards |
update_stream_mode | Updates the capacity mode of the data stream |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kinesis()
svc$add_tags_to_stream(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds or updates tags for the specified Kinesis data stream
Description
Adds or updates tags for the specified Kinesis data stream. You can assign up to 50 tags to a data stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_add_tags_to_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_add_tags_to_stream(StreamName = NULL, Tags, StreamARN = NULL)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream. |
Tags |
[required] A set of up to 10 key-value pairs to use to create the tags. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Creates a Kinesis data stream
Description
Creates a Kinesis data stream. A stream captures and transports data records that are continuously emitted from different data sources or producers. Scale-out within a stream is explicitly supported by means of shards, which are uniquely identified groups of data records in a stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_create_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_create_stream(
StreamName,
ShardCount = NULL,
StreamModeDetails = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
[required] A name to identify the stream. The stream name is scoped to the Amazon Web Services account used by the application that creates the stream. It is also scoped by Amazon Web Services Region. That is, two streams in two different Amazon Web Services accounts can have the same name. Two streams in the same Amazon Web Services account but in two different Regions can also have the same name. |
ShardCount |
The number of shards that the stream will use. The throughput of the stream is a function of the number of shards; more shards are required for greater provisioned throughput. |
StreamModeDetails |
Indicates the capacity mode of the data stream. Currently, in Kinesis Data Streams, you can choose between an on-demand capacity mode and a provisioned capacity mode for your data streams. |
Tags |
A set of up to 10 key-value pairs to use to create the tags. |
Decreases the Kinesis data stream's retention period, which is the length of time data records are accessible after they are added to the stream
Description
Decreases the Kinesis data stream's retention period, which is the length of time data records are accessible after they are added to the stream. The minimum value of a stream's retention period is 24 hours.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_decrease_stream_retention_period/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_decrease_stream_retention_period(
StreamName = NULL,
RetentionPeriodHours,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream to modify. |
RetentionPeriodHours |
[required] The new retention period of the stream, in hours. Must be less than the current retention period. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Delete a policy for the specified data stream or consumer
Description
Delete a policy for the specified data stream or consumer. Request patterns can be one of the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_delete_resource_policy(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the data stream or consumer. |
Deletes a Kinesis data stream and all its shards and data
Description
Deletes a Kinesis data stream and all its shards and data. You must shut down any applications that are operating on the stream before you delete the stream. If an application attempts to operate on a deleted stream, it receives the exception ResourceNotFoundException
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_delete_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_delete_stream(
StreamName = NULL,
EnforceConsumerDeletion = NULL,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream to delete. |
EnforceConsumerDeletion |
If this parameter is unset ( |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
To deregister a consumer, provide its ARN
Description
To deregister a consumer, provide its ARN. Alternatively, you can provide the ARN of the data stream and the name you gave the consumer when you registered it. You may also provide all three parameters, as long as they don't conflict with each other. If you don't know the name or ARN of the consumer that you want to deregister, you can use the list_stream_consumers
operation to get a list of the descriptions of all the consumers that are currently registered with a given data stream. The description of a consumer contains its name and ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_deregister_stream_consumer/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_deregister_stream_consumer(
StreamARN = NULL,
ConsumerName = NULL,
ConsumerARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamARN |
The ARN of the Kinesis data stream that the consumer is registered with. For more information, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces. |
ConsumerName |
The name that you gave to the consumer. |
ConsumerARN |
The ARN returned by Kinesis Data Streams when you registered the consumer. If you don't know the ARN of the consumer that you want to deregister, you can use the ListStreamConsumers operation to get a list of the descriptions of all the consumers that are currently registered with a given data stream. The description of a consumer contains its ARN. |
Describes the shard limits and usage for the account
Description
Describes the shard limits and usage for the account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_describe_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_describe_limits()
Describes the specified Kinesis data stream
Description
Describes the specified Kinesis data stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_describe_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_describe_stream(
StreamName = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
ExclusiveStartShardId = NULL,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream to describe. |
Limit |
The maximum number of shards to return in a single call. The default value is 100. If you specify a value greater than 100, at most 100 results are returned. |
ExclusiveStartShardId |
The shard ID of the shard to start with. Specify this parameter to indicate that you want to describe the stream
starting with the shard whose ID immediately follows
If you don't specify this parameter, the default behavior for
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
To get the description of a registered consumer, provide the ARN of the consumer
Description
To get the description of a registered consumer, provide the ARN of the consumer. Alternatively, you can provide the ARN of the data stream and the name you gave the consumer when you registered it. You may also provide all three parameters, as long as they don't conflict with each other. If you don't know the name or ARN of the consumer that you want to describe, you can use the list_stream_consumers
operation to get a list of the descriptions of all the consumers that are currently registered with a given data stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_describe_stream_consumer/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_describe_stream_consumer(
StreamARN = NULL,
ConsumerName = NULL,
ConsumerARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamARN |
The ARN of the Kinesis data stream that the consumer is registered with. For more information, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces. |
ConsumerName |
The name that you gave to the consumer. |
ConsumerARN |
The ARN returned by Kinesis Data Streams when you registered the consumer. |
Provides a summarized description of the specified Kinesis data stream without the shard list
Description
Provides a summarized description of the specified Kinesis data stream without the shard list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_describe_stream_summary/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_describe_stream_summary(StreamName = NULL, StreamARN = NULL)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream to describe. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Disables enhanced monitoring
Description
Disables enhanced monitoring.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_disable_enhanced_monitoring/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_disable_enhanced_monitoring(
StreamName = NULL,
ShardLevelMetrics,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the Kinesis data stream for which to disable enhanced monitoring. |
ShardLevelMetrics |
[required] List of shard-level metrics to disable. The following are the valid shard-level metrics. The value "
For more information, see Monitoring the Amazon Kinesis Data Streams Service with Amazon CloudWatch in the Amazon Kinesis Data Streams Developer Guide. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Enables enhanced Kinesis data stream monitoring for shard-level metrics
Description
Enables enhanced Kinesis data stream monitoring for shard-level metrics.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_enable_enhanced_monitoring/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_enable_enhanced_monitoring(
StreamName = NULL,
ShardLevelMetrics,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream for which to enable enhanced monitoring. |
ShardLevelMetrics |
[required] List of shard-level metrics to enable. The following are the valid shard-level metrics. The value "
For more information, see Monitoring the Amazon Kinesis Data Streams Service with Amazon CloudWatch in the Amazon Kinesis Data Streams Developer Guide. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Gets data records from a Kinesis data stream's shard
Description
Gets data records from a Kinesis data stream's shard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_get_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_get_records(ShardIterator, Limit = NULL, StreamARN = NULL)
Arguments
ShardIterator |
[required] The position in the shard from which you want to start sequentially reading data records. A shard iterator specifies this position using the sequence number of a data record in the shard. |
Limit |
The maximum number of records to return. Specify a value of up to
10,000. If you specify a value that is greater than 10,000,
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Returns a policy attached to the specified data stream or consumer
Description
Returns a policy attached to the specified data stream or consumer. Request patterns can be one of the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_get_resource_policy(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the data stream or consumer. |
Gets an Amazon Kinesis shard iterator
Description
Gets an Amazon Kinesis shard iterator. A shard iterator expires 5 minutes after it is returned to the requester.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_get_shard_iterator/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_get_shard_iterator(
StreamName = NULL,
ShardId,
ShardIteratorType,
StartingSequenceNumber = NULL,
Timestamp = NULL,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the Amazon Kinesis data stream. |
ShardId |
[required] The shard ID of the Kinesis Data Streams shard to get the iterator for. |
ShardIteratorType |
[required] Determines how the shard iterator is used to start reading data records from the shard. The following are the valid Amazon Kinesis shard iterator types:
|
StartingSequenceNumber |
The sequence number of the data record in the shard from which to start reading. Used with shard iterator type AT_SEQUENCE_NUMBER and AFTER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER. |
Timestamp |
The time stamp of the data record from which to start reading. Used with
shard iterator type AT_TIMESTAMP. A time stamp is the Unix epoch date
with precision in milliseconds. For example,
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Increases the Kinesis data stream's retention period, which is the length of time data records are accessible after they are added to the stream
Description
Increases the Kinesis data stream's retention period, which is the length of time data records are accessible after they are added to the stream. The maximum value of a stream's retention period is 8760 hours (365 days).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_increase_stream_retention_period/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_increase_stream_retention_period(
StreamName = NULL,
RetentionPeriodHours,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream to modify. |
RetentionPeriodHours |
[required] The new retention period of the stream, in hours. Must be more than the current retention period. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Lists the shards in a stream and provides information about each shard
Description
Lists the shards in a stream and provides information about each shard. This operation has a limit of 1000 transactions per second per data stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_list_shards/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_list_shards(
StreamName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ExclusiveStartShardId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
StreamCreationTimestamp = NULL,
ShardFilter = NULL,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the data stream whose shards you want to list. You cannot specify this parameter if you specify the |
NextToken |
When the number of shards in the data stream is greater than the default
value for the Don't specify You can optionally specify a value for the Tokens expire after 300 seconds. When you obtain a value for |
ExclusiveStartShardId |
Specify this parameter to indicate that you want to list the shards
starting with the shard whose ID immediately follows
If you don't specify this parameter, the default behavior is for
You cannot specify this parameter if you specify |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of shards to return in a single call to
When the number of shards to be listed is greater than the value of
|
StreamCreationTimestamp |
Specify this input parameter to distinguish data streams that have the same name. For example, if you create a data stream and then delete it, and you later create another data stream with the same name, you can use this input parameter to specify which of the two streams you want to list the shards for. You cannot specify this parameter if you specify the |
ShardFilter |
Enables you to filter out the response of the
If you use the If you specify the If you specify the |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Lists the consumers registered to receive data from a stream using enhanced fan-out, and provides information about each consumer
Description
Lists the consumers registered to receive data from a stream using enhanced fan-out, and provides information about each consumer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_list_stream_consumers/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_list_stream_consumers(
StreamARN,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
StreamCreationTimestamp = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamARN |
[required] The ARN of the Kinesis data stream for which you want to list the registered consumers. For more information, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces. |
NextToken |
When the number of consumers that are registered with the data stream is
greater than the default value for the Don't specify You can optionally specify a value for the Tokens expire after 300 seconds. When you obtain a value for |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of consumers that you want a single call of
|
StreamCreationTimestamp |
Specify this input parameter to distinguish data streams that have the same name. For example, if you create a data stream and then delete it, and you later create another data stream with the same name, you can use this input parameter to specify which of the two streams you want to list the consumers for. You can't specify this parameter if you specify the NextToken parameter. |
Lists your Kinesis data streams
Description
Lists your Kinesis data streams.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_list_streams/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_list_streams(
Limit = NULL,
ExclusiveStartStreamName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Limit |
The maximum number of streams to list. The default value is 100. If you specify a value greater than 100, at most 100 results are returned. |
ExclusiveStartStreamName |
The name of the stream to start the list with. |
NextToken |
Lists the tags for the specified Kinesis data stream
Description
Lists the tags for the specified Kinesis data stream. This operation has a limit of five transactions per second per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_list_tags_for_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_list_tags_for_stream(
StreamName = NULL,
ExclusiveStartTagKey = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream. |
ExclusiveStartTagKey |
The key to use as the starting point for the list of tags. If this
parameter is set, |
Limit |
The number of tags to return. If this number is less than the total
number of tags associated with the stream, |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Merges two adjacent shards in a Kinesis data stream and combines them into a single shard to reduce the stream's capacity to ingest and transport data
Description
Merges two adjacent shards in a Kinesis data stream and combines them into a single shard to reduce the stream's capacity to ingest and transport data. This API is only supported for the data streams with the provisioned capacity mode. Two shards are considered adjacent if the union of the hash key ranges for the two shards form a contiguous set with no gaps. For example, if you have two shards, one with a hash key range of 276...381 and the other with a hash key range of 382...454, then you could merge these two shards into a single shard that would have a hash key range of 276...454. After the merge, the single child shard receives data for all hash key values covered by the two parent shards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_merge_shards/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_merge_shards(
StreamName = NULL,
ShardToMerge,
AdjacentShardToMerge,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream for the merge. |
ShardToMerge |
[required] The shard ID of the shard to combine with the adjacent shard for the merge. |
AdjacentShardToMerge |
[required] The shard ID of the adjacent shard for the merge. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Writes a single data record into an Amazon Kinesis data stream
Description
Writes a single data record into an Amazon Kinesis data stream. Call put_record
to send data into the stream for real-time ingestion and subsequent processing, one record at a time. Each shard can support writes up to 1,000 records per second, up to a maximum data write total of 1 MiB per second.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_put_record/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_put_record(
StreamName = NULL,
Data,
PartitionKey,
ExplicitHashKey = NULL,
SequenceNumberForOrdering = NULL,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream to put the data record into. |
Data |
[required] The data blob to put into the record, which is base64-encoded when the blob is serialized. When the data blob (the payload before base64-encoding) is added to the partition key size, the total size must not exceed the maximum record size (1 MiB). |
PartitionKey |
[required] Determines which shard in the stream the data record is assigned to. Partition keys are Unicode strings with a maximum length limit of 256 characters for each key. Amazon Kinesis Data Streams uses the partition key as input to a hash function that maps the partition key and associated data to a specific shard. Specifically, an MD5 hash function is used to map partition keys to 128-bit integer values and to map associated data records to shards. As a result of this hashing mechanism, all data records with the same partition key map to the same shard within the stream. |
ExplicitHashKey |
The hash value used to explicitly determine the shard the data record is assigned to by overriding the partition key hash. |
SequenceNumberForOrdering |
Guarantees strictly increasing sequence numbers, for puts from the same
client and to the same partition key. Usage: set the
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Writes multiple data records into a Kinesis data stream in a single call (also referred to as a PutRecords request)
Description
Writes multiple data records into a Kinesis data stream in a single call (also referred to as a put_records
request). Use this operation to send data into the stream for data ingestion and processing.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_put_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_put_records(Records, StreamName = NULL, StreamARN = NULL)
Arguments
Records |
[required] The records associated with the request. |
StreamName |
The stream name associated with the request. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Attaches a resource-based policy to a data stream or registered consumer
Description
Attaches a resource-based policy to a data stream or registered consumer. If you are using an identity other than the root user of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the resource, the calling identity must have the put_resource_policy
permissions on the specified Kinesis Data Streams resource and belong to the owner's account in order to use this operation. If you don't have put_resource_policy
permissions, Amazon Kinesis Data Streams returns a 403 Access Denied error
. If you receive a ResourceNotFoundException
, check to see if you passed a valid stream or consumer resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_put_resource_policy(ResourceARN, Policy)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the data stream or consumer. |
Policy |
[required] Details of the resource policy. It must include the identity of the principal and the actions allowed on this resource. This is formatted as a JSON string. |
Registers a consumer with a Kinesis data stream
Description
Registers a consumer with a Kinesis data stream. When you use this operation, the consumer you register can then call subscribe_to_shard
to receive data from the stream using enhanced fan-out, at a rate of up to 2 MiB per second for every shard you subscribe to. This rate is unaffected by the total number of consumers that read from the same stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_register_stream_consumer/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_register_stream_consumer(StreamARN, ConsumerName)
Arguments
StreamARN |
[required] The ARN of the Kinesis data stream that you want to register the consumer with. For more info, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces. |
ConsumerName |
[required] For a given Kinesis data stream, each consumer must have a unique name. However, consumer names don't have to be unique across data streams. |
Removes tags from the specified Kinesis data stream
Description
Removes tags from the specified Kinesis data stream. Removed tags are deleted and cannot be recovered after this operation successfully completes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_remove_tags_from_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_remove_tags_from_stream(StreamName = NULL, TagKeys, StreamARN = NULL)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys. Each corresponding tag is removed from the stream. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Splits a shard into two new shards in the Kinesis data stream, to increase the stream's capacity to ingest and transport data
Description
Splits a shard into two new shards in the Kinesis data stream, to increase the stream's capacity to ingest and transport data. split_shard
is called when there is a need to increase the overall capacity of a stream because of an expected increase in the volume of data records being ingested. This API is only supported for the data streams with the provisioned capacity mode.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_split_shard/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_split_shard(
StreamName = NULL,
ShardToSplit,
NewStartingHashKey,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream for the shard split. |
ShardToSplit |
[required] The shard ID of the shard to split. |
NewStartingHashKey |
[required] A hash key value for the starting hash key of one of the child shards
created by the split. The hash key range for a given shard constitutes a
set of ordered contiguous positive integers. The value for
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Enables or updates server-side encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS key for a specified stream
Description
Enables or updates server-side encryption using an Amazon Web Services KMS key for a specified stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_start_stream_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_start_stream_encryption(
StreamName = NULL,
EncryptionType,
KeyId,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream for which to start encrypting records. |
EncryptionType |
[required] The encryption type to use. The only valid value is |
KeyId |
[required] The GUID for the customer-managed Amazon Web Services KMS key to use for
encryption. This value can be a globally unique identifier, a fully
specified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to either an alias or a key, or an
alias name prefixed by "alias/".You can also use a master key owned by
Kinesis Data Streams by specifying the alias
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Disables server-side encryption for a specified stream
Description
Disables server-side encryption for a specified stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_stop_stream_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_stop_stream_encryption(
StreamName = NULL,
EncryptionType,
KeyId,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream on which to stop encrypting records. |
EncryptionType |
[required] The encryption type. The only valid value is |
KeyId |
[required] The GUID for the customer-managed Amazon Web Services KMS key to use for
encryption. This value can be a globally unique identifier, a fully
specified Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to either an alias or a key, or an
alias name prefixed by "alias/".You can also use a master key owned by
Kinesis Data Streams by specifying the alias
|
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
This operation establishes an HTTP/2 connection between the consumer you specify in the ConsumerARN parameter and the shard you specify in the ShardId parameter
Description
This operation establishes an HTTP/2 connection between the consumer you specify in the ConsumerARN
parameter and the shard you specify in the ShardId
parameter. After the connection is successfully established, Kinesis Data Streams pushes records from the shard to the consumer over this connection. Before you call this operation, call register_stream_consumer
to register the consumer with Kinesis Data Streams.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_subscribe_to_shard/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_subscribe_to_shard(ConsumerARN, ShardId, StartingPosition)
Arguments
ConsumerARN |
[required] For this parameter, use the value you obtained when you called
|
ShardId |
[required] The ID of the shard you want to subscribe to. To see a list of all the
shards for a given stream, use |
StartingPosition |
[required] The starting position in the data stream from which to start streaming. |
Updates the shard count of the specified stream to the specified number of shards
Description
Updates the shard count of the specified stream to the specified number of shards. This API is only supported for the data streams with the provisioned capacity mode.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_update_shard_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_update_shard_count(
StreamName = NULL,
TargetShardCount,
ScalingType,
StreamARN = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamName |
The name of the stream. |
TargetShardCount |
[required] The new number of shards. This value has the following default limits. By default, you cannot do the following:
|
ScalingType |
[required] The scaling type. Uniform scaling creates shards of equal size. |
StreamARN |
The ARN of the stream. |
Updates the capacity mode of the data stream
Description
Updates the capacity mode of the data stream. Currently, in Kinesis Data Streams, you can choose between an on-demand capacity mode and a provisioned capacity mode for your data stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesis_update_stream_mode/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesis_update_stream_mode(StreamARN, StreamModeDetails)
Arguments
StreamARN |
[required] Specifies the ARN of the data stream whose capacity mode you want to update. |
StreamModeDetails |
[required] Specifies the capacity mode to which you want to set your data stream. Currently, in Kinesis Data Streams, you can choose between an on-demand capacity mode and a provisioned capacity mode for your data streams. |
Amazon Kinesis Analytics
Description
Overview
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
This is the Amazon Kinesis Analytics v1 API Reference. The Amazon Kinesis Analytics Developer Guide provides additional information.
Usage
kinesisanalytics(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kinesisanalytics( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
add_application_input | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
add_application_input_processing_configuration | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
add_application_output | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
add_application_reference_data_source | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
create_application | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
delete_application | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
delete_application_cloud_watch_logging_option | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
delete_application_input_processing_configuration | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
delete_application_output | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
delete_application_reference_data_source | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
describe_application | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
discover_input_schema | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
list_applications | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves the list of key-value tags assigned to the application |
start_application | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
stop_application | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
tag_resource | Adds one or more key-value tags to a Kinesis Analytics application |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from a Kinesis Analytics application |
update_application | This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kinesisanalytics()
svc$add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
CloudWatchLoggingOption
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The Kinesis Analytics application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The version ID of the Kinesis Analytics application. |
CloudWatchLoggingOption |
[required] Provides the CloudWatch log stream Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and the
IAM role ARN. Note: To write application messages to CloudWatch, the IAM
role that is used must have the |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_add_application_input/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_add_application_input(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
Input
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of your existing Amazon Kinesis Analytics application to which you want to add the streaming source. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] Current version of your Amazon Kinesis Analytics application. You can
use the |
Input |
[required] The Input to add. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_add_application_input_processing_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_add_application_input_processing_configuration(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
InputId,
InputProcessingConfiguration
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the application to which you want to add the input processing configuration. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] Version of the application to which you want to add the input processing
configuration. You can use the
|
InputId |
[required] The ID of the input configuration to add the input processing
configuration to. You can get a list of the input IDs for an application
using the
|
InputProcessingConfiguration |
[required] The InputProcessingConfiguration to add to the application. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_add_application_output/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_add_application_output(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
Output
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the application to which you want to add the output configuration. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] Version of the application to which you want to add the output
configuration. You can use the
|
Output |
[required] An array of objects, each describing one output configuration. In the output configuration, you specify the name of an in-application stream, a destination (that is, an Amazon Kinesis stream, an Amazon Kinesis Firehose delivery stream, or an AWS Lambda function), and record the formation to use when writing to the destination. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_add_application_reference_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_add_application_reference_data_source(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
ReferenceDataSource
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of an existing application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] Version of the application for which you are adding the reference data
source. You can use the
|
ReferenceDataSource |
[required] The reference data source can be an object in your Amazon S3 bucket. Amazon Kinesis Analytics reads the object and copies the data into the in-application table that is created. You provide an S3 bucket, object key name, and the resulting in-application table that is created. You must also provide an IAM role with the necessary permissions that Amazon Kinesis Analytics can assume to read the object from your S3 bucket on your behalf. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_create_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_create_application(
ApplicationName,
ApplicationDescription = NULL,
Inputs = NULL,
Outputs = NULL,
CloudWatchLoggingOptions = NULL,
ApplicationCode = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of your Amazon Kinesis Analytics application (for example,
|
ApplicationDescription |
Summary description of the application. |
Inputs |
Use this parameter to configure the application input. You can configure your application to receive input from a single streaming source. In this configuration, you map this streaming source to an in-application stream that is created. Your application code can then query the in-application stream like a table (you can think of it as a constantly updating table). For the streaming source, you provide its Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and format of data on the stream (for example, JSON, CSV, etc.). You also must provide an IAM role that Amazon Kinesis Analytics can assume to read this stream on your behalf. To create the in-application stream, you need to specify a schema to transform your data into a schematized version used in SQL. In the schema, you provide the necessary mapping of the data elements in the streaming source to record columns in the in-app stream. |
Outputs |
You can configure application output to write data from any of the in-application streams to up to three destinations. These destinations can be Amazon Kinesis streams, Amazon Kinesis Firehose delivery streams, AWS Lambda destinations, or any combination of the three. In the configuration, you specify the in-application stream name, the destination stream or Lambda function Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the format to use when writing data. You must also provide an IAM role that Amazon Kinesis Analytics can assume to write to the destination stream or Lambda function on your behalf. In the output configuration, you also provide the output stream or Lambda function ARN. For stream destinations, you provide the format of data in the stream (for example, JSON, CSV). You also must provide an IAM role that Amazon Kinesis Analytics can assume to write to the stream or Lambda function on your behalf. |
CloudWatchLoggingOptions |
Use this parameter to configure a CloudWatch log stream to monitor application configuration errors. For more information, see Working with Amazon CloudWatch Logs. |
ApplicationCode |
One or more SQL statements that read input data, transform it, and generate output. For example, you can write a SQL statement that reads data from one in-application stream, generates a running average of the number of advertisement clicks by vendor, and insert resulting rows in another in-application stream using pumps. For more information about the typical pattern, see Application Code. You can provide such series of SQL statements, where output of one statement can be used as the input for the next statement. You store intermediate results by creating in-application streams and pumps. Note that the application code must create the streams with names
specified in the |
Tags |
A list of one or more tags to assign to the application. A tag is a key-value pair that identifies an application. Note that the maximum number of application tags includes system tags. The maximum number of user-defined application tags is 50. For more information, see Using Tagging. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_delete_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_delete_application(ApplicationName, CreateTimestamp)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the Amazon Kinesis Analytics application to delete. |
CreateTimestamp |
[required] You can use the
|
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_delete_application_cloud_watch_logging_option/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_delete_application_cloud_watch_logging_option(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
CloudWatchLoggingOptionId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The Kinesis Analytics application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The version ID of the Kinesis Analytics application. |
CloudWatchLoggingOptionId |
[required] The |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_delete_application_input_processing_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_delete_application_input_processing_configuration(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
InputId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The Kinesis Analytics application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The version ID of the Kinesis Analytics application. |
InputId |
[required] The ID of the input configuration from which to delete the input
processing configuration. You can get a list of the input IDs for an
application by using the
|
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_delete_application_output/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_delete_application_output(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
OutputId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Amazon Kinesis Analytics application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] Amazon Kinesis Analytics application version. You can use the
|
OutputId |
[required] The ID of the configuration to delete. Each output configuration that is
added to the application, either when the application is created or
later using the
|
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_delete_application_reference_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_delete_application_reference_data_source(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
ReferenceId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of an existing application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] Version of the application. You can use the
|
ReferenceId |
[required] ID of the reference data source. When you add a reference data source to
your application using the
|
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_describe_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_describe_application(ApplicationName)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the application. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_discover_input_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_discover_input_schema(
ResourceARN = NULL,
RoleARN = NULL,
InputStartingPositionConfiguration = NULL,
S3Configuration = NULL,
InputProcessingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the streaming source. |
RoleARN |
ARN of the IAM role that Amazon Kinesis Analytics can assume to access the stream on your behalf. |
InputStartingPositionConfiguration |
Point at which you want Amazon Kinesis Analytics to start reading records from the specified streaming source discovery purposes. |
S3Configuration |
Specify this parameter to discover a schema from data in an Amazon S3 object. |
InputProcessingConfiguration |
The InputProcessingConfiguration to use to preprocess the records before discovering the schema of the records. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_list_applications/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_list_applications(
Limit = NULL,
ExclusiveStartApplicationName = NULL
)
Arguments
Limit |
Maximum number of applications to list. |
ExclusiveStartApplicationName |
Name of the application to start the list with. When using pagination to retrieve the list, you don't need to specify this parameter in the first request. However, in subsequent requests, you add the last application name from the previous response to get the next page of applications. |
Retrieves the list of key-value tags assigned to the application
Description
Retrieves the list of key-value tags assigned to the application. For more information, see Using Tagging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the application for which to retrieve tags. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_start_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_start_application(ApplicationName, InputConfigurations)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the application. |
InputConfigurations |
[required] Identifies the specific input, by ID, that the application starts consuming. Amazon Kinesis Analytics starts reading the streaming source associated with the input. You can also specify where in the streaming source you want Amazon Kinesis Analytics to start reading. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_stop_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_stop_application(ApplicationName)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the running application to stop. |
Adds one or more key-value tags to a Kinesis Analytics application
Description
Adds one or more key-value tags to a Kinesis Analytics application. Note that the maximum number of application tags includes system tags. The maximum number of user-defined application tags is 50. For more information, see Using Tagging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the application to assign the tags. |
Tags |
[required] The key-value tags to assign to the application. |
Removes one or more tags from a Kinesis Analytics application
Description
Removes one or more tags from a Kinesis Analytics application. For more information, see Using Tagging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the Kinesis Analytics application from which to remove the tags. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of keys of tags to remove from the specified application. |
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications
Description
This documentation is for version 1 of the Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API, which only supports SQL applications. Version 2 of the API supports SQL and Java applications. For more information about version 2, see Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics API V2 Documentation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalytics_update_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalytics_update_application(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
ApplicationUpdate
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] Name of the Amazon Kinesis Analytics application to update. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The current application version ID. You can use the
|
ApplicationUpdate |
[required] Describes application updates. |
Amazon Kinesis Analytics
Description
Amazon Managed Service for Apache Flink was previously known as Amazon Kinesis Data Analytics for Apache Flink.
Amazon Managed Service for Apache Flink is a fully managed service that you can use to process and analyze streaming data using Java, Python, SQL, or Scala. The service enables you to quickly author and run Java, SQL, or Scala code against streaming sources to perform time series analytics, feed real-time dashboards, and create real-time metrics.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- kinesisanalyticsv2( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option | Adds an Amazon CloudWatch log stream to monitor application configuration errors |
add_application_input | Adds a streaming source to your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application |
add_application_input_processing_configuration | Adds an InputProcessingConfiguration to a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application |
add_application_output | Adds an external destination to your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application |
add_application_reference_data_source | Adds a reference data source to an existing SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application |
add_application_vpc_configuration | Adds a Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) configuration to the application |
create_application | Creates a Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
create_application_presigned_url | Creates and returns a URL that you can use to connect to an application's extension |
create_application_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of the application's state data |
delete_application | Deletes the specified application |
delete_application_cloud_watch_logging_option | Deletes an Amazon CloudWatch log stream from an SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application |
delete_application_input_processing_configuration | Deletes an InputProcessingConfiguration from an input |
delete_application_output | Deletes the output destination configuration from your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application's configuration |
delete_application_reference_data_source | Deletes a reference data source configuration from the specified SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application's configuration |
delete_application_snapshot | Deletes a snapshot of application state |
delete_application_vpc_configuration | Removes a VPC configuration from a Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
describe_application | Returns information about a specific Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
describe_application_operation | Returns information about a specific operation performed on a Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
describe_application_snapshot | Returns information about a snapshot of application state data |
describe_application_version | Provides a detailed description of a specified version of the application |
discover_input_schema | Infers a schema for a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application by evaluating sample records on the specified streaming source (Kinesis data stream or Kinesis Data Firehose delivery stream) or Amazon S3 object |
list_application_operations | Lists information about operations performed on a Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
list_applications | Returns a list of Managed Service for Apache Flink applications in your account |
list_application_snapshots | Lists information about the current application snapshots |
list_application_versions | Lists all the versions for the specified application, including versions that were rolled back |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves the list of key-value tags assigned to the application |
rollback_application | Reverts the application to the previous running version |
start_application | Starts the specified Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
stop_application | Stops the application from processing data |
tag_resource | Adds one or more key-value tags to a Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from a Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
update_application | Updates an existing Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
update_application_maintenance_configuration | Updates the maintenance configuration of the Managed Service for Apache Flink application |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- kinesisanalyticsv2()
svc$add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds an Amazon CloudWatch log stream to monitor application configuration errors
Description
Adds an Amazon CloudWatch log stream to monitor application configuration errors.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_cloud_watch_logging_option(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId = NULL,
CloudWatchLoggingOption,
ConditionalToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The Kinesis Data Analytics application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
The version ID of the SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application. You
must provide the |
CloudWatchLoggingOption |
[required] Provides the Amazon CloudWatch log stream Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ConditionalToken |
A value you use to implement strong concurrency for application updates.
You must provide the |
Adds a streaming source to your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application
Description
Adds a streaming source to your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_input/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_input(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
Input
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of your existing application to which you want to add the streaming source. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The current version of your application. You must provide the
|
Input |
[required] The Input to add. |
Adds an InputProcessingConfiguration to a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application
Description
Adds an InputProcessingConfiguration to a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application. An input processor pre-processes records on the input stream before the application's SQL code executes. Currently, the only input processor available is Amazon Lambda.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_input_processing_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_input_processing_configuration(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
InputId,
InputProcessingConfiguration
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application to which you want to add the input processing configuration. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The version of the application to which you want to add the input
processing configuration. You can use the
|
InputId |
[required] The ID of the input configuration to add the input processing
configuration to. You can get a list of the input IDs for an application
using the
|
InputProcessingConfiguration |
[required] The InputProcessingConfiguration to add to the application. |
Adds an external destination to your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application
Description
Adds an external destination to your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_output/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_output(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
Output
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application to which you want to add the output configuration. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The version of the application to which you want to add the output
configuration. You can use the
|
Output |
[required] An array of objects, each describing one output configuration. In the output configuration, you specify the name of an in-application stream, a destination (that is, a Kinesis data stream, a Kinesis Data Firehose delivery stream, or an Amazon Lambda function), and record the formation to use when writing to the destination. |
Adds a reference data source to an existing SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application
Description
Adds a reference data source to an existing SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_reference_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_reference_data_source(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
ReferenceDataSource
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The version of the application for which you are adding the reference
data source. You can use the
|
ReferenceDataSource |
[required] The reference data source can be an object in your Amazon S3 bucket. Kinesis Data Analytics reads the object and copies the data into the in-application table that is created. You provide an S3 bucket, object key name, and the resulting in-application table that is created. |
Adds a Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) configuration to the application
Description
Adds a Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) configuration to the application. Applications can use VPCs to store and access resources securely.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_vpc_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_add_application_vpc_configuration(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId = NULL,
VpcConfiguration,
ConditionalToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
The version of the application to which you want to add the VPC
configuration. You must provide the |
VpcConfiguration |
[required] Description of the VPC to add to the application. |
ConditionalToken |
A value you use to implement strong concurrency for application updates.
You must provide the |
Creates a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Creates a Managed Service for Apache Flink application. For information about creating a Managed Service for Apache Flink application, see Creating an Application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_create_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_create_application(
ApplicationName,
ApplicationDescription = NULL,
RuntimeEnvironment,
ServiceExecutionRole,
ApplicationConfiguration = NULL,
CloudWatchLoggingOptions = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
ApplicationMode = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of your application (for example, |
ApplicationDescription |
A summary description of the application. |
RuntimeEnvironment |
[required] The runtime environment for the application. |
ServiceExecutionRole |
[required] The IAM role used by the application to access Kinesis data streams, Kinesis Data Firehose delivery streams, Amazon S3 objects, and other external resources. |
ApplicationConfiguration |
Use this parameter to configure the application. |
CloudWatchLoggingOptions |
Use this parameter to configure an Amazon CloudWatch log stream to monitor application configuration errors. |
Tags |
A list of one or more tags to assign to the application. A tag is a key-value pair that identifies an application. Note that the maximum number of application tags includes system tags. The maximum number of user-defined application tags is 50. For more information, see Using Tagging. |
ApplicationMode |
Use the |
Creates and returns a URL that you can use to connect to an application's extension
Description
Creates and returns a URL that you can use to connect to an application's extension.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_create_application_presigned_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_create_application_presigned_url(
ApplicationName,
UrlType,
SessionExpirationDurationInSeconds = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application. |
UrlType |
[required] The type of the extension for which to create and return a URL.
Currently, the only valid extension URL type is |
SessionExpirationDurationInSeconds |
The duration in seconds for which the returned URL will be valid. |
Creates a snapshot of the application's state data
Description
Creates a snapshot of the application's state data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_create_application_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_create_application_snapshot(ApplicationName, SnapshotName)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application |
SnapshotName |
[required] An identifier for the application snapshot. |
Deletes the specified application
Description
Deletes the specified application. Managed Service for Apache Flink halts application execution and deletes the application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application(ApplicationName, CreateTimestamp)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application to delete. |
CreateTimestamp |
[required] Use the
|
Deletes an Amazon CloudWatch log stream from an SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application
Description
Deletes an Amazon CloudWatch log stream from an SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_cloud_watch_logging_option/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_cloud_watch_logging_option(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId = NULL,
CloudWatchLoggingOptionId,
ConditionalToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
The version ID of the application. You must provide the
|
CloudWatchLoggingOptionId |
[required] The |
ConditionalToken |
A value you use to implement strong concurrency for application updates.
You must provide the |
Deletes an InputProcessingConfiguration from an input
Description
Deletes an InputProcessingConfiguration from an input.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_input_processing_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_input_processing_configuration(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
InputId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The application version. You can use the
|
InputId |
[required] The ID of the input configuration from which to delete the input
processing configuration. You can get a list of the input IDs for an
application by using the
|
Deletes the output destination configuration from your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application's configuration
Description
Deletes the output destination configuration from your SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application's configuration. Kinesis Data Analytics will no longer write data from the corresponding in-application stream to the external output destination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_output/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_output(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
OutputId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The application name. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The application version. You can use the
|
OutputId |
[required] The ID of the configuration to delete. Each output configuration that is
added to the application (either when the application is created or
later) using the
|
Deletes a reference data source configuration from the specified SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application's configuration
Description
Deletes a reference data source configuration from the specified SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application's configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_reference_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_reference_data_source(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId,
ReferenceId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The current application version. You can use the
|
ReferenceId |
[required] The ID of the reference data source. When you add a reference data
source to your application using the
|
Deletes a snapshot of application state
Description
Deletes a snapshot of application state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_snapshot(
ApplicationName,
SnapshotName,
SnapshotCreationTimestamp
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
SnapshotName |
[required] The identifier for the snapshot delete. |
SnapshotCreationTimestamp |
[required] The creation timestamp of the application snapshot to delete. You can retrieve this value using or . |
Removes a VPC configuration from a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Removes a VPC configuration from a Managed Service for Apache Flink application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_vpc_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_delete_application_vpc_configuration(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId = NULL,
VpcConfigurationId,
ConditionalToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
The current application version ID. You must provide the
|
VpcConfigurationId |
[required] The ID of the VPC configuration to delete. |
ConditionalToken |
A value you use to implement strong concurrency for application updates.
You must provide the |
Returns information about a specific Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Returns information about a specific Managed Service for Apache Flink application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application(
ApplicationName,
IncludeAdditionalDetails = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application. |
IncludeAdditionalDetails |
Displays verbose information about a Managed Service for Apache Flink application, including the application's job plan. |
Returns information about a specific operation performed on a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Returns information about a specific operation performed on a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application_operation/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application_operation(ApplicationName, OperationId)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] |
OperationId |
[required] |
Returns information about a snapshot of application state data
Description
Returns information about a snapshot of application state data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application_snapshot(ApplicationName, SnapshotName)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
SnapshotName |
[required] The identifier of an application snapshot. You can retrieve this value using . |
Provides a detailed description of a specified version of the application
Description
Provides a detailed description of a specified version of the application. To see a list of all the versions of an application, invoke the list_application_versions
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_describe_application_version(
ApplicationName,
ApplicationVersionId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application for which you want to get the version description. |
ApplicationVersionId |
[required] The ID of the application version for which you want to get the description. |
Infers a schema for a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application by evaluating sample records on the specified streaming source (Kinesis data stream or Kinesis Data Firehose delivery stream) or Amazon S3 object
Description
Infers a schema for a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application by evaluating sample records on the specified streaming source (Kinesis data stream or Kinesis Data Firehose delivery stream) or Amazon S3 object. In the response, the operation returns the inferred schema and also the sample records that the operation used to infer the schema.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_discover_input_schema/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_discover_input_schema(
ResourceARN = NULL,
ServiceExecutionRole,
InputStartingPositionConfiguration = NULL,
S3Configuration = NULL,
InputProcessingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the streaming source. |
ServiceExecutionRole |
[required] The ARN of the role that is used to access the streaming source. |
InputStartingPositionConfiguration |
The point at which you want Kinesis Data Analytics to start reading records from the specified streaming source for discovery purposes. |
S3Configuration |
Specify this parameter to discover a schema from data in an Amazon S3 object. |
InputProcessingConfiguration |
The InputProcessingConfiguration to use to preprocess the records before discovering the schema of the records. |
Lists information about operations performed on a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Lists information about operations performed on a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_list_application_operations/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_list_application_operations(
ApplicationName,
Limit = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Operation = NULL,
OperationStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] |
Limit |
|
NextToken |
|
Operation |
|
OperationStatus |
Lists information about the current application snapshots
Description
Lists information about the current application snapshots.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_list_application_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_list_application_snapshots(
ApplicationName,
Limit = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of an existing application. |
Limit |
The maximum number of application snapshots to list. |
NextToken |
Use this parameter if you receive a |
Lists all the versions for the specified application, including versions that were rolled back
Description
Lists all the versions for the specified application, including versions that were rolled back. The response also includes a summary of the configuration associated with each version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_list_application_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_list_application_versions(
ApplicationName,
Limit = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application for which you want to list all versions. |
Limit |
The maximum number of versions to list in this invocation of the operation. |
NextToken |
If a previous invocation of this operation returned a pagination token, pass it into this value to retrieve the next set of results. For more information about pagination, see Using the Amazon Command Line Interface's Pagination Options. |
Returns a list of Managed Service for Apache Flink applications in your account
Description
Returns a list of Managed Service for Apache Flink applications in your account. For each application, the response includes the application name, Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_list_applications/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_list_applications(Limit = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
Limit |
The maximum number of applications to list. |
NextToken |
If a previous command returned a pagination token, pass it into this value to retrieve the next set of results. For more information about pagination, see Using the Amazon Command Line Interface's Pagination Options. |
Retrieves the list of key-value tags assigned to the application
Description
Retrieves the list of key-value tags assigned to the application. For more information, see Using Tagging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the application for which to retrieve tags. |
Reverts the application to the previous running version
Description
Reverts the application to the previous running version. You can roll back an application if you suspect it is stuck in a transient status or in the running status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_rollback_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_rollback_application(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
[required] The current application version ID. You can retrieve the application
version ID using
|
Starts the specified Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Starts the specified Managed Service for Apache Flink application. After creating an application, you must exclusively call this operation to start your application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_start_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_start_application(ApplicationName, RunConfiguration = NULL)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application. |
RunConfiguration |
Identifies the run configuration (start parameters) of a Managed Service for Apache Flink application. |
Stops the application from processing data
Description
Stops the application from processing data. You can stop an application only if it is in the running status, unless you set the Force
parameter to true
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_stop_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_stop_application(ApplicationName, Force = NULL)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the running application to stop. |
Force |
Set to Force-stopping your application may lead to data loss or duplication. To prevent data loss or duplicate processing of data during application restarts, we recommend you to take frequent snapshots of your application. You can only force stop a Managed Service for Apache Flink application. You can't force stop a SQL-based Kinesis Data Analytics application. The application must be in the |
Adds one or more key-value tags to a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Adds one or more key-value tags to a Managed Service for Apache Flink application. Note that the maximum number of application tags includes system tags. The maximum number of user-defined application tags is 50. For more information, see Using Tagging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the application to assign the tags. |
Tags |
[required] The key-value tags to assign to the application. |
Removes one or more tags from a Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Removes one or more tags from a Managed Service for Apache Flink application. For more information, see Using Tagging.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the Managed Service for Apache Flink application from which to remove the tags. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of keys of tags to remove from the specified application. |
Updates an existing Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Updates an existing Managed Service for Apache Flink application. Using this operation, you can update application code, input configuration, and output configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_update_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_update_application(
ApplicationName,
CurrentApplicationVersionId = NULL,
ApplicationConfigurationUpdate = NULL,
ServiceExecutionRoleUpdate = NULL,
RunConfigurationUpdate = NULL,
CloudWatchLoggingOptionUpdates = NULL,
ConditionalToken = NULL,
RuntimeEnvironmentUpdate = NULL
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application to update. |
CurrentApplicationVersionId |
The current application version ID. You must provide the
|
ApplicationConfigurationUpdate |
Describes application configuration updates. |
ServiceExecutionRoleUpdate |
Describes updates to the service execution role. |
RunConfigurationUpdate |
Describes updates to the application's starting parameters. |
CloudWatchLoggingOptionUpdates |
Describes application Amazon CloudWatch logging option updates. You can
only update existing CloudWatch logging options with this action. To add
a new CloudWatch logging option, use
|
ConditionalToken |
A value you use to implement strong concurrency for application updates.
You must provide the |
RuntimeEnvironmentUpdate |
Updates the Managed Service for Apache Flink runtime environment used to run your code. To avoid issues you must:
|
Updates the maintenance configuration of the Managed Service for Apache Flink application
Description
Updates the maintenance configuration of the Managed Service for Apache Flink application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/kinesisanalyticsv2_update_application_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
kinesisanalyticsv2_update_application_maintenance_configuration(
ApplicationName,
ApplicationMaintenanceConfigurationUpdate
)
Arguments
ApplicationName |
[required] The name of the application for which you want to update the maintenance configuration. |
ApplicationMaintenanceConfigurationUpdate |
[required] Describes the application maintenance configuration update. |
Amazon Mechanical Turk
Description
Amazon Mechanical Turk API Reference
Usage
mturk(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- mturk( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_qualification_request | The AcceptQualificationRequest operation approves a Worker's request for a Qualification |
approve_assignment | The ApproveAssignment operation approves the results of a completed assignment |
associate_qualification_with_worker | The AssociateQualificationWithWorker operation gives a Worker a Qualification |
create_additional_assignments_for_hit | The CreateAdditionalAssignmentsForHIT operation increases the maximum number of assignments of an existing HIT |
create_hit | The CreateHIT operation creates a new Human Intelligence Task (HIT) |
create_hit_type | The CreateHITType operation creates a new HIT type |
create_hit_with_hit_type | The CreateHITWithHITType operation creates a new Human Intelligence Task (HIT) using an existing HITTypeID generated by the CreateHITType operation |
create_qualification_type | The CreateQualificationType operation creates a new Qualification type, which is represented by a QualificationType data structure |
create_worker_block | The CreateWorkerBlock operation allows you to prevent a Worker from working on your HITs |
delete_hit | The DeleteHIT operation is used to delete HIT that is no longer needed |
delete_qualification_type | The DeleteQualificationType deletes a Qualification type and deletes any HIT types that are associated with the Qualification type |
delete_worker_block | The DeleteWorkerBlock operation allows you to reinstate a blocked Worker to work on your HITs |
disassociate_qualification_from_worker | The DisassociateQualificationFromWorker revokes a previously granted Qualification from a user |
get_account_balance | The GetAccountBalance operation retrieves the Prepaid HITs balance in your Amazon Mechanical Turk account if you are a Prepaid Requester |
get_assignment | The GetAssignment operation retrieves the details of the specified Assignment |
get_file_upload_url | The GetFileUploadURL operation generates and returns a temporary URL |
get_hit | The GetHIT operation retrieves the details of the specified HIT |
get_qualification_score | The GetQualificationScore operation returns the value of a Worker's Qualification for a given Qualification type |
get_qualification_type | The GetQualificationTypeoperation retrieves information about a Qualification type using its ID |
list_assignments_for_hit | The ListAssignmentsForHIT operation retrieves completed assignments for a HIT |
list_bonus_payments | The ListBonusPayments operation retrieves the amounts of bonuses you have paid to Workers for a given HIT or assignment |
list_hi_ts | The ListHITs operation returns all of a Requester's HITs |
list_hi_ts_for_qualification_type | The ListHITsForQualificationType operation returns the HITs that use the given Qualification type for a Qualification requirement |
list_qualification_requests | The ListQualificationRequests operation retrieves requests for Qualifications of a particular Qualification type |
list_qualification_types | The ListQualificationTypes operation returns a list of Qualification types, filtered by an optional search term |
list_reviewable_hi_ts | The ListReviewableHITs operation retrieves the HITs with Status equal to Reviewable or Status equal to Reviewing that belong to the Requester calling the operation |
list_review_policy_results_for_hit | The ListReviewPolicyResultsForHIT operation retrieves the computed results and the actions taken in the course of executing your Review Policies for a given HIT |
list_worker_blocks | The ListWorkersBlocks operation retrieves a list of Workers who are blocked from working on your HITs |
list_workers_with_qualification_type | The ListWorkersWithQualificationType operation returns all of the Workers that have been associated with a given Qualification type |
notify_workers | The NotifyWorkers operation sends an email to one or more Workers that you specify with the Worker ID |
reject_assignment | The RejectAssignment operation rejects the results of a completed assignment |
reject_qualification_request | The RejectQualificationRequest operation rejects a user's request for a Qualification |
send_bonus | The SendBonus operation issues a payment of money from your account to a Worker |
send_test_event_notification | The SendTestEventNotification operation causes Amazon Mechanical Turk to send a notification message as if a HIT event occurred, according to the provided notification specification |
update_expiration_for_hit | The UpdateExpirationForHIT operation allows you update the expiration time of a HIT |
update_hit_review_status | The UpdateHITReviewStatus operation updates the status of a HIT |
update_hit_type_of_hit | The UpdateHITTypeOfHIT operation allows you to change the HITType properties of a HIT |
update_notification_settings | The UpdateNotificationSettings operation creates, updates, disables or re-enables notifications for a HIT type |
update_qualification_type | The UpdateQualificationType operation modifies the attributes of an existing Qualification type, which is represented by a QualificationType data structure |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- mturk()
svc$accept_qualification_request(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
The AcceptQualificationRequest operation approves a Worker's request for a Qualification
Description
The accept_qualification_request
operation approves a Worker's request for a Qualification.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_accept_qualification_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_accept_qualification_request(QualificationRequestId, IntegerValue = NULL)
Arguments
QualificationRequestId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification request, as returned by the
|
IntegerValue |
The value of the Qualification. You can omit this value if you are using the presence or absence of the Qualification as the basis for a HIT requirement. |
The ApproveAssignment operation approves the results of a completed assignment
Description
The approve_assignment
operation approves the results of a completed assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_approve_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_approve_assignment(
AssignmentId,
RequesterFeedback = NULL,
OverrideRejection = NULL
)
Arguments
AssignmentId |
[required] The ID of the assignment. The assignment must correspond to a HIT created by the Requester. |
RequesterFeedback |
A message for the Worker, which the Worker can see in the Status section of the web site. |
OverrideRejection |
A flag indicating that an assignment should be approved even if it was
previously rejected. Defaults to |
The AssociateQualificationWithWorker operation gives a Worker a Qualification
Description
The associate_qualification_with_worker
operation gives a Worker a Qualification. associate_qualification_with_worker
does not require that the Worker submit a Qualification request. It gives the Qualification directly to the Worker.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_associate_qualification_with_worker/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_associate_qualification_with_worker(
QualificationTypeId,
WorkerId,
IntegerValue = NULL,
SendNotification = NULL
)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification type to use for the assigned Qualification. |
WorkerId |
[required] The ID of the Worker to whom the Qualification is being assigned. Worker IDs are included with submitted HIT assignments and Qualification requests. |
IntegerValue |
The value of the Qualification to assign. |
SendNotification |
Specifies whether to send a notification email message to the Worker saying that the qualification was assigned to the Worker. Note: this is true by default. |
The CreateAdditionalAssignmentsForHIT operation increases the maximum number of assignments of an existing HIT
Description
The create_additional_assignments_for_hit
operation increases the maximum number of assignments of an existing HIT.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_create_additional_assignments_for_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_create_additional_assignments_for_hit(
HITId,
NumberOfAdditionalAssignments,
UniqueRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The ID of the HIT to extend. |
NumberOfAdditionalAssignments |
[required] The number of additional assignments to request for this HIT. |
UniqueRequestToken |
A unique identifier for this request, which allows you to retry the call
on error without extending the HIT multiple times. This is useful in
cases such as network timeouts where it is unclear whether or not the
call succeeded on the server. If the extend HIT already exists in the
system from a previous call using the same |
The CreateHIT operation creates a new Human Intelligence Task (HIT)
Description
The create_hit
operation creates a new Human Intelligence Task (HIT). The new HIT is made available for Workers to find and accept on the Amazon Mechanical Turk website.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_create_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_create_hit(
MaxAssignments = NULL,
AutoApprovalDelayInSeconds = NULL,
LifetimeInSeconds,
AssignmentDurationInSeconds,
Reward,
Title,
Keywords = NULL,
Description,
Question = NULL,
RequesterAnnotation = NULL,
QualificationRequirements = NULL,
UniqueRequestToken = NULL,
AssignmentReviewPolicy = NULL,
HITReviewPolicy = NULL,
HITLayoutId = NULL,
HITLayoutParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxAssignments |
The number of times the HIT can be accepted and completed before the HIT becomes unavailable. |
AutoApprovalDelayInSeconds |
The number of seconds after an assignment for the HIT has been submitted, after which the assignment is considered Approved automatically unless the Requester explicitly rejects it. |
LifetimeInSeconds |
[required] An amount of time, in seconds, after which the HIT is no longer available for users to accept. After the lifetime of the HIT elapses, the HIT no longer appears in HIT searches, even if not all of the assignments for the HIT have been accepted. |
AssignmentDurationInSeconds |
[required] The amount of time, in seconds, that a Worker has to complete the HIT after accepting it. If a Worker does not complete the assignment within the specified duration, the assignment is considered abandoned. If the HIT is still active (that is, its lifetime has not elapsed), the assignment becomes available for other users to find and accept. |
Reward |
[required] The amount of money the Requester will pay a Worker for successfully completing the HIT. |
Title |
[required] The title of the HIT. A title should be short and descriptive about the kind of task the HIT contains. On the Amazon Mechanical Turk web site, the HIT title appears in search results, and everywhere the HIT is mentioned. |
Keywords |
One or more words or phrases that describe the HIT, separated by commas. These words are used in searches to find HITs. |
Description |
[required] A general description of the HIT. A description includes detailed information about the kind of task the HIT contains. On the Amazon Mechanical Turk web site, the HIT description appears in the expanded view of search results, and in the HIT and assignment screens. A good description gives the user enough information to evaluate the HIT before accepting it. |
Question |
The data the person completing the HIT uses to produce the results. Constraints: Must be a QuestionForm data structure, an ExternalQuestion data structure, or an HTMLQuestion data structure. The XML question data must not be larger than 64 kilobytes (65,535 bytes) in size, including whitespace. Either a Question parameter or a HITLayoutId parameter must be provided. |
RequesterAnnotation |
An arbitrary data field. The RequesterAnnotation parameter lets your application attach arbitrary data to the HIT for tracking purposes. For example, this parameter could be an identifier internal to the Requester's application that corresponds with the HIT. The RequesterAnnotation parameter for a HIT is only visible to the Requester who created the HIT. It is not shown to the Worker, or any other Requester. The RequesterAnnotation parameter may be different for each HIT you submit. It does not affect how your HITs are grouped. |
QualificationRequirements |
Conditions that a Worker's Qualifications must meet in order to accept
the HIT. A HIT can have between zero and ten Qualification requirements.
All requirements must be met in order for a Worker to accept the HIT.
Additionally, other actions can be restricted using the |
UniqueRequestToken |
A unique identifier for this request which allows you to retry the call on error without creating duplicate HITs. This is useful in cases such as network timeouts where it is unclear whether or not the call succeeded on the server. If the HIT already exists in the system from a previous call using the same UniqueRequestToken, subsequent calls will return a AWS.MechanicalTurk.HitAlreadyExists error with a message containing the HITId. Note: It is your responsibility to ensure uniqueness of the token. The unique token expires after 24 hours. Subsequent calls using the same UniqueRequestToken made after the 24 hour limit could create duplicate HITs. |
AssignmentReviewPolicy |
The Assignment-level Review Policy applies to the assignments under the HIT. You can specify for Mechanical Turk to take various actions based on the policy. |
HITReviewPolicy |
The HIT-level Review Policy applies to the HIT. You can specify for Mechanical Turk to take various actions based on the policy. |
HITLayoutId |
The HITLayoutId allows you to use a pre-existing HIT design with placeholder values and create an additional HIT by providing those values as HITLayoutParameters. Constraints: Either a Question parameter or a HITLayoutId parameter must be provided. |
HITLayoutParameters |
If the HITLayoutId is provided, any placeholder values must be filled in with values using the HITLayoutParameter structure. For more information, see HITLayout. |
The CreateHITType operation creates a new HIT type
Description
The create_hit_type
operation creates a new HIT type. This operation allows you to define a standard set of HIT properties to use when creating HITs. If you register a HIT type with values that match an existing HIT type, the HIT type ID of the existing type will be returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_create_hit_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_create_hit_type(
AutoApprovalDelayInSeconds = NULL,
AssignmentDurationInSeconds,
Reward,
Title,
Keywords = NULL,
Description,
QualificationRequirements = NULL
)
Arguments
AutoApprovalDelayInSeconds |
The number of seconds after an assignment for the HIT has been submitted, after which the assignment is considered Approved automatically unless the Requester explicitly rejects it. |
AssignmentDurationInSeconds |
[required] The amount of time, in seconds, that a Worker has to complete the HIT after accepting it. If a Worker does not complete the assignment within the specified duration, the assignment is considered abandoned. If the HIT is still active (that is, its lifetime has not elapsed), the assignment becomes available for other users to find and accept. |
Reward |
[required] The amount of money the Requester will pay a Worker for successfully completing the HIT. |
Title |
[required] The title of the HIT. A title should be short and descriptive about the kind of task the HIT contains. On the Amazon Mechanical Turk web site, the HIT title appears in search results, and everywhere the HIT is mentioned. |
Keywords |
One or more words or phrases that describe the HIT, separated by commas. These words are used in searches to find HITs. |
Description |
[required] A general description of the HIT. A description includes detailed information about the kind of task the HIT contains. On the Amazon Mechanical Turk web site, the HIT description appears in the expanded view of search results, and in the HIT and assignment screens. A good description gives the user enough information to evaluate the HIT before accepting it. |
QualificationRequirements |
Conditions that a Worker's Qualifications must meet in order to accept
the HIT. A HIT can have between zero and ten Qualification requirements.
All requirements must be met in order for a Worker to accept the HIT.
Additionally, other actions can be restricted using the |
The CreateHITWithHITType operation creates a new Human Intelligence Task (HIT) using an existing HITTypeID generated by the CreateHITType operation
Description
The create_hit_with_hit_type
operation creates a new Human Intelligence Task (HIT) using an existing HITTypeID generated by the create_hit_type
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_create_hit_with_hit_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_create_hit_with_hit_type(
HITTypeId,
MaxAssignments = NULL,
LifetimeInSeconds,
Question = NULL,
RequesterAnnotation = NULL,
UniqueRequestToken = NULL,
AssignmentReviewPolicy = NULL,
HITReviewPolicy = NULL,
HITLayoutId = NULL,
HITLayoutParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
HITTypeId |
[required] The HIT type ID you want to create this HIT with. |
MaxAssignments |
The number of times the HIT can be accepted and completed before the HIT becomes unavailable. |
LifetimeInSeconds |
[required] An amount of time, in seconds, after which the HIT is no longer available for users to accept. After the lifetime of the HIT elapses, the HIT no longer appears in HIT searches, even if not all of the assignments for the HIT have been accepted. |
Question |
The data the person completing the HIT uses to produce the results. Constraints: Must be a QuestionForm data structure, an ExternalQuestion data structure, or an HTMLQuestion data structure. The XML question data must not be larger than 64 kilobytes (65,535 bytes) in size, including whitespace. Either a Question parameter or a HITLayoutId parameter must be provided. |
RequesterAnnotation |
An arbitrary data field. The RequesterAnnotation parameter lets your application attach arbitrary data to the HIT for tracking purposes. For example, this parameter could be an identifier internal to the Requester's application that corresponds with the HIT. The RequesterAnnotation parameter for a HIT is only visible to the Requester who created the HIT. It is not shown to the Worker, or any other Requester. The RequesterAnnotation parameter may be different for each HIT you submit. It does not affect how your HITs are grouped. |
UniqueRequestToken |
A unique identifier for this request which allows you to retry the call on error without creating duplicate HITs. This is useful in cases such as network timeouts where it is unclear whether or not the call succeeded on the server. If the HIT already exists in the system from a previous call using the same UniqueRequestToken, subsequent calls will return a AWS.MechanicalTurk.HitAlreadyExists error with a message containing the HITId. Note: It is your responsibility to ensure uniqueness of the token. The unique token expires after 24 hours. Subsequent calls using the same UniqueRequestToken made after the 24 hour limit could create duplicate HITs. |
AssignmentReviewPolicy |
The Assignment-level Review Policy applies to the assignments under the HIT. You can specify for Mechanical Turk to take various actions based on the policy. |
HITReviewPolicy |
The HIT-level Review Policy applies to the HIT. You can specify for Mechanical Turk to take various actions based on the policy. |
HITLayoutId |
The HITLayoutId allows you to use a pre-existing HIT design with placeholder values and create an additional HIT by providing those values as HITLayoutParameters. Constraints: Either a Question parameter or a HITLayoutId parameter must be provided. |
HITLayoutParameters |
If the HITLayoutId is provided, any placeholder values must be filled in with values using the HITLayoutParameter structure. For more information, see HITLayout. |
The CreateQualificationType operation creates a new Qualification type, which is represented by a QualificationType data structure
Description
The create_qualification_type
operation creates a new Qualification type, which is represented by a QualificationType
data structure.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_create_qualification_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_create_qualification_type(
Name,
Keywords = NULL,
Description,
QualificationTypeStatus,
RetryDelayInSeconds = NULL,
Test = NULL,
AnswerKey = NULL,
TestDurationInSeconds = NULL,
AutoGranted = NULL,
AutoGrantedValue = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name you give to the Qualification type. The type name is used to represent the Qualification to Workers, and to find the type using a Qualification type search. It must be unique across all of your Qualification types. |
Keywords |
One or more words or phrases that describe the Qualification type, separated by commas. The keywords of a type make the type easier to find during a search. |
Description |
[required] A long description for the Qualification type. On the Amazon Mechanical Turk website, the long description is displayed when a Worker examines a Qualification type. |
QualificationTypeStatus |
[required] The initial status of the Qualification type. Constraints: Valid values are: Active | Inactive |
RetryDelayInSeconds |
The number of seconds that a Worker must wait after requesting a Qualification of the Qualification type before the worker can retry the Qualification request. Constraints: None. If not specified, retries are disabled and Workers can request a Qualification of this type only once, even if the Worker has not been granted the Qualification. It is not possible to disable retries for a Qualification type after it has been created with retries enabled. If you want to disable retries, you must delete existing retry-enabled Qualification type and then create a new Qualification type with retries disabled. |
Test |
The questions for the Qualification test a Worker must answer correctly
to obtain a Qualification of this type. If this parameter is specified,
Constraints: Must not be longer than 65535 bytes. Must be a QuestionForm data structure. This parameter cannot be specified if AutoGranted is true. Constraints: None. If not specified, the Worker may request the Qualification without answering any questions. |
AnswerKey |
The answers to the Qualification test specified in the Test parameter, in the form of an AnswerKey data structure. Constraints: Must not be longer than 65535 bytes. Constraints: None. If not specified, you must process Qualification requests manually. |
TestDurationInSeconds |
The number of seconds the Worker has to complete the Qualification test, starting from the time the Worker requests the Qualification. |
AutoGranted |
Specifies whether requests for the Qualification type are granted immediately, without prompting the Worker with a Qualification test. Constraints: If the Test parameter is specified, this parameter cannot be true. |
AutoGrantedValue |
The Qualification value to use for automatically granted Qualifications. This parameter is used only if the AutoGranted parameter is true. |
The CreateWorkerBlock operation allows you to prevent a Worker from working on your HITs
Description
The create_worker_block
operation allows you to prevent a Worker from working on your HITs. For example, you can block a Worker who is producing poor quality work. You can block up to 100,000 Workers.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_create_worker_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_create_worker_block(WorkerId, Reason)
Arguments
WorkerId |
[required] The ID of the Worker to block. |
Reason |
[required] A message explaining the reason for blocking the Worker. This parameter enables you to keep track of your Workers. The Worker does not see this message. |
The DeleteHIT operation is used to delete HIT that is no longer needed
Description
The delete_hit
operation is used to delete HIT that is no longer needed. Only the Requester who created the HIT can delete it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_delete_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_delete_hit(HITId)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The ID of the HIT to be deleted. |
The DeleteQualificationType deletes a Qualification type and deletes any HIT types that are associated with the Qualification type
Description
The delete_qualification_type
deletes a Qualification type and deletes any HIT types that are associated with the Qualification type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_delete_qualification_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_delete_qualification_type(QualificationTypeId)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the QualificationType to dispose. |
The DeleteWorkerBlock operation allows you to reinstate a blocked Worker to work on your HITs
Description
The delete_worker_block
operation allows you to reinstate a blocked Worker to work on your HITs. This operation reverses the effects of the CreateWorkerBlock operation. You need the Worker ID to use this operation. If the Worker ID is missing or invalid, this operation fails and returns the message “WorkerId is invalid.” If the specified Worker is not blocked, this operation returns successfully.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_delete_worker_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_delete_worker_block(WorkerId, Reason = NULL)
Arguments
WorkerId |
[required] The ID of the Worker to unblock. |
Reason |
A message that explains the reason for unblocking the Worker. The Worker does not see this message. |
The DisassociateQualificationFromWorker revokes a previously granted Qualification from a user
Description
The disassociate_qualification_from_worker
revokes a previously granted Qualification from a user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_disassociate_qualification_from_worker/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_disassociate_qualification_from_worker(
WorkerId,
QualificationTypeId,
Reason = NULL
)
Arguments
WorkerId |
[required] The ID of the Worker who possesses the Qualification to be revoked. |
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification type of the Qualification to be revoked. |
Reason |
A text message that explains why the Qualification was revoked. The user who had the Qualification sees this message. |
The GetAccountBalance operation retrieves the Prepaid HITs balance in your Amazon Mechanical Turk account if you are a Prepaid Requester
Description
The get_account_balance
operation retrieves the Prepaid HITs balance in your Amazon Mechanical Turk account if you are a Prepaid Requester. Alternatively, this operation will retrieve the remaining available AWS Billing usage if you have enabled AWS Billing. Note: If you have enabled AWS Billing and still have a remaining Prepaid HITs balance, this balance can be viewed on the My Account page in the Requester console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_get_account_balance/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_get_account_balance()
The GetAssignment operation retrieves the details of the specified Assignment
Description
The get_assignment
operation retrieves the details of the specified Assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_get_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_get_assignment(AssignmentId)
Arguments
AssignmentId |
[required] The ID of the Assignment to be retrieved. |
The GetFileUploadURL operation generates and returns a temporary URL
Description
The get_file_upload_url
operation generates and returns a temporary URL. You use the temporary URL to retrieve a file uploaded by a Worker as an answer to a FileUploadAnswer question for a HIT. The temporary URL is generated the instant the GetFileUploadURL operation is called, and is valid for 60 seconds. You can get a temporary file upload URL any time until the HIT is disposed. After the HIT is disposed, any uploaded files are deleted, and cannot be retrieved. Pending Deprecation on December 12, 2017. The Answer Specification structure will no longer support the FileUploadAnswer
element to be used for the QuestionForm data structure. Instead, we recommend that Requesters who want to create HITs asking Workers to upload files to use Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_get_file_upload_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_get_file_upload_url(AssignmentId, QuestionIdentifier)
Arguments
AssignmentId |
[required] The ID of the assignment that contains the question with a FileUploadAnswer. |
QuestionIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the question with a FileUploadAnswer, as specified in the QuestionForm of the HIT. |
The GetHIT operation retrieves the details of the specified HIT
Description
The get_hit
operation retrieves the details of the specified HIT.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_get_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_get_hit(HITId)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The ID of the HIT to be retrieved. |
The GetQualificationScore operation returns the value of a Worker's Qualification for a given Qualification type
Description
The get_qualification_score
operation returns the value of a Worker's Qualification for a given Qualification type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_get_qualification_score/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_get_qualification_score(QualificationTypeId, WorkerId)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the QualificationType. |
WorkerId |
[required] The ID of the Worker whose Qualification is being updated. |
The GetQualificationTypeoperation retrieves information about a Qualification type using its ID
Description
The get_qualification_type
operation retrieves information about a Qualification type using its ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_get_qualification_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_get_qualification_type(QualificationTypeId)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the QualificationType. |
The ListAssignmentsForHIT operation retrieves completed assignments for a HIT
Description
The list_assignments_for_hit
operation retrieves completed assignments for a HIT. You can use this operation to retrieve the results for a HIT.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_assignments_for_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_assignments_for_hit(
HITId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
AssignmentStatuses = NULL
)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The ID of the HIT. |
NextToken |
Pagination token |
MaxResults |
|
AssignmentStatuses |
The status of the assignments to return: Submitted | Approved | Rejected |
The ListBonusPayments operation retrieves the amounts of bonuses you have paid to Workers for a given HIT or assignment
Description
The list_bonus_payments
operation retrieves the amounts of bonuses you have paid to Workers for a given HIT or assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_bonus_payments/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_bonus_payments(
HITId = NULL,
AssignmentId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
HITId |
The ID of the HIT associated with the bonus payments to retrieve. If not specified, all bonus payments for all assignments for the given HIT are returned. Either the HITId parameter or the AssignmentId parameter must be specified |
AssignmentId |
The ID of the assignment associated with the bonus payments to retrieve. If specified, only bonus payments for the given assignment are returned. Either the HITId parameter or the AssignmentId parameter must be specified |
NextToken |
Pagination token |
MaxResults |
The ListHITs operation returns all of a Requester's HITs
Description
The list_hi_ts
operation returns all of a Requester's HITs. The operation returns HITs of any status, except for HITs that have been deleted of with the DeleteHIT operation or that have been auto-deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_hi_ts/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_hi_ts(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
Pagination token |
MaxResults |
The ListHITsForQualificationType operation returns the HITs that use the given Qualification type for a Qualification requirement
Description
The list_hi_ts_for_qualification_type
operation returns the HITs that use the given Qualification type for a Qualification requirement. The operation returns HITs of any status, except for HITs that have been deleted with the delete_hit
operation or that have been auto-deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_hi_ts_for_qualification_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_hi_ts_for_qualification_type(
QualificationTypeId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification type to use when querying HITs. |
NextToken |
Pagination Token |
MaxResults |
Limit the number of results returned. |
The ListQualificationRequests operation retrieves requests for Qualifications of a particular Qualification type
Description
The list_qualification_requests
operation retrieves requests for Qualifications of a particular Qualification type. The owner of the Qualification type calls this operation to poll for pending requests, and accepts them using the AcceptQualification operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_qualification_requests/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_qualification_requests(
QualificationTypeId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
The ID of the QualificationType. |
NextToken |
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call. |
The ListQualificationTypes operation returns a list of Qualification types, filtered by an optional search term
Description
The list_qualification_types
operation returns a list of Qualification types, filtered by an optional search term.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_qualification_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_qualification_types(
Query = NULL,
MustBeRequestable,
MustBeOwnedByCaller = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Query |
A text query against all of the searchable attributes of Qualification types. |
MustBeRequestable |
[required] Specifies that only Qualification types that a user can request through the Amazon Mechanical Turk web site, such as by taking a Qualification test, are returned as results of the search. Some Qualification types, such as those assigned automatically by the system, cannot be requested directly by users. If false, all Qualification types, including those managed by the system, are considered. Valid values are True | False. |
MustBeOwnedByCaller |
Specifies that only Qualification types that the Requester created are returned. If false, the operation returns all Qualification types. |
NextToken |
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single call. |
The ListReviewPolicyResultsForHIT operation retrieves the computed results and the actions taken in the course of executing your Review Policies for a given HIT
Description
The list_review_policy_results_for_hit
operation retrieves the computed results and the actions taken in the course of executing your Review Policies for a given HIT. For information about how to specify Review Policies when you call CreateHIT, see Review Policies. The ListReviewPolicyResultsForHIT operation can return results for both Assignment-level and HIT-level review results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_review_policy_results_for_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_review_policy_results_for_hit(
HITId,
PolicyLevels = NULL,
RetrieveActions = NULL,
RetrieveResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The unique identifier of the HIT to retrieve review results for. |
PolicyLevels |
The Policy Level(s) to retrieve review results for - HIT or Assignment. If omitted, the default behavior is to retrieve all data for both policy levels. For a list of all the described policies, see Review Policies. |
RetrieveActions |
Specify if the operation should retrieve a list of the actions taken executing the Review Policies and their outcomes. |
RetrieveResults |
Specify if the operation should retrieve a list of the results computed by the Review Policies. |
NextToken |
Pagination token |
MaxResults |
Limit the number of results returned. |
The ListReviewableHITs operation retrieves the HITs with Status equal to Reviewable or Status equal to Reviewing that belong to the Requester calling the operation
Description
The list_reviewable_hi_ts
operation retrieves the HITs with Status equal to Reviewable or Status equal to Reviewing that belong to the Requester calling the operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_reviewable_hi_ts/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_reviewable_hi_ts(
HITTypeId = NULL,
Status = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
HITTypeId |
The ID of the HIT type of the HITs to consider for the query. If not specified, all HITs for the Reviewer are considered |
Status |
Can be either |
NextToken |
Pagination Token |
MaxResults |
Limit the number of results returned. |
The ListWorkersBlocks operation retrieves a list of Workers who are blocked from working on your HITs
Description
The ListWorkersBlocks
operation retrieves a list of Workers who are blocked from working on your HITs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_worker_blocks/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_worker_blocks(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
Pagination token |
MaxResults |
The ListWorkersWithQualificationType operation returns all of the Workers that have been associated with a given Qualification type
Description
The list_workers_with_qualification_type
operation returns all of the Workers that have been associated with a given Qualification type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_list_workers_with_qualification_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_list_workers_with_qualification_type(
QualificationTypeId,
Status = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification type of the Qualifications to return. |
Status |
The status of the Qualifications to return. Can be |
NextToken |
Pagination Token |
MaxResults |
Limit the number of results returned. |
The NotifyWorkers operation sends an email to one or more Workers that you specify with the Worker ID
Description
The notify_workers
operation sends an email to one or more Workers that you specify with the Worker ID. You can specify up to 100 Worker IDs to send the same message with a single call to the NotifyWorkers operation. The NotifyWorkers operation will send a notification email to a Worker only if you have previously approved or rejected work from the Worker.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_notify_workers/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_notify_workers(Subject, MessageText, WorkerIds)
Arguments
Subject |
[required] The subject line of the email message to send. Can include up to 200 characters. |
MessageText |
[required] The text of the email message to send. Can include up to 4,096 characters |
WorkerIds |
[required] A list of Worker IDs you wish to notify. You can notify upto 100 Workers at a time. |
The RejectAssignment operation rejects the results of a completed assignment
Description
The reject_assignment
operation rejects the results of a completed assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_reject_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_reject_assignment(AssignmentId, RequesterFeedback)
Arguments
AssignmentId |
[required] The ID of the assignment. The assignment must correspond to a HIT created by the Requester. |
RequesterFeedback |
[required] A message for the Worker, which the Worker can see in the Status section of the web site. |
The RejectQualificationRequest operation rejects a user's request for a Qualification
Description
The reject_qualification_request
operation rejects a user's request for a Qualification.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_reject_qualification_request/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_reject_qualification_request(QualificationRequestId, Reason = NULL)
Arguments
QualificationRequestId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification request, as returned by the
|
Reason |
A text message explaining why the request was rejected, to be shown to the Worker who made the request. |
The SendBonus operation issues a payment of money from your account to a Worker
Description
The send_bonus
operation issues a payment of money from your account to a Worker. This payment happens separately from the reward you pay to the Worker when you approve the Worker's assignment. The SendBonus operation requires the Worker's ID and the assignment ID as parameters to initiate payment of the bonus. You must include a message that explains the reason for the bonus payment, as the Worker may not be expecting the payment. Amazon Mechanical Turk collects a fee for bonus payments, similar to the HIT listing fee. This operation fails if your account does not have enough funds to pay for both the bonus and the fees.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_send_bonus/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_send_bonus(
WorkerId,
BonusAmount,
AssignmentId,
Reason,
UniqueRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
WorkerId |
[required] The ID of the Worker being paid the bonus. |
BonusAmount |
[required] The Bonus amount is a US Dollar amount specified using a string (for example, "5" represents $5.00 USD and "101.42" represents $101.42 USD). Do not include currency symbols or currency codes. |
AssignmentId |
[required] The ID of the assignment for which this bonus is paid. |
Reason |
[required] A message that explains the reason for the bonus payment. The Worker receiving the bonus can see this message. |
UniqueRequestToken |
A unique identifier for this request, which allows you to retry the call on error without granting multiple bonuses. This is useful in cases such as network timeouts where it is unclear whether or not the call succeeded on the server. If the bonus already exists in the system from a previous call using the same UniqueRequestToken, subsequent calls will return an error with a message containing the request ID. |
The SendTestEventNotification operation causes Amazon Mechanical Turk to send a notification message as if a HIT event occurred, according to the provided notification specification
Description
The send_test_event_notification
operation causes Amazon Mechanical Turk to send a notification message as if a HIT event occurred, according to the provided notification specification. This allows you to test notifications without setting up notifications for a real HIT type and trying to trigger them using the website. When you call this operation, the service attempts to send the test notification immediately.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_send_test_event_notification/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_send_test_event_notification(Notification, TestEventType)
Arguments
Notification |
[required] The notification specification to test. This value is identical to the value you would provide to the UpdateNotificationSettings operation when you establish the notification specification for a HIT type. |
TestEventType |
[required] The event to simulate to test the notification specification. This event is included in the test message even if the notification specification does not include the event type. The notification specification does not filter out the test event. |
The UpdateExpirationForHIT operation allows you update the expiration time of a HIT
Description
The update_expiration_for_hit
operation allows you update the expiration time of a HIT. If you update it to a time in the past, the HIT will be immediately expired.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_update_expiration_for_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_update_expiration_for_hit(HITId, ExpireAt)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The HIT to update. |
ExpireAt |
[required] The date and time at which you want the HIT to expire |
The UpdateHITReviewStatus operation updates the status of a HIT
Description
The update_hit_review_status
operation updates the status of a HIT. If the status is Reviewable, this operation can update the status to Reviewing, or it can revert a Reviewing HIT back to the Reviewable status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_update_hit_review_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_update_hit_review_status(HITId, Revert = NULL)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The ID of the HIT to update. |
Revert |
Specifies how to update the HIT status. Default is
|
The UpdateHITTypeOfHIT operation allows you to change the HITType properties of a HIT
Description
The update_hit_type_of_hit
operation allows you to change the HITType properties of a HIT. This operation disassociates the HIT from its old HITType properties and associates it with the new HITType properties. The HIT takes on the properties of the new HITType in place of the old ones.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_update_hit_type_of_hit/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_update_hit_type_of_hit(HITId, HITTypeId)
Arguments
HITId |
[required] The HIT to update. |
HITTypeId |
[required] The ID of the new HIT type. |
The UpdateNotificationSettings operation creates, updates, disables or re-enables notifications for a HIT type
Description
The update_notification_settings
operation creates, updates, disables or re-enables notifications for a HIT type. If you call the UpdateNotificationSettings operation for a HIT type that already has a notification specification, the operation replaces the old specification with a new one. You can call the UpdateNotificationSettings operation to enable or disable notifications for the HIT type, without having to modify the notification specification itself by providing updates to the Active status without specifying a new notification specification. To change the Active status of a HIT type's notifications, the HIT type must already have a notification specification, or one must be provided in the same call to update_notification_settings
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_update_notification_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_update_notification_settings(
HITTypeId,
Notification = NULL,
Active = NULL
)
Arguments
HITTypeId |
[required] The ID of the HIT type whose notification specification is being updated. |
Notification |
The notification specification for the HIT type. |
Active |
Specifies whether notifications are sent for HITs of this HIT type, according to the notification specification. You must specify either the Notification parameter or the Active parameter for the call to UpdateNotificationSettings to succeed. |
The UpdateQualificationType operation modifies the attributes of an existing Qualification type, which is represented by a QualificationType data structure
Description
The update_qualification_type
operation modifies the attributes of an existing Qualification type, which is represented by a QualificationType data structure. Only the owner of a Qualification type can modify its attributes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/mturk_update_qualification_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
mturk_update_qualification_type(
QualificationTypeId,
Description = NULL,
QualificationTypeStatus = NULL,
Test = NULL,
AnswerKey = NULL,
TestDurationInSeconds = NULL,
RetryDelayInSeconds = NULL,
AutoGranted = NULL,
AutoGrantedValue = NULL
)
Arguments
QualificationTypeId |
[required] The ID of the Qualification type to update. |
Description |
The new description of the Qualification type. |
QualificationTypeStatus |
The new status of the Qualification type - Active | Inactive |
Test |
The questions for the Qualification test a Worker must answer correctly
to obtain a Qualification of this type. If this parameter is specified,
Constraints: Must not be longer than 65535 bytes. Must be a QuestionForm data structure. This parameter cannot be specified if AutoGranted is true. Constraints: None. If not specified, the Worker may request the Qualification without answering any questions. |
AnswerKey |
The answers to the Qualification test specified in the Test parameter, in the form of an AnswerKey data structure. |
TestDurationInSeconds |
The number of seconds the Worker has to complete the Qualification test, starting from the time the Worker requests the Qualification. |
RetryDelayInSeconds |
The amount of time, in seconds, that Workers must wait after requesting a Qualification of the specified Qualification type before they can retry the Qualification request. It is not possible to disable retries for a Qualification type after it has been created with retries enabled. If you want to disable retries, you must dispose of the existing retry-enabled Qualification type using DisposeQualificationType and then create a new Qualification type with retries disabled using CreateQualificationType. |
AutoGranted |
Specifies whether requests for the Qualification type are granted immediately, without prompting the Worker with a Qualification test. Constraints: If the Test parameter is specified, this parameter cannot be true. |
AutoGrantedValue |
The Qualification value to use for automatically granted Qualifications. This parameter is used only if the AutoGranted parameter is true. |
Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion
Description
Use the Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion API to create and manage ingestion pipelines. OpenSearch Ingestion is a fully managed data collector that delivers real-time log and trace data to OpenSearch Service domains. For more information, see Getting data into your cluster using OpenSearch Ingestion.
Usage
opensearchingestion(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- opensearchingestion( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_pipeline | Creates an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
delete_pipeline | Deletes an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
get_pipeline | Retrieves information about an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
get_pipeline_blueprint | Retrieves information about a specific blueprint for OpenSearch Ingestion |
get_pipeline_change_progress | Returns progress information for the current change happening on an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
list_pipeline_blueprints | Retrieves a list of all available blueprints for Data Prepper |
list_pipelines | Lists all OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines in the current Amazon Web Services account and Region |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all resource tags associated with an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
start_pipeline | Starts an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
stop_pipeline | Stops an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
tag_resource | Tags an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
update_pipeline | Updates an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline |
validate_pipeline | Checks whether an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline configuration is valid prior to creation |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- opensearchingestion()
svc$create_pipeline(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Creates an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Creating Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_create_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_create_pipeline(
PipelineName,
MinUnits,
MaxUnits,
PipelineConfigurationBody,
LogPublishingOptions = NULL,
VpcOptions = NULL,
BufferOptions = NULL,
EncryptionAtRestOptions = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline to create. Pipeline names are unique across the pipelines owned by an account within an Amazon Web Services Region. |
MinUnits |
[required] The minimum pipeline capacity, in Ingestion Compute Units (ICUs). |
MaxUnits |
[required] The maximum pipeline capacity, in Ingestion Compute Units (ICUs). |
PipelineConfigurationBody |
[required] The pipeline configuration in YAML format. The command accepts the
pipeline configuration as a string or within a .yaml file. If you
provide the configuration as a string, each new line must be escaped
with |
LogPublishingOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure log publishing. |
VpcOptions |
Container for the values required to configure VPC access for the pipeline. If you don't specify these values, OpenSearch Ingestion creates the pipeline with a public endpoint. |
BufferOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure persistent buffering for the pipeline. |
EncryptionAtRestOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure encryption for data that is written to a persistent buffer. |
Tags |
List of tags to add to the pipeline upon creation. |
Deletes an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Deletes an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Deleting Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_delete_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_delete_pipeline(PipelineName)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the pipeline to delete. |
Retrieves information about an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Retrieves information about an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_get_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_get_pipeline(PipelineName)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the pipeline. |
Retrieves information about a specific blueprint for OpenSearch Ingestion
Description
Retrieves information about a specific blueprint for OpenSearch Ingestion. Blueprints are templates for the configuration needed for a create_pipeline
request. For more information, see Using blueprints to create a pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_get_pipeline_blueprint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_get_pipeline_blueprint(BlueprintName, Format = NULL)
Arguments
BlueprintName |
[required] The name of the blueprint to retrieve. |
Format |
The format format of the blueprint to retrieve. |
Returns progress information for the current change happening on an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Returns progress information for the current change happening on an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. Currently, this operation only returns information when a pipeline is being created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_get_pipeline_change_progress/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_get_pipeline_change_progress(PipelineName)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the pipeline. |
Retrieves a list of all available blueprints for Data Prepper
Description
Retrieves a list of all available blueprints for Data Prepper. For more information, see Using blueprints to create a pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_list_pipeline_blueprints/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_list_pipeline_blueprints()
Lists all OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines in the current Amazon Web Services account and Region
Description
Lists all OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines in the current Amazon Web Services account and Region. For more information, see Viewing Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_list_pipelines/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_list_pipelines(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial |
Lists all resource tags associated with an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Lists all resource tags associated with an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_list_tags_for_resource(Arn)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the pipeline to retrieve tags for. |
Starts an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Starts an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Starting an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_start_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_start_pipeline(PipelineName)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the pipeline to start. |
Stops an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Stops an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Stopping an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_stop_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_stop_pipeline(PipelineName)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the pipeline to stop. |
Tags an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Tags an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_tag_resource(Arn, Tags)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the pipeline to tag. |
Tags |
[required] The list of key-value tags to add to the pipeline. |
Removes one or more tags from an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Removes one or more tags from an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_untag_resource(Arn, TagKeys)
Arguments
Arn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the pipeline to remove tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys to remove. |
Updates an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline
Description
Updates an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline. For more information, see Updating Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_update_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_update_pipeline(
PipelineName,
MinUnits = NULL,
MaxUnits = NULL,
PipelineConfigurationBody = NULL,
LogPublishingOptions = NULL,
BufferOptions = NULL,
EncryptionAtRestOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
PipelineName |
[required] The name of the pipeline to update. |
MinUnits |
The minimum pipeline capacity, in Ingestion Compute Units (ICUs). |
MaxUnits |
The maximum pipeline capacity, in Ingestion Compute Units (ICUs) |
PipelineConfigurationBody |
The pipeline configuration in YAML format. The command accepts the
pipeline configuration as a string or within a .yaml file. If you
provide the configuration as a string, each new line must be escaped
with |
LogPublishingOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure log publishing. |
BufferOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure persistent buffering for the pipeline. |
EncryptionAtRestOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure encryption for data that is written to a persistent buffer. |
Checks whether an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline configuration is valid prior to creation
Description
Checks whether an OpenSearch Ingestion pipeline configuration is valid prior to creation. For more information, see Creating Amazon OpenSearch Ingestion pipelines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchingestion_validate_pipeline/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchingestion_validate_pipeline(PipelineConfigurationBody)
Arguments
PipelineConfigurationBody |
[required] The pipeline configuration in YAML format. The command accepts the
pipeline configuration as a string or within a .yaml file. If you
provide the configuration as a string, each new line must be escaped
with |
Amazon OpenSearch Service
Description
Use the Amazon OpenSearch Service configuration API to create, configure, and manage OpenSearch Service domains. The endpoint for configuration service requests is Region specific: es.region.amazonaws.com. For example, es.us-east-1.amazonaws.com. For a current list of supported Regions and endpoints, see Amazon Web Services service endpoints.
Usage
opensearchservice(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- opensearchservice( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_inbound_connection | Allows the destination Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to accept an inbound cross-cluster search connection request |
add_data_source | Creates a new direct-query data source to the specified domain |
add_direct_query_data_source | Adds a new data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service so that you can perform direct queries on external data |
add_tags | Attaches tags to an existing Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application |
associate_package | Associates a package with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
associate_packages | Operation in the Amazon OpenSearch Service API for associating multiple packages with a domain simultaneously |
authorize_vpc_endpoint_access | Provides access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint |
cancel_domain_config_change | Cancels a pending configuration change on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
cancel_service_software_update | Cancels a scheduled service software update for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
create_application | Creates an OpenSearch Application |
create_domain | Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
create_outbound_connection | Creates a new cross-cluster search connection from a source Amazon OpenSearch Service domain to a destination domain |
create_package | Creates a package for use with Amazon OpenSearch Service domains |
create_vpc_endpoint | Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoint |
delete_application | Deletes an existing OpenSearch Application |
delete_data_source | Deletes a direct-query data source |
delete_direct_query_data_source | Deletes a previously configured direct query data source from Amazon OpenSearch Service |
delete_domain | Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain and all of its data |
delete_inbound_connection | Allows the destination Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to delete an existing inbound cross-cluster search connection |
delete_outbound_connection | Allows the source Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to delete an existing outbound cross-cluster search connection |
delete_package | Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service package |
delete_vpc_endpoint | Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint |
describe_domain | Describes the domain configuration for the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, including the domain ID, domain service endpoint, and domain ARN |
describe_domain_auto_tunes | Returns the list of optimizations that Auto-Tune has made to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
describe_domain_change_progress | Returns information about the current blue/green deployment happening on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
describe_domain_config | Returns the configuration of an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
describe_domain_health | Returns information about domain and node health, the standby Availability Zone, number of nodes per Availability Zone, and shard count per node |
describe_domain_nodes | Returns information about domain and nodes, including data nodes, master nodes, ultrawarm nodes, Availability Zone(s), standby nodes, node configurations, and node states |
describe_domains | Returns domain configuration information about the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domains |
describe_dry_run_progress | Describes the progress of a pre-update dry run analysis on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
describe_inbound_connections | Lists all the inbound cross-cluster search connections for a destination (remote) Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
describe_instance_type_limits | Describes the instance count, storage, and master node limits for a given OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version and instance type |
describe_outbound_connections | Lists all the outbound cross-cluster connections for a local (source) Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
describe_packages | Describes all packages available to OpenSearch Service |
describe_reserved_instance_offerings | Describes the available Amazon OpenSearch Service Reserved Instance offerings for a given Region |
describe_reserved_instances | Describes the Amazon OpenSearch Service instances that you have reserved in a given Region |
describe_vpc_endpoints | Describes one or more Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints |
dissociate_package | Removes a package from the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
dissociate_packages | Dissociates multiple packages from a domain simulatneously |
get_application | Check the configuration and status of an existing OpenSearch Application |
get_compatible_versions | Returns a map of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch versions and the versions you can upgrade them to |
get_data_source | Retrieves information about a direct query data source |
get_direct_query_data_source | Returns detailed configuration information for a specific direct query data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service |
get_domain_maintenance_status | The status of the maintenance action |
get_package_version_history | Returns a list of Amazon OpenSearch Service package versions, along with their creation time, commit message, and plugin properties (if the package is a zip plugin package) |
get_upgrade_history | Retrieves the complete history of the last 10 upgrades performed on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
get_upgrade_status | Returns the most recent status of the last upgrade or upgrade eligibility check performed on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
list_applications | List all OpenSearch Applications under your account |
list_data_sources | Lists direct-query data sources for a specific domain |
list_direct_query_data_sources | Lists an inventory of all the direct query data sources that you have configured within Amazon OpenSearch Service |
list_domain_maintenances | A list of maintenance actions for the domain |
list_domain_names | Returns the names of all Amazon OpenSearch Service domains owned by the current user in the active Region |
list_domains_for_package | Lists all Amazon OpenSearch Service domains associated with a given package |
list_instance_type_details | Lists all instance types and available features for a given OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version |
list_packages_for_domain | Lists all packages associated with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
list_scheduled_actions | Retrieves a list of configuration changes that are scheduled for a domain |
list_tags | Returns all resource tags for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application |
list_versions | Lists all versions of OpenSearch and Elasticsearch that Amazon OpenSearch Service supports |
list_vpc_endpoint_access | Retrieves information about each Amazon Web Services principal that is allowed to access a given Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint |
list_vpc_endpoints | Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints in the current Amazon Web Services account and Region |
list_vpc_endpoints_for_domain | Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints associated with a particular domain |
purchase_reserved_instance_offering | Allows you to purchase Amazon OpenSearch Service Reserved Instances |
reject_inbound_connection | Allows the remote Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to reject an inbound cross-cluster connection request |
remove_tags | Removes the specified set of tags from an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application |
revoke_vpc_endpoint_access | Revokes access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain that was provided through an interface VPC endpoint |
start_domain_maintenance | Starts the node maintenance process on the data node |
start_service_software_update | Schedules a service software update for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
update_application | Update the OpenSearch Application |
update_data_source | Updates a direct-query data source |
update_direct_query_data_source | Updates the configuration or properties of an existing direct query data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service |
update_domain_config | Modifies the cluster configuration of the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain |
update_package | Updates a package for use with Amazon OpenSearch Service domains |
update_package_scope | Updates the scope of a package |
update_scheduled_action | Reschedules a planned domain configuration change for a later time |
update_vpc_endpoint | Modifies an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint |
upgrade_domain | Allows you to either upgrade your Amazon OpenSearch Service domain or perform an upgrade eligibility check to a compatible version of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- opensearchservice()
svc$accept_inbound_connection(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Allows the destination Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to accept an inbound cross-cluster search connection request
Description
Allows the destination Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to accept an inbound cross-cluster search connection request. For more information, see Cross-cluster search for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_accept_inbound_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_accept_inbound_connection(ConnectionId)
Arguments
ConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the inbound connection to accept. |
Creates a new direct-query data source to the specified domain
Description
Creates a new direct-query data source to the specified domain. For more information, see Creating Amazon OpenSearch Service data source integrations with Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_add_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_add_data_source(
DomainName,
Name,
DataSourceType,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain to add the data source to. |
Name |
[required] A name for the data source. |
DataSourceType |
[required] The type of data source. |
Description |
A description of the data source. |
Adds a new data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service so that you can perform direct queries on external data
Description
Adds a new data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service so that you can perform direct queries on external data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_add_direct_query_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_add_direct_query_data_source(
DataSourceName,
DataSourceType,
Description = NULL,
OpenSearchArns,
TagList = NULL
)
Arguments
DataSourceName |
[required] A unique, user-defined label to identify the data source within your OpenSearch Service environment. |
DataSourceType |
[required] The supported Amazon Web Services service that you want to use as the source for direct queries in OpenSearch Service. |
Description |
An optional text field for providing additional context and details about the data source. |
OpenSearchArns |
[required] A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the OpenSearch collections that are associated with the direct query data source. |
TagList |
Attaches tags to an existing Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application
Description
Attaches tags to an existing Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_add_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_add_tags(ARN, TagList)
Arguments
ARN |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application to which you want to attach resource tags. |
TagList |
[required] List of resource tags. |
Associates a package with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Associates a package with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_associate_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_associate_package(
PackageID,
DomainName,
PrerequisitePackageIDList = NULL,
AssociationConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Internal ID of the package to associate with a domain. Use
|
DomainName |
[required] Name of the domain to associate the package with. |
PrerequisitePackageIDList |
A list of package IDs that must be associated with the domain before the package specified in the request can be associated. |
AssociationConfiguration |
The configuration for associating a package with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. |
Operation in the Amazon OpenSearch Service API for associating multiple packages with a domain simultaneously
Description
Operation in the Amazon OpenSearch Service API for associating multiple packages with a domain simultaneously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_associate_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_associate_packages(PackageList, DomainName)
Arguments
PackageList |
[required] A list of packages and their prerequisites to be associated with a domain. |
DomainName |
[required] |
Provides access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint
Description
Provides access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_authorize_vpc_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_authorize_vpc_endpoint_access(
DomainName,
Account = NULL,
Service = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Service domain to provide access to. |
Account |
The Amazon Web Services account ID to grant access to. |
Service |
The Amazon Web Services service SP to grant access to. |
Cancels a pending configuration change on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Cancels a pending configuration change on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_cancel_domain_config_change/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_cancel_domain_config_change(DomainName, DryRun = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] |
DryRun |
When set to |
Cancels a scheduled service software update for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Cancels a scheduled service software update for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. You can only perform this operation before the AutomatedUpdateDate
and when the domain's UpdateStatus
is PENDING_UPDATE
. For more information, see Service software updates in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_cancel_service_software_update/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_cancel_service_software_update(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the OpenSearch Service domain that you want to cancel the service software update on. |
Creates an OpenSearch Application
Description
Creates an OpenSearch Application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_create_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_create_application(
clientToken = NULL,
name,
dataSources = NULL,
iamIdentityCenterOptions = NULL,
appConfigs = NULL,
tagList = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A unique client idempotency token. It will be auto generated if not provided. |
name |
[required] Name of the OpenSearch Appication to create. Application names are unique across the applications owned by an account within an Amazon Web Services Region. |
dataSources |
Data sources to be associated with the OpenSearch Application. |
iamIdentityCenterOptions |
Settings of IAM Identity Center for the OpenSearch Application. |
appConfigs |
Configurations of the OpenSearch Application, inlcuding admin configuration. |
tagList |
Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Creating and managing Amazon OpenSearch Service domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_create_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_create_domain(
DomainName,
EngineVersion = NULL,
ClusterConfig = NULL,
EBSOptions = NULL,
AccessPolicies = NULL,
IPAddressType = NULL,
SnapshotOptions = NULL,
VPCOptions = NULL,
CognitoOptions = NULL,
EncryptionAtRestOptions = NULL,
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions = NULL,
AdvancedOptions = NULL,
LogPublishingOptions = NULL,
DomainEndpointOptions = NULL,
AdvancedSecurityOptions = NULL,
IdentityCenterOptions = NULL,
TagList = NULL,
AutoTuneOptions = NULL,
OffPeakWindowOptions = NULL,
SoftwareUpdateOptions = NULL,
AIMLOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the OpenSearch Service domain to create. Domain names are unique across the domains owned by an account within an Amazon Web Services Region. |
EngineVersion |
String of format Elasticsearch_X.Y or OpenSearch_X.Y to specify the
engine version for the OpenSearch Service domain. For example,
|
ClusterConfig |
Container for the cluster configuration of a domain. |
EBSOptions |
Container for the parameters required to enable EBS-based storage for an OpenSearch Service domain. |
AccessPolicies |
Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy document specifying the access policies for the new domain. |
IPAddressType |
Specify either dual stack or IPv4 as your IP address type. Dual stack allows you to share domain resources across IPv4 and IPv6 address types, and is the recommended option. If you set your IP address type to dual stack, you can't change your address type later. |
SnapshotOptions |
DEPRECATED. Container for the parameters required to configure automated snapshots of domain indexes. |
VPCOptions |
Container for the values required to configure VPC access domains. If you don't specify these values, OpenSearch Service creates the domain with a public endpoint. For more information, see Launching your Amazon OpenSearch Service domains using a VPC. |
CognitoOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure Amazon Cognito authentication. For more information, see Configuring Amazon Cognito authentication for OpenSearch Dashboards. |
EncryptionAtRestOptions |
Key-value pairs to enable encryption at rest. |
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions |
Enables node-to-node encryption. |
AdvancedOptions |
Key-value pairs to specify advanced configuration options. The following key-value pairs are supported:
For more information, see Advanced cluster parameters. |
LogPublishingOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure log publishing. |
DomainEndpointOptions |
Additional options for the domain endpoint, such as whether to require HTTPS for all traffic. |
AdvancedSecurityOptions |
Options for fine-grained access control. |
IdentityCenterOptions |
Options for IAM Identity Center Option control for the domain. |
TagList |
List of tags to add to the domain upon creation. |
AutoTuneOptions |
Options for Auto-Tune. |
OffPeakWindowOptions |
Specifies a daily 10-hour time block during which OpenSearch Service can perform configuration changes on the domain, including service software updates and Auto-Tune enhancements that require a blue/green deployment. If no options are specified, the default start time of 10:00 P.M. local time (for the Region that the domain is created in) is used. |
SoftwareUpdateOptions |
Software update options for the domain. |
AIMLOptions |
Options for all machine learning features for the specified domain. |
Creates a new cross-cluster search connection from a source Amazon OpenSearch Service domain to a destination domain
Description
Creates a new cross-cluster search connection from a source Amazon OpenSearch Service domain to a destination domain. For more information, see Cross-cluster search for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_create_outbound_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_create_outbound_connection(
LocalDomainInfo,
RemoteDomainInfo,
ConnectionAlias,
ConnectionMode = NULL,
ConnectionProperties = NULL
)
Arguments
LocalDomainInfo |
[required] Name and Region of the source (local) domain. |
RemoteDomainInfo |
[required] Name and Region of the destination (remote) domain. |
ConnectionAlias |
[required] Name of the connection. |
ConnectionMode |
The connection mode. |
ConnectionProperties |
The |
Creates a package for use with Amazon OpenSearch Service domains
Description
Creates a package for use with Amazon OpenSearch Service domains. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_create_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_create_package(
PackageName,
PackageType,
PackageDescription = NULL,
PackageSource,
PackageConfiguration = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
PackageVendingOptions = NULL,
PackageEncryptionOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageName |
[required] Unique name for the package. |
PackageType |
[required] The type of package. |
PackageDescription |
Description of the package. |
PackageSource |
[required] The Amazon S3 location from which to import the package. |
PackageConfiguration |
The configuration parameters for the package being created. |
EngineVersion |
The version of the Amazon OpenSearch Service engine for which is
compatible with the package. This can only be specified for package type
|
PackageVendingOptions |
The vending options for the package being created. They determine if the package can be vended to other users. |
PackageEncryptionOptions |
The encryption parameters for the package being created. |
Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoint
Description
Creates an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_create_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_create_vpc_endpoint(
DomainArn,
VpcOptions,
ClientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the domain to create the endpoint for. |
VpcOptions |
[required] Options to specify the subnets and security groups for the endpoint. |
ClientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes an existing OpenSearch Application
Description
Deletes an existing OpenSearch Application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_application(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] Unique identifier for the OpenSearch Application that you want to delete. |
Deletes a direct-query data source
Description
Deletes a direct-query data source. For more information, see Deleting an Amazon OpenSearch Service data source with Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_data_source(DomainName, Name)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Name |
[required] The name of the data source to delete. |
Deletes a previously configured direct query data source from Amazon OpenSearch Service
Description
Deletes a previously configured direct query data source from Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_direct_query_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_direct_query_data_source(DataSourceName)
Arguments
DataSourceName |
[required] A unique, user-defined label to identify the data source within your OpenSearch Service environment. |
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain and all of its data
Description
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain and all of its data. You can't recover a domain after you delete it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain you want to permanently delete. |
Allows the destination Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to delete an existing inbound cross-cluster search connection
Description
Allows the destination Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to delete an existing inbound cross-cluster search connection. For more information, see Cross-cluster search for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_inbound_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_inbound_connection(ConnectionId)
Arguments
ConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the inbound connection to permanently delete. |
Allows the source Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to delete an existing outbound cross-cluster search connection
Description
Allows the source Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to delete an existing outbound cross-cluster search connection. For more information, see Cross-cluster search for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_outbound_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_outbound_connection(ConnectionId)
Arguments
ConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the outbound connection you want to permanently delete. |
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service package
Description
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service package. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_package(PackageID)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] The internal ID of the package you want to delete. Use
|
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint
Description
Deletes an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_delete_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_delete_vpc_endpoint(VpcEndpointId)
Arguments
VpcEndpointId |
[required] The unique identifier of the endpoint. |
Describes the domain configuration for the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, including the domain ID, domain service endpoint, and domain ARN
Description
Describes the domain configuration for the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, including the domain ID, domain service endpoint, and domain ARN.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain that you want information about. |
Returns the list of optimizations that Auto-Tune has made to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Returns the list of optimizations that Auto-Tune has made to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Auto-Tune for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domain_auto_tunes/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domain_auto_tunes(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the domain that you want Auto-Tune details about. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Returns information about the current blue/green deployment happening on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Returns information about the current blue/green deployment happening on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Making configuration changes in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domain_change_progress/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domain_change_progress(DomainName, ChangeId = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain to get progress information for. |
ChangeId |
The specific change ID for which you want to get progress information. If omitted, the request returns information about the most recent configuration change. |
Returns the configuration of an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Returns the configuration of an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domain_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domain_config(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the OpenSearch Service domain configuration that you want to describe. |
Returns information about domain and node health, the standby Availability Zone, number of nodes per Availability Zone, and shard count per node
Description
Returns information about domain and node health, the standby Availability Zone, number of nodes per Availability Zone, and shard count per node.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domain_health/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domain_health(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Returns information about domain and nodes, including data nodes, master nodes, ultrawarm nodes, Availability Zone(s), standby nodes, node configurations, and node states
Description
Returns information about domain and nodes, including data nodes, master nodes, ultrawarm nodes, Availability Zone(s), standby nodes, node configurations, and node states.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domain_nodes/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domain_nodes(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Returns domain configuration information about the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domains
Description
Returns domain configuration information about the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domains.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_domains/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_domains(DomainNames)
Arguments
DomainNames |
[required] Array of OpenSearch Service domain names that you want information about. You must specify at least one domain name. |
Describes the progress of a pre-update dry run analysis on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Describes the progress of a pre-update dry run analysis on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Determining whether a change will cause a blue/green deployment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_dry_run_progress/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_dry_run_progress(
DomainName,
DryRunId = NULL,
LoadDryRunConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
DryRunId |
The unique identifier of the dry run. |
LoadDryRunConfig |
Whether to include the configuration of the dry run in the response. The configuration specifies the updates that you're planning to make on the domain. |
Lists all the inbound cross-cluster search connections for a destination (remote) Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Lists all the inbound cross-cluster search connections for a destination (remote) Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Cross-cluster search for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_inbound_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_inbound_connections(
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
A list of filters used to match properties for inbound cross-cluster connections. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Describes the instance count, storage, and master node limits for a given OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version and instance type
Description
Describes the instance count, storage, and master node limits for a given OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version and instance type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_instance_type_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_instance_type_limits(
DomainName = NULL,
InstanceType,
EngineVersion
)
Arguments
DomainName |
The name of the domain. Only specify if you need the limits for an existing domain. |
InstanceType |
[required] The OpenSearch Service instance type for which you need limit information. |
EngineVersion |
[required] Version of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch, in the format Elasticsearch_X.Y or OpenSearch_X.Y. Defaults to the latest version of OpenSearch. |
Lists all the outbound cross-cluster connections for a local (source) Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Lists all the outbound cross-cluster connections for a local (source) Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Cross-cluster search for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_outbound_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_outbound_connections(
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
List of filter names and values that you can use for requests. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Describes all packages available to OpenSearch Service
Description
Describes all packages available to OpenSearch Service. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_packages(
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Filters |
Only returns packages that match the |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial |
Describes the available Amazon OpenSearch Service Reserved Instance offerings for a given Region
Description
Describes the available Amazon OpenSearch Service Reserved Instance offerings for a given Region. For more information, see Reserved Instances in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_reserved_instance_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_reserved_instance_offerings(
ReservedInstanceOfferingId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedInstanceOfferingId |
The Reserved Instance identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available instance types that match the specified reservation identifier. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Describes the Amazon OpenSearch Service instances that you have reserved in a given Region
Description
Describes the Amazon OpenSearch Service instances that you have reserved in a given Region. For more information, see Reserved Instances in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_reserved_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_reserved_instances(
ReservedInstanceId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedInstanceId |
The reserved instance identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reserved OpenSearch instance ID. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Describes one or more Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints
Description
Describes one or more Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_describe_vpc_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_describe_vpc_endpoints(VpcEndpointIds)
Arguments
VpcEndpointIds |
[required] The unique identifiers of the endpoints to get information about. |
Removes a package from the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Removes a package from the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. The package can't be in use with any OpenSearch index for the dissociation to succeed. The package is still available in OpenSearch Service for association later. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_dissociate_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_dissociate_package(PackageID, DomainName)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] Internal ID of the package to dissociate from the domain. Use
|
DomainName |
[required] Name of the domain to dissociate the package from. |
Dissociates multiple packages from a domain simulatneously
Description
Dissociates multiple packages from a domain simulatneously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_dissociate_packages/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_dissociate_packages(PackageList, DomainName)
Arguments
PackageList |
[required] A list of package IDs to be dissociated from a domain. |
DomainName |
[required] |
Check the configuration and status of an existing OpenSearch Application
Description
Check the configuration and status of an existing OpenSearch Application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_application(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] Unique identifier of the checked OpenSearch Application. |
Returns a map of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch versions and the versions you can upgrade them to
Description
Returns a map of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch versions and the versions you can upgrade them to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_compatible_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_compatible_versions(DomainName = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
The name of an existing domain. Provide this parameter to limit the results to a single domain. |
Retrieves information about a direct query data source
Description
Retrieves information about a direct query data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_data_source(DomainName, Name)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Name |
[required] The name of the data source to get information about. |
Returns detailed configuration information for a specific direct query data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service
Description
Returns detailed configuration information for a specific direct query data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_direct_query_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_direct_query_data_source(DataSourceName)
Arguments
DataSourceName |
[required] A unique, user-defined label that identifies the data source within your OpenSearch Service environment. |
The status of the maintenance action
Description
The status of the maintenance action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_domain_maintenance_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_domain_maintenance_status(DomainName, MaintenanceId)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
MaintenanceId |
[required] The request ID of the maintenance action. |
Returns a list of Amazon OpenSearch Service package versions, along with their creation time, commit message, and plugin properties (if the package is a zip plugin package)
Description
Returns a list of Amazon OpenSearch Service package versions, along with their creation time, commit message, and plugin properties (if the package is a zip plugin package). For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_package_version_history/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_package_version_history(
PackageID,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] The unique identifier of the package. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Retrieves the complete history of the last 10 upgrades performed on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Retrieves the complete history of the last 10 upgrades performed on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_upgrade_history/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_upgrade_history(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of an existing domain. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Returns the most recent status of the last upgrade or upgrade eligibility check performed on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Returns the most recent status of the last upgrade or upgrade eligibility check performed on an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_get_upgrade_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_get_upgrade_status(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The domain of the domain to get upgrade status information for. |
List all OpenSearch Applications under your account
Description
List all OpenSearch Applications under your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_applications/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_applications(
nextToken = NULL,
statuses = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
nextToken |
|
statuses |
OpenSearch Application Status can be used as filters for the listing
request. Possible values are |
maxResults |
Lists direct-query data sources for a specific domain
Description
Lists direct-query data sources for a specific domain. For more information, see For more information, see Working with Amazon OpenSearch Service direct queries with Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_data_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_data_sources(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Lists an inventory of all the direct query data sources that you have configured within Amazon OpenSearch Service
Description
Lists an inventory of all the direct query data sources that you have configured within Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_direct_query_data_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_direct_query_data_sources(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
A list of maintenance actions for the domain
Description
A list of maintenance actions for the domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_domain_maintenances/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_domain_maintenances(
DomainName,
Action = NULL,
Status = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Action |
The name of the action. |
Status |
The status of the action. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Returns the names of all Amazon OpenSearch Service domains owned by the current user in the active Region
Description
Returns the names of all Amazon OpenSearch Service domains owned by the current user in the active Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_domain_names/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_domain_names(EngineType = NULL)
Arguments
EngineType |
Filters the output by domain engine type. |
Lists all Amazon OpenSearch Service domains associated with a given package
Description
Lists all Amazon OpenSearch Service domains associated with a given package. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_domains_for_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_domains_for_package(
PackageID,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] The unique identifier of the package for which to list associated domains. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Lists all instance types and available features for a given OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version
Description
Lists all instance types and available features for a given OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_instance_type_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_instance_type_details(
EngineVersion,
DomainName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
RetrieveAZs = NULL,
InstanceType = NULL
)
Arguments
EngineVersion |
[required] The version of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch, in the format Elasticsearch_X.Y or OpenSearch_X.Y. Defaults to the latest version of OpenSearch. |
DomainName |
The name of the domain. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
RetrieveAZs |
An optional parameter that specifies the Availability Zones for the domain. |
InstanceType |
An optional parameter that lists information for a given instance type. |
Lists all packages associated with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Lists all packages associated with an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_packages_for_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_packages_for_domain(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain for which you want to list associated packages. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Retrieves a list of configuration changes that are scheduled for a domain
Description
Retrieves a list of configuration changes that are scheduled for a domain. These changes can be service software updates or blue/green Auto-Tune enhancements.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_scheduled_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_scheduled_actions(
DomainName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Returns all resource tags for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application
Description
Returns all resource tags for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Service resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_tags(ARN)
Arguments
ARN |
[required] Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the domain, data source, or application to view tags for. |
Lists all versions of OpenSearch and Elasticsearch that Amazon OpenSearch Service supports
Description
Lists all versions of OpenSearch and Elasticsearch that Amazon OpenSearch Service supports.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_versions(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
NextToken |
If your initial |
Retrieves information about each Amazon Web Services principal that is allowed to access a given Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint
Description
Retrieves information about each Amazon Web Services principal that is allowed to access a given Amazon OpenSearch Service domain through the use of an interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_vpc_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_vpc_endpoint_access(DomainName, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Service domain to retrieve access information for. |
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints in the current Amazon Web Services account and Region
Description
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints in the current Amazon Web Services account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints(NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
If your initial
|
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints associated with a particular domain
Description
Retrieves all Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed VPC endpoints associated with a particular domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints_for_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_list_vpc_endpoints_for_domain(DomainName, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain to list associated VPC endpoints for. |
NextToken |
If your initial |
Allows you to purchase Amazon OpenSearch Service Reserved Instances
Description
Allows you to purchase Amazon OpenSearch Service Reserved Instances.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_purchase_reserved_instance_offering/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_purchase_reserved_instance_offering(
ReservedInstanceOfferingId,
ReservationName,
InstanceCount = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedInstanceOfferingId |
[required] The ID of the Reserved Instance offering to purchase. |
ReservationName |
[required] A customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. |
InstanceCount |
The number of OpenSearch instances to reserve. |
Allows the remote Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to reject an inbound cross-cluster connection request
Description
Allows the remote Amazon OpenSearch Service domain owner to reject an inbound cross-cluster connection request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_reject_inbound_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_reject_inbound_connection(ConnectionId)
Arguments
ConnectionId |
[required] The unique identifier of the inbound connection to reject. |
Removes the specified set of tags from an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application
Description
Removes the specified set of tags from an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain, data source, or application. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Service resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_remove_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_remove_tags(ARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the domain, data source, or application from which you want to delete the specified tags. |
TagKeys |
[required] The list of tag keys to remove from the domain, data source, or application. |
Revokes access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain that was provided through an interface VPC endpoint
Description
Revokes access to an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain that was provided through an interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_revoke_vpc_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_revoke_vpc_endpoint_access(
DomainName,
Account = NULL,
Service = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the OpenSearch Service domain. |
Account |
The account ID to revoke access from. |
Service |
The service SP to revoke access from. |
Starts the node maintenance process on the data node
Description
Starts the node maintenance process on the data node. These processes can include a node reboot, an Opensearch or Elasticsearch process restart, or a Dashboard or Kibana restart.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_start_domain_maintenance/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_start_domain_maintenance(DomainName, Action, NodeId = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Action |
[required] The name of the action. |
NodeId |
The ID of the data node. |
Schedules a service software update for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Schedules a service software update for an Amazon OpenSearch Service domain. For more information, see Service software updates in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_start_service_software_update/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_start_service_software_update(
DomainName,
ScheduleAt = NULL,
DesiredStartTime = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain that you want to update to the latest service software. |
ScheduleAt |
When to start the service software update.
Default: |
DesiredStartTime |
The Epoch timestamp when you want the service software update to start.
You only need to specify this parameter if you set |
Update the OpenSearch Application
Description
Update the OpenSearch Application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_application(id, dataSources = NULL, appConfigs = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] Unique identifier of the OpenSearch Application to be updated. |
dataSources |
Data sources to be associated with the OpenSearch Application. |
appConfigs |
Configurations to be changed for the OpenSearch Application. |
Updates a direct-query data source
Description
Updates a direct-query data source. For more information, see Working with Amazon OpenSearch Service data source integrations with Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_data_source(
DomainName,
Name,
DataSourceType,
Description = NULL,
Status = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain. |
Name |
[required] The name of the data source to modify. |
DataSourceType |
[required] The type of data source. |
Description |
A new description of the data source. |
Status |
The status of the data source update. |
Updates the configuration or properties of an existing direct query data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service
Description
Updates the configuration or properties of an existing direct query data source in Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_direct_query_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_direct_query_data_source(
DataSourceName,
DataSourceType,
Description = NULL,
OpenSearchArns
)
Arguments
DataSourceName |
[required] A unique, user-defined label to identify the data source within your OpenSearch Service environment. |
DataSourceType |
[required] The supported Amazon Web Services service that you want to use as the source for direct queries in OpenSearch Service. |
Description |
An optional text field for providing additional context and details about the data source. |
OpenSearchArns |
[required] A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the OpenSearch collections that are associated with the direct query data source. |
Modifies the cluster configuration of the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain
Description
Modifies the cluster configuration of the specified Amazon OpenSearch Service domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_domain_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_domain_config(
DomainName,
ClusterConfig = NULL,
EBSOptions = NULL,
SnapshotOptions = NULL,
VPCOptions = NULL,
CognitoOptions = NULL,
AdvancedOptions = NULL,
AccessPolicies = NULL,
IPAddressType = NULL,
LogPublishingOptions = NULL,
EncryptionAtRestOptions = NULL,
DomainEndpointOptions = NULL,
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions = NULL,
AdvancedSecurityOptions = NULL,
IdentityCenterOptions = NULL,
AutoTuneOptions = NULL,
DryRun = NULL,
DryRunMode = NULL,
OffPeakWindowOptions = NULL,
SoftwareUpdateOptions = NULL,
AIMLOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain that you're updating. |
ClusterConfig |
Changes that you want to make to the cluster configuration, such as the instance type and number of EC2 instances. |
EBSOptions |
The type and size of the EBS volume to attach to instances in the domain. |
SnapshotOptions |
Option to set the time, in UTC format, for the daily automated snapshot.
Default value is |
VPCOptions |
Options to specify the subnets and security groups for a VPC endpoint. For more information, see Launching your Amazon OpenSearch Service domains using a VPC. |
CognitoOptions |
Key-value pairs to configure Amazon Cognito authentication for OpenSearch Dashboards. |
AdvancedOptions |
Key-value pairs to specify advanced configuration options. The following key-value pairs are supported:
For more information, see Advanced cluster parameters. |
AccessPolicies |
Identity and Access Management (IAM) access policy as a JSON-formatted string. |
IPAddressType |
Specify either dual stack or IPv4 as your IP address type. Dual stack allows you to share domain resources across IPv4 and IPv6 address types, and is the recommended option. If your IP address type is currently set to dual stack, you can't change it. |
LogPublishingOptions |
Options to publish OpenSearch logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. |
EncryptionAtRestOptions |
Encryption at rest options for the domain. |
DomainEndpointOptions |
Additional options for the domain endpoint, such as whether to require HTTPS for all traffic. |
NodeToNodeEncryptionOptions |
Node-to-node encryption options for the domain. |
AdvancedSecurityOptions |
Options for fine-grained access control. |
IdentityCenterOptions |
|
AutoTuneOptions |
Options for Auto-Tune. |
DryRun |
This flag, when set to True, specifies whether the |
DryRunMode |
The type of dry run to perform.
|
OffPeakWindowOptions |
Off-peak window options for the domain. |
SoftwareUpdateOptions |
Service software update options for the domain. |
AIMLOptions |
Options for all machine learning features for the specified domain. |
Updates a package for use with Amazon OpenSearch Service domains
Description
Updates a package for use with Amazon OpenSearch Service domains. For more information, see Custom packages for Amazon OpenSearch Service.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_package/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_package(
PackageID,
PackageSource,
PackageDescription = NULL,
CommitMessage = NULL,
PackageConfiguration = NULL,
PackageEncryptionOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] The unique identifier for the package. |
PackageSource |
[required] Amazon S3 bucket and key for the package. |
PackageDescription |
A new description of the package. |
CommitMessage |
Commit message for the updated file, which is shown as part of
|
PackageConfiguration |
The updated configuration details for a package. |
PackageEncryptionOptions |
Encryption options for a package. |
Updates the scope of a package
Description
Updates the scope of a package. Scope of the package defines users who can view and associate a package.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_package_scope/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_package_scope(PackageID, Operation, PackageUserList)
Arguments
PackageID |
[required] ID of the package whose scope is being updated. |
Operation |
[required] The operation to perform on the package scope (e.g., add/remove/override users). |
PackageUserList |
[required] List of users to be added or removed from the package scope. |
Reschedules a planned domain configuration change for a later time
Description
Reschedules a planned domain configuration change for a later time. This change can be a scheduled service software update or a blue/green Auto-Tune enhancement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_scheduled_action(
DomainName,
ActionID,
ActionType,
ScheduleAt,
DesiredStartTime = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain to reschedule an action for. |
ActionID |
[required] The unique identifier of the action to reschedule. To retrieve this ID,
send a
|
ActionType |
[required] The type of action to reschedule. Can be one of
|
ScheduleAt |
[required] When to schedule the action.
|
DesiredStartTime |
The time to implement the change, in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Only specify this parameter if you set |
Modifies an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint
Description
Modifies an Amazon OpenSearch Service-managed interface VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_update_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_update_vpc_endpoint(VpcEndpointId, VpcOptions)
Arguments
VpcEndpointId |
[required] The unique identifier of the endpoint. |
VpcOptions |
[required] The security groups and/or subnets to add, remove, or modify. |
Allows you to either upgrade your Amazon OpenSearch Service domain or perform an upgrade eligibility check to a compatible version of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch
Description
Allows you to either upgrade your Amazon OpenSearch Service domain or perform an upgrade eligibility check to a compatible version of OpenSearch or Elasticsearch.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchservice_upgrade_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchservice_upgrade_domain(
DomainName,
TargetVersion,
PerformCheckOnly = NULL,
AdvancedOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] Name of the OpenSearch Service domain that you want to upgrade. |
TargetVersion |
[required] OpenSearch or Elasticsearch version to which you want to upgrade, in the format Opensearch_X.Y or Elasticsearch_X.Y. |
PerformCheckOnly |
When true, indicates that an upgrade eligibility check needs to be performed. Does not actually perform the upgrade. |
AdvancedOptions |
Only supports the |
OpenSearch Service Serverless
Description
Use the Amazon OpenSearch Serverless API to create, configure, and manage OpenSearch Serverless collections and security policies.
OpenSearch Serverless is an on-demand, pre-provisioned serverless configuration for Amazon OpenSearch Service. OpenSearch Serverless removes the operational complexities of provisioning, configuring, and tuning your OpenSearch clusters. It enables you to easily search and analyze petabytes of data without having to worry about the underlying infrastructure and data management.
To learn more about OpenSearch Serverless, see What is Amazon OpenSearch Serverless?
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- opensearchserviceserverless( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_get_collection | Returns attributes for one or more collections, including the collection endpoint and the OpenSearch Dashboards endpoint |
batch_get_effective_lifecycle_policy | Returns a list of successful and failed retrievals for the OpenSearch Serverless indexes |
batch_get_lifecycle_policy | Returns one or more configured OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policies |
batch_get_vpc_endpoint | Returns attributes for one or more VPC endpoints associated with the current account |
create_access_policy | Creates a data access policy for OpenSearch Serverless |
create_collection | Creates a new OpenSearch Serverless collection |
create_lifecycle_policy | Creates a lifecyle policy to be applied to OpenSearch Serverless indexes |
create_security_config | Specifies a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless |
create_security_policy | Creates a security policy to be used by one or more OpenSearch Serverless collections |
create_vpc_endpoint | Creates an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface VPC endpoint |
delete_access_policy | Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless access policy |
delete_collection | Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless collection |
delete_lifecycle_policy | Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policy |
delete_security_config | Deletes a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless |
delete_security_policy | Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless security policy |
delete_vpc_endpoint | Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface endpoint |
get_access_policy | Returns an OpenSearch Serverless access policy |
get_account_settings | Returns account-level settings related to OpenSearch Serverless |
get_policies_stats | Returns statistical information about your OpenSearch Serverless access policies, security configurations, and security policies |
get_security_config | Returns information about an OpenSearch Serverless security configuration |
get_security_policy | Returns information about a configured OpenSearch Serverless security policy |
list_access_policies | Returns information about a list of OpenSearch Serverless access policies |
list_collections | Lists all OpenSearch Serverless collections |
list_lifecycle_policies | Returns a list of OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policies |
list_security_configs | Returns information about configured OpenSearch Serverless security configurations |
list_security_policies | Returns information about configured OpenSearch Serverless security policies |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns the tags for an OpenSearch Serverless resource |
list_vpc_endpoints | Returns the OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface VPC endpoints associated with the current account |
tag_resource | Associates tags with an OpenSearch Serverless resource |
untag_resource | Removes a tag or set of tags from an OpenSearch Serverless resource |
update_access_policy | Updates an OpenSearch Serverless access policy |
update_account_settings | Update the OpenSearch Serverless settings for the current Amazon Web Services account |
update_collection | Updates an OpenSearch Serverless collection |
update_lifecycle_policy | Updates an OpenSearch Serverless access policy |
update_security_config | Updates a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless |
update_security_policy | Updates an OpenSearch Serverless security policy |
update_vpc_endpoint | Updates an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface endpoint |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- opensearchserviceserverless()
svc$batch_get_collection(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Returns attributes for one or more collections, including the collection endpoint and the OpenSearch Dashboards endpoint
Description
Returns attributes for one or more collections, including the collection endpoint and the OpenSearch Dashboards endpoint. For more information, see Creating and managing Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_collection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_collection(ids = NULL, names = NULL)
Arguments
ids |
A list of collection IDs. You can't provide names and IDs in the same
request. The ID is part of the collection endpoint. You can also
retrieve it using the
|
names |
A list of collection names. You can't provide names and IDs in the same request. |
Returns a list of successful and failed retrievals for the OpenSearch Serverless indexes
Description
Returns a list of successful and failed retrievals for the OpenSearch Serverless indexes. For more information, see Viewing data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_effective_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_effective_lifecycle_policy(
resourceIdentifiers
)
Arguments
resourceIdentifiers |
[required] The unique identifiers of policy types and resource names. |
Returns one or more configured OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policies
Description
Returns one or more configured OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policies. For more information, see Viewing data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_lifecycle_policy(identifiers)
Arguments
identifiers |
[required] The unique identifiers of policy types and policy names. |
Returns attributes for one or more VPC endpoints associated with the current account
Description
Returns attributes for one or more VPC endpoints associated with the current account. For more information, see Access Amazon OpenSearch Serverless using an interface endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_batch_get_vpc_endpoint(ids)
Arguments
ids |
[required] A list of VPC endpoint identifiers. |
Creates a data access policy for OpenSearch Serverless
Description
Creates a data access policy for OpenSearch Serverless. Access policies limit access to collections and the resources within them, and allow a user to access that data irrespective of the access mechanism or network source. For more information, see Data access control for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_create_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_create_access_policy(
type,
name,
description = NULL,
policy,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy. |
description |
A description of the policy. Typically used to store information about the permissions defined in the policy. |
policy |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the policy. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Creates a new OpenSearch Serverless collection
Description
Creates a new OpenSearch Serverless collection. For more information, see Creating and managing Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_create_collection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_create_collection(
name,
type = NULL,
description = NULL,
tags = NULL,
standbyReplicas = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] Name of the collection. |
type |
The type of collection. |
description |
Description of the collection. |
tags |
An arbitrary set of tags (key–value pairs) to associate with the OpenSearch Serverless collection. |
standbyReplicas |
Indicates whether standby replicas should be used for a collection. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Creates a lifecyle policy to be applied to OpenSearch Serverless indexes
Description
Creates a lifecyle policy to be applied to OpenSearch Serverless indexes. Lifecycle policies define the number of days or hours to retain the data on an OpenSearch Serverless index. For more information, see Creating data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_create_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_create_lifecycle_policy(
type,
name,
description = NULL,
policy,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of lifecycle policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the lifecycle policy. |
description |
A description of the lifecycle policy. |
policy |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the lifecycle policy. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Specifies a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless
Description
Specifies a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless. For more information, see SAML authentication for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_create_security_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_create_security_config(
type,
name,
description = NULL,
samlOptions = NULL,
iamIdentityCenterOptions = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of security configuration. |
name |
[required] The name of the security configuration. |
description |
A description of the security configuration. |
samlOptions |
Describes SAML options in in the form of a key-value map. This field is
required if you specify |
iamIdentityCenterOptions |
Describes IAM Identity Center options in the form of a key-value map. This field is required if you specify iamidentitycenter for the type parameter. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Creates a security policy to be used by one or more OpenSearch Serverless collections
Description
Creates a security policy to be used by one or more OpenSearch Serverless collections. Security policies provide access to a collection and its OpenSearch Dashboards endpoint from public networks or specific VPC endpoints. They also allow you to secure a collection with a KMS encryption key. For more information, see Network access for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless and Encryption at rest for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_create_security_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_create_security_policy(
type,
name,
description = NULL,
policy,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of security policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy. |
description |
A description of the policy. Typically used to store information about the permissions defined in the policy. |
policy |
[required] The JSON policy document to use as the content for the new policy. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Creates an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface VPC endpoint
Description
Creates an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface VPC endpoint. For more information, see Access Amazon OpenSearch Serverless using an interface endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_create_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_create_vpc_endpoint(
name,
vpcId,
subnetIds,
securityGroupIds = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the interface endpoint. |
vpcId |
[required] The ID of the VPC from which you'll access OpenSearch Serverless. |
subnetIds |
[required] The ID of one or more subnets from which you'll access OpenSearch Serverless. |
securityGroupIds |
The unique identifiers of the security groups that define the ports, protocols, and sources for inbound traffic that you are authorizing into your endpoint. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless access policy
Description
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless access policy. For more information, see Data access control for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_delete_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_delete_access_policy(
type,
name,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy to delete. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless collection
Description
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless collection. For more information, see Creating and managing Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_delete_collection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_delete_collection(id, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the collection. For example, |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policy
Description
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policy. For more information, see Deleting data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_delete_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_delete_lifecycle_policy(
type,
name,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of lifecycle policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy to delete. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless
Description
Deletes a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless. For more information, see SAML authentication for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_delete_security_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_delete_security_config(id, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The security configuration identifier. For SAML the ID will be
|
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless security policy
Description
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless security policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_delete_security_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_delete_security_policy(
type,
name,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy to delete. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface endpoint
Description
Deletes an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface endpoint. For more information, see Access Amazon OpenSearch Serverless using an interface endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_delete_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_delete_vpc_endpoint(id, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The VPC endpoint identifier. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Returns an OpenSearch Serverless access policy
Description
Returns an OpenSearch Serverless access policy. For more information, see Data access control for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_get_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_get_access_policy(type, name)
Arguments
type |
[required] Tye type of policy. Currently, the only supported value is |
name |
[required] The name of the access policy. |
Returns account-level settings related to OpenSearch Serverless
Description
Returns account-level settings related to OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_get_account_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_get_account_settings()
Returns statistical information about your OpenSearch Serverless access policies, security configurations, and security policies
Description
Returns statistical information about your OpenSearch Serverless access policies, security configurations, and security policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_get_policies_stats/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_get_policies_stats()
Returns information about an OpenSearch Serverless security configuration
Description
Returns information about an OpenSearch Serverless security configuration. For more information, see SAML authentication for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_get_security_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_get_security_config(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the security configuration. |
Returns information about a configured OpenSearch Serverless security policy
Description
Returns information about a configured OpenSearch Serverless security policy. For more information, see Network access for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless and Encryption at rest for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_get_security_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_get_security_policy(type, name)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of security policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the security policy. |
Returns information about a list of OpenSearch Serverless access policies
Description
Returns information about a list of OpenSearch Serverless access policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_access_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_access_policies(
type,
resource = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of access policy. |
resource |
Resource filters (can be collections or indexes) that policies can apply to. |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
Lists all OpenSearch Serverless collections
Description
Lists all OpenSearch Serverless collections. For more information, see Creating and managing Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_collections/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_collections(
collectionFilters = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
collectionFilters |
A list of filter names and values that you can use for requests. |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. Default is 20. You can use
|
Returns a list of OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policies
Description
Returns a list of OpenSearch Serverless lifecycle policies. For more information, see Viewing data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_lifecycle_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_lifecycle_policies(
type,
resources = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of lifecycle policy. |
resources |
Resource filters that policies can apply to. Currently, the only
supported resource type is |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use use |
Returns information about configured OpenSearch Serverless security configurations
Description
Returns information about configured OpenSearch Serverless security configurations. For more information, see SAML authentication for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_security_configs/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_security_configs(
type,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of security configuration. |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
Returns information about configured OpenSearch Serverless security policies
Description
Returns information about configured OpenSearch Serverless security policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_security_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_security_policies(
type,
resource = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of policy. |
resource |
Resource filters (can be collection or indexes) that policies can apply to. |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
Returns the tags for an OpenSearch Serverless resource
Description
Returns the tags for an OpenSearch Serverless resource. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. The resource must be
active (not in the |
Returns the OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface VPC endpoints associated with the current account
Description
Returns the OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface VPC endpoints associated with the current account. For more information, see Access Amazon OpenSearch Serverless using an interface endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_list_vpc_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_list_vpc_endpoints(
vpcEndpointFilters = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
vpcEndpointFilters |
Filter the results according to the current status of the VPC endpoint.
Possible statuses are |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
Associates tags with an OpenSearch Serverless resource
Description
Associates tags with an OpenSearch Serverless resource. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. The resource must be
active (not in the |
tags |
[required] A list of tags (key-value pairs) to add to the resource. All tag keys in the request must be unique. |
Removes a tag or set of tags from an OpenSearch Serverless resource
Description
Removes a tag or set of tags from an OpenSearch Serverless resource. For more information, see Tagging Amazon OpenSearch Serverless collections.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to remove tags from. The
resource must be active (not in the |
tagKeys |
[required] The tag or set of tags to remove from the resource. All tag keys in the request must be unique. |
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless access policy
Description
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless access policy. For more information, see Data access control for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_access_policy(
type,
name,
policyVersion,
description = NULL,
policy = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy. |
policyVersion |
[required] The version of the policy being updated. |
description |
A description of the policy. Typically used to store information about the permissions defined in the policy. |
policy |
The JSON policy document to use as the content for the policy. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Update the OpenSearch Serverless settings for the current Amazon Web Services account
Description
Update the OpenSearch Serverless settings for the current Amazon Web Services account. For more information, see Managing capacity limits for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_account_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_account_settings(capacityLimits = NULL)
Arguments
capacityLimits |
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless collection
Description
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless collection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_collection/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_collection(
id,
description = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the collection. |
description |
A description of the collection. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless access policy
Description
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless access policy. For more information, see Updating data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_lifecycle_policy(
type,
name,
policyVersion,
description = NULL,
policy = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of lifecycle policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy. |
policyVersion |
[required] The version of the policy being updated. |
description |
A description of the lifecycle policy. |
policy |
The JSON policy document to use as the content for the lifecycle policy. |
clientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Updates a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless
Description
Updates a security configuration for OpenSearch Serverless. For more information, see SAML authentication for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_security_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_security_config(
id,
configVersion,
description = NULL,
samlOptions = NULL,
iamIdentityCenterOptionsUpdates = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The security configuration identifier. For SAML the ID will be
|
configVersion |
[required] The version of the security configuration to be updated. You can find
the most recent version of a security configuration using the
|
description |
A description of the security configuration. |
samlOptions |
SAML options in in the form of a key-value map. |
iamIdentityCenterOptionsUpdates |
Describes IAM Identity Center options in the form of a key-value map. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless security policy
Description
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless security policy. For more information, see Network access for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless and Encryption at rest for Amazon OpenSearch Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_security_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_security_policy(
type,
name,
policyVersion,
description = NULL,
policy = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
[required] The type of access policy. |
name |
[required] The name of the policy. |
policyVersion |
[required] The version of the policy being updated. |
description |
A description of the policy. Typically used to store information about the permissions defined in the policy. |
policy |
The JSON policy document to use as the content for the new policy. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface endpoint
Description
Updates an OpenSearch Serverless-managed interface endpoint. For more information, see Access Amazon OpenSearch Serverless using an interface endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/opensearchserviceserverless_update_vpc_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
opensearchserviceserverless_update_vpc_endpoint(
id,
addSubnetIds = NULL,
removeSubnetIds = NULL,
addSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
removeSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the interface endpoint to update. |
addSubnetIds |
The ID of one or more subnets to add to the endpoint. |
removeSubnetIds |
The unique identifiers of the subnets to remove from the endpoint. |
addSecurityGroupIds |
The unique identifiers of the security groups to add to the endpoint. Security groups define the ports, protocols, and sources for inbound traffic that you are authorizing into your endpoint. |
removeSecurityGroupIds |
The unique identifiers of the security groups to remove from the endpoint. |
clientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive identifier to ensure idempotency of the request. |
Amazon QuickSight
Description
Amazon QuickSight API Reference
Amazon QuickSight is a fully managed, serverless business intelligence service for the Amazon Web Services Cloud that makes it easy to extend data and insights to every user in your organization. This API reference contains documentation for a programming interface that you can use to manage Amazon QuickSight.
Usage
quicksight(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- quicksight( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_create_topic_reviewed_answer | Creates new reviewed answers for a Q Topic |
batch_delete_topic_reviewed_answer | Deletes reviewed answers for Q Topic |
cancel_ingestion | Cancels an ongoing ingestion of data into SPICE |
create_account_customization | Creates Amazon QuickSight customizations for the current Amazon Web Services Region |
create_account_subscription | Creates an Amazon QuickSight account, or subscribes to Amazon QuickSight Q |
create_analysis | Creates an analysis in Amazon QuickSight |
create_brand | Creates an Amazon QuickSight brand |
create_custom_permissions | Creates a custom permissions profile |
create_dashboard | Creates a dashboard from either a template or directly with a DashboardDefinition |
create_data_set | Creates a dataset |
create_data_source | Creates a data source |
create_folder | Creates an empty shared folder |
create_folder_membership | Adds an asset, such as a dashboard, analysis, or dataset into a folder |
create_group | Use the CreateGroup operation to create a group in Amazon QuickSight |
create_group_membership | Adds an Amazon QuickSight user to an Amazon QuickSight group |
create_iam_policy_assignment | Creates an assignment with one specified IAM policy, identified by its Amazon Resource Name (ARN) |
create_ingestion | Creates and starts a new SPICE ingestion for a dataset |
create_namespace | (Enterprise edition only) Creates a new namespace for you to use with Amazon QuickSight |
create_refresh_schedule | Creates a refresh schedule for a dataset |
create_role_membership | Use CreateRoleMembership to add an existing Amazon QuickSight group to an existing role |
create_template | Creates a template either from a TemplateDefinition or from an existing Amazon QuickSight analysis or template |
create_template_alias | Creates a template alias for a template |
create_theme | Creates a theme |
create_theme_alias | Creates a theme alias for a theme |
create_topic | Creates a new Q topic |
create_topic_refresh_schedule | Creates a topic refresh schedule |
create_vpc_connection | Creates a new VPC connection |
delete_account_customization | Deletes all Amazon QuickSight customizations in this Amazon Web Services Region for the specified Amazon Web Services account and Amazon QuickSight namespace |
delete_account_subscription | Use the DeleteAccountSubscription operation to delete an Amazon QuickSight account |
delete_analysis | Deletes an analysis from Amazon QuickSight |
delete_brand | Deletes an Amazon QuickSight brand |
delete_brand_assignment | Deletes a brand assignment |
delete_custom_permissions | Deletes a custom permissions profile |
delete_dashboard | Deletes a dashboard |
delete_data_set | Deletes a dataset |
delete_data_set_refresh_properties | Deletes the dataset refresh properties of the dataset |
delete_data_source | Deletes the data source permanently |
delete_default_q_business_application | Deletes a linked Amazon Q Business application from an Amazon QuickSight account |
delete_folder | Deletes an empty folder |
delete_folder_membership | Removes an asset, such as a dashboard, analysis, or dataset, from a folder |
delete_group | Removes a user group from Amazon QuickSight |
delete_group_membership | Removes a user from a group so that the user is no longer a member of the group |
delete_iam_policy_assignment | Deletes an existing IAM policy assignment |
delete_identity_propagation_config | Deletes all access scopes and authorized targets that are associated with a service from the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application |
delete_namespace | Deletes a namespace and the users and groups that are associated with the namespace |
delete_refresh_schedule | Deletes a refresh schedule from a dataset |
delete_role_custom_permission | Removes custom permissions from the role |
delete_role_membership | Removes a group from a role |
delete_template | Deletes a template |
delete_template_alias | Deletes the item that the specified template alias points to |
delete_theme | Deletes a theme |
delete_theme_alias | Deletes the version of the theme that the specified theme alias points to |
delete_topic | Deletes a topic |
delete_topic_refresh_schedule | Deletes a topic refresh schedule |
delete_user | Deletes the Amazon QuickSight user that is associated with the identity of the IAM user or role that's making the call |
delete_user_by_principal_id | Deletes a user identified by its principal ID |
delete_user_custom_permission | Deletes a custom permissions profile from a user |
delete_vpc_connection | Deletes a VPC connection |
describe_account_customization | Describes the customizations associated with the provided Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Amazon QuickSight namespace in an Amazon Web Services Region |
describe_account_settings | Describes the settings that were used when your Amazon QuickSight subscription was first created in this Amazon Web Services account |
describe_account_subscription | Use the DescribeAccountSubscription operation to receive a description of an Amazon QuickSight account's subscription |
describe_analysis | Provides a summary of the metadata for an analysis |
describe_analysis_definition | Provides a detailed description of the definition of an analysis |
describe_analysis_permissions | Provides the read and write permissions for an analysis |
describe_asset_bundle_export_job | Describes an existing export job |
describe_asset_bundle_import_job | Describes an existing import job |
describe_brand | Describes a brand |
describe_brand_assignment | Describes a brand assignment |
describe_brand_published_version | Describes the published version of the brand |
describe_custom_permissions | Describes a custom permissions profile |
describe_dashboard | Provides a summary for a dashboard |
describe_dashboard_definition | Provides a detailed description of the definition of a dashboard |
describe_dashboard_permissions | Describes read and write permissions for a dashboard |
describe_dashboard_snapshot_job | Describes an existing snapshot job |
describe_dashboard_snapshot_job_result | Describes the result of an existing snapshot job that has finished running |
describe_dashboards_qa_configuration | Describes an existing dashboard QA configuration |
describe_data_set | Describes a dataset |
describe_data_set_permissions | Describes the permissions on a dataset |
describe_data_set_refresh_properties | Describes the refresh properties of a dataset |
describe_data_source | Describes a data source |
describe_data_source_permissions | Describes the resource permissions for a data source |
describe_default_q_business_application | Describes a Amazon Q Business application that is linked to an Amazon QuickSight account |
describe_folder | Describes a folder |
describe_folder_permissions | Describes permissions for a folder |
describe_folder_resolved_permissions | Describes the folder resolved permissions |
describe_group | Returns an Amazon QuickSight group's description and Amazon Resource Name (ARN) |
describe_group_membership | Use the DescribeGroupMembership operation to determine if a user is a member of the specified group |
describe_iam_policy_assignment | Describes an existing IAM policy assignment, as specified by the assignment name |
describe_ingestion | Describes a SPICE ingestion |
describe_ip_restriction | Provides a summary and status of IP rules |
describe_key_registration | Describes all customer managed key registrations in a Amazon QuickSight account |
describe_namespace | Describes the current namespace |
describe_q_personalization_configuration | Describes a personalization configuration |
describe_quick_sight_q_search_configuration | Describes the state of a Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration |
describe_refresh_schedule | Provides a summary of a refresh schedule |
describe_role_custom_permission | Describes all custom permissions that are mapped to a role |
describe_template | Describes a template's metadata |
describe_template_alias | Describes the template alias for a template |
describe_template_definition | Provides a detailed description of the definition of a template |
describe_template_permissions | Describes read and write permissions on a template |
describe_theme | Describes a theme |
describe_theme_alias | Describes the alias for a theme |
describe_theme_permissions | Describes the read and write permissions for a theme |
describe_topic | Describes a topic |
describe_topic_permissions | Describes the permissions of a topic |
describe_topic_refresh | Describes the status of a topic refresh |
describe_topic_refresh_schedule | Deletes a topic refresh schedule |
describe_user | Returns information about a user, given the user name |
describe_vpc_connection | Describes a VPC connection |
generate_embed_url_for_anonymous_user | Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight dashboard or visual in your website, without having to register any reader users |
generate_embed_url_for_registered_user | Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight experience in your website |
generate_embed_url_for_registered_user_with_identity | Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight experience in your website |
get_dashboard_embed_url | Generates a temporary session URL and authorization code(bearer token) that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight read-only dashboard in your website or application |
get_session_embed_url | Generates a session URL and authorization code that you can use to embed the Amazon Amazon QuickSight console in your web server code |
list_analyses | Lists Amazon QuickSight analyses that exist in the specified Amazon Web Services account |
list_asset_bundle_export_jobs | Lists all asset bundle export jobs that have been taken place in the last 14 days |
list_asset_bundle_import_jobs | Lists all asset bundle import jobs that have taken place in the last 14 days |
list_brands | Lists all brands in an Amazon QuickSight account |
list_custom_permissions | Returns a list of all the custom permissions profiles |
list_dashboards | Lists dashboards in an Amazon Web Services account |
list_dashboard_versions | Lists all the versions of the dashboards in the Amazon QuickSight subscription |
list_data_sets | Lists all of the datasets belonging to the current Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region |
list_data_sources | Lists data sources in current Amazon Web Services Region that belong to this Amazon Web Services account |
list_folder_members | List all assets (DASHBOARD, ANALYSIS, and DATASET) in a folder |
list_folders | Lists all folders in an account |
list_folders_for_resource | List all folders that a resource is a member of |
list_group_memberships | Lists member users in a group |
list_groups | Lists all user groups in Amazon QuickSight |
list_iam_policy_assignments | Lists the IAM policy assignments in the current Amazon QuickSight account |
list_iam_policy_assignments_for_user | Lists all of the IAM policy assignments, including the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), for the IAM policies assigned to the specified user and group, or groups that the user belongs to |
list_identity_propagation_configs | Lists all services and authorized targets that the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application can access |
list_ingestions | Lists the history of SPICE ingestions for a dataset |
list_namespaces | Lists the namespaces for the specified Amazon Web Services account |
list_refresh_schedules | Lists the refresh schedules of a dataset |
list_role_memberships | Lists all groups that are associated with a role |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags assigned to a resource |
list_template_aliases | Lists all the aliases of a template |
list_templates | Lists all the templates in the current Amazon QuickSight account |
list_template_versions | Lists all the versions of the templates in the current Amazon QuickSight account |
list_theme_aliases | Lists all the aliases of a theme |
list_themes | Lists all the themes in the current Amazon Web Services account |
list_theme_versions | Lists all the versions of the themes in the current Amazon Web Services account |
list_topic_refresh_schedules | Lists all of the refresh schedules for a topic |
list_topic_reviewed_answers | Lists all reviewed answers for a Q Topic |
list_topics | Lists all of the topics within an account |
list_user_groups | Lists the Amazon QuickSight groups that an Amazon QuickSight user is a member of |
list_users | Returns a list of all of the Amazon QuickSight users belonging to this account |
list_vpc_connections | Lists all of the VPC connections in the current set Amazon Web Services Region of an Amazon Web Services account |
predict_qa_results | Predicts existing visuals or generates new visuals to answer a given query |
put_data_set_refresh_properties | Creates or updates the dataset refresh properties for the dataset |
register_user | Creates an Amazon QuickSight user whose identity is associated with the Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity or role specified in the request |
restore_analysis | Restores an analysis |
search_analyses | Searches for analyses that belong to the user specified in the filter |
search_dashboards | Searches for dashboards that belong to a user |
search_data_sets | Use the SearchDataSets operation to search for datasets that belong to an account |
search_data_sources | Use the SearchDataSources operation to search for data sources that belong to an account |
search_folders | Searches the subfolders in a folder |
search_groups | Use the SearchGroups operation to search groups in a specified Amazon QuickSight namespace using the supplied filters |
search_topics | Searches for any Q topic that exists in an Amazon QuickSight account |
start_asset_bundle_export_job | Starts an Asset Bundle export job |
start_asset_bundle_import_job | Starts an Asset Bundle import job |
start_dashboard_snapshot_job | Starts an asynchronous job that generates a snapshot of a dashboard's output |
start_dashboard_snapshot_job_schedule | Starts an asynchronous job that runs an existing dashboard schedule and sends the dashboard snapshot through email |
tag_resource | Assigns one or more tags (key-value pairs) to the specified Amazon QuickSight resource |
untag_resource | Removes a tag or tags from a resource |
update_account_customization | Updates Amazon QuickSight customizations for the current Amazon Web Services Region |
update_account_settings | Updates the Amazon QuickSight settings in your Amazon Web Services account |
update_analysis | Updates an analysis in Amazon QuickSight |
update_analysis_permissions | Updates the read and write permissions for an analysis |
update_application_with_token_exchange_grant | Updates an Amazon QuickSight application with a token exchange grant |
update_brand | Updates a brand |
update_brand_assignment | Updates a brand assignment |
update_brand_published_version | Updates the published version of a brand |
update_custom_permissions | Updates a custom permissions profile |
update_dashboard | Updates a dashboard in an Amazon Web Services account |
update_dashboard_links | Updates the linked analyses on a dashboard |
update_dashboard_permissions | Updates read and write permissions on a dashboard |
update_dashboard_published_version | Updates the published version of a dashboard |
update_dashboards_qa_configuration | Updates a Dashboard QA configuration |
update_data_set | Updates a dataset |
update_data_set_permissions | Updates the permissions on a dataset |
update_data_source | Updates a data source |
update_data_source_permissions | Updates the permissions to a data source |
update_default_q_business_application | Updates a Amazon Q Business application that is linked to a Amazon QuickSight account |
update_folder | Updates the name of a folder |
update_folder_permissions | Updates permissions of a folder |
update_group | Changes a group description |
update_iam_policy_assignment | Updates an existing IAM policy assignment |
update_identity_propagation_config | Adds or updates services and authorized targets to configure what the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application can access |
update_ip_restriction | Updates the content and status of IP rules |
update_key_registration | Updates a customer managed key in a Amazon QuickSight account |
update_public_sharing_settings | Use the UpdatePublicSharingSettings operation to turn on or turn off the public sharing settings of an Amazon QuickSight dashboard |
update_q_personalization_configuration | Updates a personalization configuration |
update_quick_sight_q_search_configuration | Updates the state of a Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration |
update_refresh_schedule | Updates a refresh schedule for a dataset |
update_role_custom_permission | Updates the custom permissions that are associated with a role |
update_spice_capacity_configuration | Updates the SPICE capacity configuration for a Amazon QuickSight account |
update_template | Updates a template from an existing Amazon QuickSight analysis or another template |
update_template_alias | Updates the template alias of a template |
update_template_permissions | Updates the resource permissions for a template |
update_theme | Updates a theme |
update_theme_alias | Updates an alias of a theme |
update_theme_permissions | Updates the resource permissions for a theme |
update_topic | Updates a topic |
update_topic_permissions | Updates the permissions of a topic |
update_topic_refresh_schedule | Updates a topic refresh schedule |
update_user | Updates an Amazon QuickSight user |
update_user_custom_permission | Updates a custom permissions profile for a user |
update_vpc_connection | Updates a VPC connection |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- quicksight()
svc$batch_create_topic_reviewed_answer(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates new reviewed answers for a Q Topic
Description
Creates new reviewed answers for a Q Topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_batch_create_topic_reviewed_answer/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_batch_create_topic_reviewed_answer(AwsAccountId, TopicId, Answers)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a reviewed answer in. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID for the topic reviewed answer that you want to create. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Answers |
[required] The definition of the Answers to be created. |
Deletes reviewed answers for Q Topic
Description
Deletes reviewed answers for Q Topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_batch_delete_topic_reviewed_answer/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_batch_delete_topic_reviewed_answer(
AwsAccountId,
TopicId,
AnswerIds = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to delete a reviewed answers in. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID for the topic reviewed answer that you want to delete. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
AnswerIds |
The Answer IDs of the Answers to be deleted. |
Cancels an ongoing ingestion of data into SPICE
Description
Cancels an ongoing ingestion of data into SPICE.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_cancel_ingestion/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_cancel_ingestion(AwsAccountId, DataSetId, IngestionId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset used in the ingestion. |
IngestionId |
[required] An ID for the ingestion. |
Creates Amazon QuickSight customizations for the current Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Creates Amazon QuickSight customizations for the current Amazon Web Services Region. Currently, you can add a custom default theme by using the create_account_customization
or update_account_customization
API operation. To further customize Amazon QuickSight by removing Amazon QuickSight sample assets and videos for all new users, see Customizing Amazon QuickSight in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_account_customization/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_account_customization(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace = NULL,
AccountCustomization,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to customize Amazon QuickSight for. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that you want to add customizations to. |
AccountCustomization |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight customizations you're adding in the current Amazon Web Services Region. You can add these to an Amazon Web Services account and a QuickSight namespace. For example, you can add a default theme by setting
|
Tags |
A list of the tags that you want to attach to this resource. |
Creates an Amazon QuickSight account, or subscribes to Amazon QuickSight Q
Description
Creates an Amazon QuickSight account, or subscribes to Amazon QuickSight Q.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_account_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_account_subscription(
Edition = NULL,
AuthenticationMethod,
AwsAccountId,
AccountName,
NotificationEmail,
ActiveDirectoryName = NULL,
Realm = NULL,
DirectoryId = NULL,
AdminGroup = NULL,
AuthorGroup = NULL,
ReaderGroup = NULL,
AdminProGroup = NULL,
AuthorProGroup = NULL,
ReaderProGroup = NULL,
FirstName = NULL,
LastName = NULL,
EmailAddress = NULL,
ContactNumber = NULL,
IAMIdentityCenterInstanceArn = NULL
)
Arguments
Edition |
The edition of Amazon QuickSight that you want your account to have.
Currently, you can choose from If you choose
|
AuthenticationMethod |
[required] The method that you want to use to authenticate your Amazon QuickSight account. If you choose If you choose |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account that you're using to create your Amazon QuickSight account. |
AccountName |
[required] The name of your Amazon QuickSight account. This name is unique over all
of Amazon Web Services, and it appears only when users sign in. You
can't change |
NotificationEmail |
[required] The email address that you want Amazon QuickSight to send notifications to regarding your Amazon QuickSight account or Amazon QuickSight subscription. |
ActiveDirectoryName |
The name of your Active Directory. This field is required if
|
Realm |
The realm of the Active Directory that is associated with your Amazon
QuickSight account. This field is required if |
DirectoryId |
The ID of the Active Directory that is associated with your Amazon QuickSight account. |
AdminGroup |
The admin group associated with your Active Directory or IAM Identity
Center account. Either this field or the For more information about using IAM Identity Center in Amazon QuickSight, see Using IAM Identity Center with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. For more information about using Active Directory in Amazon QuickSight, see Using Active Directory with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
AuthorGroup |
The author group associated with your Active Directory or IAM Identity Center account. For more information about using IAM Identity Center in Amazon QuickSight, see Using IAM Identity Center with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. For more information about using Active Directory in Amazon QuickSight, see Using Active Directory with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
ReaderGroup |
The reader group associated with your Active Directory or IAM Identity Center account. For more information about using IAM Identity Center in Amazon QuickSight, see Using IAM Identity Center with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. For more information about using Active Directory in Amazon QuickSight, see Using Active Directory with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
AdminProGroup |
The admin pro group associated with your Active Directory or IAM
Identity Center account. Either this field or the For more information about using IAM Identity Center in Amazon QuickSight, see Using IAM Identity Center with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. For more information about using Active Directory in Amazon QuickSight, see Using Active Directory with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
AuthorProGroup |
The author pro group associated with your Active Directory or IAM Identity Center account. For more information about using IAM Identity Center in Amazon QuickSight, see Using IAM Identity Center with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. For more information about using Active Directory in Amazon QuickSight, see Using Active Directory with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
ReaderProGroup |
The reader pro group associated with your Active Directory or IAM Identity Center account. For more information about using IAM Identity Center in Amazon QuickSight, see Using IAM Identity Center with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. For more information about using Active Directory in Amazon QuickSight, see Using Active Directory with Amazon QuickSight Enterprise Edition in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
FirstName |
The first name of the author of the Amazon QuickSight account to use for
future communications. This field is required if |
LastName |
The last name of the author of the Amazon QuickSight account to use for
future communications. This field is required if |
EmailAddress |
The email address of the author of the Amazon QuickSight account to use
for future communications. This field is required if |
ContactNumber |
A 10-digit phone number for the author of the Amazon QuickSight account
to use for future communications. This field is required if
|
IAMIdentityCenterInstanceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM Identity Center instance. |
Creates an analysis in Amazon QuickSight
Description
Creates an analysis in Amazon QuickSight. Analyses can be created either from a template or from an AnalysisDefinition
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_analysis/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_analysis(
AwsAccountId,
AnalysisId,
Name,
Parameters = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
SourceEntity = NULL,
ThemeArn = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
Definition = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL,
FolderArns = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account where you are creating an analysis. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID for the analysis that you're creating. This ID displays in the URL of the analysis. |
Name |
[required] A descriptive name for the analysis that you're creating. This name displays for the analysis in the Amazon QuickSight console. |
Parameters |
The parameter names and override values that you want to use. An analysis can have any parameter type, and some parameters might accept multiple values. |
Permissions |
A structure that describes the principals and the resource-level
permissions on an analysis. You can use the To specify no permissions, omit |
SourceEntity |
A source entity to use for the analysis that you're creating. This metadata structure contains details that describe a source template and one or more datasets. Either a |
ThemeArn |
The ARN for the theme to apply to the analysis that you're creating. To see the theme in the Amazon QuickSight console, make sure that you have access to it. |
Tags |
Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the analysis. |
Definition |
The definition of an analysis. A definition is the data model of all features in a Dashboard, Template, or Analysis. Either a |
ValidationStrategy |
The option to relax the validation needed to create an analysis with definition objects. This skips the validation step for specific errors. |
FolderArns |
When you create the analysis, Amazon QuickSight adds the analysis to these folders. |
Creates an Amazon QuickSight brand
Description
Creates an Amazon QuickSight brand.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_brand/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_brand(
AwsAccountId,
BrandId,
BrandDefinition = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand. |
BrandId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight brand. |
BrandDefinition |
The definition of the brand. |
Tags |
A map of the key-value pairs that are assigned to the brand. |
Creates a custom permissions profile
Description
Creates a custom permissions profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_custom_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_custom_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
CustomPermissionsName,
Capabilities = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create the custom permissions profile in. |
CustomPermissionsName |
[required] The name of the custom permissions profile that you want to create. |
Capabilities |
A set of actions to include in the custom permissions profile. |
Tags |
The tags to associate with the custom permissions profile. |
Creates a dashboard from either a template or directly with a DashboardDefinition
Description
Creates a dashboard from either a template or directly with a DashboardDefinition
. To first create a template, see the create_template
API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_dashboard/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_dashboard(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
Name,
Parameters = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
SourceEntity = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
VersionDescription = NULL,
DashboardPublishOptions = NULL,
ThemeArn = NULL,
Definition = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL,
FolderArns = NULL,
LinkSharingConfiguration = NULL,
LinkEntities = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account where you want to create the dashboard. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard, also added to the IAM policy. |
Name |
[required] The display name of the dashboard. |
Parameters |
The parameters for the creation of the dashboard, which you want to use to override the default settings. A dashboard can have any type of parameters, and some parameters might accept multiple values. |
Permissions |
A structure that contains the permissions of the dashboard. You can use this structure for granting permissions by providing a list of IAM action information for each principal ARN. To specify no permissions, omit the permissions list. |
SourceEntity |
The entity that you are using as a source when you create the dashboard.
In Use the Either a |
Tags |
Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the dashboard. |
VersionDescription |
A description for the first version of the dashboard being created. |
DashboardPublishOptions |
Options for publishing the dashboard when you create it:
|
ThemeArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the theme that is being used for this dashboard. If you add a value for this field, it overrides the value that is used in the source entity. The theme ARN must exist in the same Amazon Web Services account where you create the dashboard. |
Definition |
The definition of a dashboard. A definition is the data model of all features in a Dashboard, Template, or Analysis. Either a |
ValidationStrategy |
The option to relax the validation needed to create a dashboard with definition objects. This option skips the validation step for specific errors. |
FolderArns |
When you create the dashboard, Amazon QuickSight adds the dashboard to these folders. |
LinkSharingConfiguration |
A structure that contains the permissions of a shareable link to the dashboard. |
LinkEntities |
A list of analysis Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) to be linked to the dashboard. |
Creates a dataset
Description
Creates a dataset. This operation doesn't support datasets that include uploaded files as a source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_data_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_data_set(
AwsAccountId,
DataSetId,
Name,
PhysicalTableMap,
LogicalTableMap = NULL,
ImportMode,
ColumnGroups = NULL,
FieldFolders = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
RowLevelPermissionDataSet = NULL,
RowLevelPermissionTagConfiguration = NULL,
ColumnLevelPermissionRules = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DataSetUsageConfiguration = NULL,
DatasetParameters = NULL,
FolderArns = NULL,
PerformanceConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] An ID for the dataset that you want to create. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] The display name for the dataset. |
PhysicalTableMap |
[required] Declares the physical tables that are available in the underlying data sources. |
LogicalTableMap |
Configures the combination and transformation of the data from the physical tables. |
ImportMode |
[required] Indicates whether you want to import the data into SPICE. |
ColumnGroups |
Groupings of columns that work together in certain Amazon QuickSight features. Currently, only geospatial hierarchy is supported. |
FieldFolders |
The folder that contains fields and nested subfolders for your dataset. |
Permissions |
A list of resource permissions on the dataset. |
RowLevelPermissionDataSet |
The row-level security configuration for the data that you want to create. |
RowLevelPermissionTagConfiguration |
The configuration of tags on a dataset to set row-level security. Row-level security tags are currently supported for anonymous embedding only. |
ColumnLevelPermissionRules |
A set of one or more definitions of a |
Tags |
Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the dataset. |
DataSetUsageConfiguration |
|
DatasetParameters |
The parameter declarations of the dataset. |
FolderArns |
When you create the dataset, Amazon QuickSight adds the dataset to these folders. |
PerformanceConfiguration |
The configuration for the performance optimization of the dataset that
contains a |
Creates a data source
Description
Creates a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_data_source(
AwsAccountId,
DataSourceId,
Name,
Type,
DataSourceParameters = NULL,
Credentials = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
VpcConnectionProperties = NULL,
SslProperties = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
FolderArns = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSourceId |
[required] An ID for the data source. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] A display name for the data source. |
Type |
[required] The type of the data source. To return a list of all data sources, use
Use |
DataSourceParameters |
The parameters that Amazon QuickSight uses to connect to your underlying source. |
Credentials |
The credentials Amazon QuickSight that uses to connect to your underlying source. Currently, only credentials based on user name and password are supported. |
Permissions |
A list of resource permissions on the data source. |
VpcConnectionProperties |
Use this parameter only when you want Amazon QuickSight to use a VPC connection when connecting to your underlying source. |
SslProperties |
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) properties that apply when Amazon QuickSight connects to your underlying source. |
Tags |
Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the data source. |
FolderArns |
When you create the data source, Amazon QuickSight adds the data source to these folders. |
Creates an empty shared folder
Description
Creates an empty shared folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_folder/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_folder(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
Name = NULL,
FolderType = NULL,
ParentFolderArn = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SharingModel = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account where you want to create the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
Name |
The name of the folder. |
FolderType |
The type of folder. By default, |
ParentFolderArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the parent folder.
|
Permissions |
A structure that describes the principals and the resource-level permissions of a folder. To specify no permissions, omit |
Tags |
Tags for the folder. |
SharingModel |
An optional parameter that determines the sharing scope of the folder.
The default value for this parameter is |
Adds an asset, such as a dashboard, analysis, or dataset into a folder
Description
Adds an asset, such as a dashboard, analysis, or dataset into a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_folder_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_folder_membership(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
MemberId,
MemberType
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
MemberId |
[required] The ID of the asset that you want to add to the folder. |
MemberType |
[required] The member type of the asset that you want to add to a folder. |
Use the CreateGroup operation to create a group in Amazon QuickSight
Description
Use the create_group
operation to create a group in Amazon QuickSight. You can create up to 10,000 groups in a namespace. If you want to create more than 10,000 groups in a namespace, contact Amazon Web Services Support.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_group(GroupName, Description = NULL, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] A name for the group that you want to create. |
Description |
A description for the group that you want to create. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that you want the group to be a part of. |
Adds an Amazon QuickSight user to an Amazon QuickSight group
Description
Adds an Amazon QuickSight user to an Amazon QuickSight group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_group_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_group_membership(
MemberName,
GroupName,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
MemberName |
[required] The name of the user that you want to add to the group membership. |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to add the user to. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that you want the user to be a part of. |
Creates an assignment with one specified IAM policy, identified by its Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
Description
Creates an assignment with one specified IAM policy, identified by its Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This policy assignment is attached to the specified groups or users of Amazon QuickSight. Assignment names are unique per Amazon Web Services account. To avoid overwriting rules in other namespaces, use assignment names that are unique.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_iam_policy_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_iam_policy_assignment(
AwsAccountId,
AssignmentName,
AssignmentStatus,
PolicyArn = NULL,
Identities = NULL,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account where you want to assign an IAM policy to Amazon QuickSight users or groups. |
AssignmentName |
[required] The name of the assignment, also called a rule. The name must be unique within the Amazon Web Services account. |
AssignmentStatus |
[required] The status of the assignment. Possible values are as follows:
|
PolicyArn |
The ARN for the IAM policy to apply to the Amazon QuickSight users and groups specified in this assignment. |
Identities |
The Amazon QuickSight users, groups, or both that you want to assign the policy to. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that contains the assignment. |
Creates and starts a new SPICE ingestion for a dataset
Description
Creates and starts a new SPICE ingestion for a dataset. You can manually refresh datasets in an Enterprise edition account 32 times in a 24-hour period. You can manually refresh datasets in a Standard edition account 8 times in a 24-hour period. Each 24-hour period is measured starting 24 hours before the current date and time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_ingestion/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_ingestion(
DataSetId,
IngestionId,
AwsAccountId,
IngestionType = NULL
)
Arguments
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset used in the ingestion. |
IngestionId |
[required] An ID for the ingestion. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
IngestionType |
The type of ingestion that you want to create. |
(Enterprise edition only) Creates a new namespace for you to use with Amazon QuickSight
Description
(Enterprise edition only) Creates a new namespace for you to use with Amazon QuickSight.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_namespace(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace,
IdentityStore,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create the Amazon QuickSight namespace in. |
Namespace |
[required] The name that you want to use to describe the new namespace. |
IdentityStore |
[required] Specifies the type of your user identity directory. Currently, this
supports users with an identity type of |
Tags |
The tags that you want to associate with the namespace that you're creating. |
Creates a refresh schedule for a dataset
Description
Creates a refresh schedule for a dataset. You can create up to 5 different schedules for a single dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_refresh_schedule(DataSetId, AwsAccountId, Schedule)
Arguments
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Schedule |
[required] The refresh schedule. |
Use CreateRoleMembership to add an existing Amazon QuickSight group to an existing role
Description
Use create_role_membership
to add an existing Amazon QuickSight group to an existing role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_role_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_role_membership(MemberName, AwsAccountId, Namespace, Role)
Arguments
MemberName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to add to the role. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a group in. The Amazon Web Services account ID that you provide must be the same Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that the role belongs to. |
Role |
[required] The role that you want to add a group to. |
Creates a template either from a TemplateDefinition or from an existing Amazon QuickSight analysis or template
Description
Creates a template either from a TemplateDefinition
or from an existing Amazon QuickSight analysis or template. You can use the resulting template to create additional dashboards, templates, or analyses.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_template(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
Name = NULL,
Permissions = NULL,
SourceEntity = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
VersionDescription = NULL,
Definition = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. You use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
TemplateId |
[required] An ID for the template that you want to create. This template is unique per Amazon Web Services Region; in each Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
A display name for the template. |
Permissions |
A list of resource permissions to be set on the template. |
SourceEntity |
The entity that you are using as a source when you create the template.
In Use the Either a |
Tags |
Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the resource. |
VersionDescription |
A description of the current template version being created. This API
operation creates the first version of the template. Every time
|
Definition |
The definition of a template. A definition is the data model of all features in a Dashboard, Template, or Analysis. Either a |
ValidationStrategy |
TThe option to relax the validation needed to create a template with definition objects. This skips the validation step for specific errors. |
Creates a template alias for a template
Description
Creates a template alias for a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_template_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_template_alias(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
AliasName,
TemplateVersionNumber
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template that you creating an alias for. |
TemplateId |
[required] An ID for the template. |
AliasName |
[required] The name that you want to give to the template alias that you're
creating. Don't start the alias name with the |
TemplateVersionNumber |
[required] The version number of the template. |
Creates a theme
Description
Creates a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_theme/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_theme(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
Name,
BaseThemeId,
VersionDescription = NULL,
Configuration,
Permissions = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account where you want to store the new theme. |
ThemeId |
[required] An ID for the theme that you want to create. The theme ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region in each Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] A display name for the theme. |
BaseThemeId |
[required] The ID of the theme that a custom theme will inherit from. All themes
inherit from one of the starting themes defined by Amazon QuickSight.
For a list of the starting themes, use
|
VersionDescription |
A description of the first version of the theme that you're creating.
Every time |
Configuration |
[required] The theme configuration, which contains the theme display properties. |
Permissions |
A valid grouping of resource permissions to apply to the new theme. |
Tags |
A map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags that you want to add to the resource. |
Creates a theme alias for a theme
Description
Creates a theme alias for a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_theme_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_theme_alias(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
AliasName,
ThemeVersionNumber
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme for the new theme alias. |
ThemeId |
[required] An ID for the theme alias. |
AliasName |
[required] The name that you want to give to the theme alias that you are creating.
The alias name can't begin with a |
ThemeVersionNumber |
[required] The version number of the theme. |
Creates a new Q topic
Description
Creates a new Q topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_topic/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_topic(
AwsAccountId,
TopicId,
Topic,
Tags = NULL,
FolderArns = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a topic in. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID for the topic that you want to create. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Topic |
[required] The definition of a topic to create. |
Tags |
Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags that are assigned to the dataset. |
FolderArns |
The Folder ARN of the folder that you want the topic to reside in. |
Creates a topic refresh schedule
Description
Creates a topic refresh schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_topic_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_topic_refresh_schedule(
AwsAccountId,
TopicId,
DatasetArn,
DatasetName = NULL,
RefreshSchedule
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic you're creating a refresh schedule for. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to modify. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
DatasetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the dataset. |
DatasetName |
The name of the dataset. |
RefreshSchedule |
[required] The definition of a refresh schedule. |
Creates a new VPC connection
Description
Creates a new VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_create_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_create_vpc_connection(
AwsAccountId,
VPCConnectionId,
Name,
SubnetIds,
SecurityGroupIds,
DnsResolvers = NULL,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account where you want to create a new VPC connection. |
VPCConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the VPC connection that you're creating. This ID is a unique identifier for each Amazon Web Services Region in an Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] The display name for the VPC connection. |
SubnetIds |
[required] A list of subnet IDs for the VPC connection. |
SecurityGroupIds |
[required] A list of security group IDs for the VPC connection. |
DnsResolvers |
A list of IP addresses of DNS resolver endpoints for the VPC connection. |
RoleArn |
[required] The IAM role to associate with the VPC connection. |
Tags |
A map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the VPC connection. |
Deletes all Amazon QuickSight customizations in this Amazon Web Services Region for the specified Amazon Web Services account and Amazon QuickSight namespace
Description
Deletes all Amazon QuickSight customizations in this Amazon Web Services Region for the specified Amazon Web Services account and Amazon QuickSight namespace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_account_customization/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_account_customization(AwsAccountId, Namespace = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to delete Amazon QuickSight customizations from in this Amazon Web Services Region. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that you're deleting the customizations from. |
Use the DeleteAccountSubscription operation to delete an Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Use the delete_account_subscription
operation to delete an Amazon QuickSight account. This operation will result in an error message if you have configured your account termination protection settings to True
. To change this setting and delete your account, call the update_account_settings
API and set the value of the TerminationProtectionEnabled
parameter to False
, then make another call to the delete_account_subscription
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_account_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_account_subscription(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account that you want to delete. |
Deletes an analysis from Amazon QuickSight
Description
Deletes an analysis from Amazon QuickSight. You can optionally include a recovery window during which you can restore the analysis. If you don't specify a recovery window value, the operation defaults to 30 days. Amazon QuickSight attaches a DeletionTime
stamp to the response that specifies the end of the recovery window. At the end of the recovery window, Amazon QuickSight deletes the analysis permanently.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_analysis/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_analysis(
AwsAccountId,
AnalysisId,
RecoveryWindowInDays = NULL,
ForceDeleteWithoutRecovery = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account where you want to delete an analysis. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID of the analysis that you're deleting. |
RecoveryWindowInDays |
A value that specifies the number of days that Amazon QuickSight waits
before it deletes the analysis. You can't use this parameter with the
|
ForceDeleteWithoutRecovery |
This option defaults to the value |
Deletes an Amazon QuickSight brand
Description
Deletes an Amazon QuickSight brand.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_brand/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_brand(AwsAccountId, BrandId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand. |
BrandId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight brand. |
Deletes a brand assignment
Description
Deletes a brand assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_brand_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_brand_assignment(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand assignment. |
Deletes a custom permissions profile
Description
Deletes a custom permissions profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_custom_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_custom_permissions(AwsAccountId, CustomPermissionsName)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the custom permissions profile that you want to delete. |
CustomPermissionsName |
[required] The name of the custom permissions profile that you want to delete. |
Deletes a dashboard
Description
Deletes a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_dashboard/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_dashboard(AwsAccountId, DashboardId, VersionNumber = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're deleting. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
VersionNumber |
The version number of the dashboard. If the version number property is provided, only the specified version of the dashboard is deleted. |
Deletes a dataset
Description
Deletes a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_data_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_data_set(AwsAccountId, DataSetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID for the dataset that you want to create. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Deletes the dataset refresh properties of the dataset
Description
Deletes the dataset refresh properties of the dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_data_set_refresh_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_data_set_refresh_properties(AwsAccountId, DataSetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
Deletes the data source permanently
Description
Deletes the data source permanently. This operation breaks all the datasets that reference the deleted data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_data_source(AwsAccountId, DataSourceId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSourceId |
[required] The ID of the data source. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Deletes a linked Amazon Q Business application from an Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Deletes a linked Amazon Q Business application from an Amazon QuickSight account
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_default_q_business_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_default_q_business_application(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight account that you want to disconnect from a Amazon Q Business application. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that you want to delete a linked Amazon Q Business application from. If this field is left blank, the Amazon Q Business application is deleted from the default namespace. Currently, the default namespace is the only valid value for this parameter. |
Deletes an empty folder
Description
Deletes an empty folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_folder/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_folder(AwsAccountId, FolderId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
Removes an asset, such as a dashboard, analysis, or dataset, from a folder
Description
Removes an asset, such as a dashboard, analysis, or dataset, from a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_folder_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_folder_membership(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
MemberId,
MemberType
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The Folder ID. |
MemberId |
[required] The ID of the asset that you want to delete. |
MemberType |
[required] The member type of the asset that you want to delete from a folder. |
Removes a user group from Amazon QuickSight
Description
Removes a user group from Amazon QuickSight.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_group(GroupName, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to delete. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the group that you want to delete. |
Removes a user from a group so that the user is no longer a member of the group
Description
Removes a user from a group so that the user is no longer a member of the group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_group_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_group_membership(
MemberName,
GroupName,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
MemberName |
[required] The name of the user that you want to delete from the group membership. |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to delete the user from. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the group that you want to remove a user from. |
Deletes an existing IAM policy assignment
Description
Deletes an existing IAM policy assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_iam_policy_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_iam_policy_assignment(
AwsAccountId,
AssignmentName,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID where you want to delete the IAM policy assignment. |
AssignmentName |
[required] The name of the assignment. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that contains the assignment. |
Deletes all access scopes and authorized targets that are associated with a service from the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application
Description
Deletes all access scopes and authorized targets that are associated with a service from the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_identity_propagation_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_identity_propagation_config(AwsAccountId, Service)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that you want to delete an identity propagation configuration from. |
Service |
[required] The name of the Amazon Web Services service that you want to delete the associated access scopes and authorized targets from. |
Deletes a namespace and the users and groups that are associated with the namespace
Description
Deletes a namespace and the users and groups that are associated with the namespace. This is an asynchronous process. Assets including dashboards, analyses, datasets and data sources are not deleted. To delete these assets, you use the API operations for the relevant asset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_namespace(AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to delete the Amazon QuickSight namespace from. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that you want to delete. |
Deletes a refresh schedule from a dataset
Description
Deletes a refresh schedule from a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_refresh_schedule(DataSetId, AwsAccountId, ScheduleId)
Arguments
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
ScheduleId |
[required] The ID of the refresh schedule. |
Removes custom permissions from the role
Description
Removes custom permissions from the role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_role_custom_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_role_custom_permission(Role, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
Role |
[required] The role that you want to remove permissions from. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that includes the role. |
Removes a group from a role
Description
Removes a group from a role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_role_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_role_membership(MemberName, Role, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
MemberName |
[required] The name of the group. |
Role |
[required] The role that you want to remove permissions from. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a group in. The Amazon Web Services account ID that you provide must be the same Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that contains the role. |
Deletes a template
Description
Deletes a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_template(AwsAccountId, TemplateId, VersionNumber = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template that you're deleting. |
TemplateId |
[required] An ID for the template you want to delete. |
VersionNumber |
Specifies the version of the template that you want to delete. If you
don't provide a version number,
|
Deletes the item that the specified template alias points to
Description
Deletes the item that the specified template alias points to. If you provide a specific alias, you delete the version of the template that the alias points to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_template_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_template_alias(AwsAccountId, TemplateId, AliasName)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the item to delete. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template that the specified alias is for. |
AliasName |
[required] The name for the template alias. To delete a specific alias, you delete
the version that the alias points to. You can specify the alias name, or
specify the latest version of the template by providing the keyword
|
Deletes a theme
Description
Deletes a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_theme/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_theme(AwsAccountId, ThemeId, VersionNumber = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme that you're deleting. |
ThemeId |
[required] An ID for the theme that you want to delete. |
VersionNumber |
The version of the theme that you want to delete. Note: If you don't provide a version number, you're using this call
to |
Deletes the version of the theme that the specified theme alias points to
Description
Deletes the version of the theme that the specified theme alias points to. If you provide a specific alias, you delete the version of the theme that the alias points to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_theme_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_theme_alias(AwsAccountId, ThemeId, AliasName)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme alias to delete. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme that the specified alias is for. |
AliasName |
[required] The unique name for the theme alias to delete. |
Deletes a topic
Description
Deletes a topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_topic/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_topic(AwsAccountId, TopicId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic that you want to delete. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to delete. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Deletes a topic refresh schedule
Description
Deletes a topic refresh schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_topic_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_topic_refresh_schedule(AwsAccountId, TopicId, DatasetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to modify. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
DatasetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
Deletes the Amazon QuickSight user that is associated with the identity of the IAM user or role that's making the call
Description
Deletes the Amazon QuickSight user that is associated with the identity of the IAM user or role that's making the call. The IAM user isn't deleted as a result of this call.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_user(UserName, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user that you want to delete. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
Deletes a user identified by its principal ID
Description
Deletes a user identified by its principal ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_user_by_principal_id/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_user_by_principal_id(PrincipalId, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
PrincipalId |
[required] The principal ID of the user. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
Deletes a custom permissions profile from a user
Description
Deletes a custom permissions profile from a user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_user_custom_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_user_custom_permission(UserName, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The username of the user that you want to remove custom permissions from. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the custom permission configuration that you want to delete. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that the user belongs to. |
Deletes a VPC connection
Description
Deletes a VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_delete_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_delete_vpc_connection(AwsAccountId, VPCConnectionId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account where you want to delete a VPC connection. |
VPCConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the VPC connection that you're creating. This ID is a unique identifier for each Amazon Web Services Region in an Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes the customizations associated with the provided Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Amazon QuickSight namespace in an Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Describes the customizations associated with the provided Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Amazon QuickSight namespace in an Amazon Web Services Region. The Amazon QuickSight console evaluates which customizations to apply by running this API operation with the Resolved
flag included.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_account_customization/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_account_customization(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace = NULL,
Resolved = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to describe Amazon QuickSight customizations for. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that you want to describe Amazon QuickSight customizations for. |
Resolved |
The |
Describes the settings that were used when your Amazon QuickSight subscription was first created in this Amazon Web Services account
Description
Describes the settings that were used when your Amazon QuickSight subscription was first created in this Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_account_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_account_settings(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the settings that you want to list. |
Use the DescribeAccountSubscription operation to receive a description of an Amazon QuickSight account's subscription
Description
Use the DescribeAccountSubscription operation to receive a description of an Amazon QuickSight account's subscription. A successful API call returns an AccountInfo
object that includes an account's name, subscription status, authentication type, edition, and notification email address.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_account_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_account_subscription(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Provides a summary of the metadata for an analysis
Description
Provides a summary of the metadata for an analysis.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_analysis/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_analysis(AwsAccountId, AnalysisId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analysis. You must be using the Amazon Web Services account that the analysis is in. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID of the analysis that you're describing. The ID is part of the URL of the analysis. |
Provides a detailed description of the definition of an analysis
Description
Provides a detailed description of the definition of an analysis.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_analysis_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_analysis_definition(AwsAccountId, AnalysisId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analysis. You must be using the Amazon Web Services account that the analysis is in. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID of the analysis that you're describing. The ID is part of the URL of the analysis. |
Provides the read and write permissions for an analysis
Description
Provides the read and write permissions for an analysis.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_analysis_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_analysis_permissions(AwsAccountId, AnalysisId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analysis whose permissions you're describing. You must be using the Amazon Web Services account that the analysis is in. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID of the analysis whose permissions you're describing. The ID is part of the analysis URL. |
Describes an existing export job
Description
Describes an existing export job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_asset_bundle_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_asset_bundle_export_job(
AwsAccountId,
AssetBundleExportJobId
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account the export job is executed in. |
AssetBundleExportJobId |
[required] The ID of the job that you want described. The job ID is set when you
start a new job with a
|
Describes an existing import job
Description
Describes an existing import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_asset_bundle_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_asset_bundle_import_job(
AwsAccountId,
AssetBundleImportJobId
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account the import job was executed in. |
AssetBundleImportJobId |
[required] The ID of the job. The job ID is set when you start a new job with a
|
Describes a brand
Description
Describes a brand.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_brand/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_brand(AwsAccountId, BrandId, VersionId = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand. |
BrandId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight brand. |
VersionId |
The ID of the specific version. The default value is the latest version. |
Describes a brand assignment
Description
Describes a brand assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_brand_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_brand_assignment(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand assignment. |
Describes the published version of the brand
Description
Describes the published version of the brand.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_brand_published_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_brand_published_version(AwsAccountId, BrandId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand. |
BrandId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight brand. |
Describes a custom permissions profile
Description
Describes a custom permissions profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_custom_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_custom_permissions(AwsAccountId, CustomPermissionsName)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the custom permissions profile that you want described. |
CustomPermissionsName |
[required] The name of the custom permissions profile to describe. |
Provides a summary for a dashboard
Description
Provides a summary for a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_dashboard/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_dashboard(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
VersionNumber = NULL,
AliasName = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're describing. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
VersionNumber |
The version number for the dashboard. If a version number isn't passed, the latest published dashboard version is described. |
AliasName |
The alias name. |
Provides a detailed description of the definition of a dashboard
Description
Provides a detailed description of the definition of a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_dashboard_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_dashboard_definition(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
VersionNumber = NULL,
AliasName = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're describing. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
VersionNumber |
The version number for the dashboard. If a version number isn't passed, the latest published dashboard version is described. |
AliasName |
The alias name. |
Describes read and write permissions for a dashboard
Description
Describes read and write permissions for a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_dashboard_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_dashboard_permissions(AwsAccountId, DashboardId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're describing permissions for. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard, also added to the IAM policy. |
Describes an existing snapshot job
Description
Describes an existing snapshot job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_dashboard_snapshot_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_dashboard_snapshot_job(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
SnapshotJobId
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the dashboard snapshot job is executed in. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID of the dashboard that you have started a snapshot job for. |
SnapshotJobId |
[required] The ID of the job to be described. The job ID is set when you start a
new job with a
|
Describes the result of an existing snapshot job that has finished running
Description
Describes the result of an existing snapshot job that has finished running.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_dashboard_snapshot_job_result/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_dashboard_snapshot_job_result(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
SnapshotJobId
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the dashboard snapshot job is executed in. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID of the dashboard that you have started a snapshot job for. |
SnapshotJobId |
[required] The ID of the job to be described. The job ID is set when you start a
new job with a
|
Describes an existing dashboard QA configuration
Description
Describes an existing dashboard QA configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_dashboards_qa_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_dashboards_qa_configuration(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard QA configuration that you want described. |
Describes a dataset
Description
Describes a dataset. This operation doesn't support datasets that include uploaded files as a source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_data_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_data_set(AwsAccountId, DataSetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID for the dataset that you want to create. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes the permissions on a dataset
Description
Describes the permissions on a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_data_set_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_data_set_permissions(AwsAccountId, DataSetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID for the dataset that you want to create. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes the refresh properties of a dataset
Description
Describes the refresh properties of a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_data_set_refresh_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_data_set_refresh_properties(AwsAccountId, DataSetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
Describes a data source
Description
Describes a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_data_source(AwsAccountId, DataSourceId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSourceId |
[required] The ID of the data source. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes the resource permissions for a data source
Description
Describes the resource permissions for a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_data_source_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_data_source_permissions(AwsAccountId, DataSourceId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSourceId |
[required] The ID of the data source. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes a Amazon Q Business application that is linked to an Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Describes a Amazon Q Business application that is linked to an Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_default_q_business_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_default_q_business_application(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight account that is linked to the Amazon Q Business application that you want described. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that contains the linked Amazon Q Business application. If this field is left blank, the default namespace is used. Currently, the default namespace is the only valid value for this parameter. |
Describes a folder
Description
Describes a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_folder/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_folder(AwsAccountId, FolderId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
Describes permissions for a folder
Description
Describes permissions for a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_folder_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_folder_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
Namespace = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
Namespace |
The namespace of the folder whose permissions you want described. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
NextToken |
A pagination token for the next set of results. |
Describes the folder resolved permissions
Description
Describes the folder resolved permissions. Permissions consists of both folder direct permissions and the inherited permissions from the ancestor folders.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_folder_resolved_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_folder_resolved_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
Namespace = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
Namespace |
The namespace of the folder whose permissions you want described. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
NextToken |
A pagination token for the next set of results. |
Returns an Amazon QuickSight group's description and Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
Description
Returns an Amazon QuickSight group's description and Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_group(GroupName, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to describe. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the group that you want described. |
Use the DescribeGroupMembership operation to determine if a user is a member of the specified group
Description
Use the describe_group_membership
operation to determine if a user is a member of the specified group. If the user exists and is a member of the specified group, an associated GroupMember
object is returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_group_membership/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_group_membership(
MemberName,
GroupName,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
MemberName |
[required] The user name of the user that you want to search for. |
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to search. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that includes the group you are searching within. |
Describes an existing IAM policy assignment, as specified by the assignment name
Description
Describes an existing IAM policy assignment, as specified by the assignment name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_iam_policy_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_iam_policy_assignment(
AwsAccountId,
AssignmentName,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the assignment that you want to describe. |
AssignmentName |
[required] The name of the assignment, also called a rule. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that contains the assignment. |
Describes a SPICE ingestion
Description
Describes a SPICE ingestion.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_ingestion/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_ingestion(AwsAccountId, DataSetId, IngestionId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset used in the ingestion. |
IngestionId |
[required] An ID for the ingestion. |
Provides a summary and status of IP rules
Description
Provides a summary and status of IP rules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_ip_restriction/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_ip_restriction(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the IP rules. |
Describes all customer managed key registrations in a Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Describes all customer managed key registrations in a Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_key_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_key_registration(AwsAccountId, DefaultKeyOnly = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the customer managed key registration that you want to describe. |
DefaultKeyOnly |
Determines whether the request returns the default key only. |
Describes the current namespace
Description
Describes the current namespace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_namespace(AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the Amazon QuickSight namespace that you want to describe. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that you want to describe. |
Describes a personalization configuration
Description
Describes a personalization configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_q_personalization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_q_personalization_configuration(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the personalization configuration that the user wants described. |
Describes the state of a Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration
Description
Describes the state of a Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_quick_sight_q_search_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_quick_sight_q_search_configuration(AwsAccountId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration that the user wants described. |
Provides a summary of a refresh schedule
Description
Provides a summary of a refresh schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_refresh_schedule(AwsAccountId, DataSetId, ScheduleId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
ScheduleId |
[required] The ID of the refresh schedule. |
Describes all custom permissions that are mapped to a role
Description
Describes all custom permissions that are mapped to a role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_role_custom_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_role_custom_permission(Role, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
Role |
[required] The name of the role whose permissions you want described. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a group in. The Amazon Web Services account ID that you provide must be the same Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that contains the role. |
Describes a template's metadata
Description
Describes a template's metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_template(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
VersionNumber = NULL,
AliasName = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template that you're describing. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
VersionNumber |
(Optional) The number for the version to describe. If a |
AliasName |
The alias of the template that you want to describe. If you name a
specific alias, you describe the version that the alias points to. You
can specify the latest version of the template by providing the keyword
|
Describes the template alias for a template
Description
Describes the template alias for a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_template_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_template_alias(AwsAccountId, TemplateId, AliasName)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template alias that you're describing. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
AliasName |
[required] The name of the template alias that you want to describe. If you name a
specific alias, you describe the version that the alias points to. You
can specify the latest version of the template by providing the keyword
|
Provides a detailed description of the definition of a template
Description
Provides a detailed description of the definition of a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_template_definition/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_template_definition(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
VersionNumber = NULL,
AliasName = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template. You must be using the Amazon Web Services account that the template is in. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID of the template that you're describing. |
VersionNumber |
The version number of the template. |
AliasName |
The alias of the template that you want to describe. If you name a
specific alias, you describe the version that the alias points to. You
can specify the latest version of the template by providing the keyword
|
Describes read and write permissions on a template
Description
Describes read and write permissions on a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_template_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_template_permissions(AwsAccountId, TemplateId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template that you're describing. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
Describes a theme
Description
Describes a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_theme/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_theme(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
VersionNumber = NULL,
AliasName = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme that you're describing. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
VersionNumber |
The version number for the version to describe. If a |
AliasName |
The alias of the theme that you want to describe. If you name a specific
alias, you describe the version that the alias points to. You can
specify the latest version of the theme by providing the keyword
|
Describes the alias for a theme
Description
Describes the alias for a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_theme_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_theme_alias(AwsAccountId, ThemeId, AliasName)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme alias that you're describing. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
AliasName |
[required] The name of the theme alias that you want to describe. |
Describes the read and write permissions for a theme
Description
Describes the read and write permissions for a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_theme_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_theme_permissions(AwsAccountId, ThemeId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme that you're describing. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme that you want to describe permissions for. |
Describes a topic
Description
Describes a topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_topic/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_topic(AwsAccountId, TopicId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to describe. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes the permissions of a topic
Description
Describes the permissions of a topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_topic_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_topic_permissions(AwsAccountId, TopicId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic that you want described. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to describe. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Describes the status of a topic refresh
Description
Describes the status of a topic refresh.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_topic_refresh/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_topic_refresh(AwsAccountId, TopicId, RefreshId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic whose refresh you want to describe. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to describe. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
RefreshId |
[required] The ID of the refresh, which is performed when the topic is created or updated. |
Deletes a topic refresh schedule
Description
Deletes a topic refresh schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_topic_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_topic_refresh_schedule(AwsAccountId, TopicId, DatasetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that contains the refresh schedule that you want to describe. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
DatasetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
Returns information about a user, given the user name
Description
Returns information about a user, given the user name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_user(UserName, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user that you want to describe. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
Describes a VPC connection
Description
Describes a VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_describe_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_describe_vpc_connection(AwsAccountId, VPCConnectionId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account that contains the VPC connection that you want described. |
VPCConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the VPC connection that you're creating. This ID is a unique identifier for each Amazon Web Services Region in an Amazon Web Services account. |
Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight dashboard or visual in your website, without having to register any reader users
Description
Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight dashboard or visual in your website, without having to register any reader users. Before you use this action, make sure that you have configured the dashboards and permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_generate_embed_url_for_anonymous_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_generate_embed_url_for_anonymous_user(
AwsAccountId,
SessionLifetimeInMinutes = NULL,
Namespace,
SessionTags = NULL,
AuthorizedResourceArns,
ExperienceConfiguration,
AllowedDomains = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're embedding. |
SessionLifetimeInMinutes |
How many minutes the session is valid. The session lifetime must be in [15-600] minutes range. |
Namespace |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight namespace that the anonymous user virtually
belongs to. If you are not using an Amazon QuickSight custom namespace,
set this to |
SessionTags |
The session tags used for row-level security. Before you use this
parameter, make sure that you have configured the relevant datasets
using the These are not the tags used for the Amazon Web Services resource tagging feature. For more information, see Using Row-Level Security (RLS) with Tagsin the Amazon QuickSight User Guide. |
AuthorizedResourceArns |
[required] The Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) for the Amazon QuickSight resources that the user is authorized to access during the lifetime of the session. If you choose If you want to make changes to the theme of your embedded content, pass a list of theme ARNs that the anonymous users need access to. Currently, you can pass up to 25 theme ARNs in each API call. |
ExperienceConfiguration |
[required] The configuration of the experience that you are embedding. |
AllowedDomains |
The domains that you want to add to the allow list for access to the generated URL that is then embedded. This optional parameter overrides the static domains that are configured in the Manage QuickSight menu in the Amazon QuickSight console. Instead, it allows only the domains that you include in this parameter. You can list up to three domains or subdomains in each API call. To include all subdomains under a specific domain to the allow list, use
|
Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight experience in your website
Description
Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight experience in your website. This action can be used for any type of user registered in an Amazon QuickSight account. Before you use this action, make sure that you have configured the relevant Amazon QuickSight resource and permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_generate_embed_url_for_registered_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_generate_embed_url_for_registered_user(
AwsAccountId,
SessionLifetimeInMinutes = NULL,
UserArn,
ExperienceConfiguration,
AllowedDomains = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're embedding. |
SessionLifetimeInMinutes |
How many minutes the session is valid. The session lifetime must be in [15-600] minutes range. |
UserArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name for the registered user. |
ExperienceConfiguration |
[required] The experience that you want to embed. For registered users, you can embed Amazon QuickSight dashboards, Amazon QuickSight visuals, the Amazon QuickSight Q search bar, the Amazon QuickSight Generative Q&A experience, or the entire Amazon QuickSight console. |
AllowedDomains |
The domains that you want to add to the allow list for access to the generated URL that is then embedded. This optional parameter overrides the static domains that are configured in the Manage QuickSight menu in the Amazon QuickSight console. Instead, it allows only the domains that you include in this parameter. You can list up to three domains or subdomains in each API call. To include all subdomains under a specific domain to the allow list, use
|
Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight experience in your website
Description
Generates an embed URL that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight experience in your website. This action can be used for any type of user that is registered in an Amazon QuickSight account that uses IAM Identity Center for authentication. This API requires identity-enhanced IAM Role sessions for the authenticated user that the API call is being made for.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_generate_embed_url_for_registered_user_with_identity/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_generate_embed_url_for_registered_user_with_identity(
AwsAccountId,
SessionLifetimeInMinutes = NULL,
ExperienceConfiguration,
AllowedDomains = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services registered user. |
SessionLifetimeInMinutes |
The validity of the session in minutes. |
ExperienceConfiguration |
[required] |
AllowedDomains |
A list of domains to be allowed to generate the embed URL. |
Generates a temporary session URL and authorization code(bearer token) that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight read-only dashboard in your website or application
Description
Generates a temporary session URL and authorization code(bearer token) that you can use to embed an Amazon QuickSight read-only dashboard in your website or application. Before you use this command, make sure that you have configured the dashboards and permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_get_dashboard_embed_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_get_dashboard_embed_url(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
IdentityType,
SessionLifetimeInMinutes = NULL,
UndoRedoDisabled = NULL,
ResetDisabled = NULL,
StatePersistenceEnabled = NULL,
UserArn = NULL,
Namespace = NULL,
AdditionalDashboardIds = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're embedding. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard, also added to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy. |
IdentityType |
[required] The authentication method that the user uses to sign in. |
SessionLifetimeInMinutes |
How many minutes the session is valid. The session lifetime must be 15-600 minutes. |
UndoRedoDisabled |
Remove the undo/redo button on the embedded dashboard. The default is FALSE, which enables the undo/redo button. |
ResetDisabled |
Remove the reset button on the embedded dashboard. The default is FALSE, which enables the reset button. |
StatePersistenceEnabled |
Adds persistence of state for the user session in an embedded dashboard.
Persistence applies to the sheet and the parameter settings. These are
control settings that the dashboard subscriber (Amazon QuickSight
reader) chooses while viewing the dashboard. If this is set to |
UserArn |
The Amazon QuickSight user's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), for use with
Omit this parameter for users in the third group – IAM users and IAM role-based sessions. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that contains the dashboard IDs in this
request. If you're not using a custom namespace, set
|
AdditionalDashboardIds |
A list of one or more dashboard IDs that you want anonymous users to
have tempporary access to. Currently, the |
Generates a session URL and authorization code that you can use to embed the Amazon Amazon QuickSight console in your web server code
Description
Generates a session URL and authorization code that you can use to embed the Amazon Amazon QuickSight console in your web server code. Use get_session_embed_url
where you want to provide an authoring portal that allows users to create data sources, datasets, analyses, and dashboards. The users who access an embedded Amazon QuickSight console need belong to the author or admin security cohort. If you want to restrict permissions to some of these features, add a custom permissions profile to the user with the update_user
API operation. Use register_user
API operation to add a new user with a custom permission profile attached. For more information, see the following sections in the Amazon QuickSight User Guide:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_get_session_embed_url/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_get_session_embed_url(
AwsAccountId,
EntryPoint = NULL,
SessionLifetimeInMinutes = NULL,
UserArn = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account associated with your Amazon QuickSight subscription. |
EntryPoint |
The URL you use to access the embedded session. The entry point URL is constrained to the following paths:
|
SessionLifetimeInMinutes |
How many minutes the session is valid. The session lifetime must be 15-600 minutes. |
UserArn |
The Amazon QuickSight user's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), for use with
Omit this parameter for users in the third group, IAM users and IAM role-based sessions. |
Lists Amazon QuickSight analyses that exist in the specified Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists Amazon QuickSight analyses that exist in the specified Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_analyses/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_analyses(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analyses. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Lists all asset bundle export jobs that have been taken place in the last 14 days
Description
Lists all asset bundle export jobs that have been taken place in the last 14 days. Jobs created more than 14 days ago are deleted forever and are not returned. If you are using the same job ID for multiple jobs, list_asset_bundle_export_jobs
only returns the most recent job that uses the repeated job ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_asset_bundle_export_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_asset_bundle_export_jobs(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the export jobs were executed in. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all asset bundle import jobs that have taken place in the last 14 days
Description
Lists all asset bundle import jobs that have taken place in the last 14 days. Jobs created more than 14 days ago are deleted forever and are not returned. If you are using the same job ID for multiple jobs, list_asset_bundle_import_jobs
only returns the most recent job that uses the repeated job ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_asset_bundle_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_asset_bundle_import_jobs(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the import jobs were executed in. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all brands in an Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Lists all brands in an Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_brands/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_brands(AwsAccountId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brands that you want to list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned in a single request. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
Returns a list of all the custom permissions profiles
Description
Returns a list of all the custom permissions profiles.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_custom_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_custom_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the custom permissions profiles that you want to list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
Lists all the versions of the dashboards in the Amazon QuickSight subscription
Description
Lists all the versions of the dashboards in the Amazon QuickSight subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_dashboard_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_dashboard_versions(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're listing versions for. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists dashboards in an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists dashboards in an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_dashboards/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_dashboards(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboards that you're listing. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all of the datasets belonging to the current Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Lists all of the datasets belonging to the current Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_data_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_data_sets(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists data sources in current Amazon Web Services Region that belong to this Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists data sources in current Amazon Web Services Region that belong to this Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_data_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_data_sources(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
List all assets (DASHBOARD, ANALYSIS, and DATASET) in a folder
Description
List all assets (DASHBOARD
, ANALYSIS
, and DATASET
) in a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_folder_members/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_folder_members(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all folders in an account
Description
Lists all folders in an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_folders/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_folders(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
List all folders that a resource is a member of
Description
List all folders that a resource is a member of.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_folders_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_folders_for_resource(
AwsAccountId,
ResourceArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the resource. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) the resource whose folders you need to list. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists member users in a group
Description
Lists member users in a group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_group_memberships/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_group_memberships(
GroupName,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to see a membership list of. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return from this request. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the group that you want a list of users from. |
Lists all user groups in Amazon QuickSight
Description
Lists all user groups in Amazon QuickSight.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_groups(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that you want a list of groups from. |
Lists the IAM policy assignments in the current Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Lists the IAM policy assignments in the current Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_iam_policy_assignments/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_iam_policy_assignments(
AwsAccountId,
AssignmentStatus = NULL,
Namespace,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains these IAM policy assignments. |
AssignmentStatus |
The status of the assignments. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace for the assignments. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all of the IAM policy assignments, including the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), for the IAM policies assigned to the specified user and group, or groups that the user belongs to
Description
Lists all of the IAM policy assignments, including the Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), for the IAM policies assigned to the specified user and group, or groups that the user belongs to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_iam_policy_assignments_for_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_iam_policy_assignments_for_user(
AwsAccountId,
UserName,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the assignments. |
UserName |
[required] The name of the user. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the assignment. |
Lists all services and authorized targets that the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application can access
Description
Lists all services and authorized targets that the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application can access.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_identity_propagation_configs/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_identity_propagation_configs(
AwsAccountId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contain the identity propagation configurations of. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
Lists the history of SPICE ingestions for a dataset
Description
Lists the history of SPICE ingestions for a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_ingestions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_ingestions(
DataSetId,
NextToken = NULL,
AwsAccountId,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset used in the ingestion. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists the namespaces for the specified Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the namespaces for the specified Amazon Web Services account. This operation doesn't list deleted namespaces.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_namespaces/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_namespaces(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the Amazon QuickSight namespaces that you want to list. |
NextToken |
A unique pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. You
will receive a pagination token in the response body of a previous
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Lists the refresh schedules of a dataset
Description
Lists the refresh schedules of a dataset. Each dataset can have up to 5 schedules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_refresh_schedules/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_refresh_schedules(AwsAccountId, DataSetId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
Lists all groups that are associated with a role
Description
Lists all groups that are associated with a role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_role_memberships/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_role_memberships(
Role,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
Role |
[required] The name of the role. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a group in. The Amazon Web Services account ID that you provide must be the same Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that includes the role. |
Lists the tags assigned to a resource
Description
Lists the tags assigned to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want a list of tags for. |
Lists all the aliases of a template
Description
Lists all the aliases of a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_template_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_template_aliases(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template aliases that you're listing. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all the versions of the templates in the current Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Lists all the versions of the templates in the current Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_template_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_template_versions(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the templates that you're listing. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all the templates in the current Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Lists all the templates in the current Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_templates(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the templates that you're listing. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all the aliases of a theme
Description
Lists all the aliases of a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_theme_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_theme_aliases(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme aliases that you're listing. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all the versions of the themes in the current Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists all the versions of the themes in the current Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_theme_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_theme_versions(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the themes that you're listing. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists all the themes in the current Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists all the themes in the current Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_themes/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_themes(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Type = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the themes that you're listing. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Type |
The type of themes that you want to list. Valid options include the following:
|
Lists all of the refresh schedules for a topic
Description
Lists all of the refresh schedules for a topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_topic_refresh_schedules/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_topic_refresh_schedules(AwsAccountId, TopicId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic whose refresh schedule you want described. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID for the topic that you want to describe. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Lists all reviewed answers for a Q Topic
Description
Lists all reviewed answers for a Q Topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_topic_reviewed_answers/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_topic_reviewed_answers(AwsAccountId, TopicId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that containd the reviewed answers that you want listed. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID for the topic that contains the reviewed answer that you want to list. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Lists all of the topics within an account
Description
Lists all of the topics within an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_topics/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_topics(AwsAccountId, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topics that you want to list. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Lists the Amazon QuickSight groups that an Amazon QuickSight user is a member of
Description
Lists the Amazon QuickSight groups that an Amazon QuickSight user is a member of.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_user_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_user_groups(
UserName,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight user name that you want to list group memberships for. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return from this request. |
Returns a list of all of the Amazon QuickSight users belonging to this account
Description
Returns a list of all of the Amazon QuickSight users belonging to this account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_users(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return from this request. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
Lists all of the VPC connections in the current set Amazon Web Services Region of an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists all of the VPC connections in the current set Amazon Web Services Region of an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_list_vpc_connections/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_list_vpc_connections(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account that contains the VPC connections that you want to list. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Predicts existing visuals or generates new visuals to answer a given query
Description
Predicts existing visuals or generates new visuals to answer a given query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_predict_qa_results/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_predict_qa_results(
AwsAccountId,
QueryText,
IncludeQuickSightQIndex = NULL,
IncludeGeneratedAnswer = NULL,
MaxTopicsToConsider = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the user wants to execute Predict QA results in. |
QueryText |
[required] The query text to be used to predict QA results. |
IncludeQuickSightQIndex |
Indicates whether Q indicies are included or excluded. |
IncludeGeneratedAnswer |
Indicates whether generated answers are included or excluded. |
MaxTopicsToConsider |
The number of maximum topics to be considered to predict QA results. |
Creates or updates the dataset refresh properties for the dataset
Description
Creates or updates the dataset refresh properties for the dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_put_data_set_refresh_properties/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_put_data_set_refresh_properties(
AwsAccountId,
DataSetId,
DataSetRefreshProperties
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
DataSetRefreshProperties |
[required] The dataset refresh properties. |
Creates an Amazon QuickSight user whose identity is associated with the Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity or role specified in the request
Description
Creates an Amazon QuickSight user whose identity is associated with the Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity or role specified in the request. When you register a new user from the Amazon QuickSight API, Amazon QuickSight generates a registration URL. The user accesses this registration URL to create their account. Amazon QuickSight doesn't send a registration email to users who are registered from the Amazon QuickSight API. If you want new users to receive a registration email, then add those users in the Amazon QuickSight console. For more information on registering a new user in the Amazon QuickSight console, see Inviting users to access Amazon QuickSight.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_register_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_register_user(
IdentityType,
Email,
UserRole,
IamArn = NULL,
SessionName = NULL,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace,
UserName = NULL,
CustomPermissionsName = NULL,
ExternalLoginFederationProviderType = NULL,
CustomFederationProviderUrl = NULL,
ExternalLoginId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
IdentityType |
[required] The identity type that your Amazon QuickSight account uses to manage the identity of users. |
Email |
[required] The email address of the user that you want to register. |
UserRole |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight role for the user. The user role can be one of the following:
|
IamArn |
The ARN of the IAM user or role that you are registering with Amazon QuickSight. |
SessionName |
You need to use this parameter only when you register one or more users
using an assumed IAM role. You don't need to provide the session name
for other scenarios, for example when you are registering an IAM user or
an Amazon QuickSight user. You can register multiple users using the
same IAM role if each user has a different session name. For more
information on assuming IAM roles, see
|
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
UserName |
The Amazon QuickSight user name that you want to create for the user you are registering. |
CustomPermissionsName |
(Enterprise edition only) The name of the custom permissions profile that you want to assign to this user. Customized permissions allows you to control a user's access by restricting access the following operations:
To add custom permissions to an existing user, use
A set of custom permissions includes any combination of these
restrictions. Currently, you need to create the profile names for custom
permission sets by using the Amazon QuickSight console. Then, you use
the Amazon QuickSight custom permissions are applied through IAM policies. Therefore, they override the permissions typically granted by assigning Amazon QuickSight users to one of the default security cohorts in Amazon QuickSight (admin, author, reader, admin pro, author pro, reader pro). This feature is available only to Amazon QuickSight Enterprise edition subscriptions. |
ExternalLoginFederationProviderType |
The type of supported external login provider that provides identity to let a user federate into Amazon QuickSight with an associated Identity and Access Management(IAM) role. The type of supported external login provider can be one of the following.
|
CustomFederationProviderUrl |
The URL of the custom OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider that provides
identity to let a user federate into Amazon QuickSight with an
associated Identity and Access Management(IAM) role. This parameter
should only be used when |
ExternalLoginId |
The identity ID for a user in the external login provider. |
Tags |
The tags to associate with the user. |
Restores an analysis
Description
Restores an analysis.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_restore_analysis/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_restore_analysis(AwsAccountId, AnalysisId, RestoreToFolders = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analysis. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID of the analysis that you're restoring. |
RestoreToFolders |
A boolean value that determines if the analysis will be restored to
folders that it previously resided in. A |
Searches for analyses that belong to the user specified in the filter
Description
Searches for analyses that belong to the user specified in the filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_analyses/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_analyses(
AwsAccountId,
Filters,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analyses that you're searching for. |
Filters |
[required] The structure for the search filters that you want to apply to your search. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Searches for dashboards that belong to a user
Description
Searches for dashboards that belong to a user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_dashboards/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_dashboards(
AwsAccountId,
Filters,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the user whose dashboards you're searching for. |
Filters |
[required] The filters to apply to the search. Currently, you can search only by
user name, for example,
|
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Use the SearchDataSets operation to search for datasets that belong to an account
Description
Use the search_data_sets
operation to search for datasets that belong to an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_data_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_data_sets(
AwsAccountId,
Filters,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Filters |
[required] The filters to apply to the search. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Use the SearchDataSources operation to search for data sources that belong to an account
Description
Use the search_data_sources
operation to search for data sources that belong to an account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_data_sources/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_data_sources(
AwsAccountId,
Filters,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Filters |
[required] The filters to apply to the search. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Searches the subfolders in a folder
Description
Searches the subfolders in a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_folders/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_folders(
AwsAccountId,
Filters,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder. |
Filters |
[required] The filters to apply to the search. Currently, you can search only by
the parent folder ARN. For example,
|
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Use the SearchGroups operation to search groups in a specified Amazon QuickSight namespace using the supplied filters
Description
Use the search_groups
operation to search groups in a specified Amazon QuickSight namespace using the supplied filters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_groups(
AwsAccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
Namespace,
Filters
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
NextToken |
A pagination token that can be used in a subsequent request. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return from this request. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that you want to search. |
Filters |
[required] The structure for the search filters that you want to apply to your search. |
Searches for any Q topic that exists in an Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Searches for any Q topic that exists in an Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_search_topics/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_search_topics(
AwsAccountId,
Filters,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic that you want to find. |
Filters |
[required] The filters that you want to use to search for the topic. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to be returned per request. |
Starts an Asset Bundle export job
Description
Starts an Asset Bundle export job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_start_asset_bundle_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_start_asset_bundle_export_job(
AwsAccountId,
AssetBundleExportJobId,
ResourceArns,
IncludeAllDependencies = NULL,
ExportFormat,
CloudFormationOverridePropertyConfiguration = NULL,
IncludePermissions = NULL,
IncludeTags = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL,
IncludeFolderMemberships = NULL,
IncludeFolderMembers = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account to export assets from. |
AssetBundleExportJobId |
[required] The ID of the job. This ID is unique while the job is running. After the job is completed, you can reuse this ID for another job. |
ResourceArns |
[required] An array of resource ARNs to export. The following resources are supported.
The API caller must have the necessary permissions in their IAM role to access each resource before the resources can be exported. |
IncludeAllDependencies |
A Boolean that determines whether all dependencies of each resource ARN
are recursively exported with the job. For example, say you provided a
Dashboard ARN to the |
ExportFormat |
[required] The export data format. |
CloudFormationOverridePropertyConfiguration |
An optional collection of structures that generate CloudFormation parameters to override the existing resource property values when the resource is exported to a new CloudFormation template. Use this field if the |
IncludePermissions |
A Boolean that determines whether all permissions for each resource ARN
are exported with the job. If you set |
IncludeTags |
A Boolean that determines whether all tags for each resource ARN are
exported with the job. If you set |
ValidationStrategy |
An optional parameter that determines which validation strategy to use
for the export job. If |
IncludeFolderMemberships |
A Boolean that determines if the exported asset carries over information about the folders that the asset is a member of. |
IncludeFolderMembers |
A setting that indicates whether you want to include folder assets. You can also use this setting to recusrsively include all subfolders of an exported folder. |
Starts an Asset Bundle import job
Description
Starts an Asset Bundle import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_start_asset_bundle_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_start_asset_bundle_import_job(
AwsAccountId,
AssetBundleImportJobId,
AssetBundleImportSource,
OverrideParameters = NULL,
FailureAction = NULL,
OverridePermissions = NULL,
OverrideTags = NULL,
OverrideValidationStrategy = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account to import assets into. |
AssetBundleImportJobId |
[required] The ID of the job. This ID is unique while the job is running. After the job is completed, you can reuse this ID for another job. |
AssetBundleImportSource |
[required] The source of the asset bundle zip file that contains the data that you
want to import. The file must be in |
OverrideParameters |
Optional overrides that are applied to the resource configuration before import. |
FailureAction |
The failure action for the import job. If you choose If you choose |
OverridePermissions |
Optional permission overrides that are applied to the resource configuration before import. |
OverrideTags |
Optional tag overrides that are applied to the resource configuration before import. |
OverrideValidationStrategy |
An optional validation strategy override for all analyses and dashboards that is applied to the resource configuration before import. |
Starts an asynchronous job that generates a snapshot of a dashboard's output
Description
Starts an asynchronous job that generates a snapshot of a dashboard's output. You can request one or several of the following format configurations in each API call.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_start_dashboard_snapshot_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_start_dashboard_snapshot_job(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
SnapshotJobId,
UserConfiguration,
SnapshotConfiguration
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the dashboard snapshot job is executed in. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID of the dashboard that you want to start a snapshot job for. |
SnapshotJobId |
[required] An ID for the dashboard snapshot job. This ID is unique to the dashboard
while the job is running. This ID can be used to poll the status of a
job with a
|
UserConfiguration |
[required] A structure that contains information about the anonymous users that the generated snapshot is for. This API will not return information about registered Amazon QuickSight. |
SnapshotConfiguration |
[required] A structure that describes the configuration of the dashboard snapshot. |
Starts an asynchronous job that runs an existing dashboard schedule and sends the dashboard snapshot through email
Description
Starts an asynchronous job that runs an existing dashboard schedule and sends the dashboard snapshot through email.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_start_dashboard_snapshot_job_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_start_dashboard_snapshot_job_schedule(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
ScheduleId
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that the dashboard snapshot job is executed in. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID of the dashboard that you want to start a snapshot job schedule for. |
ScheduleId |
[required] The ID of the schedule that you want to start a snapshot job schedule for. The schedule ID can be found in the Amazon QuickSight console in the Schedules pane of the dashboard that the schedule is configured for. |
Assigns one or more tags (key-value pairs) to the specified Amazon QuickSight resource
Description
Assigns one or more tags (key-value pairs) to the specified Amazon QuickSight resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to tag. |
Tags |
[required] Contains a map of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the resource. |
Removes a tag or tags from a resource
Description
Removes a tag or tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to untag. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of the key-value pairs for the resource tag or tags assigned to the resource. |
Updates Amazon QuickSight customizations for the current Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Updates Amazon QuickSight customizations for the current Amazon Web Services Region. Currently, the only customization that you can use is a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_account_customization/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_account_customization(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace = NULL,
AccountCustomization
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to update Amazon QuickSight customizations for. |
Namespace |
The namespace that you want to update Amazon QuickSight customizations for. |
AccountCustomization |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight customizations you're updating in the current Amazon Web Services Region. |
Updates the Amazon QuickSight settings in your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Updates the Amazon QuickSight settings in your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_account_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_account_settings(
AwsAccountId,
DefaultNamespace,
NotificationEmail = NULL,
TerminationProtectionEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the Amazon QuickSight settings that you want to list. |
DefaultNamespace |
[required] The default namespace for this Amazon Web Services account. Currently,
the default is |
NotificationEmail |
The email address that you want Amazon QuickSight to send notifications to regarding your Amazon Web Services account or Amazon QuickSight subscription. |
TerminationProtectionEnabled |
A boolean value that determines whether or not an Amazon QuickSight
account can be deleted. A |
Updates an analysis in Amazon QuickSight
Description
Updates an analysis in Amazon QuickSight
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_analysis/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_analysis(
AwsAccountId,
AnalysisId,
Name,
Parameters = NULL,
SourceEntity = NULL,
ThemeArn = NULL,
Definition = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analysis that you're updating. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID for the analysis that you're updating. This ID displays in the URL of the analysis. |
Name |
[required] A descriptive name for the analysis that you're updating. This name displays for the analysis in the Amazon QuickSight console. |
Parameters |
The parameter names and override values that you want to use. An analysis can have any parameter type, and some parameters might accept multiple values. |
SourceEntity |
A source entity to use for the analysis that you're updating. This metadata structure contains details that describe a source template and one or more datasets. |
ThemeArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the theme to apply to the analysis that you're creating. To see the theme in the Amazon QuickSight console, make sure that you have access to it. |
Definition |
The definition of an analysis. A definition is the data model of all features in a Dashboard, Template, or Analysis. |
ValidationStrategy |
The option to relax the validation needed to update an analysis with definition objects. This skips the validation step for specific errors. |
Updates the read and write permissions for an analysis
Description
Updates the read and write permissions for an analysis.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_analysis_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_analysis_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
AnalysisId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the analysis whose permissions you're updating. You must be using the Amazon Web Services account that the analysis is in. |
AnalysisId |
[required] The ID of the analysis whose permissions you're updating. The ID is part of the analysis URL. |
GrantPermissions |
A structure that describes the permissions to add and the principal to add them to. |
RevokePermissions |
A structure that describes the permissions to remove and the principal to remove them from. |
Updates an Amazon QuickSight application with a token exchange grant
Description
Updates an Amazon QuickSight application with a token exchange grant. This operation only supports Amazon QuickSight applications that are registered with IAM Identity Center.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_application_with_token_exchange_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_application_with_token_exchange_grant(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account to be updated with a token exchange grant. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the Amazon QuickSight application. |
Updates a brand
Description
Updates a brand.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_brand/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_brand(AwsAccountId, BrandId, BrandDefinition = NULL)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand. |
BrandId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight brand. |
BrandDefinition |
The definition of the brand. |
Updates a brand assignment
Description
Updates a brand assignment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_brand_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_brand_assignment(AwsAccountId, BrandArn)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand assignment. |
BrandArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the brand. |
Updates the published version of a brand
Description
Updates the published version of a brand.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_brand_published_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_brand_published_version(AwsAccountId, BrandId, VersionId)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the brand. |
BrandId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight brand. |
VersionId |
[required] The ID of the published version. |
Updates a custom permissions profile
Description
Updates a custom permissions profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_custom_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_custom_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
CustomPermissionsName,
Capabilities = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the custom permissions profile that you want to update. |
CustomPermissionsName |
[required] The name of the custom permissions profile that you want to update. |
Capabilities |
A set of actions to include in the custom permissions profile. |
Updates a dashboard in an Amazon Web Services account
Description
Updates a dashboard in an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_dashboard/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_dashboard(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
Name,
SourceEntity = NULL,
Parameters = NULL,
VersionDescription = NULL,
DashboardPublishOptions = NULL,
ThemeArn = NULL,
Definition = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're updating. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
Name |
[required] The display name of the dashboard. |
SourceEntity |
The entity that you are using as a source when you update the dashboard.
In Use the |
Parameters |
A structure that contains the parameters of the dashboard. These are parameter overrides for a dashboard. A dashboard can have any type of parameters, and some parameters might accept multiple values. |
VersionDescription |
A description for the first version of the dashboard being created. |
DashboardPublishOptions |
Options for publishing the dashboard when you create it:
|
ThemeArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the theme that is being used for this dashboard. If you add a value for this field, it overrides the value that was originally associated with the entity. The theme ARN must exist in the same Amazon Web Services account where you create the dashboard. |
Definition |
The definition of a dashboard. A definition is the data model of all features in a Dashboard, Template, or Analysis. |
ValidationStrategy |
The option to relax the validation needed to update a dashboard with definition objects. This skips the validation step for specific errors. |
Updates the linked analyses on a dashboard
Description
Updates the linked analyses on a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_dashboard_links/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_dashboard_links(AwsAccountId, DashboardId, LinkEntities)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard whose links you want to update. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
LinkEntities |
[required] list of analysis Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) to be linked to the dashboard. |
Updates read and write permissions on a dashboard
Description
Updates read and write permissions on a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_dashboard_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_dashboard_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL,
GrantLinkPermissions = NULL,
RevokeLinkPermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard whose permissions you're updating. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
GrantPermissions |
The permissions that you want to grant on this resource. |
RevokePermissions |
The permissions that you want to revoke from this resource. |
GrantLinkPermissions |
Grants link permissions to all users in a defined namespace. |
RevokeLinkPermissions |
Revokes link permissions from all users in a defined namespace. |
Updates the published version of a dashboard
Description
Updates the published version of a dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_dashboard_published_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_dashboard_published_version(
AwsAccountId,
DashboardId,
VersionNumber
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard that you're updating. |
DashboardId |
[required] The ID for the dashboard. |
VersionNumber |
[required] The version number of the dashboard. |
Updates a Dashboard QA configuration
Description
Updates a Dashboard QA configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_dashboards_qa_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_dashboards_qa_configuration(AwsAccountId, DashboardsQAStatus)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the dashboard QA configuration that you want to update. |
DashboardsQAStatus |
[required] The status of dashboards QA configuration that you want to update. |
Updates a dataset
Description
Updates a dataset. This operation doesn't support datasets that include uploaded files as a source. Partial updates are not supported by this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_data_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_data_set(
AwsAccountId,
DataSetId,
Name,
PhysicalTableMap,
LogicalTableMap = NULL,
ImportMode,
ColumnGroups = NULL,
FieldFolders = NULL,
RowLevelPermissionDataSet = NULL,
RowLevelPermissionTagConfiguration = NULL,
ColumnLevelPermissionRules = NULL,
DataSetUsageConfiguration = NULL,
DatasetParameters = NULL,
PerformanceConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID for the dataset that you want to update. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] The display name for the dataset. |
PhysicalTableMap |
[required] Declares the physical tables that are available in the underlying data sources. |
LogicalTableMap |
Configures the combination and transformation of the data from the physical tables. |
ImportMode |
[required] Indicates whether you want to import the data into SPICE. |
ColumnGroups |
Groupings of columns that work together in certain Amazon QuickSight features. Currently, only geospatial hierarchy is supported. |
FieldFolders |
The folder that contains fields and nested subfolders for your dataset. |
RowLevelPermissionDataSet |
The row-level security configuration for the data you want to create. |
RowLevelPermissionTagConfiguration |
The configuration of tags on a dataset to set row-level security. Row-level security tags are currently supported for anonymous embedding only. |
ColumnLevelPermissionRules |
A set of one or more definitions of a |
DataSetUsageConfiguration |
|
DatasetParameters |
The parameter declarations of the dataset. |
PerformanceConfiguration |
The configuration for the performance optimization of the dataset that
contains a |
Updates the permissions on a dataset
Description
Updates the permissions on a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_data_set_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_data_set_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
DataSetId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSetId |
[required] The ID for the dataset whose permissions you want to update. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
GrantPermissions |
The resource permissions that you want to grant to the dataset. |
RevokePermissions |
The resource permissions that you want to revoke from the dataset. |
Updates a data source
Description
Updates a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_data_source/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_data_source(
AwsAccountId,
DataSourceId,
Name,
DataSourceParameters = NULL,
Credentials = NULL,
VpcConnectionProperties = NULL,
SslProperties = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSourceId |
[required] The ID of the data source. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] A display name for the data source. |
DataSourceParameters |
The parameters that Amazon QuickSight uses to connect to your underlying source. |
Credentials |
The credentials that Amazon QuickSight that uses to connect to your underlying source. Currently, only credentials based on user name and password are supported. |
VpcConnectionProperties |
Use this parameter only when you want Amazon QuickSight to use a VPC connection when connecting to your underlying source. |
SslProperties |
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) properties that apply when Amazon QuickSight connects to your underlying source. |
Updates the permissions to a data source
Description
Updates the permissions to a data source.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_data_source_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_data_source_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
DataSourceId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
DataSourceId |
[required] The ID of the data source. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
GrantPermissions |
A list of resource permissions that you want to grant on the data source. |
RevokePermissions |
A list of resource permissions that you want to revoke on the data source. |
Updates a Amazon Q Business application that is linked to a Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Updates a Amazon Q Business application that is linked to a Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_default_q_business_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_default_q_business_application(
AwsAccountId,
Namespace = NULL,
ApplicationId
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon QuickSight account that is connected to the Amazon Q Business application that you want to update. |
Namespace |
The Amazon QuickSight namespace that contains the linked Amazon Q Business application. If this field is left blank, the default namespace is used. Currently, the default namespace is the only valid value for this parameter. |
ApplicationId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Q Business application that you want to update. |
Updates the name of a folder
Description
Updates the name of a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_folder/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_folder(AwsAccountId, FolderId, Name)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder to update. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
Name |
[required] The name of the folder. |
Updates permissions of a folder
Description
Updates permissions of a folder.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_folder_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_folder_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
FolderId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains the folder to update. |
FolderId |
[required] The ID of the folder. |
GrantPermissions |
The permissions that you want to grant on a resource. Namespace ARNs are
not supported |
RevokePermissions |
The permissions that you want to revoke from a resource. Namespace ARNs
are not supported |
Changes a group description
Description
Changes a group description.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_group(GroupName, Description = NULL, AwsAccountId, Namespace)
Arguments
GroupName |
[required] The name of the group that you want to update. |
Description |
The description for the group that you want to update. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the group is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the group that you want to update. |
Updates an existing IAM policy assignment
Description
Updates an existing IAM policy assignment. This operation updates only the optional parameter or parameters that are specified in the request. This overwrites all of the users included in Identities
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_iam_policy_assignment/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_iam_policy_assignment(
AwsAccountId,
AssignmentName,
Namespace,
AssignmentStatus = NULL,
PolicyArn = NULL,
Identities = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the IAM policy assignment. |
AssignmentName |
[required] The name of the assignment, also called a rule. The name must be unique within the Amazon Web Services account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace of the assignment. |
AssignmentStatus |
The status of the assignment. Possible values are as follows:
|
PolicyArn |
The ARN for the IAM policy to apply to the Amazon QuickSight users and groups specified in this assignment. |
Identities |
The Amazon QuickSight users, groups, or both that you want to assign the policy to. |
Adds or updates services and authorized targets to configure what the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application can access
Description
Adds or updates services and authorized targets to configure what the Amazon QuickSight IAM Identity Center application can access.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_identity_propagation_config/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_identity_propagation_config(
AwsAccountId,
Service,
AuthorizedTargets = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the identity propagation configuration that you want to update. |
Service |
[required] The name of the Amazon Web Services service that contains the authorized targets that you want to add or update. |
AuthorizedTargets |
Specifies a list of application ARNs that represent the authorized targets for a service. |
Updates the content and status of IP rules
Description
Updates the content and status of IP rules. Traffic from a source is allowed when the source satisfies either the IpRestrictionRule
, VpcIdRestrictionRule
, or VpcEndpointIdRestrictionRule
. To use this operation, you must provide the entire map of rules. You can use the describe_ip_restriction
operation to get the current rule map.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_ip_restriction/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_ip_restriction(
AwsAccountId,
IpRestrictionRuleMap = NULL,
VpcIdRestrictionRuleMap = NULL,
VpcEndpointIdRestrictionRuleMap = NULL,
Enabled = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the IP rules. |
IpRestrictionRuleMap |
A map that describes the updated IP rules with CIDR ranges and descriptions. |
VpcIdRestrictionRuleMap |
A map of VPC IDs and their corresponding rules. When you configure this parameter, traffic from all VPC endpoints that are present in the specified VPC is allowed. |
VpcEndpointIdRestrictionRuleMap |
A map of allowed VPC endpoint IDs and their corresponding rule descriptions. |
Enabled |
A value that specifies whether IP rules are turned on. |
Updates a customer managed key in a Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Updates a customer managed key in a Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_key_registration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_key_registration(AwsAccountId, KeyRegistration)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the customer managed key registration that you want to update. |
KeyRegistration |
[required] A list of |
Use the UpdatePublicSharingSettings operation to turn on or turn off the public sharing settings of an Amazon QuickSight dashboard
Description
Use the update_public_sharing_settings
operation to turn on or turn off the public sharing settings of an Amazon QuickSight dashboard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_public_sharing_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_public_sharing_settings(
AwsAccountId,
PublicSharingEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with your Amazon QuickSight subscription. |
PublicSharingEnabled |
A Boolean value that indicates whether public sharing is turned on for an Amazon QuickSight account. |
Updates a personalization configuration
Description
Updates a personalization configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_q_personalization_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_q_personalization_configuration(
AwsAccountId,
PersonalizationMode
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account account that contains the personalization configuration that the user wants to update. |
PersonalizationMode |
[required] An option to allow Amazon QuickSight to customize data stories with user specific metadata, specifically location and job information, in your IAM Identity Center instance. |
Updates the state of a Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration
Description
Updates the state of a Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_quick_sight_q_search_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_quick_sight_q_search_configuration(
AwsAccountId,
QSearchStatus
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration that you want to update. |
QSearchStatus |
[required] The status of the Amazon QuickSight Q Search configuration that the user wants to update. |
Updates a refresh schedule for a dataset
Description
Updates a refresh schedule for a dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_refresh_schedule(DataSetId, AwsAccountId, Schedule)
Arguments
DataSetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Schedule |
[required] The refresh schedule. |
Updates the custom permissions that are associated with a role
Description
Updates the custom permissions that are associated with a role.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_role_custom_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_role_custom_permission(
CustomPermissionsName,
Role,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace
)
Arguments
CustomPermissionsName |
[required] The name of the custom permission that you want to update the role with. |
Role |
[required] The name of role tht you want to update. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that you want to create a group in. The Amazon Web Services account ID that you provide must be the same Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that contains the role that you want to update. |
Updates the SPICE capacity configuration for a Amazon QuickSight account
Description
Updates the SPICE capacity configuration for a Amazon QuickSight account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_spice_capacity_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_spice_capacity_configuration(AwsAccountId, PurchaseMode)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the SPICE configuration that you want to update. |
PurchaseMode |
[required] Determines how SPICE capacity can be purchased. The following options are available.
|
Updates a template from an existing Amazon QuickSight analysis or another template
Description
Updates a template from an existing Amazon QuickSight analysis or another template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_template(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
SourceEntity = NULL,
VersionDescription = NULL,
Name = NULL,
Definition = NULL,
ValidationStrategy = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template that you're updating. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
SourceEntity |
The entity that you are using as a source when you update the template.
In Use the |
VersionDescription |
A description of the current template version that is being updated.
Every time you call |
Name |
The name for the template. |
Definition |
The definition of a template. A definition is the data model of all features in a Dashboard, Template, or Analysis. |
ValidationStrategy |
The option to relax the validation needed to update a template with definition objects. This skips the validation step for specific errors. |
Updates the template alias of a template
Description
Updates the template alias of a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_template_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_template_alias(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
AliasName,
TemplateVersionNumber
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template alias that you're updating. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
AliasName |
[required] The alias of the template that you want to update. If you name a
specific alias, you update the version that the alias points to. You can
specify the latest version of the template by providing the keyword
|
TemplateVersionNumber |
[required] The version number of the template. |
Updates the resource permissions for a template
Description
Updates the resource permissions for a template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_template_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_template_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
TemplateId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the template. |
TemplateId |
[required] The ID for the template. |
GrantPermissions |
A list of resource permissions to be granted on the template. |
RevokePermissions |
A list of resource permissions to be revoked from the template. |
Updates a theme
Description
Updates a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_theme/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_theme(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
Name = NULL,
BaseThemeId,
VersionDescription = NULL,
Configuration = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme that you're updating. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
Name |
The name for the theme. |
BaseThemeId |
[required] The theme ID, defined by Amazon QuickSight, that a custom theme inherits from. All themes initially inherit from a default Amazon QuickSight theme. |
VersionDescription |
A description of the theme version that you're updating Every time that
you call |
Configuration |
The theme configuration, which contains the theme display properties. |
Updates an alias of a theme
Description
Updates an alias of a theme.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_theme_alias/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_theme_alias(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
AliasName,
ThemeVersionNumber
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme alias that you're updating. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
AliasName |
[required] The name of the theme alias that you want to update. |
ThemeVersionNumber |
[required] The version number of the theme that the alias should reference. |
Updates the resource permissions for a theme
Description
Updates the resource permissions for a theme. Permissions apply to the action to grant or revoke permissions on, for example "quicksight:DescribeTheme"
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_theme_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_theme_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
ThemeId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the theme. |
ThemeId |
[required] The ID for the theme. |
GrantPermissions |
A list of resource permissions to be granted for the theme. |
RevokePermissions |
A list of resource permissions to be revoked from the theme. |
Updates a topic
Description
Updates a topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_topic/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_topic(AwsAccountId, TopicId, Topic)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic that you want to update. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to modify. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
Topic |
[required] The definition of the topic that you want to update. |
Updates the permissions of a topic
Description
Updates the permissions of a topic.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_topic_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_topic_permissions(
AwsAccountId,
TopicId,
GrantPermissions = NULL,
RevokePermissions = NULL
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic that you want to update the permissions for. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to modify. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
GrantPermissions |
The resource permissions that you want to grant to the topic. |
RevokePermissions |
The resource permissions that you want to revoke from the topic. |
Updates a topic refresh schedule
Description
Updates a topic refresh schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_topic_refresh_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_topic_refresh_schedule(
AwsAccountId,
TopicId,
DatasetId,
RefreshSchedule
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the topic whose refresh schedule you want to update. |
TopicId |
[required] The ID of the topic that you want to modify. This ID is unique per Amazon Web Services Region for each Amazon Web Services account. |
DatasetId |
[required] The ID of the dataset. |
RefreshSchedule |
[required] The definition of a refresh schedule. |
Updates an Amazon QuickSight user
Description
Updates an Amazon QuickSight user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_user(
UserName,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace,
Email,
Role,
CustomPermissionsName = NULL,
UnapplyCustomPermissions = NULL,
ExternalLoginFederationProviderType = NULL,
CustomFederationProviderUrl = NULL,
ExternalLoginId = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight user name that you want to update. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID for the Amazon Web Services account that the user is in. Currently, you use the ID for the Amazon Web Services account that contains your Amazon QuickSight account. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace. Currently, you should set this to |
Email |
[required] The email address of the user that you want to update. |
Role |
[required] The Amazon QuickSight role of the user. The role can be one of the following default security cohorts:
The name of the Amazon QuickSight role is invisible to the user except for the console screens dealing with permissions. |
CustomPermissionsName |
(Enterprise edition only) The name of the custom permissions profile that you want to assign to this user. Customized permissions allows you to control a user's access by restricting access the following operations:
A set of custom permissions includes any combination of these
restrictions. Currently, you need to create the profile names for custom
permission sets by using the Amazon QuickSight console. Then, you use
the Amazon QuickSight custom permissions are applied through IAM policies. Therefore, they override the permissions typically granted by assigning Amazon QuickSight users to one of the default security cohorts in Amazon QuickSight (admin, author, reader). This feature is available only to Amazon QuickSight Enterprise edition subscriptions. |
UnapplyCustomPermissions |
A flag that you use to indicate that you want to remove all custom permissions from this user. Using this parameter resets the user to the state it was in before a custom permissions profile was applied. This parameter defaults to NULL and it doesn't accept any other value. |
ExternalLoginFederationProviderType |
The type of supported external login provider that provides identity to let a user federate into Amazon QuickSight with an associated Identity and Access Management(IAM) role. The type of supported external login provider can be one of the following.
|
CustomFederationProviderUrl |
The URL of the custom OpenID Connect (OIDC) provider that provides
identity to let a user federate into Amazon QuickSight with an
associated Identity and Access Management(IAM) role. This parameter
should only be used when |
ExternalLoginId |
The identity ID for a user in the external login provider. |
Updates a custom permissions profile for a user
Description
Updates a custom permissions profile for a user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_user_custom_permission/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_user_custom_permission(
UserName,
AwsAccountId,
Namespace,
CustomPermissionsName
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The username of the user that you want to update custom permissions for. |
AwsAccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that contains the custom permission configuration that you want to update. |
Namespace |
[required] The namespace that the user belongs to. |
CustomPermissionsName |
[required] The name of the custom permissions that you want to update. |
Updates a VPC connection
Description
Updates a VPC connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/quicksight_update_vpc_connection/ for full documentation.
Usage
quicksight_update_vpc_connection(
AwsAccountId,
VPCConnectionId,
Name,
SubnetIds,
SecurityGroupIds,
DnsResolvers = NULL,
RoleArn
)
Arguments
AwsAccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the account that contains the VPC connection that you want to update. |
VPCConnectionId |
[required] The ID of the VPC connection that you're updating. This ID is a unique identifier for each Amazon Web Services Region in an Amazon Web Services account. |
Name |
[required] The display name for the VPC connection. |
SubnetIds |
[required] A list of subnet IDs for the VPC connection. |
SecurityGroupIds |
[required] A list of security group IDs for the VPC connection. |
DnsResolvers |
A list of IP addresses of DNS resolver endpoints for the VPC connection. |
RoleArn |
[required] An IAM role associated with the VPC connection. |
Objects exported from other packages
Description
These objects are imported from other packages. Follow the links below to see their documentation.
- paws.common
config
,credentials
,creds
,list_paginators
,paginate
,paginate_lapply
,paginate_sapply
,paws_stream_parser